Home

H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note

1. H8SX No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 6 sin 0 523333333 4 665 5 363 5 362 1 046666667 4 601 5 260 5 260 1 9625 4 405 5 040 5 040 2 7475 5 033 5 754 5 754 3 5325 4 764 5 461 5 461 4 3175 4 725 5 384 5 384 5 1025 4 473 5 108 5 108 5 8875 5 061 5 783 5 782 0 52333333 4 674 5 372 5 372 1 04666667 4 622 5 281 5 282 1 9625 4 414 5 049 5 050 2 7475 5 042 5 763 5 764 3 5325 4 773 5 470 5 471 4 3175 4 734 5 393 5 394 5 1025 4 482 5 117 5 118 5 8875 5 072 5 792 5 792 7 tan 0 3925 7 096 7 418 7 418 1 1775 B 7 284 7 631 7 631 1 9625 7 050 7 917 7 371 2 7475 7 451 7 797 7 797 8 cosh 0 33 16 425 16 725 16 727 0 78 16 918 17 216 17 218 0 33 16 427 16 727 16 729 0 78 gt 16 920 17 218 17 220 9 sinh 0 33 4 793 4 873 4 873 0 98 16 705 17 003 17 006 0 33 4 793 4 873 4 873 0 98 16 707 17 005 17 008 10 tanh 0 0033 00 21 563 20 209 20 210 11 exp 0 33 8 073 8 249 8 248 0 98 8 113 8 289 8 288 0 33 8 113 8 289 8 288 0 98 8 129 8 305 8 304 12 frexp 0 3 80 75 75 400 80 75 75 13 Idexp 0 3 30 378 413 413 0 1 100 378 413 413 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 11 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8SX No Function Para
2. eee 11 56 11 3 3 There Is No Standard Library File H8C V4 or Later essere 11 56 11 3 4 Warning Message On Building Standard Library eese 11 57 11 3 5 Size of Memory Used as Heap nenne EE tren trente en nest enne nennen 11 58 11 3 6 How to Reduce ROM Size for I O Libraries eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen eene en rennen 11 58 11 377 How to Edit Library File tre meto e oH ns 11 59 IT 4 HEW uai oie on e OI nA ead pite AU dete d reti aie 11 61 11 4 1 Failure to Display Dialog Menu ener te peer eripe o RR HER igi 11 61 11 4 2 Linkage Order of Object Files ure e egere ERR ET ut V Eee ERI Ep es 11 61 11 4 3 Excluding Project File oerte eee Dun erts eoe EE He Pre 11 63 11 4 4 Specifying the Default Options for Project Files sesessssssssseeeee eene rennen 11 64 114 5 Changing Memory Map ite pP Ie PR DI et tn id dm biete ten 11 64 11 4 6 How to Use HEW on Network essere enne nennen tren trennen eren enne enne entere enne 11 65 11 4 7 Limitations on File and Directory Names Created in HEW ssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeneen 11 65 11 4 8 Failure of Japanese Font Display with the HEW Editor or HDI eee 11 65 11 4 9 How to Convert Programs from HIM to HEW sssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeneenee nennen nennen enne 11 67 11 4 10 I Want to Use an Old Compiler Tool Chain in the Latest HEW
3. HEW2 0 or later Use Font of the Font tab in Tools gt Format Views Format Views Source Disassembly Output Point Size 11 HEW Sample Text Seen Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 66 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A If Japanese fonts are not correctly displayed with the HDI modify as follows Setup gt Customize gt Font Font Style Regular T GulimChe T GungsuhChe Use as Default Font 11 49 How to Convert Programs from HIM to HEW Question How can I use a project created under HIM Hitachi Integration Manager on the HEW Answer Projects can be converted from HIM to HEW using a tool called HIM To HEW Project Converter that is supplied with the HEW system 11 4 10 I Want to Use an Old Compiler Tool Chain in the Latest HEW Question I have an old compiler package When I bought an Emulator new HEW was bundled In order to Build and Debug with new HEW I want to use an old tool chain in the new HEW Can I do that Answer It depends on the version of the compiler package you are using See below H8C V 3 0 lt Build gt The tool chain cannot be registered in the latest HEW Therefore building by new HEW is not available Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 67 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Note HIM to HEW Project Converter is usable if you have H8C V 3 0A compiler package By using this tool you can co
4. H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 50 40 58 42 42 After 50 40 50 38 38 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 46 46 38 After 46 46 38 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 119 109 516 404 400 After 119 109 322 254 254 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 101 95 83 After 101 95 83 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 3 4 Merging Loop Conditions Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points In the case of identical or similar loop conditions both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by merging them Description This technique reduces the object size for loop determination statements which substantially improves the execution speed Example Initialize the array a with 0 and the array b with 1 C language program before optimization int a 10 bI10 void f void int i j for i 0 i 10 i a i 0 for j 0 j 10 j b j 1 Expanded into assembly language code before optimization ds ER6 R6 R6 R1 W D R6 ERO W e 6 a 32 ERO R6 0 R6 D E e 2e DU Dd db Dd ze DU E ze s DU Dd Dd d ZU OY wo C language program after optimization int a 10 b 10 void f void a yE us for i20 i 10 i a i 0 b i 1 Expanded into asse
5. H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 15 12 30 24 24 Specified 13 12 26 24 24 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 10 10 9 Specified 9 9 9 Remarks and Notes This specification is valid only with the CPU operation mode H8SXX H8SXA H8SXM 2600a 2000a or 300ha The pragma abs16 cannot be specified for data that have previously been declared This specification is valid only for external variables The name of the section to which data are output can be modified with the pragma statement At linkage sections starting with ABS16 are allocated to the 16 bit absolute address area 5 4 13 Using Indirect Memory Format Size O Speed X Description When frequently used functions are accessed in the indirect memory format ROM efficiency is improved If a function address is stored in the indirect memory area at linkage the function is called in the indirect memory format when it is called In this case the execution speed is lowered but the program size is reduced because the function can be called with a short instruction There are the following two ways to specify the indirect memory format Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 62 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format pragma indirect function name gt vect lt vector number gt __indirect vect lt vector number gt
6. Which CPU do you want to use for this project CPU Series 2600 Specify the CPU series to be used The corresponding CPU names are displayed Select the name of the CPU to be used If the desired CPU name is not available select 3 New project Step 2 Specify the desired global options and press NEXT gt New Project Step 2 Select either Normal or Advanced as the Specify global options operating mode Operating Mode REN When selecting the Advanced mode specify Address Space the size of the address space to be used Merit of Library Code Size Select either the code optimized library or speed optimized library r1 Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 Specify the number of parameter passing registers Required C Runtime Library c8s26a lib The standard C library ec226a lib name and EC class library name associated with the specified program execution method is displayed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program The same set of global options should be used for all project files The following categories of global options are available e CPU Type e Number of argument passing registers To change the global options specified in this dialog box after the new project has been initialized the specification of the standard library to be linked should be modifi
7. seen 11 67 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance esse A 1 A Floating Point Operation Performance kisis ee e R E E E EEA A S REE E S A 1 A l Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance ssessssesssseessereesestsresresreerrsrertssrsrrnerrenesrnstsrenresreet A 1 A 1 1 Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8 300 H8 300H H85 2600 A 1 A 1 2 Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8SX sssssssseeeeeee A 4 A 2 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance eee nemen A 7 A 2 1 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2600 A 7 A 2 2 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8SX sse A 10 Appendix B Added Feat r Su acean dotted Oeo EUR oso dest s aha N e E e ch eM DEE B 13 B 1 Features Added between Ver 2 0 and Ver 3 0 enne B 13 B 1 1 Addition of Embedded Extended Functions essere nennen nenne B 13 B 1 2 Additional and Improved Functions eee cece cee cseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeecesecsecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeseaeseeseseesees B 13 B 1 3 Modification of Language Specifications essent enne nene nren nennen B 14 B 2 Features Added between Ver 3 0 and Ver 4 0 ener trennen trennen B 17 B 2 Common Additions and Improvement esesseseeeseeseeeeee
8. Miscellaneous options Dialog Menu Command Option Function Allow comment nest comment Enables comment nesting Check against EC language ecpp Checks syntax according to the EC language specification specifications Interrupt handler saves restores macsave Guarantees MAC registers MACH and MACL registers if used Treate loop condition as volatile volatile loop Disables optimization of loop iteration condition qualified Treat enum as char if it is in the byteenum Handles enumeration type data as char range of char Increase a register for register Regexpansion Specifies the number of variable allocation registers as 2 or variable noregexpansion 3 Put common subexpression ona cmncode Improves the optimization function for common expression register temporarily deletion Use EEPMOV in block copy eepmov Performs structure substitution using the EEPMOV instruction Treats loop condition as volatile volatile_loop Disables optimization of loop iteration qualified Suppress line in preprocessed noline Disables line output at preprocessor expansion source file Enable register declaration enable_register Preferentially allocates the variables with register storage class specification to registers Obey ansi specifications more strict ansi Conforms to the ANSI standard for the following processing strictly Associative rule of floating point operations User defined options Specifies the comma
9. aoe eee Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 7 2 8 Reconfiguration of Debugger Target Description HEW can configure Debugger Target if you select Application for the project type when creating a new workspace However when creating a new project you may sometimes not configure this because you then believe that this is unnecessary If you do you can use this feature to reconfigure Debugger Target after creating a project However this feature is only available when you select Application for the project type when creating a new workspace Usage HEW Menu Project Edit Project Configuration Functions that can be reconfigured Setting method You can set a simulator and other debugger targets on the Target tab in the Edit Project Configuration dialog box If a debugger is already connected to the session you will see a message saying This target has already existed It does not support duplicated targets and cannot connect to the debugger target Edit Project Configuration VO Register Stack Tareet Session Detail options SimSessionH85 26004 z hem Value Simulator I O disable Targets Simulator I O addr 0x0 Bus mode 0 85 20004 simulator H85 2600N Simulator Target type 2600 Note Reconfiguring a file is supported by HEW 2 1 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 38 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 7 Usi
10. cpu 26004 24 debug object GCONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj listz CONFIGDIRO FILELEAF lis nologo cheincpath owes Option to set Dialog Menu Command Option Function 2aa 8 abs8 Specifies 8 bit absolute address symbol aa 16 abs16 Specifies 16 bit absolute address symbol Note Selects external reference symbols or external definition symbols Specify all symbols Check Box Function Assigns the specified size to the external reference symbols and external definition symbols Assigns a specific size to each symbol or does not assign a size Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Category Other Standard Toolchain Configuration Sim Debue_H85 26004 E E eJ All Loaded Projects P C source file C source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Miscellaneous options C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library GPU Sim 4 gt Category z Miscellaneous options Remove unreferenced external symbols User defined options Options Assembly cpu 28004 24 debug object GONFIGDIROX 4FILELE AF obj listz CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF lis nologo cheincpath owes Dialog Menu Check Box Command Option Function Remove y exclude Disables unreferenced external reference symbol unreferenced information output external symbols noexclude Enables unreferenced external
11. Eliminate same code Same code Unifies instruction codes Use indirect call jump Function call Uses indirect addressing mode Optimize branches Branch Optimizes branch instructions Eliminated size Samesize Specifies the object size for same code elimination None Nooptimize Disables optimization Include profile Check Box Command Option profile Function Specifies a profile information file Cache size Specifies no profile information file Dialog Menu Command Option Function Size cachesize sized Specifies cache size Line cachesize align Specifies cache align size Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Category Section H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 32 x Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb KIL Debug ai Category ERAAN E fil Loaded Projects Show entries for Section x GEM O source file Address Section Edit H E C source file Ox00000400 PResetPRG Assembly source file PIntPRG Linkage symbol file Ox00000800 CHDSEC CHBSEC Ox00F F6000 2D 00 o Ox00FFBEOO Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0
12. Example of message output The following example shows that a new function has been created by the unification of common codes Phase OptLinker starting LOOD2 D Symbol com optl created by optimization same code Phase OptLinker finished Build Finished 0 Errors 0 Warnings Version Control Confirmation by list Optimization results are confirmed by specifying the following options For more details please refer to section 9 2 1 Symbol Information List Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Contents Symbol Command line list lt file name gt show symbol Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 36 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 10 MISRA C Section 10 MISRA C 10 1 MISRA C 10 1 1 What Is MISRA C MISRA C refers to the usage guidelines for the C language that were issued by the Motor Industry Software Reliability Association MISRA in 1998 as well as the C coding rules standardized by those guidelines The C language itself is very useful but suffers from some particular problems The MISRA C guideline divides these problems into five types programmer errors misconceptions about the language unintended compiler operations errors at execution and errors in the compiler itself The purpose of MISRA C is to overcome these problems while promoting safe usage of the C language MISRA C contains 127 rules of two types required and advisory Code development should aim to conform to all of these rules b
13. Expanded into assembly before optimization language code _func MOV SUB MOV MOV BRA MOV W INC W MOV W 4 s 32 ERI1 RO RO RO GERI 1 16 E0 L7 8 ER1 RO f1 RO0 RO GERI 1 E0 _n 32 R0 RO EO L6 8 L6 Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization unsigned int s unsigned int n 100 void func void s n n 1 gt gt 1 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _func MOV W MOV W INC W MULXU W SHLR W MOV W RTS H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 38 32 38 34 38 After 24 20 24 20 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 36 36 30 After 24 24 20 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 1322 1118 2644 2438 2450 After 20 17 54 48 144 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 916 916 815 After 14 14 13 6 2 6 Using Local Variables Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points In the case of temporary variables loop counters and so forth that can be used as local variables both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by declaring them as local variables Similarly efficiency can be improved by assigning external variables that are common to multiple arithmetic expre
14. Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 2 Multiple tab This tab converts multiple HIM projects into HEW projects f HIM To HEW Project Converter 1 0 Sinele Mulitple Workspace directory Specify the directory in which the HIM CX Himitest3 projects are stored FEW workapacer name Specify the HIM w orkspace name test CPU family d Hes H8 200 Select the H8S H8 300 CPU family Current project Displays the conversion status __ Results Displays the conversion results Total complete Status Press this button to start the conversion After the conversion start the HEW as in the case of the Single tab in order to build the converted HEW workspace 7 1 9 Add Supported CPUs Description HEW can automatically generate I O register definition and vector table files but HEW cannot support new CPUs which are released after HEW release In this case the tool DeviceUpdater can make HEW support new CPUs And this tool can update generated files to bug fixed version How to get DeviceUpdater Download from the following URL of Renesas Technology Corp Please refer to Notes of this page too http www renesas com Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Execution Results of DeviceUpdater CPU types are added as follows Toolchain version Toolchain version 6 0 0 0 m 5 0 0 0 m Which CP
15. 2 EC language specification syntax check function Syntaxes are checked on C programs based upon the EC language specifications using a compiler option Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Check against EC language specification Command line ecpp Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 3 Other functions The following functions are supported for efficient coding of C programs Better C functions Inline expansion of functions e Customization of operators such as e Simplification of names through the use of multiple definition functions e Simple coding of comments Object oriented functions e Classes e Constructors e Virtual functions For a description of how to set the execution environment at using library functions in a C program refer to section 9 2 2 5 C C library function initial settings _INILIB in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 11 1 25 How to View Source Programs after Pre Processor Expansion Question How can I review a program after macros are expanded Answer The output of the source program expanded by the Pre Processor is specified with the compiler option If the source program before expansion was a C language program it is output with the extension lt filename gt p For a C program the extension is lt filename g
16. Important Points Functions that are used only within a file should be static specified Description Functions that are static specified are deleted if they are not called by an external function When specified for inline expansion such functions are also deleted which improves size efficiency Example Specify a function for inline expansion Call the function func from the function main RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 9 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques C language program before optimization C language program after optimization pragma inline func pragma inline func int a b int a b void func static void func at 10 at 10 void main void main a 1 a 1 func b a Expanded into assembly language code Expanded into assembly language code after before optimization optimization tuno main MOV _a ERO MOV W 11 R0 MOV ERO R1 MOV W RO _a 32 ADD 10 R1 MOV W RO _b 32 MOV R1 ERO RTS RTS main MOV 11 R0 MOV RO _a 32 MOV RO _b 32 RTS Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 36 28 34 28 28 After 18 14 18 14 14 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 26 26 20 After 14 14 10 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 15 12 30 24 24 After 15 12 30 24 24 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV N
17. Merge example 1 test c void main void funel 2 Open a stack information file in Call Walker KH main Ox00000004 3 funci 0x00000002 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 3 Change stack size of func1 to 100 testcal Max 0x00000102 KY main lt 0x00000102 46 funci 0x00000100 4 Change test c and rebuild add func2 call void main void funel func2 5 Open test sni while opening test cal Check the following Merge specified file check box and click on the Open button Look in a Debug x et E3 test sni File name ftest sni Files of type Stack Files sni or Profiles pro Cancel IV Merge specified file 4 6 After that the stack information is merged The stack size of funcl that is changed at 3 is used and the information of func2 is added cal Max KY main lt 0x00000102 gt 46 funci 0x00000100 V3 func2 0x00000002 When Merge specified file check box is not checked at 5 the stack size of func1 that is changed at 3 is overwritten with the rebuilt value which is the same as before changed G main lt 0x00000004 gt KY funci 0x00000002 3 func2 lt 0x00000002 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Merge option Merge me
18. this pointer offset OL Unassigned area void foo 1AFv I void foo 1AFv Pointer to A foo const struct T5579436 __vtbl__1B 2 Virtual function table for class B Unassigned area Unassigned area Unassigned area this pointer offset Unassigned area void foo__1BFv Pointer to B foo pragma section struct __T5584740 T Type information for class A unassigned struct __T5579436 __vtbl__02_3std9type_info const char A amp TID 1A struct T5585724 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques struct T5584740 T Type information for class B unassigned struct T5579436 __vtbl__ 02 3std9type info const char B amp TID 1B 15591360 un C program after conversion virtual function calls void mainl Fv void struct A _a _a __vptr __vtbl__1A foo__1AFv amp a f00__1AFv amp _a Call of A foo return void main2__Fv void struct B _b b b A vptr b b A vptr foo 1BFv amp b f00__1BFv amp b Call to B foo return void main3__Fv void struct __T5579436 struct B a struct A pa struct B pb struct A amp b vptr struct A amp b vptr _pa struct A amp b _pb amp _b tmp _pa gt __vptr 1 void struct A const _tmp
19. type specifier gt function name gt type specifier gt indirect vect2 vector number gt function name gt 2 Specifying with an option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Function call aa 8 Command line indirect Normal The indirect memory address area is the range from 00 to FF Specifying include to the include file indirect h all run time routines to be used are called in the indirect memory format In addition each run time routine can be called in the indirect memory format individually Example To call the function func in the indirect memory format C C program Specifying in the pragma statement pragma indirect func specifies Zpragma indirect extern void func int int extern int a b c int d void main void b 0 func a b func b c func c a d c Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified ER6 ER6 RO RO RO RO RO _b 32 5 RO _b 32 RO EO RO EO Q a 32 R0 Q a 32 R0 Q func 24 S func 8 f c ER6 E _c ER6 ER6 EO ER6 EO _b 32 R0 _b 32 R0 Q func 24 Sfunc 8 Q a 32 E0 R _a 32 E0 ER6 RO ER6 RO Q func 24 Sfunc 8 ER6 R6 GER6 R6 R6 d 32 R6 d 32 ER6 ER6 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 63 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not spe
20. 241 NE SAS Renesas Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan REJO5B0464 0300
21. C C program include machine h struct STR char a 300 ST1 struct STR ST2 0 void f eepmov char amp ST1 char amp ST2 255 Executes the EEPMOV instruction Compiled assembly language expansion code STM L ER4 ER6 SP MOV L _ST2 32 ER5 MOV B 1 8 RAL MOV L _ST1 32 ER6 EEPMOV B LDM L SP ERA ER6 RTS Remarks and notes i When the CPU operating mode is 300 the maximum size of data that can be block transferred is 255 bytes ii When the CPU operating mode is other than 300 the maximum size of data that can be block transferred is 65535 bytes When the data size is 256 to 65535 bytes the instruction is expanded into EEPMOV W which may be subject to an NMI interrupt For details on this interrupt refer to the applicable product programming manual 2 eepmovi To perform a block transfer from the address indicated by the second parameter to the address indicated by the first parameters in bytes indicated by the third parameter This function is expanded so that the EEPMOV instruction can resume transfer after returning from an interrupt C C program include machine h struct STR char a 300 ST struct STR ST2 0 void f eepmovi char amp ST1 char amp ST2 256 Executes the EEPMOV instruction Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Compiled assembly language expa
22. Create the subcommand file to be specified in the inter module optimization process This example uses the c2600a sub file located in the sample directory The file can be used only for HEWI 2 The file of user s own should be made for HEW2 0 based on the following subcommand files Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program c2600a sub Modifying the subcommand file input init obj input vectbl obj Input files input scttbl obj input cmain obj output test abs Output file format absolute debug lt Specify debug information sysrof Specify output format rom D R Fom VABS8D SABS8R ROM support function rom SABS16D ABS16R start Cvect1 Cvect2 0 start P C D CSBSEC CSDSEC SABS8D ABS816 0200 Specify section allocation start R B OEDOO S 0FEO00 exit Use the following subcommand file to execute the inter module optimization process optInk38A sub test sub RET HEWI1 2 Command Line optInkA sub test sub RET HEW2 0 Command Line The optimization process outputs a load module file sample abs In HEW1 2 it also outputs memory allocation information to the linkage list sample map and symbol optimization information to the optimization information list sample lop In HEW 2 0 it outputs memory allocation information and symbol optimization information to the linkage list sample map 4 Convert the object file In
23. Dialog Menu Command Option Function Optimize items Specifies optimization Forbid item Disables optimization of specific symbol and address areas Elimination of dead code Symbol forbid Specifies the name of variable or function in which unreferenced symbol eliminating optimization is disabled Elimination of same code Samecode forbid Specifies the name of the function in which same code eliminating optimization is disabled Use of short addressing to Variable forbid Specifies the name of the variable in which optimization using short absolute addressing mode is disabled Use of indirect call jump to Function forbid Specifies the name of the function in which optimization using indirect addressing mode is disabled Memory allocation in Absolute forbid Specifies the address area to which address allocation is not performed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Optimize Dialog Menu Command Option Function All Optimize Enables all optimization items Speed OptimizeAspeed Performs optimization in speed Safe OptimizeAsafe Performs safe optimization Custom OptimizeA Enables optimization item selection Unify strings String unify Unifies constant or string literal Eliminate dead code Symbol delete Deletes unreferenced symbols Use short addressing Variable access Uses short absolute addressing mode Reallocate registers Register Reallocates registers
24. Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 61 58 55 Specified 62 62 56 Remarks and Notes When vector number is not specified the SEXINDIRECT section should be allocated to the memory area where can be accessed in the extended indirect memory format at linkage The extended indirect memory area is output to the EXINDIRECT section The section name can be modified using the pragma indirect section statement 5 4 15 Specifying 2byte pointer Size O Speed O Description When frequently used variables are allocated to the 16 bit absolute address area size efficiency and execution speed are both improved ABS16 option which is specified by the ABS16 option or the pragma abs16 allocates data to the 16 bit absolute address area This 2byte pointer option assumes the size of a pointer to data as two bytes There are the following two ways to specify this function 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format type specifier __ptr16 lt variable gt 2 Specifying with an option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize 2byte pointer Command line ptr16 If this option is not specified the size of the pointer indicating data is four bytes If this option is specified and the data section is explicitly located in the 16 bit absolute address area the size of the pointer indicating data is set to two bytes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 66 REJ05B0464 0300 REN
25. HITACHI VERSION _ are implicitly declared by define 18 static Label Name The specification of label names as references to static file labels by using pragma asm and pragma endasm and pragma inline asm has been changed to _ name However in a linkage list the name is displayed as _ name 19 Extension and Change of Language Specification Inhibits errors when initializing unions Example union char c 4 uu a b c e enum can be applied to bit fields Example struct enum El a b c m1 2 enum El m2 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features ee 99 e The output of an error message when a comma is written after the last enumeration has been inhibited Example enum El a b c ml1 e An union can be assigned and declared in a single statement Example union U int a b jul void test union U u2 ul e The level of checking for errors in casting of symbol address expressions has been eased Example int x short addrl short amp x e Restrictions on the order of writing declaration of functions and variables and pragma declarations in C programs has been eased Example void f void pragma interrupt f void f void pragma declaration following a function declaration is valid In version 3 an error would have occurred e The restrictions on the order of writing declarations
26. MOV B H 85 8 R4 BRA 8 RA 8 R1L LWORD L45 16 R0 MOV L ERA SP ER6 4 16 SP _printf 16 ADD W 8 16 R7 SP ERA4 ER6 If a register is not allocated the following information message appears C0102 T Register is not allocated to variable name in function name However this message does not appear if an argument is not allocated to any register This option is valid when CPU type is H8SX or H8S Since variable Reg 11 gives higher priority ERI is allocated RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 39 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 3 Compiler 3 7 4 Specifying Absolute Addresses of Variables Description You can specify the absolute addresses of variables that are referenced externally using a preprocessor directive The compiler allocates the variables declared in the pramga address directive to the corresponding absolute addresses This feature enables easier access via variables to I O allocated to a specific address Format pragma address variable name gt address value gt lt variable name address value Example of use Variable io is allocated to the absolute address 0x100 C language code pragma address io 0x100 int io Expanded into assembly language code _main MOV L H OA 8 _io 16 RTS SECTION SADDRESSSB100 DATA LOCATE H 100 _io RES L 1 END Important Information This option is
27. PUSH L ER5 file3 c MOV L _a ER6 MOV L Q b ER5 ADD L ER5 ER6 long a b void sub MOV L ER6 _a at b i POP L ERS POP L ER6 RIS Uses ER4 before and after function sub is called 6 Unification of Common Code Changes ER6 to ER3 and deletes RTS save restor e code lt After inter module optimization gt Sub DELEETE MOV L 8 a ER3 MOV L Q8 b ER5 ADD L ER5 ER3 MOV L ER3 8 a DELETE Multiple strings representing the same instruction are unified into a subroutine and the code size is reduced with this specification C source filel c extern int void f1 a bt c file2 c extern int void f1 a btc lt compiler output codes gt a b c ewes ay Dej _b 32 R0 B c 32 R1 R1 R0 RO 8 a 32 After inter module optimization Q b 32 R0 B c 32 R1 R1 R0 RO _a 32 MOV W MOV W ADD W MOV W RTS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 74 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 7 Optimization of Branch Instructions Based on the program allocation information the branch instruction size is optimized If any other optimization item is executed this optimization is always performed regardless of whether it is specified or not C source compiler output codes After inter module optimization filel c extern int a void f1 8 bit width line displacement i fi JSR Q f2 24 B
28. RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Compiled assembly language expansion code TRAPA 0 RTS SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 _vect_table DATA L EL DATA L H 00000000 DATA L SER ES END Remarks and notes i Only a constant 0 to 3 can be assigned to the parameter of the function trapa ii This function is valid only when the CPU operating mode is specified as other than 300 2 SLEEP instruction Issues the SLEEP instruction to place the CPU in the low power consumption mode The low power consumption mode maintains the current CPU status suspends the execution of any instructions after the SLEEP instruction and waits until an interrupt request is generated Upon an interrupt request the CPU exits the low power consumption C C program include lt machine h gt extern int a void func while a sleep ssues SLEEP instruction Compiled assembly language expansion code Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 2 9 Description Block Transfer Instruction The following function is available to enhance the system control block transfer instruction No Item Format Description 1 EEPMOV void eepmov void dst const void src Expands into the block transfer instruction EEPMOV instruction unsigned char size void eepmov void dst const void src unsigned int size void eepmovb void dst const Always expanded to EEPM
29. To reduce the code size the order in which parameters are listed should be adjusted so that there is no gap between parameters Description Parameters passed through the registers are assigned to the registers ERO and ER1 or RO and R1 in the case of an H300 CPU in the order in which they are declared Therefore the order in which the parameters are declared should be adjusted so as to minimize any gap between them to reduce the code size Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Call the function func C language program before optimization long rtn void func char short char void main short a char b c func b a c void func char x short y char z rtn x y z C language program after optimization long rtn void func char char short void main short a char b c func b c a void func char x char y short z rtn x y z Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _main SUBS L SUBS L OV B OV W OV B BSR ADDS L ADDS L RTS func PUSH L OV B EXTS W OV W ULXU W OV B EXTS W ADD W EXTS L OV L POP L RTS Object Size Table byte 4 8 12 8 e 5 e 2 GSP p p 16 SP ROH 16 SP E0 ROL func 8 42 8 84 8 ER RO RO RO EO R6 R6 R6 ER ER ER p p 6
30. lib lt Library File Name delete lt Module Name in Library D Extract Module in Library The module in library can be extracted 1 Open library and select module to extract multiple select available 2 Display the following dialog by Action gt Extract specify Output folder and push OK button 3 Then the specified modules are output to the specified Output folder C Vin the following example Extract Output file type Object file ce Output folder jox Browse we Output file information Type Path Object file C func1 obj Cancel Command line optlnk lib lt Library File Name extract lt Module Name in Library form lt Output File Type Here Output file type is object in this example Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 60 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 4 11 4 1 Question HEW Failure to Display Dialog Menu Tool option dialog boxes are not displayed correctly with the HEW Answer If an old release such as 400 950a of Windows 95 is used an application error occurs when options in the C C compiler the Assembler or the IM OptLinker are opened and the HEW may aborts the operation abnormally or option dialog boxes may not be displayed correctly This problem is caused when the version of the COMCTL32 DLL file that is located in the System directory of the Windows directory is too old In this case upgrade the Windows 895 11 4 2 Q
31. 1 ERO ERO ER4 R1L ERO L5 8 SP ERA ER5 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 80 62 74 54 54 After 52 32 44 36 34 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 70 70 56 After 52 52 32 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 59 48 232 84 84 After 45 26 218 74 74 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 37 43 31 After 26 27 20 6 2 4 Using a Suitable Algorithm Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by using mathematical techniques Description If an arithmetic expression contains common terms those terms should be factored out to reduce the number of arithmetic operations performed This improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Solve a third order equation C language program before optimization unsigned char a b c d x y void func void y a x x xtb x xtco xtd C language program after optimization unsigned char a b c d x y void func void y x x a xtb c d RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 15 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded in
32. Attributes iddrese Ox00000800 CallWalkerZ obj Ox000000 fis Bontime librar Ox00000000 CallWalker2 obj 0x0000085a Ox00000400 resetpre obj Ox000000C 0x00000808 CallWalker2 obj Ox000000 0x00000804 CallWalker2 obj Ox000000 Ox00000802 OallWalker2 obj Ox000000C F _Undef Ox00000000 CallWalker2 obj G INT TGIBB TPU3 0x00000460 _ intpre obj 0000000 G3 INT IRQ9 0x0000043a intpre obj Ox000000C d by optimization 2 Adding a new symbol Check the following New symbol check box to add a new symbol Symbol name category attribute address stack size can be specified here v New symbol Symbol list Symbol Symbol Address Source Stack sir a fiecruston D abort Ox0000082c CallWalker20bj Ox000000t D INT CMIB TMRI 0x00000480 _ intpre obj 0x000000t Category Ox0000082e sbrk obj Ox000000 C C Function 0x00000428 intpre obj 0x000000 Ox00000806 CallWalker20bj 0x000000t Attributes 3 Address 0x00000800 CallWalker2 obj Ox000000C Runtime library 0x0000084024 Ox00000000 CallWalker2 obj PTS B 000000853 0000000 I Interrupt Size Ox00000400 resetpre obj Ox000000C M 300000018 0x00000808 OallWalker2obj OxO00000 Bs Ox00000804 OallWalker2obj 0x000000t T Virtual Stack size 0x00000802 CallWalker2obj Ox000000 Use local stack 000000008 24 21 0x00000000 CallWalker2 obj ZEE C INT TGIBB TPU3 0x00000460 _ intpre obj 0x000000 Source
33. H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 132 103 294 212 244 Specified 88 72 162 138 244 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 95 87 87 Specified 75 71 71 Remarks This specification sometimes reduces the size of codes Try this option on and off at tuning options RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 47 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 6 Speed Efficiency Code Expansion of switch Statement Size Speed O Description The switch statement is expanded in the method outputting less number of execution cycles with this specification There are two methods to expand the switch statement the table method and the if then method Usually the compiler determines which method is better to reduce the size In the if then method the value of the switch statement evaluation expression is compared with that of the case label If they are the same jumping to the case label statement is repeated the number of times the case labels are included Therefore in this method the object code size is increased according to the number of case labels included in the switch statement In the table method the destination of case label jumping is stored in a jump table and the jumping to the case label statement that matches the evaluation expression of the switch statement is performed with a single referencing of the jump table In this case the size of the ju
34. How to view timer register settings To view settings on timer registers and interrupt priority level setting registers choose View gt CPU gt I O to open the following I O window Note Address Value Access Na IHTCR OOFFFF32 H 00 IPRF OOFFFD4A H 7777 Bus Controller OOFFFFBC OOFFFFCO OOFFFFC4 OOFFFFC5 This feature is supported by HEW 3 1 or later This is valid only with H8SX 7 2 7 Examples of Timer Usage Description This subsection outlines how to use compare match and cyclic handler interrupts using TPU in the H8SX 1650 H8S X as an example HEW setup Enable the timers by referring to the paragraph entitled Timer simulation method in subsection 7 2 6 How to Use Timers e Sample program containing code that raises a compare match interrupt The following sample program contains code that raises a compare match interrupt f timer2 c 0x00000a56 0x00000a5a 0x00000a62 0x00000a66 tinc void lude iodef ine h main void TPUO Compare match interrupt enable TPUO TIER BIT TGIED 1 TGRD value 19 999 TPUO TGRD 19999 TPUO start TPU TSTR BIT CSTO 1 while 1 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 35 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 7 Using HEW Explanation of an interrupt generation program 1 When the TGIED TGR Interrupt Enable D bit in TIER Timer Interr
35. Memory size 128 MB or more recommended Hard disk capacity for the integrated development environment 100 MB or more free disk space required for full installation Acrobat Reader 10 Mbytes or more free disk space required Display SVGA or better I O device CD ROM drive Others Mouse or other pointing devices Perform the following procedures to install the compiler on your PC Before commencing the installation procedure be sure to close all applications a Installing the H8S and H8 300 C C compiler package i Insert the CD ROM for the compiler package into the CD ROM drive Here it is assumed that the CD ROM drive is drive D ii From the Windows Start menu click on Run iii In the Run dialog box specify Setup EXE that is in the root directory of the CD ROM example D Setup EXE and then click OK iv Follow the onscreen installation instructions Notes on the installation of the Integrated Development Environment Install the Integrated Development Environment in a directory path consisting solely of half width alphanumeric characters and half width underlines Use a directory path that does not contain full width characters or spaces i Be careful not to install HEW High performance Embedded Workshop in the same directory as HIM Hitachi Integration Manager ii Even when using it on a network install High performance Embedded Workshop on each PC drive The tool chain the librarian
36. Miscellaneous options Dialog Menu Command Option Function Allow comment nest comment Enables comment nesting Check against EC language ecpp Checks syntax according to the EC language specification specifications Generate browser information browser Outputs browser information Interrupt handler saves restores MACH macsave Guarantees MAC registers and MACL registers if used Pack struct union and class pack 1 2 Specifies alignment Avoid optimizing external symbols volatile Enables or disables external variable optimization treating them as volatile Treat enum as char if it is in the range of byteenum Handles enumeration type data as char char Increase a register for register variable regexpansion Specifies the number of variable allocation noregexpansion registers as 2 or 3 Put common subexpression on a cmncode Improves the optimization function for common register temporarily expression deletion Use EEPMOV in block copy eepmov Performs structure substitution User defined options Specifies the command options 6 CPU Tab Compiler Options Debug using the EEPMOV instruction Operating mode advanced Address space jiem byte Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW CPU Specifies the CPU types CPU Operating Mode Addr
37. Program Area Data Area 64 kbytes in total Program Area 16 Mbytes Data Area 64 kbytes 16 Mbytes in total Program Area 16 Mbytes Data Area 4 Gbytes 4 Gbytes in total Program Area Data Area 4 Gbytes in total Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Address Space Normal Mode Middle Mode Advanced Mode Maximum Mode H 0000 H 000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 H 007FFF Program Area Program 16 Mbytes Area H FFFF Data Area 64 kbytes 77 Data Area 64 kbytes Program Area 16 Mbytes H FF8000 Program Area Data Area 4 Gbytes H FFFFFF H OOFFFFFF pss Data Area 4 Gbytes H FFFFFFFF H FFFFFFFF 3 8 2 Specifying 8 bit Absolute Address Space Description If data are allocated and accessed in 8 bit absolute address space the objects can be small size and high speed When CPU is H8SX users can modify the access range of this 8 bit absolute address space In the old H8 family 8 bit absolute address space is fixed from H FFFF00 to H FFFFFF and duplicated internal I O space In H8SX 256 bytes area from any address specified by SBR Short Address Base Register is set as 8 bit absolute address space Register Format SBR Short Address Base Register is a 32 bit register that has the valid upper 24 bits The lower eight bits are reserved and read as Os 31 8 7 0 Eo Reserve Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 8 b
38. Program Area Bit Size Execution Mode p24 Stop 7 Response Round Mode p 40000 Round To Nearest SYSCR Address H OOFFFF39 e Check that Enable has been selected in System Call Address e Click on the OK button to enable Simulated I O e Select Simulated I O from the View menu to open the Simulated I O window Without opening the Simulated I O window Simulated I O is not enabled Simulated L O Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 63 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 5 Setting Trace Information Acquisition Conditions e Select Code gt Trace from the View menu to open the Trace window Then right click on the Trace window to display the popup menu and select Acquisition The Trace Acquisition dialog box appears as shown below Trace Acquisition Trace Start Stop C Disable z Enable Cancel Instruction Type Instruction Subroutine Trace Buffer Full Handling Continue Break Trace Gapacity 1024 records C 4096 records 16384 records 32768 records e Set Enable for Trace start Stop in the Trace Acquisition dialog box and click on the OK button to enable Trace Information Acquisition Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 64 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 6 Status Window The termination cause can be confirmed o
39. RES B RES W RES W Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization int a b c void func void c atb Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _func MOV MOV ADD MOV RTS W W W W H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 24 18 24 18 18 After 22 16 22 16 16 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 24 24 18 After 22 22 16 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 19 15 38 30 30 After 18 14 36 28 28 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 13 13 12 After 13 13 12 6 1 4 Using the const Qualifier Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Initialization data whose value remains unchanged should be const qualified to save the RAM area Description Data items that are initialized are often subject to change in values These data items are allocated on the ROM during linking and copied into the RAM at the start of program execution which causes them to be allocated in both ROM and RAM areas Data items whose values remain unchanged throughout program execution can be const qualified so that they are allocated only in a ROM area Example Allocate 5 bytes of initialization data C language program before optimization C lan
40. binary Available Output Files No Kind of Files Command line 1 Absolute Files form absolute 2 Relocatable Files form relocate 3 Object Files form object 4 User Library Files form library s 5 System Library Files form libraryzu 6 HEX Files form hexadecimal 7 S type Files form stype 8 Binary Files form binary Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 1 Absolute Files Address resolved Files by the optimizing linkage editor As this file has debug information C C source level debugger can be used When writing to ROM this file should be transformed to either S type format HEX or Binary 2 Relocatable Files Relocatable Address Unresolved Files As this file has debug information C C source level debugger can be used To execute this file this file should be transformed to absolute file by linking again 3 Object Files This file is used when a module object is extracted as an object file from a library with the extract option When specifying by command line a needed object file can be extracted from the library file specified by this option When using HEW specify the following options at Link Library Tab Category Other User defined options Extract Options form object extract module name gt 4 User Library System Library Output Library Files 5 HEX Files Output HEX Files As this files have no debug inf
41. iv Performs efficient programming by modifying codes Use the procedure below e What compile options is specified JI e What inter module optimization functions are used e What expansion functions can be used e Any code to be improved upon Section 6 This section explains the options to be specified at creating a load module the expansion functions to be used and the options of the inter module optimizer to be used The following table lists the optimization functions supported by the compiler Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions No Optimization Function Specification Mode Size Speed 1 Uses the 1 byte enum type Option O O 2 Extended interpretation of multiplication division specifications Option O O 3 Specifies the number of parameter passing registers Option A A 4 Increases the number of variable allocation registers Option A A 5 Optimization of external variables Option 6 Block transfer instruction Option X O 7 SPEED option Option X O 8 Allocates global variables to registers Expansion function A A 9 Controls the output of register save restore codes at function Expansion function O O entry and exit points 10 Specifies the inline expansion of a function Expansion function X O 11 Inline expansion of an assembly language function Expansion function X O 12 Uses 8 bit absolute address areas Option
42. k Added Intrinsic Functions The following intrinsic functions are added e 64 bit multiplication of H8SX mulsu and muluu e Block transfer instructions of H8SX movmdb movmdw movmdl and movsd e Block transfer instructions eepmovb eepmovw eepmovi e Revised instrinsic function for MOVFPE instruction _movfpe l Support for Wild Cards An input file can be specified with a wild card m Change in Compiler Limitation The limitation in the number of switch statements is changed from 256 to 2048 n Change in specification of information message display In Ver 4 0 only the last specification of all the message and nomessage options was effective in a command line In Ver 6 0 the union of all the numbers specified by each nomessage option in a command line is suppressed to display the message o Type of enum instance If the byteenum option is specified and if all the numbers in an enum are in the range from 0 to 255 the compiler handles the data as unsigned char p Inline expansion In H8SX numeric value in the speed inline lt numeric value option means the percentage of increase in program size allowed by inline expansion In the other CPU numeric value means the maximum number of nodes in a function allowed to perform inline expansion q 1 byte aligned Data Section and 4 byte aligned Data Section only in H8SX Specifying the align 4 option places data whose size is odd to 1 byte aligned data section and
43. program include machine h char s1 100 d1 100 int s2 50 d2 50 long s4 25 d4 25 void f void movmdb d1 sl 100 movmdw d2 s2 50 Executes the MOVMD instruction movmdl d4 s4 25 Compiled assembly language expansion code ERA ER6 SP dl ER6 s1 ER5 100 16 R4 d2 ER6 s2 ER5 50 16 R4 d4 ER6 s4 ER5 25 16 R4 ER4 ER6 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Remarks and notes i his function is valid only when the CPU is H8SX ii count takes the value from zero to 65535 If count is zero however it is interpreted as 65536 2 movsd Transfers a memory block using the block transfer instruction MOVSD from the address specified by src to the address specified by dst either until a byte whose value is zero H 00 has been transferred or until the transferred size has reached size The return value is the value subtracting the size of actually transferred bytes from the size given by size C C program cahr d 100 void f void remain include lt machine h gt const char s 1234 unsigned int remain movsd d s 100 Executes the MOVMD instruction within the limit of 100 bytes Compiled assembly language expansion code STM L MOV L MOV L MOV W MOVSD B MOV W RTS L Remarks and notes ER4 ER6 SP d ER6 Q s 32 ER5 100 16 R4
44. secend B __sectop S ABS8B __secend SABS8B __sectop SABS16B __secend SABS16B For adding an initialized data area section name add the section name here as in the preceding line For adding an uninitialized data area section name add the section name lhere as in the preceding line The _ _sectop and _ secend are enhanced functions used to determine a section address These functions will be explained in section 3 3 Section Address Operators Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 35 RENESAS REJ05B0464 0300 Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 Allocating a heap area HEW project file names sbrk c sbrk h sample program names sbrk c lowsrc c otherlb c These programs generate a function that allocates the heap area to be used by the memory management library OR KH KK ke kk ke kk Ck ko kk ke kk kc ke kk ko kk ke ke kk ke ke kk e kk Sk ke kk ke kk ko ke kk ko ke kk ke kk ck ke kk ko ke kk ko ke kk ke ke ke kk EA FILE sbrk c a DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 y DESCRIPTION Program of sbrk EJ CPU TYPE H8S 2621 A ay This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 wed BR KKK IK KI KK IK IK KK I A I I I I I I I ke ke ke I ek include lt stdio h gt include sbrk h const size_t _sbrk_size Specifies the minimum unit of the defined heap area extern char _slptr extern void srand unsign
45. verity Other Relocatable section start address Address H OO00ECOO Modify New Overlay Remove RAM sct4 HOOOOFSFO 7 H 0000F FOO E RAM sct2 Down Generate external symbol file Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 45 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A HEW2 0 or later Send the cursor to Lik Library tab Category Section target section to specify the New Overlay option 00 Standard Toolchain Configuration Dees Bf Category Section E a em Projecta Show entries for Section C source file E G source file Assembly source file CJ Linkage symbol file 4 Import Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage listz CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME map nooptimize startzPResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D U800 TN In the case of subcommands use the start option start RAM Sctl RAM Sct3 RAM Sct2 RAM Sct4 O0FF00 Remarks and notes If an overlay is going to be specified on a program section the section needs to be transferred Refer to section 11 2 3 How to Run Programs in RAM Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 6 How to Specify Output of Undefined Symbol Error Question How can I specify to output an error message and
46. void Reserved Dummy Reserved Dummy Reserved Dummy Treace INT_Treace Reserved Dummy NMI INT_NMI User breakpoint trap INT TRAP User breakpoint trap NT TRAP2 User breakpoint trap INT TRAP3 User breakpoint trap NT TRAP4 Reserved Dummy Reserved Dummy Creates a vector table named INT Vectors in the INTTBL section Specifying a section name in the pragma section causes the name to be appended to the default section name Therefore when assigning an address using the inter module optimizer you need to change the section name RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 41 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 6 vect h This program declares the prototypes for the built in function that are referenced when vector tables are set up To be generated under HEW1 2 only F BR RIK RA e e e k e e e e e e e e e k e e e e e ke e k e e Ck e k A e k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k kk kk k k k k x FILE vect h t DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 DESCRIPTION Definition of Vector 54 CPU TYPE H8S 2621 KA This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 y gt ay BRK IKK KK k k KK IK IK kk KK I A k k AR k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k I k k k k k k k k k lt lt VECTOR DATA START POWER ON RESET gt gt 0 Power On Reset extern void PowerON_Reset void
47. void func01 void gli g 12 g 13 g 14 g 15 Examples Codes Examples of codes before and after this optimization are as follows Common codes are unified into a new function com optl1 which is called from the original positions In the following example which is in H8S 2600 advanced mode ROM Size 114 bytes to 66 bytes Execution Speed 91 cycles to 108 cycles Before Optimization After Optimization filel c filel c main main BSR func00 8 func00 8 JMP _ func01 24 func01 8 func00 func00 ERO ERO com opt1 8 1 ROL ERO _g_11 _com_opt1 3 ROL SUB L ERO ERO ERO _g_12 MOV B 1 8 ROL 5 ROL MOV L ERO Q g ll ERO Q g 13 MOV B 3 8 ROL 7 ROL MOV L ERO Q g 12 ERO Q g 14 MOV B 5 8 ROL 9 ROL MOV L ERO Q g 13 ERO Q g 15 MOV B 7 8 ROL MOV L ERO g 14 MOV B 9 8 ROL MOV L ERO g 15 Common mE Codes file2 c file2 c func01 func01 ERO ERO BSR com opt1 8 1 ROL RTS ERO Q g 11 3 ROL ERO Q g 12 i5 ROL ERO Q g 13 7 ROL ERO Q g 14 9 ROL ERO _g_15 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Remarks This option is valid only for object files generated by C C Compiler Object files generated by Assembler are not optimized 9 4 7 Uses Indirect Addressing Mode Size O Speed Description If the indirect memory access space has space area the addresse
48. x void func void sub amp x Expanded into assembly language code before optimization Expanded into assembly language code after optimization tune Eune _x 32 ER0 _sub 24 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 39 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 58 50 52 44 62 After 14 12 10 10 10 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 50 48 40 After 16 14 12 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 52 45 102 88 126 After 18 14 22 18 18 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 30 28 28 After 14 14 14 6 5 5 Assigning Structures to Registers Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points When local variables are used as a structure the members should be declared so that the variables can directly be assigned to registers Description Because structures can also be assigned to registers both size efficiency and processing speed can be improved by appropriately assigning the members of the structure Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Pass the structure data to the function func C language program before optimization Struct ST 4 char a short b char Cc pst void main struc
49. 0 a 8 bn 3 Let s run the program Notice that the right coverage view contains a line with the Times column changed to 1 This indicates that the statement at the address corresponding to this line has been executed On the left view the CO coverage value within the address range is displayed Statistic Statu H 0000081a H 000 21 Times Pass Address 081E 00000824 00000824 00000082C 0000082E 00000834 00000838 00000834 00000083C 00000840 00000842 00000846 Assembler ROL H 01106DF4 32 H OOFFEO02 ERS H OOFFEO00 ER4 BERS RO H 0008 R0 BH 0846 8 H 0004 R0 RO ER4 Source if a 0 a 8 bn a 4 bn Note The left coverage view exists when the HEW version is 3 0 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 4 In addition to the coverage view you can use another method to see coverage information A left column on the editor screen indicates whether program execution has passed a particular source line 0x00000812 0x0000081a 0x0000081e 0x00000830 0x00000836 0x00000842 Ox0000084e 0x0000085a x 0000864 iValue func a b 0x00000872 e Save Data To save coverage information click the right mouse button on the right coverage view and enter a file name with the extension cov File name e Information collection using existing coverage information You can rarely obtain a single collection of c
50. 2 x 2 1 j 71 func j 3 func 1 2 func 2 2 Figure 10 2 Rule 46 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 10 MISRA C Figure 10 3 shows Rule 38 that the right hand operand of a shift operator shall lie between zero and one less than the width in bits of the left hand operand This is categorized as an unintended compiler operation In ANSI if the shift number of the bit shift operator is a negative number or larger than the size of the object to be shifted the calculation results are undefined In figure 10 3 if the shift number when us is shifted is not between 0 and 15 the results are undefined and the value will differ depending on the compiler This problem can be avoided through the application of Rule 38 Example unsigned short us us 16 Undefined action us 1 Undefined action Figure 10 3 Rule 38 Figure 10 4 shows Rule 51 that the evaluation of constant unsigned integer expressions should not lead to wrap around This is categorized as an error at execution When the result of an unsigned integer calculation is theoretically negative it is unclear whether a theoretically negative value is expected or a result based on a calculation without the sign will suffice This situation could lead to a malfunction Also the results of an addition calculation may cause an overflow resulting in a very small value This problem can be avoided through the application of Rule 51
51. 3 7 3 Enabling Register Declarations essere enne ene trennen trennen rennen ene 3 38 3 7 4 Specifying Absolute Addresses of Variables esee nere 3 40 3 5 5 Inter fie Inline Expansion eene eO RUP ODORE e REED ET SEEST E 3 41 3 7 6 Division of Optimizing Ranges essere enne tnne nene tene trennen trennen rennen ene 3 42 3 8 Features of H8SX c sssennee aee nee dee onere ea HU B mer app ee 3 43 3 8 1 Address Space ceo pee SUE PURGE e ET E EEUU EDS 3 43 3 8 2 Specifying 8 bit Absolute Address Space eene nenne nennen tenerent 3 44 3 8 3 Switching Vector Table Address sess enne nne anor Vei ene 3 48 Secon 4 HEW MT 4 1 4 Specifying Options HEW L2 iii eee ierit aE pice dpa eiecit e e ente edente 4 3 411 CC Compiler Options bes Sk ek BA AEG te ion LEM SS s 4 3 4 12 Assembler Options E EINEN teen GERE edd 4 10 4 1 3 Inter Module Optimizer Options sesesseeseeeseeeeeeeee eene eene Ee nee nete tere r SEE ik trennen 4 16 4 14 S Type Converter Options sesime oer sesno renee rne e err e uct dues eren ene edere ie oohdvens an aet ESEE Nosse 4 23 AVS Librarian Options eR RE oen EDU PRU ERSS ERE Erose 4 24 4 2 Specifying Options in HEW2 0 or Later nennen nennen nein rene e neene trennen nre 4 25 42 C C Compiler Options perenne tei ede pre ederet 4 25 4 22 Assembler Options 2 teneo U I HE pU RU EE Ee UE ERE A ied ad Uo EEEE 4 37 4 2 3 Optimizi
52. 8 4 11 Anonymous union Development and Size Reduction maintenance Speed Important Points In C use an anonymous union to directly access a member without like in C having to specify the member name This will improve the development efficiency Additionally it will not influence the size and processing speed Example of Use In the following example function main is used to access union member variable s In the C program member variable s is directly accessed In the C program after conversion it is accessed using a member name that the Compiler has automatically created The use of this simple code enables access to a member variable without influencing the object efficiency C program struct tag union unsigned char c 4 unsigned short s 2 unsigned long 1 void main void tag ts t s l Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 32 REJ05B0464 0300 There is no member name C program after conversion struct tag union uni unsigned char c 4 unsigned short s 2 unsigned long 1 access hi There is a member name void main void struct tag t t access s 1 tENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 12 Virtual Function Development and Size Reduction A Speed maintenance mportant Points A virtual function must be used if as shown in the following program there is a fu
53. CONFIGDIR FILELEAF obj debug nolist goptimize cheincpath lang c nologo Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 69 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 6 Specifying a subcommand file for the inter module optimizer Use Options gt H8S H8 300 IM OptLinker for HEW1 2 and Link Library Tab Category Subcommand file for HEW2 0 or later to invoke an HEW option dialog box for the specification of a subcommand file for the inter module optimizer lt HEW1 2 gt 300 OptLinker options Debug Check here to display a Subcommand file tab HEW2 0 or later Standard Toolchain L2 LX KE Subcommand file ha C source file Assembly source file H A Linkage symbol file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 70 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 7 Executing the building process Executing the building process generates the load module S sample High performance Embedded Workshop dbsct c m ni x File Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help lej x osaga 5evujlem imjej amp gssnsz mn Sel ve ST EESTI p amp cats steuert e e Sr mme salara gp mm m 5 NIS EISE xl shes sb e e e e nb ne e e e te R n t e o e te e e n R R n s e e e R R e o se e R nee e e R R R E sample 4 fk 3 sample FILE dbsct c 3 Assembly sc DATE Thu Oct 02 2003 E lowlvlsrc DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section amp C sour
54. ER1 E0 RO EO EO ER1 RO RO RO _a 32 _func 88 Object Size Comparison byte _b 32 R0 _a ER1 ER1 E0 RO EO E0 ER1 E0 E0 _b 32 R0 RO EO E0 G8 a 32 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 32 24 30 24 24 Specified 36 26 38 30 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 22 22 16 Specified 28 28 20 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 25 20 48 40 40 Specified 13 10 30 24 24 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 57 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 16 16 15 Specified 11 11 10 Remarks and Notes 1 The pragma inline statement should be specified before the function is defined If the optimization is not specified this specification is unavailable however the pragma specification is available The inline expansion is not performed for the following functions e Functions including variable parameters e Functions referencing addresses of parameters e Functions in which the type of a real parameter and that of a dummy parameter do not match e Functions calling inline expanded functions e Functions that exceed the size limitation of the inline expansion 2 When a function is specified as static the function is expanded only in the called side which improves size efficiency In this cas
55. Example if 1UL 2UL 4a What is intended 1 or OXFFFFFFFF char OxfffffffeUL 2 4 Results in a 0 address Figure 10 4 Rule 51 10 1 3 Compliance Matrix With MISRA C source code is checked for compliance with all 127 rules In addition a table as the one shown in Table 10 1 needs to be made showing whether or not each rule is upheld This is called a compliance matrix Given the difficulty of visually checking all rules we recommend that you use a static check tool The MISRA C guideline also indicates such stating that the use of a tool to adhere to rules is of utmost importance As not every rule can be checked using such a tool you will need to perform a visual review to check such rules visually Table 10 1 Compliance Matrix Rule number Compiler Tool 1 Tool 2 Review visual 1 Warning 347 2 Violation 38 3 Warning 97 4 Pass Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 10 MISRA C 10 1 4 Rule Violations Rule violations can consist of those that are known to be safe and those that may have more effects Rule violations such as the former should be accepted but some degree of safety is lost when rule violations are accepted too easily This is why MISRA C states a special procedure for accepting rule violations Such violations require a valid reason as well as verification that the violation is safe As such locations and valid reasons for all accepted rules are documented
56. In the C language the initial settings must be modified as indicated below The following description illustrates the modification method by using the resetprg c file in the workspace created in section 2 1 1 Creating a New Workspace 2 HEW2 0 oO tern fdef tern ndif tern fdef tern tern ndif fdef tern ndif fdef oO oO oO oO oO HOXHOXXHX OK HX t include machine h include stacksct h pragma entry PowerON Reset void main void Ccplusplus C void INITSCT void USES SIMIO void _INIT_IOLIB void void _CLOSEALL void OTHERLIB void _INIT_OTHERLIB void HWSETUP void HardwareSetup void Ccplusplus pragma section ResetPRG void PowerON Reset void void PowerON Reset void set imask ccr 1 _INITSCT ifdef endif ifdef endif ifdef endif ifdef endif USES SIMIO _INIT_IOLIB OTHERLIB _INIT_OTHERLIB HWSETUP HardwareSetup eal seats 5 main USES_SIMIO _CLOSEALL _call_end sleep These functions are called if static data exists in the C program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 REJ05B0464 0300 3 30 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler The call init function initializes the C initialized data area that stores the address of the constructor which is called with respect to a global class object The call end function initializes the C post processing data area that stores
57. Optimize Speed or size 11 1 22 How to Build Programs When the Assembler is Embedded Question A warning message is output at compiling when the assembler intrinsic is performed using pragma asm and pragma endasm or pragma inline asm Answer Assembler embedded files should be output in the Assembly language and then be assembled To build a file on the HEW specify the file containing the Assembler embedding to the Assembly output referring to the procedure described in section 11 1 21 How to Specify Options for Each File When built in this manner the file that has been Assembly output will automatically be assembled In the following example the file test c containing an Assembly embedding is specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A lt HEW1 2 gt 0 C Compiler Options Debug 3 C C source file Source Object List Optimize Other El ra C source file 8 ete Output file type Mach ine code Ok obj bel Machine code Gkobi f Hc JV Generate debug intor eee s C n Preprocessed source file Gkp pp resetprg c Section Nu Default Optioi Program section P P B4 Crt source file L Default Optior Store string data in Const section Mul Div operation specification Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit Output directory d3hewde mo test test Debug Modify Ei Select Assembly source
58. Propagate variables Disable Level 3 Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier within the entire function novolatile Treat global Not checked infinite loop 0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range all Specify optimizing All global_alloc 1 Allocate registers Enable const_var_propagate 1 Propagate variables Enable Custom Optimizes external variables according to the options specified by user Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Treat global variables as volatile qualified Check Box Command Option Function Y volatile Disables external variable optimization novolatile Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier Delete assignment to global variables before an infinite loop Check Box Command Option infinite loop 1 Function Eliminates an assignment expression that is located immediately before an infinite loop and that is an assignment to the external variable that is not used in the infinite loop infinite_loop 0 Specify optimizing range Disables elimination of an assignment expression for external variables preceding an infinite loop Dialog Menu Command Option Function All opt_range all Optimizes external variables within the entire function No loop opt_range noloop External variables in a loop and external variables used in a
59. REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 1 Single tab 8 HIM To HEW Project Converter v1 0 Single Mulitple HIM Project filename Specify a HIM project C Him test2 test2 him files HEW workspace name Specify a converted test2 HEW workspace name Total complete i 7 Displays the conversionstatus Results Displays the conversion result If the conversion has been performed successfully Project converted successfully is displayed Press this button to start conversion In the next step start the HEW Select Browse to another project workspace click on the OK button and specify the HEW project that has been converted EN Create a new project workspace m Cancel C Open a recent project workspace Administration o test testhws Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 17 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 7 Using HEW The HEW project is opened as shown below itest2 High performance Embedded Workshop File Edit View Project Options Build Memory Tools Window Help JOsuHG S 58 e OTcal om m ej e amp sms 2 e r si odat IEA Debua Z Detautsession gm s a amp amp v amp Ere erm e e e Ss jy B B 5 8 O source file i B Dhrystone c y Dependencies emi 41 k Debug A Find in Files Version Control Ready ms z Specify Build gt Build to execute the building process On the command menu click herd
60. Specification method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Generate list file Command line ist2 file name gt Calculation method When this option is specified the following list file map can be output In this example code section is PResetPRG PIntPRG P CSDSEC C BSEC and D therefore ROM size is 0x00000146 RAM size is 0x00000628 by B R and S Example of list file Mapping List SECTION START END SIZE ALIGN PResetPRG 00000400 00000415 16 2 PIntPRG 00000416 0000048f 7a 2 P 00000800 0000089d 9e 2 C DSEC 0000089e 000008a9 c 2 C BSEC 000008aa 000008b1 8 2 D 000008b2 000008b5 4 2 B OOffe000 00ffe423 424 2 R O0ffe424 00ffe427 4 2 S OOffedcO OOffefbf 200 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 11 Output of Section Alignment Mismatch Question The L1322 warning message Section alignment mismatch is displayed when the section name of binary file is referred by the section address operator in binary file input as follows How can I prevent this Option Specification binary project bin BIN SECTION C C Program void main void unsigned char s ptr S ptr 2 sectop BIN SECTION dumy s ptr Answer When the section address operator sectop __second is specified the compiler generates the section of which size is 0 and boundary alignment value is 2 for the specified section in the code generated by compiler as
61. Stack information output Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions In the case of Dhrystone Ver 2 1 the following relationship holds malloc strcpy Proc 1 Proc 3 Proc Proc_6 Func_3 Proc Func_2 Func 1 strcmp Func 1 Proc 8 Proc 7 Proc 6 Func 3 Proc 5 Proc 4 Func 2 The function to be declared by pragma noregsave Because main is the function that performs the first processing it is not necessary to save restore any register used before that function Therefore this function is declared in the pragma noregsave statement If the main includes function calls only all the functions called from main can be declared in the pragma noregsave statement lt inc h gt pragma noregsave main lt dhrystone21 c gt include inc h The execution results are as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma noregsave specified 3030 1580 Functions that are declared in the pragma regsave noregsave statement Check that there is any function other than the main function that only performs function calls Suppose that the interrupt function intr only performs function calls with the following calling relationship Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions i Assume that procl proc2 and proc3 are
62. Stop At Go Reset Cancel Flash Program Flash Boot In this example one step corresponds to one line of the C source program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 56 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 13 Displaying Memory Contents Specifying View gt Memory causes the display of an Open Memory Window dialog box Enter a symbol name in the Address field Open Memory Window Address Proc Eormat Byte The contents of memory can be displayed in the following Byte Memory screen f Interface sample 00A Simulator Eie Edit View Run Memory Setup Window Help IEETT T se a8e Tann OREO WSs ME Line Address BP Label Source else o0000a88 structassign PtrParIn NextRecord ffundef NextRecord 00000a96 emory HOOFFFF4D OOFFEF9 OOFFOOO DOFF 047 DOFFEF7 DO FFEFS OOFFO46 C34EZB4 OOFFEFS 000A9C E da PS fen g n E gi nS ry 10 2 w e Break PCBreakpomt gt P Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 57 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 14 Operating HDI with HEW 3 To start the HDI from the HEW open the desired file on the HEW Editor by double clicking on the HDI source window rs 3 sample Hitachi Embedded Workshop CXHewXToolsXHitachiX H8X3 0a OXsampleXcmain cv le File Edit Project Options Build Tools W
63. W RO _b 16 RTS RTS Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 16 12 16 12 14 After 16 12 16 12 12 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 16 16 12 After 16 16 12 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 14 11 28 22 24 After 14 11 28 22 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 11 11 10 After 11 11 10 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 1 3 Suppressing Redundant Type Conversions Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by ensuring that operations are performed between data items of the same size Description Operations performed between data items of different sizes generate superfluous sign expansion instructions and zero expansion instructions which causes a conversion of the smaller data type to the larger data type Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by ensuring that the data items are of the same size Example Add the variables a and b set the results to the variable c C language program before optimization unsigned char a int b c void func void c atb Expanded into assembly language code before optimization _func MOV B _a 32 ROL EXTU W MOV W ADD W MOV W RTS
64. _str2 16 R0 W 4 g c1 8 Q0 g 11 32 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Forbid item Elimination of same code Command line samecode_forbid lt function name gt e Disables allocation of short absolute address areas e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Forbid item Use of short addressing to Command line variable_forbid lt symbol name gt Disables indirect address calls e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Forbid item Use of indirect call jump to Command line function_forbid lt function name gt Address Range where optimization is disabled e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Forbid item Memory allocation in Command line absolute_forbid lt address gt size 9 4 11 Confirm Optimization Results Description Optimization results by the optimizing linkage editor can be confirmed as follows Confirmation by message When using HEW optimization results are output by not checking in the following dialog Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Repressed information level messages Command line message error number nomessage RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 35 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor
65. a hende moXHDXHD hws z C Browse to another project workspace Select the desired project workspace from the above screen Create a new project workspace Create a new project workspace Open a recent project workspace Open an existing workspace that has been used recently Browse to another project workspace Open another workspace By selecting Administration you can register or delete the system tool to be used Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 4 2 Starting the Compiler Using a Command In this subsection the method for executing the H8S and H8 300 C C Compiler is explained along with examples For details on compiler options refer to section 2 C C Compiler Operating Method in the H8S and H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Below the basic procedures for using the compiler are explained 1 Starting up the compiler This command displays a list of command input formats and compiler options on the standard output screen ch38 RET 2 Compiling a program The C source program testl c is compiled ch38Atestl c RET The C source program test2 cpp is compiled ch38Atest2 cpp RET Multiple C C programs can be compiled at once ch38Atest1 cAtest2 cpp RET 3 Specifying options Options goptimize debug show object allocation etc are prefixed with a hyphen and multiple options are separated by spa
66. and these files can be opened and checked by clicking on File Open Look in a Debug J amp e s Debug dep n sample abs vecttbl obj a intprg h8c a sample h8l intprg obj sample_mot cpu a resetprg h8c an sbrk h8c E resetprg obj a sbrk obj a sample st vecttbl h8c E Files of type fan Files Cancel The map file is generated under the name sample map the optimization information list file is generated under the name sample lop 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace 2 HEW2 0 To create a new project workspace select Create a new project workspace from the Welcome dialog box r Options 4 e qu C Open a recent project workspace Administration es cxtest testhws Y m CES C Browse to another project workspace Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 1 Setting the Project type When the following screen appears enter the desired project name in the Name field New Project Workspace Projects puce c 0 Application Workspace Name E Assembly Application sample T Demonstration Project Name y Empty Application ample si s s S t5 Import Makefile Directory C Hew_ene sample Browse GPU family H8S H8 300 m Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard z Properties ees Then select the Project type column Project t
67. endif 281 00000a9e IntLoc IntParIo 1i0 282 for 283 284 00000aa4 if CharlGlob A O0000aaa IntLoc The symbol de displayed at the line address at which the breakpoint has been set fa fa 5a AN ae en e y i E ES 5 10 gi rai wi A T I Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 8 Displaying the Register Status Either select Registers from the View menu or click on the CPU Registers button on the Toolbar By opening the Register Window from the View menu you can see the status of the registers Fe CPU Register i Register ERO boooooo0t ERL 0000000t ERZ 0000000 ER3 0000000t ERA 0000000 ERS 0000000 ERG 0000000t ER 0000000t Pc 000000 CCR CH 2000000 114 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 53 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 9 Referencing to an External Variable Select the name of the variable of interest Click on the right button to select Add Watch from the popup menu On the Watch Window you can reference the value of the variable Alternatively you can display the value of a variable by placing the mouse cursor on the variable f Em p E RD RIED Elus p Fed a Ie sp E o Source O0000aca IntLoc IntParIo 10 00000ae8 for 00000ad0 if ChariGlob A DOOO00ada IntLoc 00000a
68. gt Configuration Debug Y Category 28 ETE m Output file type M Yer40 E Sample Machine code ob zx Optimization EH C source file acm ob M technology E C source file v Generate debug information generation E Assembly source file Section Template El Linkage symbol file Program section P Auto po ary Store string data in Const section x Mul Div operation specification Group by alignment Based on ANSI 6bit 1 6bit 1 Gbit x ato Output directory SKCONFIGDIRE Modify Options C C cpu 26004 24 object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj debug nolist cheincpath nologo Ses Output file type Dialog Menu Command Option Function Machine code obj code machinecode Outputs a machine language program Assembly source code src code asmcode Outputs an assembly language program Preprocessed source file preprocessor Outputs a source program after preprocessor expansion p pp Generate debug information Check Box Command Option Function debug Outputs debugging Information nodebug Outputs no debugging information Section Dialog Menu Command Option Function s section Changes the default section name Store string data in Dialog Menu Command Option Function Const section string const Outputs string literal to the constant area D
69. int c long d f nc2 a b G d long a int b int c long d Remarks and notes i This function supports only keyword specifications ii Using the compiler CPU option regparam 3 parameter passing registers use ERO ERI ER2 RO R1 and R2 for H8 300 for all functions Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 5 3 Even Byte access Specification Features Description This feature always allows to access in even byte not to access in byte for 2 or 4 bytes of scalar type of variable constant Format __ evenaccess type specifier variable name gt type specifier gt _ _ evenaccess variable name gt Example C C program define A volatile unsigned short 0xff01178 void test void A amp 0x2000 Compiled assembly language expansion code _ _ evenaccess is not specified _test BCLR B 5 15733112 32 RTS Remarks and notes evenaccess _ _ evenaccess is specified MOV W 15733112 32 R0 BCLR B 5 ROH MOV W RO 15733112 32 RTS Accesses in the word instruction i In H8 300 the function allows to access in 2 bytes ii This function supports only keyword specifications Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 6 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 6 0 This section explains expansion functions that are newly added to the Compiler ver 6 0 3 6 1 Bit Field Order Sp
70. lib head runtime new stdio stdlib owes Mode Dialog Menu Command Option Function Build a library file anytime Creates a new standard library Build a library file Option Creates a new standard library when option is changed Changed Use an existing library file Links an existing standard library Do not add a library file 7 Links no standard library Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 53 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Category Standard Library Configuration cee zl Category Sc SEDE EE Category kir cT a source file v runtime runtime routines G G source file v J Assembly source file ctypeh Handles and checks characters H E Linkage symbol file mathh Performs numerical calculations such as trigonom new Performs memory allocation and deallocation mathf h Performs numerical calculations such as trigonoi stdarg h Supports access to variable arguments for funci Zie4diah Parfarme innuit forit handlina of b Enable all Disable all Options Stet Library cpu 260l output V KCONFIGDIRWS PRO JECTNAME lib head runtime new stdio stdlib Ses Category Dialog Menu Command Option Function runtime Head RUNTIME Specifies a run time routine new Head NEW Specifies EC declared by new ctype h Head CTYPE Specifies ctype h math h Head MATH Specifies math h mathf h Head MA
71. lt lt VECTOR DATA END POWER ON RESET gt gt lt lt VECTOR DATA START MANUAL RESET gt gt 1 Manual Reset extern void Manual_Reset void lt lt VECTOR DATA END MANUAL RESET gt gt 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Treace pragma interrupt INT_Treace extern void INT_Treace void ex JP 6 Reserved lt By specifying pragma interrupt as an interrupt function RTE instruction is generated when 1 NMI returning a function value pragma interrupt INT_NMI For details on interrupt functions refer to section extern void INT NMI void 3 1 Specifying an Interrupt Function 8 User breakpoint trap ragma interrupt INT TRAP1 tern void INT TRAP void 9 User breakpoint trap ragma interrupt INT TRAP2 tern void INT TRAP2 void e p x p x 10 User breakpoint trap p x p x ragma interrupt INT TRAP3 tern void INT TRAP3 void 1 User breakpoint trap ragma interrupt INT TRAP4 tern void INT TRAP4 void 2 Reserved 3 Reserved Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 7 Creating an entry function HEW project file name resetprg c sample program name init c RRR IKK KKK IK KR IK KR k k k k k k AR Kk k kk Ck k kk Ck Ck kk kc k k ko kk kkk kkk kk kkk eek S xy FILE resetprg c x DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 y DESCRIPTION Reset Progr
72. the second and later specifications for the same symbol are ignored A multiple of 2 in the range from H 00000000 to H FFFFFFFE can be specified for the stack value and any other value is invalid The stack value must be specified as follows A constant value must be specified Forward reference symbol external reference symbol and relative address symbol must not be used e Specification Method of STACK assembler directive A STACKA lt symbol gt stack value Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Example of assembly program CPU H8SXA 24 EXPORT _asm_symbol SECTION P CODE ALIGN 2 _asm_symbol STACK asm symbol 88 lt Stack Size of asm symbol function RTS END Displayed Example by Call Walker As the following example the stack area size used by asm symbol function is displayed 88 in Call Walker ADDD 3 32 K main 100 3 funci 96 3 asm symbol 88 func2 40 ADDD 3 32 e Remarks 1 STACK assembler directive can only make Call Walker display stack size and does NOT affect the behavior of program 2 This assembler directive is supported in H8S H8 300 Series Assembler Ver 6 01 or later 7 3 6 Merging Stack Information Saved or editing stack information file can be merged with other stack information file By using this function the edited stack information cannot be overwritten with rebuilt stack information
73. u1 with 4 bytes Output example MOV W 9 us1 Rd MOV W _us2 Rs MULXU W Rs ERd EXTU L ERd MOV L ERd Q9 ul Lower 2 bytes of the result of us1 us2 is assigned to ul by zero expansion Unsigned short us1 us2 us3 us1 us2 computed as unsigned long Output example MOV W _us1 Rd MOV W _us2 Rs MULXU W Rs ERd MOV L 9 us3 Rs DIVXU W Rs ERd MOV L Rd Q9 us Unsigned short us us us1 us2 us3 The 4 bytes of result of us1 us2 is assigned as the dividend of the us1 us2 computed as unsigned short Output example MOV W 9 us1 Rd MOV W Q9 us2 Rs MULXU W Rs ERd EXTU L ERd MOV L Q9 us3 Rs DIVXU W Rs ERd MOV L Rd Q9 us The lower 2 bytes of the result of us1 us2 are zero expanded and assigned as the dividend of the division operation operation instruction Specification Method Dialog menu result of 16bit 16bit Command line cpuexpand Example C C Tab Category Object Mul Div operation specification Non ANSI Guarantee 32bit as a To store multiplication results of two 2 byte data in 4 byte type data C C program unsigned long 11 unsigned short a b void func ll a b Assembly expansion code Not specified fune MOV W MOV W MULXU W EXTU L MOV L RTS Q a 32 R0 Q b 32 E0 E0 ERO ERO ERO _11 32 func MOV W MOV W MULXU W MOV L RTS Specified Q a 32 RO0 _b 32 E0 E0 ERO ERO _11 32 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESA
74. 00 04 82 00 QU 04 94 n Tuae 000170 00 00 0O OO OO 00 OO OA QOO 0A Q OO 0A OO OO OU uuuuuuuuu 000180 00 00 o 00 00 00 0O 00 0O 00 Q 00 00 OO QO OQ uuuuuu 000190 00 00 Q0 00 O0 O0 QO O0 OO O0 0A QO 00 OQ QO OO Le 0001a Q0 00 04 86 00 00 04 88 00 00 04 8A 00 00 Od SC 0001b0 00 00 04 SE 00 00 04 90 00 00 04 92 00 00 00 00 Le 0001c 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O0 00 00 00 00 00 OO OD OO Le 0001d 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O0 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO Le 0001e0 00 00 00 00 00 O0 OO O0 00 00 00 00 00 0O 00 OO Le Range of Data Existing HO08a0 40 18 01 00 6D 04 01 00 6D 05 01 00 6D 06 40 OG 8 m m m 000Sb0 6C 4A 68 EA OB 06 1F D4 45 F6 1F 90 45 E4 01 20 IJh Eres Ees 0 008c0 6D 76 6D 72 54 70 00 O0 08 DA 00 00 08 DE DO FF mwmrIp D Sd E4 24 00 FF EO 00 00 FF E4 2A 00 FF EO D 78 00 Sousa O 08e0 00 04 6B AO O0 Q0 20 OC 54 70 ess Tis Specify value filled in unused area H FF 000100 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF F F 000110 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF F F Range of Data 000120 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF F F Br 000130 FF FF FF FF FF FE FF FF FE FF F F F Existing 000140 00 00 04 6E 00 00 04 70 00 00 0 4 000150 00 00 04 76 00 00 04 78 00 00 0 C 000160 00 00 04 7E 00 00 04 amp 00 Q0 0 4 000170 FF F FF FF FF FF FF F F 000180 FF FF FF FF FFF FF FF F F 000190 FF FF FF FF F FF FF FF F F 0001a0 00 00 04 86 4 88 00 00 0 C 0001b0 00 00 04 8E 4 9
75. 0400000 200000400F5 Specify value filled in unused area H FF gt O0000 00040 00140 00180 00000400F 8 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOG 0414C FFFFFFEB Range of Data Existing coecoon B EEr TL na e zz TL DUFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDD 000000042692 BORER hop fe ee ce ho e mimm m m a m a a a E FFFCF500FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFI FFFDF400FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFI FFFEF3DOFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFI DEFFF2DDFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF F 00000001FF 0400000300000400F5 Range of Data NOT Existing e Remarks This option is valid for the optimizing linkage editor Ver 8 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 3 2 End Code of S Type File Description By specifying this option the end code can be always S9 In some type of ROM writer run time error may occur during input to ROM writer when the end code of S type file is not S9 record This is because end code is S7 or S8 if the entry address exceeds 0x10000 e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Always output S9 record at the end Command line 59 e Remarks For details of S type file please refer to section 19 1 1 S Type File Format in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Op
76. 0xf a000 er0 ldc l er0 vbr andc b 0x7F ccr RTS c Set interrupt mask bit lt Clear interrupt mask bit Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Section 4 HEW This section describes the relationship between the option screens and command options supported by the C C compiler assembler inter module optimizer object converter and librarian when using the HEW1 2 or 2 0 or later For details on each option refer to the appropriate user s manual For details on options supported in the inter module optimizer refer to the description in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Each option screen in HEW1 2 is selected by the following method Tool Name Selecting Method C C Compiler Options gt H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Cross Assembler Options gt H8S H8 300 Assembler Inter Module optimizer Options gt H8S H8 300 IM Optlinker Object converter Options gt H Series Stype Converter Librarian Options gt H Series Librarian Note lf no appropriate tool is detected in the Options menu add a tool using the Options gt Build Phases Select H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain from the option menu in HEW2 0 or later Select H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain from the build menu in HEW4 0 or later Tool N
77. 10 Specified 9 9 9 Remarks and Notes The pragma abs8 cannot be specified for data that have previously been declared This specification is valid only for 1 byte external variables At linkage sections starting with ABS8 are allocated to the 8 bit absolute address area 5 4 12 Using 16 Bit Absolute Address Area Size O Speed O Description The H8S or H8 300 Series provide a 16 bit absolute address area When byte data frequently accessed are allocated to this area those data can be accessed in the 16 bit absolute address format which improves ROM efficiency RAM efficiency and the execution speed compared with accessing normally in the absolute address format There are the following two ways to specify the 16 bit absolute address area 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format pragma abs16 variable or structure name array name 2 Specifying with an expansion option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Data access aa 16 Command line abs16 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 60 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions When the pragma abs16 is specified variables to be accessed in the 16 bit absolute address format can be specified When this is specified using the option format all data in the file are set to be accessed in the 16 bit absolute address format The following lists the range of 16 bit absolute address area for each CPU operation m
78. 12 11 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Debug Information Debug Information Output Available Debugger Object Format Output Format 3rd party ELF DWARF 2 support ELF DWARF2 debug In load module debugger 3rd party ELF DWARF support ELF debug In load module debugger Hitachi Integration Manager Ver 4 or SYSROFPLUS sdebug Debug information file higher E7000 Hitachi Integration Manager Ver 3 or SYSROF debug Debug information file higher E7000 Hitachi Debugging Interface Ver 2 or SYSROF debug In load module higher E6000 Hitachi Debugging Interface Ver 3 or ELF sdebug Debug information file higher E6000 Note Ifa program is written in the C language the object should be output in the ELF format 2 Has the directory containing the source program for compiling been specified to be changed Debugging information is stored with the information of the directory location of the source program Therefore if the directory in which the source program for compiling is located is changed the source program cannot be modified Some debuggers support a feature that allows the user to specify the source program directory When relocating a directory be sure to also move the dwfinf directory The dwfinf directory may be required at debugging because it contains inter module optimization add on information files 3 Are you debugging a file to which the C source file is output in assembly language If
79. 12 4 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Generate file for inter module optimization Check Box y goptimize Command Option Function Outputs inter module optimization add on information file Outputs no inter module optimization add on information file Switch statement Specifies the switch statement expansion method Dialog Menu Command Option Function Auto case auto Determines switch statement expansion method depending on the speed option specification If then case ifthen Performs switch statement expansion in if then method Table case table Performs switch statement expansion in table jump Function call Selects the function call method method Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa Selects normal function call aa 8 idirect normal Selects memory indirect function call vec 7 idirect extended Selects extended memory indirect function call Data access Selects data access mode Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa Selects normal data access aa 8 abs8 Selects 8 bit absolute address access aa 16 abs16 Selects 16 bit absolute address access Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW a Details Button Inline Tab Supported from HEW 4 0 Optimize details 2 xi Inline Global variables Miscellaneous Inline file path OXHew exexHew4 H8V61 engXSampleSampleXinline c OK Cancel Specify op
80. 1580 pragma abs8 specified 3014 1566 If there are many other variables that can be allocated to the 8 bit absolute address area check the number of accesses and assign the variables that receive the largest number of accesses In addition specify some options to reduce the object size Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma abs8 Char1Glob Char2Glob 2944 1517 pragma noregsave specified Compiler option Inter module optimization It is clear that the above specifications yield slightly better results For further details on abs8 refer to section 5 4 11 Using 8 Bit Absolute Address Area 2 Allocating to a short 16 bit absolute address area Generate codes to perform access with a 16 bit absolute address Optimization function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 abs16 option 2988 1558 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Data access aa 16 Command line abs16 The 16 bit absolute address area must be allocated in the memory ranges H 000000 to H 007FFF and H FF8000 to H FFFFFF Initially specify abs16 as an option which reveals what variables can be allocated to the ABS16 section If the variables can fit within the range they can be specified directly in the option However if there is any variable e
81. 16 bit absolute address areas are specified Reviews the way assignments are made to memory indirect areas Specifies expansion Assigns global variables to registers functions Controls the output of register save restore codes at function entry exit points Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Specification procedure at optimization for speed Specifies options Specifies the SPEED option Uses the 1 byte enum type Specifies expanded interpretation of multiplication division Specifies the number of parameter passing registers Increases the number of variable assignment registers Specifies the block transfer instruction Provides inter module Specifies inter module optimization for speed optimization Specifies inter module optimization for all items Uses CPU specific Reviews the way 8 bit absolute address areas are specified instructions Reviews the way 16 bit absolute address areas are specified Reviews the way global variables are assigned to registers Specifies enhanced features Controls the output of register save restore codes at function entry and exit points Reviews the ways functions are inline expanded Reviews the way Assembly coded inline expansions are specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 1 Optimization for Size In this section a common benchmark prog
82. 3 1088 100 108 68 70 91 91 91 E DIVUX 3 936 23 DIVXSB 3 80 s z s 24 DIVXSW 3 188 s s s 25 DIVXUW 3 158 26 CDVC 3 132 27 CDVI 3 810 p 28 CDVUI 3 258 d 29 Remainder MODL 3 254 30 MODUL 3 224 3 E 91 CMDC 3 132 s z 32 CMDI 3 810 38 CMDUI 3 256 1 p 34 Post POID 3 1164 624 542 278 283 z 385 Increment POIF 3 476 s s 36 POIL 3 102 2 F Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A List of Runtime Routine Speeds 2 No Type Function Name 300 300HN 300HA 2000N 2000A H8sxn H8sxa H8sxx 37 Post PODD 3 1114 604 618 268 273 s 38 Decrement PODF 3 490 i 7 39 PODL 3 98 40 Pre PRID 3 1112 572 498 254 267 229 228 228 41 Increment PRIF 3 448 314 292 123 127 101 99 99 42 PRIL 3 56 43 Pre PRDD 3 1066 556 578 246 259 216 212 212 44 Decrement PRDF 3 466 326 342 131 135 108 106 106 45 PRDL 3 56 2 46 Logic operations ANDL 3 78 47 NEGD 3 74 76 80 38 40 20 20 20 48 NEGF 3 50 s s 2 z 49 NEGL 3 76 p z 2 s z 50 ORL 3 78 z 51 XORL 3 78 3 s z i 52 Block MV4 3 48 x 53 Transfer MV8 3 72
83. 3 Using the Inter Module Optimization Features sse eene eene terne 5 21 5 2 4 Selecting Expansion Functions eseseeseeeeeseeeenneene ener nre nent nren rene enne enne n eter tent tenete 5 23 25 2 5 Using the Inline Expansion Eeatutes etii nire en etti eue e operc 5 24 5 2 6 Using CPU Specific Instructions eeseesseseeseeeseeeeene enne nennen rene etre ekri ener tree 5 25 5 3 Combination of Size and Speed Efficiency sss ener en rennen tenerent entrent 5 27 5 4 Details of Optimization Functions 0000 cece cee cese cee ceeeeseeeeeeseeeecesecssecsaecsaceaecsaecsaecsaecaaeseeeeaeeeaeeseeaeesaees 5 28 2541 Using I Byteenuim Lype i5 oe eee terii e e Unde nie eR edd 5 30 5 4 2 Extended Interpretation of Multiplication Division Specifications esee 5 31 5 4 3 Specifying the Number of Parameter Passing Registers esssssssseeeeeneeeeeeeneee 5 33 5 4 4 Increasing the Number of Variable Allocation Registers sese 5 35 5 4 5 Optimization of External Variables seeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nennen rennen enne 5 36 5 446 Block Transfer Instruction eee ppm cess pee DR ree RU n epit 5 38 SAT speed Option siet cer e etin ea a iow terim eh e ee ttn 5 39 5 4 8 Allocating Registers to Global Variables sees eene 5 52 5 4 9 Controlling Output of Register Save Restore Codes at Function Entry Exit Poin
84. 4 R4 remain 32 ERA ER6 lt Set the value subtracting the size actually transferred from the given size i This function is valid only when the CPU is H8SX ii size takes the value from zero to 65535 If size is zero however it is interpreted as 65536 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 3 Section Address Operators Description Section addresses can be specified with the compiler supplied _ _sectop and _ _secend operators In objects output by the compiler section addresses usually cannot be specified because the section assignment destination is undefined However with the __sectop and secend operators you can specify the final address of a section that will be set in the program linked using the Inter Module Optimization Tool These two operators can be specified as follows Format _ Sectop section name gt secend section name gt With a section named X the statements including the operators are expanded as follows sectop X STARTOF X secend X STARTOF X SIZEOF X Example of section status sectop X secend X STARTOF and SIZEOF are asembler operators STARTOF determines the start address of a section set after it has been linked SIZEOF determines the size of a section set after it has been linked Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example To co
85. 468 2 469 1 04666667 2 476 2 546 2 548 1 9625 2 320 2 386 2 389 2 7475 2 662 2 737 2 742 3 5325 2 509 2 580 2 584 4 3175 2 513 2 583 2 587 5 1025 2 973 2 439 2 442 5 8875 2 675 2 750 2 755 7 tan 0 3925 3 366 3 775 3 771 1 1775 3 566 4 000 3 996 1 9625 3 448 3 854 3 850 2 7475 3 609 4 040 4 036 8 cosh 0 33 10 276 9 214 9 214 0 78 10 294 9 237 9 237 0 33 10 272 9 219 9 219 0 78 gt 10 299 9 242 9 242 9 sinh 0 33 gt 2 413 2 110 2 110 0 98 10 623 9 548 9 548 0 33 2 413 2 110 2 110 0 98 10 628 9 553 9 553 10 tanh 0 0033 00 1 604 1 553 1 552 11 exp 0 33 5 110 4 564 4 556 0 98 5 215 4 667 4 663 0 33 5 116 4 570 4 562 0 98 5 221 4 673 4 669 12 frexp 0 3 41 42 42 400 s 41 42 42 13 Idexp 0 3 30 220 196 196 0 1 100 220 196 196 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 5 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8SX No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 14 log 1 2 3 706 3 573 3 573 2 5 3 770 3 636 3 636 0 999 4 058 3 924 3 924 0 3 5 3 858 3 724 3 724 15 logi0 1 2 3 884 3 754 3 755 2 5 3 948 3 818 3 818 0 999 4 245 4 115 4 115 0 3 4 029 3 889 3 899 16 modf 256 3 535 514 514 0 032 469 450 450 10000 2345 571 550 550 17 pow 2 3 4 2 9 338 8 626 8 634 45 2 5 9 492 8 780 8 795 4 56 3 10 016 9 242 9 254 85 55 476 9 783 9 033
86. 49 47 47 84 LTD 3 264 250 266 123 121 93 79 79 85 LTF 3 212 115 122 57 61 49 47 47 86 NED 3 250 252 248 114 112 78 75 75 87 NEF 3 204 116 124 58 62 47 47 47 88 Convert CTOL 3 60 89 DTOF 3 316 238 242 110 112 87 87 87 90 DTOI 3 508 91 DTOL 3 464 290 294 100 102 105 105 105 92 FTOD 3 178 X 144 148 62 64 56 56 56 93 FTOI 3 608 g4 FTOL 3 564 338 342 150 152 188 188 188 95 ITOD 3 176 152 156 74 76 82 84 84 96 ITOF 3 164 124 128 62 64 80 80 80 97 ITOL 3 44 98 LTOD 3 366 244 256 126 128 150 150 150 99 LTOF 3 334 224 236 116 118 151 151 151 400 ULTOD 3 180 84 124 54 56 55 51 51 401 ULTOF 3 150 22 104 50 52 47 47 47 102 UTOD 3 114 62 94 43 45 38 36 36 103 UTOF 3 80 22 52 21 23 25 25 25 104 Left shift DSLC 3 70 70 84 31 37 105 DSLI 3 82 78 92 35 41 s 106 DSLL 3 98 112 4 51 z 107 SLC 3 gt z 23 25 3 108 SLI 3 62 26 28 gt s 109 SLL 3 M8 29 81 110 Right shift DSRC 3 70 70 84 31 37 3 411 DSRI 3 88 78 92 35 41 y 412 DSRL 3 98 112 45 51 p 418 DSRUC 3 70 70 84 31 37 414 DSRUI 3 88 78 92 35 39 3 415 DSRUL 3 98 112 45 51 s 416 SRC 3 p 18 25 23 18 19 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A List of Runtime Routine Speeds 4 No Type Function Name 300 300HN 300HA 2000N 2000A H
87. 72 76 36 38 17 17 17 54 MVN 3 170 296 328 138 146 64 71 71 55 mv3mm 30 32 56 mv3mr 28 30 57 mv3rm 17 19 58 mv4mm 36 38 59 mv4mr 31 33 60 mv4rm s 20 22 s 61 Set bit field BFINC 3 102 96 100 47 49 62 BFINCR 3 94 88 92 43 45 z 63 BFINI 3 256 180 184 7 73 35 35 35 64 BFINIR 3 248 156 160 67 69 31 31 31 65 BFINL 3 820 346 350 135 137 45 45 45 66 BFINLR 3 330 334 127 129 39 39 39 67 Reference bit BFSC 3 78 78 82 38 40 eg eld BFSI 3 196 168 172 67 69 34 34 34 69 BFSL 3 578 270 270 122 124 37 37 37 0 BFUC 3 68 68 72 33 35 71 BFUI 3 168 144 148 55 57 72 BFUL 3 546 236 240 105 107 s 78 Compare CMPD 3 230 226 218 101 97 66 62 62 7A CMPF 3 178 90 94 45 47 36 36 36 75 CMPL 3 94 s i 2 76 EQD 3 254 250 246 113 111 87 78 73 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 7 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 11 Q amp A List of Runtime Routine Speeds 3 No Type Function Name 300 300HN 300HA 2000N 2000A H8sxn H8sxa H8sxx 77 Compare EQF 3 202 114 122 57 61 49 47 47 78 GED 3 264 250 256 118 116 91 77 77 79 GEF 3 202 114 122 57 61 49 47 47 80 GTD 3 262 250 254 117 115 90 76 76 81 GTF 3 202 114 122 57 61 49 47 47 82 LED 3 264 250 266 123 121 93 79 79 83 LEF 3 212 114 122 57 61
88. 8 15 16 L26 8 6 16 L26 8 7 16 L26 8 8 16 L26 8 9 16 L26 8 L26 8 RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO 10 16 R0 11 16 R0 RO ER1 Specified _sub MOV MOV CMP BHI EXTU L MOV B 32 ERO0 ROL EXTU W EXTU L ADD L JMP MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W BRA MOV W MOV W RTS SECTION DATA B DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DAT DAT DAT DAT DAT UU UJ UU UJ UU UU UU UJ UU UJ UU UJ UU UJ GU UJ UU CJ w CJ RO ERO L7 ERO ERO RO L27 8 2 R0 L27 8 3 R0 L27 8 4 R0 L27 8 5 R0 L27 8 6 RO L27 8 7 R0 L27 8 8 RO0 L27 8 9 RO L27 8 0 RO L27 8 1 R0 RO ER1 L C DATA ALIGN 2 5 L5 6 L5 6 L5 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 49 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 136 120 126 114 120 Specified 136 120 126 114 120 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 118 118 108 Specified 118 118 108 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML
89. 948 25 724 27 260 11 231 11 682 0 777 43 992 26 872 28 494 11 653 12 127 4 atan2 0 3 0 7 51 604 29 210 31 122 12 919 13 457 0 2 0 1 62 958 34 532 36 734 15 451 16 062 0 1 0 9 39 414 22 708 24 248 9 824 10 270 5 cos 0 523333333 24 152 15 346 16 078 6 412 6 681 1 046666667 27 734 17 718 18 730 7 411 7 723 1 9625 5 26 848 17 014 17 944 7 091 7 382 2 7475 25 478 16 430 17 244 6 922 7 212 3 5325 24 488 15 598 16 330 6 538 6 807 4 3175 B 27 984 17 876 18 888 7 489 7 801 5 1025 5 26 982 17 064 17 994 7 115 7 406 5 8875 25 488 16 446 17 260 6 930 7 220 0 52333333 24 238 15 350 16 082 6 422 6 691 1 04666667 27 796 17 728 18 740 7 424 7 736 1 9625 26 934 17 024 17 954 7 104 7 395 2 7475 7 25 564 16 440 17 254 6 935 7 225 3 5325 24 574 15 608 16 340 6 551 6 820 4 3175 28 070 17 886 18 898 7 502 7 814 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 7 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 5 cos 5 1025 27 068 17 074 18 004 7 128 7 419 5 8875 25 574 16 456 17 270 6 943 7 233 6 sin 0 523333333 26 522 16 820 17 750 7 000 7 289 1 046666667 25 278 16 214 17 028 6 821 7 109 1 9625 24 278 15 556 16 288 6 524 6 791 2 7475 27 926 17 840 18 852 7 480 7 790 3 5325 26
90. 960 17 002 17 932 7 093 7 382 4 3175 25 590 16 472 17 286 6 951 7 239 5 1025 24 636 15 712 16 444 6 603 6 870 5 8875 27 988 17 908 18 920 7 512 7 822 0 52333333 26 700 16 858 17 788 7 028 7 917 1 04666667 25 480 16 300 17 114 6 873 7 161 1 9625 24 456 15 594 16 326 6 552 6 819 2 7475 28 104 17 878 18 890 7 508 7 818 3 5325 27 138 17 040 17 970 7 121 7 410 4 3175 25 768 16 510 17 324 6 979 7 267 5 1025 24 814 15 750 16 482 6 631 6 898 5 8875 28 166 17 946 18 958 7 540 7 850 7 tan 0 3925 38 230 21 734 22 712 9 149 9 483 1 1775 39 408 22 136 23 196 9 323 9 677 1 9625 38 490 21 456 22 434 9 017 9 357 2 7475 39 672 22 672 23 732 9 595 9 955 8 cosh 0 33 99 902 56 136 58 518 23 476 24 258 0 78 101 046 57 590 59 980 24 901 24 693 0 33 99 920 56 140 58 522 23 478 24 260 0 78 101 064 57 594 59 984 23 903 24 695 9 sinh 0 33 28 064 17 778 18 546 7 269 7 535 0 98 102 482 57 370 59 838 23 765 24 586 0 33 28 064 17 778 18 546 7 269 7 535 0 98 102 500 57 374 59 842 23 765 24 588 10 tanh 0 0033 00 109 818 63 362 66 024 26 975 27 838 11 exp 0 33 49 318 27 448 28 558 11 505 11 886 0 98 50 186 27 746 28 860 11 503 11 889 0 33 49 428 27 556 28 666 11 559 11 940 0 98 50 288 27 782 28 896 11 521 11 907 12 frexp 0 3 290 246 274 134 147 400 290 246 274 134 147 13 Idexp 0 3 30 1 792 1 436 1 576 659 721 0 1 100 1 792 1 436 1 576 659 721 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENES
91. As align is default with the compiler Ver 4 0 or higher the boundary alignment is automatically made in order to reduce empty areas So this improvement makes no difference Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 5 2 Techniques for Data Initialization Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points To reduce program size any variables that require initialization should be initialized when they are declared Description Data that are initialized at the time of their declaration are first allocated in the initialization data area D section and then copied to the RAM when the program is executed The assignment of initial values is performed only once at the beginning of program execution By contrast any data that are not initialized at the time of their declaration are allocated in the uninitialized data area B section which requires only one half as much memory as the case where the data are allocated to the initialization data area On the other hand the latter approach requires an increase in the size of the program area P section for setting initial values in the program by means of assignment statements For better efficiency if multiple variables exist that require initial values they should be initialized at the time of their declaration Example Initialize the variable a C language program before optimization C langua
92. Browse Append Source Address Data size Count H 0000F000 EN e File output action example Let s see the following practical action example As the result of the above setting the breakpoint is at H 00000814 and the contents of address H F000 are H FF Run the program using the Go command or similar method Source code fragment 4t IntBP c int b void main void a ll b 9 tale abort void tENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 23 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 7 Using HEW You can see that when the PC reaches H 00000814 the break condition is satisfied and as a consequence the contents of address H F000 are output to the file Memory Sample dat contents as seen on a binary editor Address Data Value p Ox0000F000 FF 00 mr 000000 Interrupt setting example The method for file output setting in the Set Break dialog box is similar to the method for file input setting As shown below PC breakpoint is used so that a break condition is considered as satisfied when the PC reaches the following address The setting method is similar for other breakpoint types Click on the Action tab select Interrupt in the Action Type field specify an interrupt priority and an interrupt type vector number 7 and click on the OK button Condition tab Action tab Set Break Set Break Condition Action Condition Action Break t
93. C C function O Recursive call function or Circulation function a Recursive call function Displayed when the same function is called in itself Example void func int x KH func Ox00000006 gt xtt QP func Recursive if x OFF func x if x MAX return H b Circulation function Displayed when the same function is called indirectly Example void funcl int a G funci 0x00000008 func2 10 t3 func2 0x00000004 i QP func Recursive void func int b funcl 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW RTOS RTOS function Example ITRON symbols Function of which the reference source is unknown Referenced by unknown In the following example function func1 calls function Undef When function Undef is not defined this icon is displayed at function Undef Undefined function call is error at linkage but link option change message can modify error to warning The load module file is made at warning so the stack information file is also made For more about change message refer to 4 2 7 Other Options Change message in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Example void funcl void 3 funci 0x00000004 Undef F Undef 0x00000000 gt X Function of which the address reference has not been resolved Address
94. Command Option Function del vacant loop 1 Eliminates the loop without statements inside del vacant loop 0 Disables elimination of vacant loops even when there is no statements inside the loop Specify maximum unroll factor Dialog Menu Command Option Function Default max unroll 2 or 1 2 or 1 is assumed as the maximum number of loops to be expanded Custom max unroll Specifies the maximum number of loops to be expanded An integer from numeric value gt 1 to 32 can be specified for lt numeric value gt Allocate registers to struct union members Check Box Command Option Function struct_alloc 1 Allocates structure union members to registers struct_alloc 0 Disables allocation of structure union members to registers Inline memcpy strcpy Check Box Command Option Function library intrinsic Performs inline expansion for memcpy and strcpy library function Makes function calls for memcpy and strcpy Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 61 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Category Other 300 Standard Toolchain C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt Configuration Debug EGY All Loaded Projects HB Category Miscellaneous options C source file Check against EC language specification G source file Treat enum as char if it is in the range of char Assembly source file Increase a
95. Format pragma interrupt function name interrupt specs function name gt lt interrupt specs gt Example To declare an interrupt function f1 This function returns on the RTE instruction after completing its processing C C program extern unsigned char a pragma interrupt f1 void f1 void lt The function f1 is defined as an interrupt function a 0 Compiled assembly language expansion code RO ROL ROL lt Interrupt function returns on RTE instruction Remarks and notes Interrupt function declarations support the following features stack switching specification trap instruction return specification interrupt complete function specification and vector table specification Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler No Item Format Option Description 1 Stack sp lt variable gt Specifies a new stack address with a variable or constant switching amp lt variable gt lt valuable gt Valuable pointer specification lt constant gt amp lt valuable gt Valuable object type address lt variable gt lt constant gt Constant value lt constant gt amp lt variable gt lt constant gt 2 Trap tn lt constant gt Specifies the end with the TRAPA instruction seta lt constant gt Constant value trap vector number specification 3 Interrupt sy lt function Specifies the end with a jump to an interrupt fu
96. Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles ANSI compliant 3048 1580 Extended interpretation 3048 1580 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Object select Non ANSI Guarantee 32bit as a result of 16bit 16bit for Mul Div operation specification Command line cpuexpand Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions In this program the extended interpretation did not produce any significant performance difference However an extended interpretation of the multiplication division code can produce different computational results because the range of extended interpretation differs from that guaranteed in the language specifications Therefore the extended interpretation should be used only when it is deemed appropriate For further details refer to section 5 4 2 Extended Interpretation of the Multiplication Division Specifications 5 1 4 Using the Inter Module Optimization Features By using the inter module optimizer a size efficient object can be created more effectively Before specifying optimization with the inter module optimizer specify the output of an inter module optimization add on information file in either the compiler or cross assembler Specification method C C Compiler Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Generate file for inter module optimization Command line goptimize Cross Assembler Dialog menu Assembly Tab Categor
97. H R6H R1 ER1 H R6L rR1 d 1 0 rtn 32 6 optimization main SUBS L 4 SP MOV W Q 2 16 SP EO OV B 1 16 SP ROH MOV B GSP ROL BSR func 8 ADDS L 44 SP RTS func MOV B ROL R1L ULXS B ROH R1 ADD W EO R1 EXTS L ERI OV L ER1 0 rtn 32 RTS H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 26 24 56 54 60 After 22 20 38 36 48 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 26 26 24 After 22 22 20 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 29 25 120 112 228 After 26 22 82 74 174 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 25 21 21 After 21 19 19 Remarks and Notes For a description of how to assign an parameter refer to section 9 3 3 Examples of Parameter Assignment in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Note that when the number of registers that pass the parameters is changed by an option the number of registers that receive the parameters also change 6 7 Branches 6 7 1 Rewriting switch Statements as Tables Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points If the processing tasks performed by the case statements associated with switch are alike the switch statements should be coded using a table to reduce th
98. H8S Output object generated by Ver 6 1 optimization technology of H8S Generate reentrant library Check Box Command Option Function reent Creates reentrant functions NOT create reentrant functions Section Dialog Menu Command Option Function section Changes the default section name Store string data in Dialog Menu Command Option Function Const section string const Outputs string literal to the constant area Data section string data Outputs string literal to the initialization data area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 55 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Mul Div operation specifications Dialog Menu Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit Command Option nocpuexpand Function Develops multiplication or division in codes according to the ANSI C language specifications Non ANSI Guarantee 32bit as a result of 16bit 16bit cpuexpand Develops multiplication or division in codes according to the CPU instruction specifications Output file path Dialog Menu Command Option Function output Specifies library file output directory Group by alignment Dialog Menu Command Option Function None noalign Allocates defined variables in the defined order Auto align Allocates variables so as to reduce space by boundary alignment 4byte align 4 Divides a data section into 4 2 1 byte boundary alignment section and allocates into multiple of 4 2 1 add
99. HEWI 2 inter module optimizer to copy a part of the program to be executed to the fixed addresses determined at linking during runtime to execute the program in RAM VECTTBL INTTBL LL PRsetPRG IntPRG Transferred during execution This program can be installed in the project that was created in section 2 as follows Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 39 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A First specify the address of the program section to be transferred to be executed in RAM at startup This processing is added to an existing file pragma section SDSEC static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data section in ROM char rom_e End address of the initialized data section in ROM f char ram_s Start address of the initialized data section in RAM JDTBL __sectop D __secend D __sectop R __sectop SABS8D __secend SABS8D __sectop SABS8R __sectop SABS16D secend SABS16D __sectop SABS16R __sectop PXX __secend PXX __sectop XX 7 Set the addresses of PXX and XX sections pragma section SBSEC static const struct 4 char b s Start address of non initialized data section char b e End address of non initialized data section JBTBL __sectop B __secend B __sectop SABS8B __secend SABS8B __sectop SABS16B __secend SABS16B With this s
100. How to convert programs from HIM to HEW 11 4 9 61 want to use an old compiler tool chain in the latest HEW 11 4 10 11 1 C C Compiler 11 1 1 How to Change Character String Assignment Destinations Question How can I modify attributes of the section to which character strings and data are assigned Answer Although character strings are normally assigned to the constants area they can be assigned to the initialization area by the following operation Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 1 Modifies with an option A character string can be assigned to the D section with the following option Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Object change Store string data in to Data section Command line string data 2 Restricts the storage area for the character string as follows Character string ABC to C section char strl ABC char str2 4 ABC Character string ABC to D section The results are as follows SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 DATA L L2 SDATAZ ABC SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 SDATAZ ABC 3 Data assigned to the constants area are assigned to the initialization area with the volatile specification pese The volatile option is specified Example Not specified Specified SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 DATA W H 0001 DATA W H 0001 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Ca
101. L ER4 ER6 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Remarks and notes This intrinsic function is valid when the CPU type is AE5 or when H8SX and the eeprom option is specified ii Refer to the hardware manual for the details of ECR EPR and other related issues 4 eepromb epr eepromw epr To perform a block transfer from the address indicated by the second parameter to the address indicated by the first parameters in bytes indicated by the third parameter The eepromb epr intrinsic function transfers a memory block with the EEPMOV B instruction and eepromw epr with the EEPMOV P W instruction respectively These intrinsic functions set the first second and third parameters to the registers set eprval to the address pointed by epr set ecrval to the address pointed by ecr and then transfer the memory block If transfer completes successfully O is returned If transfer fails the remaining size of the memory block left is returned The size of eepromb epr can take 0 to 255 and size of eepromw_epr can take 0 to 65535 However if size is 0 no transfer occurs C C program include lt machine h gt define ecr_ptr volatile unsigned char 0x123456 define epr_ptr volatile unsigned char 0x123457 char a 10 b 10 unsigned char x void f void Executes the EEPMOV P W instruction x eepromw_epr b a 10 ecr_ptr 1 epr_ptr 1 Compil
102. L ERL _sub 24 JSR _sub 24 POP L ERI LDMAC ER1 MACH POP L ERI LDMAC ER1 MACL SP ERO ER1 LDM L SP ERO ER1 RTE Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 27 The Program Runs Correctly on the ICE but Fails When Installed on a Real Chip Question The program runs correctly at debugging on the ICE but fails when operated on a real chip Answer If a program contains the initialization data area D section it uses emulation memory on the ICE Therefore read write operation can be performed on the ICE however only read operation can be performed on a real chip because memory on a real chip is ROM This causes the malfunction of the program execution whenever a write operation is attempted The initialization data area should be copied from the ROM area to the RAM area at the power on reset Secure an area for each of ROM and RAM using the ROM implementation support option of the HEW2 0 or later optimizing linkage editor and the HEWI 2 inter module optimizer For a description of how to copy data from a ROM area to a RAM area refer to section 3 3 Section Address Operators 11 1 28 How to Use C language programs Developed for SH Microcomputers Question What points should I confirm when using a C language program developed for an SH microcomputer on an H8S H8 300 microcomputer Answer Be careful on the following points for the program 1 int type data are treat
103. Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance A Floating Point Operation Performance A l Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance A 1 1 Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2600 H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 1 acos 0 4 30 850 23 316 25 636 8 495 8 852 1 57075 3 830 3 022 3 484 930 999 0 6 30 864 23 226 25 546 8 450 8 806 0 4 30 918 23 302 25 622 8 496 8 853 2 asin 0 4 29 840 22 390 24 576 8 158 8 494 1 57075 2 904 2 194 2 522 642 690 0 6 29 850 22 310 24 496 8 118 8 453 0 4 29 926 22 402 24 588 8 172 8 508 3 atan 0 11 13 166 9 948 11 010 3 581 3 767 0 27 18 122 14 302 15 718 5 269 5 502 0 547 17 964 14 128 15 544 5 179 5 412 0 777 18 890 14 820 16 270 5 436 5 672 0 975 17 924 14 210 15 582 5 277 5 502 54 45 21 834 17 744 19 390 6 659 6 922 154 233 21 952 17 840 19 486 6 707 6 970 54 45 21 920 17 754 19 400 6 672 6 935 0 975 18 010 14 220 15 592 5 290 5 515 0 777 18 976 14 830 16 280 5 449 5 685 4 atan2 0 3 0 7 20 898 16 758 18 494 6 182 6 441 0 2 0 1 24 736 20 204 22 214 7 523 7 820 0 1 0 9 16 156 12 648 14 030 4 619 4 831 5 cos 0 523333333 11 124 8 148 8 780 3 114 3 262 1 046666667 13 090 9 61
104. MOV L L1 32 ERO MOV L L1 32 ER0 void f1 printf ABC SECTION C DATA SECTION CDATA SDATAZ ABC SDATAZ ABC L2 MOV L L1 32 ERO0 t21 g void f2 MOV L L2 32 ER0 printf ABC SECTION C DATA file2 c SECTION C DATA Changes labels SDATAZ ABC DELETE 2 Deletion of Unreferenced Variables Functions Variables functions which are not referenced are deleted with this specification When specifying this optimization confirm to specify an entry function Without an entry function this optimization is not performed The following shows an example lt C source gt lt compiler output codes gt filel c lt After inter module optimization gt extern long a b c void f a 1 file2 c SECTION B DATA SECTION B DATA extern long a b c RES L 1 ay RES L 1 RES L 1 Ds RES L 1 void g b 1 file3 c EINEN Variable c assumed to Deletes variable c be unreferenced Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 72 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 3 Optimization of Access to Variables If an area accessible in the 8 or 16 bit absolute addressing mode has space frequently accessed variables are allocated the optimization of the access codes for the variables are allocated and the access codes of the variable are optimized by this specification C source compiler output codes After inter module
105. Object Code Produced by Ver 4 0 With H8S CPUs legacy v4 supports the output of object code which is compatible with that produced by earlier versions of the compiler Ver 4 0 d Expanded Specifications of cpuexpand v6 Specified with legacy v4 When cpuexpand v6 is specified with legacy v4 output object code is compatible with object code produced by Ver 6 00 and the cpuexpand option e Preferential Allocation of Register Storage Class Variables enable register preferentially allocates the variables with register storage class specification to registers f Division of Optimizing Ranges scope noscope can be specified to select whether or not to divide up ranges for optimization within functions g Inter file Inline Expansion file inline is used to specify inline expansion for functions that extend across files and file inline path is used to specify the path name of a file for inline expansion h Added Intrinsic Function Intrinsic function set vbr is used to set the VBR i pragma address pragma address can be used to allocate variables to specific absolute addresses Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features j Support for stack Directive When code asmcode has been specified the compiler outputs a stack directive within the assembly source program k Added Environment Variable Environment variable CH38SBR can be used to set initial values for the SBR l Added Implicit De
106. Optimization Functions 3 Assignment Code Expansion of Structures and Double Type Data Size Speed O Description When structures or double type data are assigned codes to call a run time routine are usually output except for the case of a small size structure Therefore if processing is performed without calling the run time routine the execution speed is improved Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Struct assignment Command line speed struct Example To assign the structure s2 to s1 C C program struct S unsigned char cc short ss long 11 s1 s2 void main void sl s2 Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified ER2 ER2 _s2 ERO _s2 ERO _s1 ER1 f _s1 ER1 ER2 ER2 ERO ER2 8 R2L P ER2 GER1 SMVNS3 24 ERO ER2 ER2 4 16 ER1 ER2 A Run time routine processing Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 18 14 30 22 22 Specified 40 32 40 36 34 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 43 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 22 22 18 Specified 22 22 18 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 49 44 244 198 220 Specifie
107. Outside of a Loop Size O Speed O Stack size A Important Points The execution speed can be improved by defining invariant expression occurring inside a loop on the outside of the loop Description If an inequality occurring inside a loop is defined outside of the loop the inequality is evaluated only at the beginning of the loop which reduces the number of instructions executed in the loop The result is an improvement in execution speed Example Initialize the array a using the sum of variables b and c C language program before optimization unsigned char a 10 b c int i void func void for i 9 i gt 0 i a i b oc C language program after optimization unsigned char a 10 b c int void func void unsigned char tmp tmp b c for i29 i gt 0 i a i tmp RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 29 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization optimization func Eune ER5 PUSH W R4 _i ER5 3 _i ER1 9 RO _b 32 R4L RO ER5 E Q c 32 RO0L L9 8 ROL R4L RO R1 E 9 RO _b 32 RO0L L10 8 Q c 32 R0H ER1 RO ROH ROL ERO ER1 RAL G a 32 ERO ROL G a 32 ER1 s f1 R0 1 R1 RO ER1 R1 ER5 L8 8 ER5 RO E R4 L7 8 ER5 Object Size Table byte
108. PUSH POP instruction instead of using a function call On the H8S 2000 and H8S 2600 Series the register save restore task is always performed by the STM LDM instruction or the PUSH POP instruction depending on the register involved Therefore in this case a Register specification will have no effect The following shows the execution results when the Register is specified in the H8 300H advanced mode Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles All specified 3422 1598 Register 3262 1721 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions The number of function nodes that should be automatically inline expanded is specified with the Maximum nodes if inline function The number of nodes indicates the units of the compiler internal processing which cannot accurately be checked However generally the larger the size of a function is the greater the number of nodes is The default is a node count of 105 To disable the inline expansion a node count of 0 turn off the specification The following shows the execution results when the number of nodes is set to 0 the default value and the maximum value The range from 1 through 65535 can be selected as the number of nodes Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Maximum nodes of inline function 1 3052 1549 Maximum nodes of inline function 105 3314 1437 Maximum nodes of inline function 65535 331
109. Referencing to a Local Variable eget tr e eare ner Eoi E oi EEE arse 2 56 2 3 12 Step Execution of Program eee reet en ipe nte EEES ae tete euer teet d 2 56 2 3 13 Displaying Memory Contents extet penetee see ie pe ee BERE ente P RR ERR reg 2 57 2 3 14 Operating HDI with HEW 3 isses nennen ener nne enne ne enee trennen ene eiee ee trennen enne 2 58 2 4 Debugging Using the Simulator Debugger sessesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen ener nenne trennen trennen 2 60 2A Set ng Configuration ote et RUPEE amp UICE EE ERR EEEE E orion ee eie Ute ERU 2 60 2 4 2 Allocating Memory Resources ennt tenetene trennen trennen eene enne asins 2 61 2 4 5 Downloading a Sample Program sese neen nee neen eene enne netter tenete 2 62 244 Setting Simulated I O s et et oet deme UID eee AS E geriet crie P NEE 2 63 2 4 5 Setting Trace Information Acquisition Conditions eese nennen 2 64 ZAG Status WIDdOW erreen eetere Het heo do tend doce ee c doeet Ies Eye ues pe eee tee ed eet eu 2 65 24 Repisters WindOW SERO denne enel e ee 2 65 2448 Using Trace tite c e oct e e beste tt eae E Rer bete 2 66 2 19 Displaying Breakpoinnits eee eiit t ie SER Etpe eset ie o Eee te bea 2 67 2 4 10 Displaying Memory Contents eese nennen nennnenene nene nren tren nr enne en ene enne enne 2 68 Section S COMER cie rei eau uadit n Mte atia Sees dll tt os rvvu ed
110. So that violations are not accepted too easily the signature of an individual with appropriate authority within the organization is added to such documentation after consultation with an expert This means that when a rule that is the same as one already accepted is violated it is deemed as an accepted rule violation and can be treated as accepted without performing the above procedures again Of course such violations need to be reviewed regularly 10 1 5 MISRA C Compliance To encourage MISRA C compliance code needs to be developed in compliance with the rules and rule violation problems need to be resolved To show whether code complies with the rules documentation for the compliance matrix and accepted rule violations is needed along with signatures for each rule violation To prevent future problems you should train programmers to make the most of the C language and tools used implement policies regarding coding style choose adequate tools and measure software metrics of various kinds Such efforts should be officially standardized along with the appropriate documentation MISRA C compliance requires more than just development of individual products according to the guidelines but rather of the organization itself 10 2 SQMlint 10 2 1 What Is SQMlint SQMlint is a package that provides the Renesas C compiler with the additional function for checking whether it conforms to the MISRA C rules SQMlint statically checks the C source
111. Statements Depth of compound statement nesting levels No limitation 20 Depth of nesting levels when iterative statements while do and for 4096 levels statements and select statements if and switch statements are H8SX H8S combined 256 levels 300H 300 21 Number of goto labels specifiable in a function 2147483646 labels H8SX H8S 511 labels 300H 300 22 Number of switch statements 2048 statements 23 Depth of nesting levels for switch statements 2048 levels H8SX H8S 128 levels 300H 300 24 Number of case labels 2147483646 labels H8SX H8S 511 labels 300H 300 25 Depth of nesting levels for the for statements 2048 levels H8SX H8S 128 levels 300H 300 26 Expressions Length of a character string 32766 characters 27 Number of parameters specifiable in function definitions or function 2147483646 calls parameters H8SX H8S 63 parameters 300H 300 28 Total number of operators and operands specifiable in an Approx 500 expression 29 Standard includes Number of files that can be opened at once using the open function Variable Notes 1 For PC up to 127 characters can be input due to the command line limitation 2 In the advanced mode if a bit width for the address space is specified the size of the address space corresponding to the specified bit width takes precedence 3 In the case of a non static function member the maximum number is 62 4 The number of files that can be opened at once using the open
112. Using the Optimization Functions Example To call a function named func C C program extern long a void func void void sub void func at 2 void func void att Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified _func 8 _a ERO CERO ER1 2 ER1 ER1 ERO _a ER ERO E 1 ER1 ER1 E Object Size Comparison byte Specified lt Function _a 32 ERO 1 ERO 2 ERO ERO _a 32 _a ERO CERO ER1 1 ER1 ER1 GERO H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 44 36 40 36 38 Specified 58 46 52 46 42 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 30 28 24 Specified 34 34 28 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 41 34 78 68 182 Specified 31 26 58 52 166 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 45 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 23 23 21 Specified 15 15 14 Remarks If the called function is included in the same file of the calling side and the function is not called by any other file no external definition of the function is generated and the function size is reduced when static is specified in the function declaration 5 Speed efficiency Code Expansion of Loop Expressions Size Speed O Description Loops satisf
113. When specified this option the C C Compiler ver 6 1 outputs objects which are optimized by the same way as Ver 4 0 This is useful for the process depending on timing because the objects don t differ from Ver 4 0 When NOT specified this option the objects which are more strongly optimized than Ver 4 0 Specification Method Command line legacy v4 Notes and Remarks This option is valid when CPU type is 2600A 2600N 2000A or 2000N When legacy v4 is specified the following options are NOT available opt range del vacant loop max unroll infinite loop global alloc struct alloc const var propagate volatile loop scope strict ansi file inline file inline path enable register 3 7 2 cpuexpand v6 Description The cpuexpand option generates multiplication and division code for variables by expanding interpretation of the ANSI standard So the objects which are generated by specifying the cpuexpand option may be different between the C C Compiler Ver 4 0 and Ver 6 0 or later when CPU type is 2600A 2600N 2000A or 2000N If this difference makes some undesirable results please use cpuexpandzv6 option The cpuexpand v6 option doesn t make any difference of objects so no undesirable results are made Specification Method Command line cpuexpand v6 Expressions influenced a signed long signed int lt lt constant b signed long unsigned int lt lt constant c unsigned long signed int lt lt constant
114. a 11 Executing the building process Execute the building process to generate a load module A build can be executed by pressing here on the command button 3 sample Hitachi Embedded Workshop C Hew Tools Hitachi H8 3_0a 0O sample cmain c OF X Jo rie File Edw Project Options Build Tools Window Help la xj ine XUCEE ca fe acca r g sample sample Double click on the source file name to ar Projact Files 3 initiate the editor iB intprg c B resetprg c Z sbrk c Compiler dependent options E vecttble undef NOENUM Dependencies fundef NOSTRUCTASSIGN S sbrkh S stackscth define only one of the next two defines B vecth Build Finished D Errors O Warnings For Help press F 1 1 461 INS NUM A Build Results are displayed in the output window Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 12 Verifying the generated files The following files are generated upon completion of the building process A directory with the same name as the project name is created under the project directory The absolute load module is generated under the name format sample abs in the debug directory in the new directory A map file and an optimization information list file generated during the building process are stored in the same directory
115. a getValue Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 14 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion struct A ct A struct A this struct A if this struct A 0 int a this struct A H nw FUl 4 struct A 0 void _nw__FUl unsigned long this gt a 1234 void dl__FPv void void main void return this Constructor code struct A ct A struct A void __dt__A struct A const int void __dt__A struct A const this void main void int flag Constructor call struct A a if this struct A 0 if flag amp 1 ct A amp a _ b a a dl FPv void this dt A amp a 2 Destructor call return Destructor code 8 4 2 Constructor 2 Development and Size Reduction A Speed A maintenance Important Points To declare a class in an array use a constructor to automatically initialize a class object However use it with caution because it will influence the object size and processing speed as follows e Example of Use Create a class A constructor and destructor and compile them The memory needs to be dynamically allocated and deallocated because the constructor and destructor are called in the class declaration but are declared in the array Use new and delete to dynamically allocate and deallocate the memory This requires implementation of a low level function For
116. add A amp a return ret void set_A int int struct A const this int x int y int z this gt a this gt b this gt c return int add_A struct A const this return this a this gt b this gt c Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 20 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 6 operator Operator Development and O Size Reduction A Speed maintenance mportant Points In C use the keyword operator to overload an operator This will enable simple coding of the user s operations such as matrix operations and vector calculations However use operator with caution because it will influence the size and processing speed Example of Use In the following example unary operator is overloaded using the operator key word If the Vector class is declared as shown below unary operator can be changed to the user s operation However the size and processing speed will be influenced because as shown in the C program after conversion reference using the this pointer is made C program class Vector private int x int y int z public Vector amp operator Vector amp u void main void Vector a b c bi CF Vector amp Vector operator Vector amp vec static Vector ret User s operation addition return ret Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8
117. address symbol occurs an address error because of the CPU specification except H8SX If 1 byte variable is deleted 0x00 0x02 0x06 0x01 0x00 0x02 0x06 Unused Area If optimization is performed 4 byte variable g max is accessed by address 0x01 e Remarks This option is valid only for object files generated by C C Compiler Object files generated by Assembler are not optimized Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 4 4 Uses Short Absolute Addressing Mode Size O Speed O Description If an area accessible in the 8 or 16 bit absolute addressing mode has space frequently accessed variables are allocated and the access codes of the variable are optimized by this specification The optimizing linkage editor automatically allocates these variables to the section which is automatically generated Compiler has similar function but the optimizing linkage editor can automatically allocate the section As the short absolute addressing area differs depending on CPU types the address of ROM or RAM should be specified by cpu option Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Use short addressing Command line optimize variable access e Specification Method for cpu option Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Verify Command line cpuz memory type address range
118. and display Breakpoints Close the Breakpoints window Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 67 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 10 Displaying Memory Contents The contents of memory block can be displayed on a Memory window For example the procedure for displaying the memory for the main column in byte size is shown as below e Select CPU gt Memory from the View menu to enter memory area start address in the Begin field and end address in the End field End 1000 Format Byte e x Display Value As ANSI character Bytes Count For One Line 16 Byte Click on the OK button to open the Memory window which shows the specified memory area Memor v Address Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 68 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Section3 Compiler This section describes effective functions used at the development of C C programs The functions described below allow you to perform interrupt processing and other types of processing that cannot be supported in most C C programs 3 1 Specifying an Interrupt Function Description pragma interrupt function name declares an interrupt function The declared interrupt function for which all the registers used in the function are guaranteed saved and restored returns on the RTE instruction This enables the interrupt function to return from an exception processing
119. and optimizing linkage editor Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features B 2 2 Added and Improved Compiler Functions 1 Use of Keyword Attributes can be specified in declarations and definitions of functions and variables by using keywords _ interrupt indirect _ _entry _ _abs8 abs16 _ regsave noregsave inline or _ _register S ex es 3 2 Creation of Vector Table Vector tables of functions can be created automatically when vect is specified by pragma interrupt indirect entry _ interrupt indirect or entry a a 3 Supports __evenaccess Memory access in even on even numbered byte boundaries is guaranteed for variables that are specified by _ evenaccess 4 Expanded Register Parameter Specification regparam2 and regparam3 can be used to specify the number of register parameters in a function 5 Specifies Options in Function Units Options can be specified in function units by using pragma options 6 Allocates Data Close to Each Other Optimizes address calculation code of arrays or structures by using near8 or nearl16 However the pointer size is not changed 7 Allocates Stacks Close to Each Other Optimizes stack address calculation code of stack area by using stack 8 Added Intrinsic Functions The following intrinsic functions were added e Unsigned overflow operation 9 Supports double float In the new version double float can be specified so that d
120. as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Default 3048 1580 SPEED option 3420 1325 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Speed or size Speed oriented optimization Command line speed As a result the speed is improved by 255 execution cycles though the object size is increased by 372 bytes in the program Dhrystone Ver 2 1 1 Selecting sub options When the SPEED option is specified optimization for speed is performed that may result in a size increase To avoid this problem it may be necessary to provide detailed specifications using the tuning procedure The recommended way is to use the effective functions of the various sub options The sub options to be specified can be determined by combining their effects so that the size of the program will fit the target ROM size Refer to the following data from the program Dhrystone Ver 2 1 Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles All specified 3420 1325 Register 3048 1580 Shift to multiple 3048 1580 Struct assignment 3074 1527 Switch judgement 3048 1580 Maximum nodes of inline function 105 3314 1437 Loop optimization 3048 1580 Expression 3080 1526 Note On the H8 300 and H8 300H when the Register is not specified the compiler performs the register save restore task with a function call using the runtime routine library When the Register is specified the compiler generates the
121. be modified in Configuration name Options to do with the target for debugging are displayed under Detail options To change the settings select Item and then click Modify When items for which modification is not possible are selected Modify remains grayed even if Item is selected ng the Debugger Options Target name H8S 26004 Simulator Configuration name SimDebue_H8S 26004 Detail options Simulator I O Simulator I O addr 0x0 Bus mode Modify lt Back Ne Finish Cancel RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 23 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 10 New project 9 9 Displays the files created by the project generator Then press lFinish New Projec E ging the File Na to be Created The following source files will be Setting of B R Section Program of sbrk Definition of I O Register Interrupt Program Reset Program Main Program Header file of sbrk file Setting of Stack area iodefine intpre resetpre sample sbrk stacksct rFoaoo0o0o yoo Next gt Finish Cancel For details on the files created in this section refer to section 2 2 Introduction of Sample Program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 11 New project Summary Clicking Finish gt on the Step 9 screen causes the project generator to di
122. bin Debug bin obj 00000800 00000821 22 main 00000800 6 func g ch abort 00000806 4 func g ch com opti 0000080a 18 func g er ch Delete Symbols Variable Accessible with Abs8 xxx Variable Accessible with Abs16 Function Call Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 2 2 Symbol Reference Count Description The optimizing linkage editor can output static symbol reference count in addition to linkage map information by specifying additional sub options 1 symbol reference count COUNTS e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Contents Show reference Command line list 2 file name gt Show reference map file Options Error information Mapping List Symbol List SECTION FILE START END SIZE SYMBOL ADDR SIZE INFO 1 COUNTS OPT SECTION P FILE C Hew exe Hew3_SHV9 bin bin Debug bin obj 00000800 00000821 22 _main 00000800 6 func g 1 ch abort 00000806 4 func g 0 ch com optl 0000080a 18 func g 2 cr ch Delete Symbols Variable Accessible with Abs8 Variable Accessible with Abs16 Function Call Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 2 3 Cross Reference Information Description The optimizing linkage editor can output
123. by optimize variable Variables allocated in a 16 bit absolute address space can be allocated in an 8 bit address space by applying optimization 8 Improved Optimization by optimize register When option optimize speed is not specified the file is compressed after optimizing the saving and restoring of register contents between functions and replacing saving and restoring of multiple register contents with function calls 9 Improved Optimization of Assembly Programs Sections including org align or data directives can be optimized 10 Debugging Information Deletion The strip option can be used to delete debugging information from either the load module file or the library file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features B 3 Added and Improved Features in Upgrade from Ver 4 0 to Ver 6 0 Note Ver 5 0 does not exist and is a missing number B 3 1 Added and Improved Compiler Functions a Support for New CPU Creation of an object file with a CPU type of H8SX is supported b Support for 2 byte Pointer only in H8SX The ptr16 keyword or option ptr16 can be used to specify use of a 2 byte pointer They are valid in H8SX advanced mode or H8SX maximum mode c Specifying Bit Field Order pragma bit order or the bit order option can be used to specify the order to store bit field members in a field d Function Call in Extended Memory Indirect Addressing Mode only in H8SX The i
124. char data define PIDR unsigned char 0x0OFFFF60 movtpe data char amp P1DR Executes the MOVTPE instruction Compiled assembly language expansion code MOV B MOVTPE B RTS END 32 6 Description Q data 32 RO0L ROL 16777056 16 Arithmetic Operation Instructions The following functions are available to enhance arithmetic operation instructions No Item Format Description 1 Decimal void dadd unsiged char size Performs decimal addition between size byte data addition char ptr1 char ptr2 char rst starting from ptr1 and size byte data starting from prt2 and stores the result to the size byte area starting from rst 2 Decimal void dsub unsiged char size Performs decimal subtraction between size byte data subtraction char ptr1 char ptr2 char rst starting from ptr1 and size byte data starting from prt2 and stores the result to the size byte area starting from rst 3 TAS void tas char addr Expands into the test and set instruction TAS instruction 4 MAC long mac long val int ptr1 int Expands into the multiply accumulate instruction MAC instruction ptr2 unsigned long count long macl long val int ptr1 int ptr2 unsigned long count unsigned long mask 5 64 bit long mulsu long val1 long val2 Expands into MULS U MULU U multiplication Note 1 unsigned long muluu unsigned long val1 unsigned long val2 valid only with H8SX Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 14 REJ05B0464 0
125. characters minus symbols or space characters With the compiler the Assembler the inter module optimizer the Librarian or the S Type Converter Japanese characters minus symbols or space characters cannot be specified for a file name For example if a project name contains Japanese characters a syntax error occurs when the output destination is specified with an inter module optimizer option Remarks In HEW2 0 or later programs can successfully be built without the error message displayed even if a file name or a project name contains Japanese characters minus symbols or space characters However Japanese characters minus symbols or space characters should not be used if possible 11 1 24 C Language Specifications Question Are there any function supporting the development of programs in the C language Answer The H8S H8 300 C C compiler supports the following functions to support program development in C 1 Support of EC class libraries As EC class libraries are supported the intrinsic C class libraries can be used from a C program without any specification The following four type libraries are supported e Stream I O class library e Memory manipulation library e Complex number calculation class library e Character string manipulation class library For details refer to section 10 3 2 C Class Libraries in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual
126. code src from Output file type on the Object tab Files are built normally with this specification Note that this specification disables C source debugging HEW2 0 or later 300 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Toolchain Option Debue xl Category Object GY All Loaded Projects Quitput file type G test n 5g o e Machine code obj Mac hine n ode i ob Te late dbsct c Assembly source code src EE intpre c Preprocessed source file amp p p o zl resetpre c Program section Store string data in sm P Const section z O Default Options Mul Div operation specification J G source file Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit CJ Assembly source file Output directory LJ Linkage symbol file BKCONFIGDIRE Modify Options C C cpuz2000N objectz CONFIGDIFOX FILELEAF obj debug nolist cheincpath lang c nologo owes Select Assembly source code src from C C Tab Category Object Output file type Files are built normally with this specification Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 23 Output of Syntax Errors at Linkage Question The error message 202 SYNTAX ERROR is displayed with the inter module optimizer for HEW1 2 Why is it Answer Does the file name or the project name contain Japanese
127. code and reports the areas that violate the rules SQMlint runs as part of the C compiler in the Renesas product development environment SQMlint can be started simply by adding an option at compile time as shown in figure 10 5 It in no way affects the code generated by the compiler Table 10 2 lists the rules supported by SQMlint Renesas C Compiler Preprocess Preprocessed C source Assembly source Rule violation message Figure 10 5 SQMlint Positioning Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 10 MISRA C Table 10 2 Rules Supported by SQMlint Rule Test Rule Test Rule Test Rule Test Rule Test Rule Test 1 26 x 51 0 76 o 101 o 126 o 2 x 27 x 52 x 7 o 102 oO ES o 3 x EM o 53 o 78 o 103 o 4 x 29 0 54 79 o 104 o 5 o 30 x 55 O 80 o 105 o 6 x EM o 56 oO 81 x 106 o EE x EM o 57 O 82 o 107 x 8 o EM o 58 oO 83 o 108 o 9 x 34 o 59 oO 84 o 109 x 10 x 35 o 60 o 85 o EN o EM x 36 oO 61 o 86 x EM o EM o EM o 62 o 87 x ES o EM o EM o EM o 88 x 113 o EM o 39 o 64 o 89 x 114 x 15 x 40 oO 65 o 90 x 115 o 16 x 4 x 66 x 91 x 116 x m7 o gt T o 67 x 92 x 117 x 18 o 43 o 68 o EM x 118 o 19 oO 44 o 69 o 94 x 119 o 20 O 45 o 70 o 95 x 120 Xx 213 o 46 o EM o 96 x EN o 222 o 47 Xx 72 o 97 Xx 122 o EM x 48 oO EM o 98 x 123 o 24 O 49 o 74 o 99 o 124 o 25 x 50 oO 75 o 100 x 125 Oo O Testable X Not te
128. cross reference information in addition to linkage map information by specifying additional sub options Cross reference information makes it possible to search where a global symbol is referenced Local symbols and static symbols are not output Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Contents Show cross reference Command line list 2 file name gt Show xreference lt map file gt Cross Reference List No Unit Name Global Symbol Location External Information 1 2 3 4 5 0001 testl SECTION P main 00000100 SECTION B S11 00007000 0001 0000011a P S12 00007004 0001 0000010e P Fret 00007008 0001 00000128 P SECT ION D 0002 test2 SECT ION P _funcl 0000015c 0001 00000124 P _func2 00000164 0001 0000013c P _func3 00000170 0001 00000150 P Description of Each Item 1 Unit number which is an identification number in object units displayed in External Information 5 2 Object name which specifies the input order at linkage 3 Symbol name output in ascending order for every section 4 Symbol allocation address which is a relative value from the beginning of the section when relocatable format is specified for output file format form relocate 5 Address from which an external symbol is referenced Output format Unit number address or offset in section section name Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 9 REJ05
129. data is accessed by two accesses of word instruction When a 4 byte data is aligned on a 4 byte boundary with align 4 and bus width is 32 bits H8SX can access a 4 bytes data by one access In 16 bits bus width data is accessed by two accesses of word instruction Thus the execution speed is not improved 5 4 17 Explanation of Inter Module Optimization Items The inter module optimizer supports the following optimization functions Description Dialog Menu Subcommand Referenced Section Unifies constants strings Unify strings String Unify 5 4 17 1 Deletes unreferenced variables functions Eliminate dead code Symbol delete 5 4 17 2 Optimizes access to variables Use short addressing Variable access 5 4 17 3 Optimizes access to functions Use indirect call jump Funcation call 5 4 17 4 Optimizes register save restore codes Reallocate registers Register 5 4 17 5 Unifies instruction codes Eliminate same code Same_code 5 4 17 6 Optimizes branch instructions Optimize branches Branch 5 4 17 7 The following describes each optimization function RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 71 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 1 Unification of Constants Strings The same value constants and the same strings having the const attribute are unified across the modules The following shows an example C source compiler output codes After inter module optimization filel c fi fl
130. details on the implementation method refer to 9 2 2 Execution Environment Settings in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual The size and processing speed will be influenced because decisions and the low level function processing are added in the constructor and destructor codes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program class A private int a public A void A void int getValue void return a void main void A a 5 b a 0 getValue C program after conversion struct A int a void nw FUl unsigned long void dl FPv void void main void void vec new void vec delete struct A ct A struct A void dt A struct A const int void main void Constructor call struct A a 5 vec new struct A a 5 ct A 34 4 a a vec delete amp a 5 4 Destructor call Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 16 REJ05B0464 0300 struct A ct A struct A this if this struct A 0 this struct A nw FU1 4 struct A 0 this a 1234 return this Constructor code void dt A struct A const this int flag if this struct A 0 if flag amp 1 dl FPv void this Destructor code RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 3 Default Param
131. displayed at inline expansion 11 1 8 Output of function not optimized 11 1 9 How to specify include files 11 1 10 Program coding using Japanese fonts 11 1 11 Output of illegal value in operand from the cross assembler 11 1 12 Deletion of large amount of codes by optimization 11 1 13 How to view values of local variables during debugging 11 1 14 Regarding optimization options 11 1 15 Failure to pass function parameters 11 1 16 Failure at bit operation in a write only register 11 1 17 Notes on linking with assembly language programs 11 1 18 How to check coding which may cause incorrect operation 11 1 19 Comment coding 11 1 20 How to specify options for each file 11 1 21 How to build programs when the assembler is embedded 11 1 22 Output of syntax errors at linkage 11 1 23 C language specifications 11 1 24 How to view source programs after pre processor expansion 11 1 25 How to output save restore codes of MACH or MACL registers 11 1 26 The program runs correctly on the ICE but fails when installed 11 1 27 on a real chip How to use C language programs developed for SH 11 1 28 microcomputers How to modify global options 11 1 29 Optimizations that cause infinite loops 11 1 30 Read write instructions for bit fields 11 1 31 Common invalid instruction exceptions that occur when 11 1 32 programs are run for an extended period of time Failure at integer multiplication 11 1 33 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 1 RENESAS REJ05B0464 0300 Sect
132. eee SUAVI eu NI OU e eI Ode 10 1 LOU What IsiMISRASC sienne rote pter ei edt e depre t ee te eie rere epe 10 1 10 1 2 Rule Exainples epi hte D Ra AO SA AG E memes eS 10 1 10 1 3 Compliance Matrix see hee tite ute oce ide e ESEESE EoiN 10 2 10 1 4 Rule Violations eee pter te e EMI eR ee E E e p ER RR IRE 10 3 10 1 5 MISRA CComphli nce RUD RUE ED quies 10 3 10 2 SQMInt ien Se DURER eU GU V Ire PIU DIEI ONCE n nePd aem 10 3 10 2 1 What Is SOMHBnt ica ete ete AI e ee eit i e tt ete deci aete 10 3 10 2 2 Using SQMnt eet npe PRESS EE e e ERE EE HO UI ie E Ree 10 5 10 2 3 Viewing Test Results 5 edente deett tere ette e detecte tee ee Receta 10 5 10 244 Development Procedures ene Dre Dee ne D EROS ORE RR RON 10 6 10 2 5 Supported Complilers to ettet nt erret it rte EES eoe ihe E ea EEEE CEEE SEE KONENE 10 6 Secti n IT OR A tec a oT ner eee OT EE ERE Dd Soleus ts Shad e ER e 11 1 LUA A C Com pile res esse idee ier tite eo ie edited dee E RP Rot d Erie e eb E He e ets 11 2 11 1 1 How to Change Character String Assignment Destinations sesesseeeeeeeneeeeeeee 11 2 11 1 2 Failure to Identify 1 bit Data sssessessesseseeseeeneneeneenne ener eeo trennen nest nne enne enne EKOSE e 11 3 11 1 3 Startup from DOS Screen conte tete rete e he ep eee E rn 11 4 11 1 4 Runtime Routine Specifications and Execution Speed sse 11 5 11 1 5 HS Family Objec
133. environment is shown below H8S H8 300 C C compiler Package Host Machine os Disk Space IBM PC AT Series Windows98 Me 2000 XP NT 4 0 Approx 120 MB HP9000 HP UX 10 2 Approx 30 MB Sun SPARC Japanese Solaris2 5 or higher Approx 30 MB Online manuals are also supplied The operating environment for the online manuals are as follows e A personal computer installing a Pentium processor e Microsoft Windows 98 Windows ME or Microsoft WindowsNT 4 0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP e A CD ROM drive with double speed or faster e Available disk space approximately 15MB Online manuals can be referenced under Windows 98 Windows ME Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pentium is a registered trademark of U S Intel Corporation Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and other countries 11 1 7 Failure in C Source Level Debugging Question The output of debugging information is specified at compilation debugging at the C source level cannot be performed Why is this Answer Check the following items 1 Is the debugging information specified to be output at compiling for each inter module optimization step The object output formats and ways to output debugging information differ depending on debuggers The following table lists examples of available debuggers and the relationship between output objects and debugging information Rev 3 00 2005 09
134. executed as follows class X int x Value of member variable x public X int n x n constructor When using CALL INIT gt 10 found destructor void Sample2 void When not using CALL INIT gt 0 X XSample 10 global class object void X Sample2 void while x 10 lt Reference position void main void X P amp XSample P Sample2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques How tocall CALL INIT CALL END Provide the following code before and after calling the main function void INIT void _INITSCT _CALL_INIT main _CALL_END If HEW is used remove the comment characters in the section for calling CALL INIT CALL END of resetprg c PowerON Reset function of resetprg c entry vect 0 void PowerON Reset void set imask ccr 1 INITSCI t CALL INIT Remove the comment when you use global class object _INIT_IOLIB Remove the comment when you use SIM I O errno 0 Remove the comment when you use errno srand 1 Remove the comment when you use rand _slptr NULL Remove the comment when you use strtok HardwareSetup Use Hardware Setup set imask ccr 0 main _CLOSEALL Remove the comment when you use SIM I O _CALL_END Remove the comment when you use global class object sleep Rev
135. file for inter module optimization Options C C cpu 2600 4 24 object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF 0bj debug nolist speed register switch shift struct expression loop 2 inline EN Optimization Check Box Command Option Function N optimize 1 Specifies optimization optimize 0 Specifies no optimization Speed or size Specifies the optimization format Dialog Menu Size oriented optimization Command Option Function Performs optimization in size Speed oriented optimization speed Performs optimization in speed Speed sub options Register speed register Performs register store restore expansion by the PUSH and POP instruction at a higher speed Switch judgement speed switch Develops the switch statement at a higher speed Shift to multiple speed shift Develops the shift operation at a higher speed Struct assignment speed struct Performs the expansion of structures and substitution expression at a higher speed Expression speed expression Performs arithmetic operation comparison and substitution expression processing at a higher speed Loop optimization speed loop1 Deletion of induction variables Loop Unrolling speed loop2 Deletion of induction variables and loop expansion Inline function Maximum node s speed inline lt data gt Performs or does not perform Automatic inline expansion Rev 3 00 2005 09
136. follows In this case because the boundary alignment value of the entity of binary section is 1 in binary section input the L1322 warning message is displayed due to different boundary alignments with the same name This warning message does not affect the program execution To prevent this warning message specify the boundary alignment value in binary file input by the Optimizing Linkage Editor Code __sectop used main function main SSTACK main 4 MOV L 8STARTOF BIN SECTION ERO BRA dumy 8 SECTION BIN SECTION DATA ALIGN 2 lt Section size is 0 boundary alignment value is 2 END Specification example Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Show entries for Binary files Command line binary project bin BIN_SECTION 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Add binary file Relative to Custom directory m Cancel Full file path CX WorkSpaceXF AQ1 D 2 11 bin_project Debue bin proje Browse Section BIN SECTION Boundary alignment 2byte Symbol ea Remarks This specification of the boundary alignment value in binary file input is valid for the Optimizing Linkage Editor Ver 9 0 or later For more details please refer to section 9 1 1 4 Binary Files 11 3 Library Generator 113 1 Reentrant and Standard Libraries Question Is it possible to create a reentrant object program when a standard library is used An
137. format converter SYSROF load module ERF DWARF1 load module Notes Input output p gt Initiation User C C Source file Include file H8S H8 300 series C C compiler Prelinker Relocatable object file Optimizing linkage editor Load module Profile information Assembly source programs are output depending on option specification Debugging information can also be added depending on option specification Software included in the package Additional Information file H8S H8 300 series standard library generator Standard library Stack information Called information RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 9 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 1 Overview Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 1 Creating a project Procedures for the creation of a load module vary with the particular working environment in which it is created and HEW Version Select your environment from the following list to appropriately create a load module Create a new project using HEW1 HEW1 2 Create a new project using HEW2 HEW2 0 The description in section 2 3 Debugging Using the HDI assumes that a new project created under HEW is used 2 1 1 Creating a New Workspace 1 HEW1 2 To create a new project workspace select Create a new project workspace from the W
138. gt f struct A pa tmp gt b Call to B foo tmp _pb gt __b_A __vptr 1 void struct B const _tmp gt f struct B pb tmp gt b Call to B foo return Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor This chapter describes the use of effective options at linkage and the Inter Module Optimization at linkage The following table shows a list of the items relating to the use of Optimizing Linkage Editor No Category Item Section 1 Input Output Options Input Options 9 1 1 Output Options 9 1 2 2 List Options Symbol information 9 2 1 3 Number of references 9 2 2 4 Cross Reference Information 9 2 3 5 Effective Options Output to unused area 9 3 1 6 End code of S type file 9 3 2 7 Debug information compression 9 3 3 8 Link time reduction 9 3 4 a Notification of Unreferenced Symbol 9 3 5 10 Reduce empty areas of boundary alignment 9 3 6 11 Optimize Options Optimization at linkage 9 4 1 12 Sub options of Optimize Option 13 Unifies constants strings 9 4 2 14 Eliminates unreferenced variables functions 9 4 3 15 Uses short absolute addressing mode 9 4 4 16 Optimizes register save restore codes 9 4 5 17 Unifies common codes 9 4 6 18 Uses indirect addressing mode 9 4 7 19 Optimizes branch instructions 9
139. instruction Example Call the function sub and update the value of an external variable C language program before optimization void g void int a void main void if a 0 else g0 at 2 Expanded into assembly language code before optimization main PUSH L ER6 MOV L _a ER6 MOV W GER6 RO BNE L6 8 INC W f1 R0 BRA L8 8 JSR Q g 24 MOV W GER6 RO INC W 2 R0 MOV W RO ER6 POP L ER6 RTS C language program after optimization void g void int a void main void if a 0 else at 2 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization main MOV _a64 ER1 MOV 1 RO0 INC 2 R0 MOV RO GERI JMP _g 24 RTS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 38 32 38 32 32 After 30 32 30 28 28 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 36 34 30 After 30 28 34 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 37 29 74 58 58 After 20 27 40 36 36 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 22 25 20 After 15 15 23 Remarks and Notes The above program assumes that the variable a is not referenced within the function g 6 6 5 Improving the Way Parameters Are Passed Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points
140. is not changed Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Unify strings Command line optimize string unify Examples of the sane value constants The const long variables cl1 c12 which have the same constant value are unified to one constant This reduces ROM size by 4 bytes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor filel c include machine h file2 c Deleted include lt machine h gt const long cl2 100 O void main void const long c11 100 void main void void func01 long void func02 long long g max void func03 long void main void extern long g max func0Ol cl1 1 func02 cl11 2 func03 cl11 3 void func02 long c_litr func03 cl2 c_litr nop funcOl long c_litr void func03 long c_litr g max c_litr g_max c_litr e Remarks This option is valid only for object files generated by C C Compiler Object files generated by Assembler are not optimized 9 4 3 Eliminates Unreferenced Variables Functions Size O Speed Description Variables functions which are never referred are deleted When specifying this optimization an entry function should be specified Without an entry function specification this optimization is not performed This is because CPU jumps from vector table to entry function and the op
141. loop Example 2 int a b f a 1 lt 1 if a lt 2 b 1 lt 3 In this example if statement 2 has been eliminated and 3 is always executed at all times as a result of optimization e Due to alias analysis of external variables a in 1 and a in 2 are handled as the same value e Constant value 1 is propagated to expression 2 Accordingly expression 2 is converted as follows gt if 1 Therefore the expression in question is judged as true the conditional statement is eliminated and the above expression 3 is always executed at all times Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Example 3 int a b c fO a 1 lt 1 if c lt 2 b 1 lt 3 a 2 lt 4 In this example expression 1 has been eliminated as a result of optimization e Obtains the control flow including the conditional of the if statement expression e Due to analyzing the control flow analysis and alias analysis of external variables it is proved that the value set in a in 1 is not used Therefore the above expression 1 is a redundant expression that is not referenced and thus it is eliminated Example 4 int a int b 10 fO f int i 1 for i 0 i lt 10 i 2 b 1 2a lt 3 In this example a in expression 3 is referenced once before the loop and is always handled as a constant value in th
142. loop iteration condition are not to be optimized No block opt_range noblock External variables extending across branches including loops are Allocate registers to global variables not to be optimized Dialog Menu Command Option Function Disable global_alloc 0 Disables allocation of external variables to registers Enable global_alloc 1 Allocates external variables to registers Default global_alloc 1 Allocates external variables to registers Propagate variables which are const qualified Dialog Menu Disable Command Option const_var_propagate 0 Function Disables constant propagation of external constants declared by const Enable const_var_propagate 1 Performs constant propagation of external constants declared by const Default const_var_propagate 1 Performs constant propagation of external constants declared by const Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW c Details Button Miscellaneous Tab Optimize details hline Global variables Miscellaneous Specify maximum unroll factor Default 1 v Allocate registers to struct union members Inline memepy strepy Cancel Delete vacant loop Check Box Command Option Function del vacant loop 1 Eliminates the loop without statements inside del vacant loop 0 Disables elimination of vacant loops even when there is no statements inside the loop Spec
143. message The C C Compiler Ver 4 0 and later versions support only the file format ELF DWARF for the object to be output The file format is changed to ELF DWARF format at upgrading If the current debugging environment does not support the ELF DWAREF format convert the ELF DWAREF format to the format supported by the debugging environment after upgrading Change Toolchain Version Summary Summary Project name Sample0823 Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain was upgraded 5 0 2 0 gt 6 0 2 0 Standard Library Mode Mode option is changed v Generate Uperade txt as a sun mary file in the project directory Confirmatjon Message Dialog Log 4 Standard Library Generator Options After upgrading Standard Library Tab Category Mode in the Standard Library Generator is changed to Build a library file anytime so should be careful 7 1 8 Converting a HIM Project to a HEW Project By using the HimToHew tool supplied with the HEW system you can convert HIM projects into HEW projects In the Programs P on the Windows Start Menu select Him To Hew Project Converter from Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop You will find Single and Multiple tabs Select the Single tab when generating an HEW workspace and an HEW project from one HIM project Select the Multiple tab when converting multiple HIM projects into HEW projects and registering them in an HEW workspace in batch Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 16
144. no exit e Since a is not referenced in the infinite loop specification 1 is assumed as unnecessary coding and is eliminated b volatile loop Option If the loop control variable is a non volatile external variable and also the conditional expression is simple the volatile loop option regards the loop control variable as volatile qualified to prevent an infinite loop from being created However if the loop control variable is not loop invariant it cannot be treated as volatile qualified In Ver 6 0 declare the relevant variable with volatile Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features An example program is given below Example Struct f unsigned char a l ST int a extern void f void func while ST a lt 1 if a 2 0 3 In this example because ST a may be updated in f ST a is not assumed as loop invariant value in the loop Therefore ST cannot be treated as volatile even though specified so with the volatile loop option e If the condition in 2 is satisfied 3 is executed and the ST a value may be updated Accordingly after the function call ST a is to be reloaded e If the condition in 2 is not satisfied the ST a value is not updated so the ST a value used in the previous conditional at 1 can be directly used B 3 3 Compatibility between Ver 4 0 and Ver 6 0 To link an object program created by Ver 4 0 with an
145. of CPU to be used CPU Type is classified for each CPU series CPU Series Select the CPU type for the program to be developed because the files to be generated differ depending on the selection of CPU Series and CPU Type If the desired CPU type is not available select the CPU type with similar hardware specification or other Click NEXT to display the following screen Click kBack to display the previous screen or the previous dialog box after this screen Click Finish to open the Summary dialog box Click Cancel to retrieve New Workspace dialog box The functions of Back NEXT Finish and Cancel are common on this wizard dialogue box New Project t Target GPU Toolchain version Toolchain version Specify the CPU series to be used project GPU Series The corresponding CPU names are displayed Select the name of the CPU to be used If the desired CPU name is not available select Other If there is no CPU type to be selected select the CPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other lt Back Ne Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 3 New project 2 9 Specify the desired global options and press NEXT gt On this screen set the options common to all the project files Items for s
146. of Use of the Feature for Output of Symbol Addresses Example of specification of externally defined symbol file output optInkKAROM1 ROM2 ROM3A output FUNCAA fsymbol sct2 sct3 The externally defined symbols sct2 and sct3 are output to a file Example of file output FUNCA sym 7H SERIES LINKAGE EDITOR GENERATED FILE 1997 10 10 fsymbol sct2 sct3 SECTION NAME sctl export syml syml equ h 00FF0080 export sym2 sym2 equ h OOFFO100 SECTION NAME sct2 export sym3 sym3 equ h OOFF0180 end Example of specification of assembly and relinking asm38AROM4 asm38AFUNCA sym optnkAROM4 FUNCA The externally referenced symbols in ROM4 can be resolved without linking the object files ROM2 ROM3 Note When using this procedure the symbols within feature A cannot be referenced from common functions Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 25 Howto Implement Overlay Question How can I assign sections that do not exist simultaneously to the same address Answer Such an assignment can be specified using an option of the HEW2 0 or later optimizing linkage editor and the HEWI 2 inter module optimizer Specification method lt HEW1 2 gt Send the cursor to Section tab Relocatable section start address target section to specify the New Overlay option The following shows the specification screen 8 300 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section
147. of functions and variables and pragma declarations in C programs have been modified Example void void pragma interrupt f void f void An error will occur when a pragma declaration follows a function declaration e Exception processing and template functions are also supported according to the C language specification Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features B 2 3 Added and Improved Functions for the Assembler 1 External Definition and Reference of BEQU The BEQU symbol can be externally defined and referenced by using BIMPORT and BEXPORT B 2 4 Added and Improved Functions for the Optimizing Linkage Editor 1 Support for Wild Cards A wild card can be specified with a section name of an input file or for file names in start options 2 Search Path An environment variable HLNK DIR can be used to specify the several search paths for input files or library files 3 Subdividing the Output of Load Modules The output of an absolute load module file can be subdivided 4 Changing the Error Level For informational warning and error level messages the error level or the output can be individually changed 5 Support for Binary and HEX Binary files can be input and output Intel amp HEX type output can be selected 6 Output the Stack Amount Information The stack option can output an information file for the stack analysis tool 7 Improved Optimization
148. of structures one byte each When CPU is H8SX word access for word or long word member at an odd address does not occur an address error because of the device specification So these members can be accessed by word or long word instructions As a result it does not increase the necessary access code When CPU is other than H8SX members of structures must not be accessed via a pointer as the following example C C program struct S char x int y s int p amp s y void test address of s y can be odd lt accessed correctly lt can be accessed incorrectly Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 5 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 4 0 This section explains expansion functions that are newly added to the Compiler ver 4 0 3 5 1 Vector Table Automatic Generation Functions Description By specifying the vector number of pragma interrupt pragma inderect and pragma entry the vector table of functions is automatically generated Format pragma interrupt function name gt vect lt vector number gt pragma inderect lt function name gt vect lt vector number gt pragma entry function name gt vect lt vector number gt Example To specify a vector number to create a vector table C C program CPU 2600a lt Allocating the entry function f1 to the vector number 0 pragma entry f1 vect 0
149. of the compiler specification and can be prevented by using the volatile type specifier Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Example C source int i1 void int d int aj do a d while a 0 il a Assembler source with optimization f function f STACK _f 4 MOV W ERO R1 L25 MOV W R1 R1 not read from memory BNE L25 8 MOV W R1 8 i1 32 RTS Modified C source int i1 void f volatile int d int a do a d while a 0 il a Modified assembler source with optimization f function f STACK _f 4 MOV L ERO ER1 L25 MOV W ER1 RO read from memory BNE L25 8 MOV W RO 8 i1 32 RTS RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 33 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 31 Read write Instructions for Bit Fields Question struct bit unsigned short int b0 1 unsigned short int bl 1 unsigned short int b2 1 unsigned short int b3 1 unsigned short int b4 1 unsigned short int b5 1 unsigned short int b6 1 unsigned short int b7 1 unsigned short int b8 1 unsigned short int unsigned short int unsigned short int unsigned short int unsigned short int b b b unsigned short int bl b b b Qr 3a C00 Nw LB cC unsigned short int 5 In the above code I d like to define a bit field and access the bits of a specific register for a 16 bit width but I end up perfor
150. of the standard library or from the compiler options cannot be linked In HEW2 0 or later the Standard Library Generator Tool should be used to create an EC class library Select Category Standard Library EC from Standard Library tab for settings CPU Operating Change Number of Series Mode Merit of Library Parameter EC Class Library H8S 2600 Normal Code Size 2 ec226n lib Speed 2 ec226ns lib Code Size 3 ec226n3 lib Speed 3 ec226ns3 lib Advanced Code Size 2 ec226a lib Speed 2 ec226as lib Code Size 3 ec226a3 lib Speed 3 ec226as3 lib H8S 2000 Normal Code Size 2 ec226n lib Speed 2 ec226ns lib Code Size 3 ec226n3 lib Speed 3 ec226ns3 lib Advanced Code Size 2 ec226a lib Speed 2 ec226as lib Code Size 3 ec226a3 lib Speed 3 ec226as3 lib H8 300H Normal Code Size 2 ec2hn lib Speed 2 ec2hns lib Code Size 3 ec2hn3 lib Speed 3 ec2hns3 lib Advanced Code Size 2 ec2ha lib Speed 2 ec2has lib Code Size 3 ec2ha3 lib Speed 3 ec2has3 lib H8 300 Code Size 2 ec2reg lib Speed 2 ec2regs lib Code Size 3 ec2reg3 lib Speed 3 ec2regs3 lib Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler CPU Operating Change Number of Series Mode Merit of Library Parameter EC Class Library H8 300L Code Size 2 ec2reg lib Speed 2 ec2regs lib Code Size 3 ec2reg3 lib Speed 3 ec2regs3 lib 3 4 2 Changing the Initialization Method
151. optimization Moves variable val to 8 bit address space char val void f Oxffffff00 Oxffffff00 8 bit absolute address space val 10 j xffffffff Oxffffffff Assumes that external variable MOV B 10 ROL MOV B 10 ROL val is frequently MOV B ROL _val 32 MOV B ROL _val 8 accessed 6 bytes 4 states 2 bytes 2states Optimizes access code for variable val 4 Optimization of Access to Functions If the memory range from 0 to OxFF has space the optimization of assigning addresses of functions frequently accessed is performed lt C source gt lt compiler output codes gt lt After inter module optimization gt Assigns address of address of f Indirect function f to indirect memory memory address access space space void main Optimizes calling f code for function f g0 4 bytes 5states 2 bytes 6states Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 73 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 Reallocation of Registers The relationships between function calls are analyzed and redundant register save restore codes are deleted with this specification In addition depending on the register state before and after the function call the register numbers to be used are modified C source filel c void f1 sub file2 c void f2 sub lt compiler output codes gt Uses ER6 before and after function sub is called _sub
152. option Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Default 3048 1580 pragma global register 3010 1487 For further details refer to section 5 4 8 Allocating Registers to Global Variables Note that global registers cannot be specified when a library is specified as the object of inter module optimization in the inter module optimization process Therefore this specification is not made in this section 2 Controlling the output of register save restore code at function entry and exit points The pragma regsave statement declares the function that saves restores all registers It also generates an object that does not allocate guaranteed registers E R2 to E R6 beyond function calls The pragma noregsave statement declares the function that does not save restore any register This statement is also used as the first function to be started without being called by other functions it is also used as function that is called by a function specifying pragma regsave To use these features create a function call relational diagram In HEW2 0 or later the call relationships among the functions can be examined by outputting available stack space information file in creating the relational diagram and reading the information file into the simulator debugger For a description of how to output the available stack space information file select Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain Link Library Tab Category Other
153. or cpu cpu information file name gt memory type ROm RAm XROm XRAm YROm YRAm address range start address gt lt end address gt Examples of this Optimization char type variable g c1 is allocated to ABSSB OPTI section and short type variable g slg s2 are allocated to ABS16B_OPT1 section So both size efficiency and execution speed of the access codes to these variables are improved include lt machine h gt void main void void init void void main void g_sl short func01 short g s2 char g c1 g cl 10 short g sl g s2 g_sl func01 g_sl g_s2 g_cl void init void nop main short funcOl short p sl sleep short wk p_sl return wk Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples of Optimized Access Codes In the following example which is in H8S 2600 advanced mode ROM Size 40 bytes to 30 bytes Execution Speed 41 cycles to 36 cycles Option NOT Specified Option Specified 7 RO RO g s1 32 8 ROL RO Q g s2 32 10 ROL ROL _g_c1 32 25 ROL func01 8 RO Q g s1 32 7 RO RO Q g s1 16 8 ROL RO Q g s2 16 10 ROL ROL _g_c1 8 25 ROL func01 8 RO Q g s1 16 e Remarks 1 For more details of short absolute addressing area please refer to section 5 4 11 Using 8 Bit Absolute Address Area and section 5 4 12 Using 16 Bit Absolute Address Area 2 This opti
154. provides an instruction set that can efficiently operate on byte size data Therefore both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by declaring any byte sized data as a char unsigned char type before the data are used Example Determine the logical product between the variable a and the constant 0x80 and store the result in the variable a C language program before optimization C language program after optimization int a char a void func void void func void a amp 0x80 a amp 0x80 Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization optimization tungi func MOV MOV f a ERO MOV MOV ERO RIL AND AND 128 R1L MOV MOV R1L ERO RTS RTS RES RES B Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 18 14 16 14 14 After 16 12 14 12 12 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 12 12 10 After 10 10 8 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 15 12 28 24 24 After 14 11 26 22 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 11 11 10 After 9 9 9 6 1 2 Using Unsigned Variables Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points For improvements in both object efficiency and execution
155. register for register variable Linkage symbol file Put common subexpression on a register temporarily User defined options Options Standard Library cpu 26004 24 outputz CONFIGDIFX PRO JECTNAME lib Miscellaneous options Dialog Menu Check against EC language specification head runtime new stdio stdlib Command Option ecpp owe Function Checks syntax according to the EC language specifications Treate loop condition as volatile qualified volatile loop Disables optimization of loop iteration condition Treat enum as char if it is in byteenum Handles enumeration type data as char the range of char Increase a register for register Regexpansion Specifies the number of variable allocation registers as 2 variable noregexpansion Specifies the number of variable allocation registers as 3 Put common subexpression cmncode Improves the optimization function for common expression on a register temporarily deletion Use EEPMOV in block copy eepmov Performs structure substitution using the EEPMOV instruction Treats loop condition as volatile qualified volatile loop Disables optimization of loop iteration Enable register declaration enable register Preferentially allocates the variables with register storage class specification to registers Obey ANSI specifications more strictly strict ansi User defined options Specifies the command op
156. registers specification can be determined to be appropriate For further details refer to section 5 4 3 Specifying the Number of Parameters Passing Registers Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 2 3 Using the Inter Module Optimization Features This section describes the optimization using the inter module optimizer to obtain an object program with higher execution efficiency Before performing optimization using the inter module optimizer specify the output of an inter module optimization add on information file in the compiler or cross assembler Specification method C C C Compiler Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Generate file for inter module optimization Command line goptimize Cross Assembler Dialog menu Assembly Tab Category Object select Generate file for inter module optimization Command line goptimize In HEW1 2 an inter module optimization add on information file is also prepared for the standard library that is linked during inter module optimization As this file is supplied in the compressed form in the Windows version decompress it before using By double clicking on the compressed file exe that has the same name as the library name to be used the file is self extracted then a directory containing the information file is generated For details on the inter module optimization of this library refer to the Supp
157. return else return void main int a if A a 1 amp amp B a 1 A is inline expanded but not B The function specified in pragma inline and the function specified in the function specifier inline C language are inline expanded to the location where they are called Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 9 Output of Function not optimized Question The warning message Function not optimized is displayed Previously the same program was compiled without any problem using the same compile options and under the same system environment Why is it Answer This warning message does not affect the program execution The message may be output by any of the following reasons 1 Compiler limitations were exceeded Because the compiler generates new internal variables at optimization processing the limitation may be exceeded In this case divide the function in question 2 Insufficient memory When memory is insufficient during optimization processing the H8S H8 300 C C compiler stops optimization in the expression unit or greater and outputs this warning message while continuing to compile In this case the optimization level achieved is no different from that without the optimization option To prevent this warning message rewrite large functions in the C C program to be divided Additionally increase the amount of memory available to the compil
158. single file by plural users 11 4 7 Limitations on File and Directory Names Created in HEW Question The message Error has occurred whilst saving file lt filename gt is displayed at the HEW system startup Why is it Answer Files and directories created on the HEW system have limitations For the specifications of the following items only half width alphanumeric characters and half width underlines can be used e Names of the directories to be installed e Names of the directories in which projects are to be created e Project names 11 4 8 Failure of Japanese Font Display with the HEW Editor or HDI Question 1 Japanese fonts are not displayed with the HEW editor 2 Japanese characters are rotated 90 degrees with the HEW editor 3 The inter module optimizer generates SYNTAX ERROR messages Answer When coding Japanese with the HEW editor specify Japanese font as follows Use Font in the Text column of the Format tab in Tools gt Options Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 65 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A lt HEW1 2 gt Use Font in the Text column of the Format tab in Tools gt Options Tools Options Build Editor Format Workspace m Text categories File group Assembly include file Assembly list file Assembly source file C header file C list file C source file Colors C header file Foreground Background Keyword group a Selected Text Text
159. specified 2946 97 1517 96 inter module 3 parameter passing registers optimization all inter module optimization functions functions Compiler Option 1 byte enum type specified 2902 95 1496 95 inter module 3 parameter passing registers optimization all inter module optimization functions functions pragma abs8 specified Expansion functions pragma abs16 specified pragma noregsave specified pragam indirect specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Following lists the examination results with option and expansion function specifications that implement the best speed efficiency Size Execution speed Specification Description Byte 96 Cycle 96 Default 3048 100 1580 100 Compiler Options SPEED option 3348 110 1249 79 Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers Compiler Options SPEED option 2906 95 1232 78 inter module Block transfer instruction specified optimization 3 parameter passing registers functions speed priority inter module optimization features Compiler Options SPEED option 2894 95 1231 78 inter module optimization functions Expansion functions Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers speed priority inter module optimization features pragma noregsave specified pragma abs8 specified pragma abs16 specified Thus compared with the case when no op
160. speed any variable whose value is always positive should be declared as unsigned Description When expanding a given data item into a larger data type the compiler performs a sign expansion if the data item is signed data if it is unsigned data the compiler performs a zero expansion Because the H8 300 series CPU does not have a data expansion instruction for handling signed data the CPU requires a sign determination object For this reason both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by qualifying any variable whose value is always positive as an unsigned variable Notice that because the H8S and H8 300H CPUs are provided with a data expansion instruction declaring a positive value variable as an unsigned variable will have no effect on the performance of these CPUs Example Expand the variable a into the int type set the result to the variable b Following are the results of compiling the program on a 300 CPU Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 4 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques C language program before optimization C language program after optimization char a unsigned char a int b int b void func void void func void b a b a Expanded into assembly language code Expanded into assembly language code after before optimization optimization _func _func MOV B _a 16 ROL MOV B _a 16 ROL BLD B 7 ROL SUB B ROH ROH SUBX B ROH ROH MOV W RO _b 16 MOV
161. the stack to be used can be determined as follows Calculate the size of the stack area for the deepest nest of calls in the call relationships among the functions The maximum value obtained in this manner is the stack area size For example if the deepest function call nest is the following sum all the stack sizes main function stack size 10 bytes func function 20 bytes sub function 30 bytes The stack size in this case will be 60 bytes The stack sizes for functions are output when symbol allocation information output is specified as part of a specification for object list file output The maximum space of stack area to be used by C C programs and standard library can be calculated by stack analysis tools when stack information file is output by specifying the stack option of Optimizing Linkage Editor For details on how to use stack analysis tools refer to section 6 Operating Stack Analysis Tool in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 7 New project 6 9 Specify the settings for a vector table and press NEXT To modify Handler Program select the Handler Program name click on it and then enter Note that the reset program reserprg c is not generated once the Handler Program is modified What supporting files would vou
162. this is the case specify the output of debugging information both at compilation and assembly Then step execution and external variable reference can be performed at the C source level Answer 2 When code asm is specified debugging cannot be performed at the C source level If you use an inline assembler specify code asm To perform debugging at the C source level for a project using an inline assembler specify code asm only for files for which the inline assembler is used Remarks For detailed information on debugging at the C source level refer to the H8S H8 300 Series Simulator Debugger User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 8 Warning Message Displayed at Inline Expansion Question At the inline expansion of a function the warning message Function lt function name in pragma inline is not expanded is displayed Why is this Answer This warning message does not affect the program execution In the following cases however the inline expansion is not performed e A function is defined before the pragma inline specification e The function has variable parameters e Parameter addresses are referenced in the function e A function call is made through the address of the function to be expanded e For the second or after condition logical operators pragma inline A B int A int a if a gt 10 return else return B int a if a lt 25
163. to section3 1 Specifying an Interrupt Function Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 5 Creating Vector Tables HEW project file name vecttbl c sample program name vecttbl c These programs set the addresses of the interrupt functions in vector tables To be generated under HEWI 2 only Note RR RIK e k KK kk kk kk k Ck Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk I ko kk Ck ko kk I kc ke k I k kk ke ek FILE DATE DESC CPU vecttbl c Thu Nov 04 1999 RIPTION Initialize of Vector Table TYPE H8S 2621 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 Ay f A y ur A id J FCKCK Kk kk kk Ck Ck Ck kk k kk Ck ARR ARR ARR ARR AAR AAR A koe include vect h pragma section VECTTBL void RE lt lt VECTOR DATA START POWER ON RESET 0 Power On Reset Power SET Vectors ON Reset Creates a vector table named RESET Vectors in the CVECTTBL section lt lt VECTOR DATA END POWER ON RESET gt gt lt lt VECTOR DATA START MANUAL RESET gt gt 1 Manual Reset Manua l Reset lt lt VECTOR DATA END MANUAL RESET gt gt pragma section INTTBL void INT_Vectors 2 void ff 3 void 4 void 5 void 6 void 7 void 8 void 9 void 10 void 11 void 12 void 13
164. to select Link Library Tab Category Optimize and specify the options for inter module optimizer First in the Optimize tab specify All to enable all inter module optimization features Standard Toolchain Configuration Debue Category Optimize E s Show entries for sample Optimize tem H Eg E source tile Optimize items dbsctc Optimize Nne Eliminated size 0x001 E intpre c T s Bios Thelude profile sample c sbrk c se sho Modify _ Default Options Reallocate registers C source file Eliminate same code Size 0x0008 C Assembly source file fom wawvert call uma Use indirect call jump Tus 0x0020 Linkaee symbol file Optimize branches Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage listz CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 Also specify here to output an optimization information list on the Link Library Tab Category List H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 1 2 xl Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim gt d Category List z vV Generate list file test as r Contents 3 4 C source file dbsctc Mshow symbol Enable all intpre c Show reference resetpre c Show section Disable all sbrkc testc Lj Default
165. valid when CPU type is H8SX or H8S 1 You must specify pragma address before the variable declaration 2 An error will occur if you specify a compound type member or other than a variable 3 An error will occur if you specify an odd address for a variable or structure whose alignment number is 2 4 An error will occur if you specify pragma address more than once for the same variable 5 An error will occur if you specify the same address for different variables or if you specify the same variable address more than once 6 An error will occur if you specify the following pragma extensions at the same time for the same variable pragma section pragma abs8 abs 16 pragma global_register Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 7 5 Inter file Inline Expansion Description The C C Compiler is performed for each file As a result if a function is called across files inline expansion is not applied to the function even though the speed inline option pragma inline or keyword inline is specified in the function for inline expansion When inter file inline expansion option is specified inline expansion can be applied to the function even if that function is called across files If the file which includes the function for inline expansion is on the other directory inline expansion can be applied to the function by specifying the directory on which the function for inter fi
166. variable by a constant the left shift operator should be used Example Assign the value of data three times to the variable a C language program before optimization int data a void main a datatdatat data Expanded into assembly language code before optimization _main PUSH L MOV MOV MOV ADD ADD MOV POP RTS ER6 _data 32 ER6 ER6 RO RO R1 R1 RO R1 RO RO _a 32 ER6 C language program after optimization int data a void main a data lt lt 1 data optimization main MOV W SHLL W MOV W ADD W MOV W RTS Expanded into assembly language code after Q data 32 R0 RO QG data 32 R1 R1 R0 RO _a 32 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 23 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 30 22 30 22 22 After 24 18 24 18 18 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 20 20 16 After 20 20 16 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 17 13 34 26 26 After 14 11 28 22 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 12 12 11 After 13 13 12 Remarks and Notes This technique can be used for the compilers before Ver 3 0 Improvements with the compiler Ver 4 0 or higher made it possible to perform shift operations in multiplication and addition
167. void f1 pragma interrupt f2 vect 4 void f2 void pragma indirect f3 vect 5 unsigned char f 3 void lt Allocating the interrupt function f2 to the vector number 4 lt Allocating the indirect memory access function f3 to the vector number 5 memory map contents SVECTO 00000000 00000003 SVECTA 00000010 00000013 SVECT5 00000014 00000017 Remarks and notes i The vector table specification vect should always be specified in lowercase characters ii Be careful not duplicate an allocating vector number with other vector tables Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 5 2 Specifying the Number of Parameter Passing Registers Description The number of parameter passing registers can be specified for each function The function that is specified by _ regparam2 uses ERO ERI RO and R1 for H8 300 and the function that is specified by regparam3 uses ERO ERI ER2 RO R1 and R2 for H8 300 Format type specifier gt regparam2 function name gt type specifier regparam3 function name gt Example This function specifies to store a variable to stack or allocate it to ER2 C C program void _ _ regparam2 funcl long a int b int c long d void _ _ regparam3 func2 long a int b int c long d void main void eI Variable allocation patterns funcl a b c d CPU 2600a func1 long a int b
168. which extend across loops or branches novolatile Treat global Not checked infinite loop 0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range noblock Specify optimizing No block global alloc O Allocate registers Disable const var propagate 0 Propagate variables Disable Level 3 Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier within the entire function novolatile Treat global Not checked infinite loop 0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range all Specify optimizing All global_alloc 1 Allocate registers Enable const_var_propagate 1 Propagate variables Enable Custom Optimizes external variables according to the options specified by user Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 59 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Treat global variables as volatile qualified Check Box Command Option Function Y volatile Disables external variable optimization novolatile Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier Delete assignment to global variables before an infinite loop Check Box Command Option Function infinite loop 1 Eliminates an assignment expression that is located immediately before an infinite loop and that is an assignment to the external variable that is not used in the infinite loop infinite loop O0 Disables elimination of an assignment expression for external variables pr
169. wresetpre c lipragzma sectio tlpragma entry Power N Reset P 0x00000400 void Power N Reset PC void i 0x00000404 l set imask ccr 1 set vbr void char s 0x00000406 _INITSCT 0x00000806 INITSCT E CALL INITO CALL INITO IMIT TOL TRS Note This feature is supported by HEW 3 0 or later 7 2 6 How to Use Timers Description HEW supports prioritization of timers and interrupts For each timer only channel 0 is supported HEW support is limited to overflow and compare match interrupts HEW does not support interrupts that involve terminal I O such as input capture interrupts e Supported timer control registers In the Supported column on the following table O indicates that the register is supported and A indicates that only the bits associated with the feature described in the paragraph under Description are supported Debug platform name Timer name Supported control register Supported H8SX TPUO TSTR TCR TIER TSR TCNT TGRA TGRB TGRC TGRD O O O OJ OJ O OF BF gt Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW e Supported interrupt priority level setting registers In the Supported column on the following table O indicates that the register is supported and A indicates that only the bits associated with the feature described in the paragraph under Description are supported Debug platform name Supp
170. y b dt te z e x c x y a z Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Variable registers 4 202 202 190 190 416 Variable registers 3 202 202 190 190 416 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Variable registers 4 150 150 150 Variable registers 3 150 150 150 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Variable registers 4 783 752 2158 2082 4836 Variable registers 3 783 752 2158 2082 4836 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Variable registers 4 174 187 169 Variable registers 3 174 187 169 5 4 5 Optimization of External Variables Size Speed Description The compiler optimizes the above expressions by deleting the substitution of 1 above If the substitution 1 should not be deleted as for a variable in an I O port or an interrupt processing declare volatile for the variable By using the option the optimization can be disabled for all external variables in the specified file However that may reduce the object efficiency When using the option declare volatile to a variable that should not be optimized such as that in an interrupt function or in an I O register in the source program and then compile the resulting program with disabling the optimization of external v
171. 0 00 00 F F 001cO FF FF FF FF FFF FF FFF F F 0001d0 FF FF FF FF FFF FEFF F F 000le0 FF FF FF FF FFF FFFFF F F Range of Data O0ffc FF FF FF FF FE FF EF FE FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FF NOT Existing D ffd FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF OOFfed FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF DOfHf FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FP 010000 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples of HEX Files As the following examples OxFF records are added to the unused areas in the range of data existing If this option is not specified the records in the range of data not existing are not output If this option is specified OxFF records are added to the area in the range of data not existing according to the output range specification in the output option Divided output files NOT Specify value filled in unused area 0400000000000400F8 D400140000000414C4 40016000000041C00 Range of Data D0400200D0000041EBA i D4002 4000000042084 Existing 04002800000004224E 0400200 00000049489 0400400 00000049899 D4004400000004288C 400480 00000042488 O4004C0 00000049080 DeDBCBDDOOODOSDADDODDSDEDOFFE42451 DBDBp DDOOFFEDDDD FFE 47437 D4D8DADDDDFFEDOASI DCDBDEDDT30DODDABBADDODO2DUOS 41030 DODODODTFF
172. 0 10 506 3 588 3 757 1 9625 12 420 9 024 9 842 3 404 3 562 2 7475 12 074 8 932 9 642 3 398 3 557 3 5325 11 332 8 284 8 916 3 183 3 331 4 3175 13 184 9 748 10 644 3 656 3 825 5 1025 12 462 9 114 9 932 3 448 3 606 5 8875 12 050 8 960 9 670 3 411 3 570 0 52333333 11 210 8 158 8 790 3 127 3 275 1 04666667 13 176 9 620 10 516 3 601 3 770 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 1 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 5 cos 1 9625 12 506 9 034 9 852 3 417 3 575 2 7475 12 160 8 942 9 652 3 411 3 570 3 5325 11 418 8 294 8 926 3 196 3 344 4 3175 13 270 9 758 10 654 3 669 3 838 5 1025 12 548 9 124 9 942 3 461 3 619 5 8875 12 136 8 970 9 680 3 424 3 583 6 sin 0 523333333 12 170 8 838 9 656 3 314 3 472 1 046666667 11 942 8 872 9 582 3 373 3 532 1 9625 11 196 8 202 8 834 3 147 3 295 2 7475 13 240 9 764 10 660 3 671 3 840 3 5325 12 482 9 060 9 878 3 428 3 586 4 3175 12 120 8 954 9 664 3 415 3 574 5 1025 11 382 8 312 8 944 3 203 3 351 5 8875 13 204 9 776 10 672 3 674 3 843 0 52333333 12 348 8 876 9 694 3 342 3 500 1 04666667 12 120 8 910 9 620 3 401 3 560 1 9625 11 374 8 240 8 872 3 175 3 323 2 7475 13 418 9 802 10 698 3 69
173. 0 Linkage symbol file Category Optimize Default of branch displacement size Default Generate file for inter module optimization Output file directory SKCONFIGDIFOX Modify Options Assembly cpu 26004 24 deb object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj nolist nologo cheincpath errorpath za NI Debug information Dialog Menu Command Option Function Default Validates DEBUG directive only With debug information debug Enables debugging information output Without debug nodebug Disables debugging information output information Generate assembly source file after preprocess Check Box Command Option Function expand Outputs preprocessor expansion results Outputs no preprocessor expansion results Optimize Check Box Command Option Function optimize Specifies optimization nooptimize Specifies no optimization Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Default of branch displacement size Function Specified by the directive descriptions in the source files Specifies the displacement size as 8 bits if the forward reference displacement is selected for the branch instruction Dialog Menu Command Option Default 8bit br_relative 8 16bit br_relative 16 Generate file for inter module optimization Specifies the displacement size as 16 bits if the forward reference displacement is selected for the
174. 0 differ the differences are explained separately Symbols and Conventions used in this application note is as follows Indicates that the enclosed item can be omitted RET Indicates the Return Enter key is to be pressed A Indicates one or more spaces or tabs Abe Boldfaced items are to be input by the user lt gt Items enclosed in these brackets should be specified Indicates that the immediately preceding item is specified one or more times H Integer constants preceded by H are in hexadecimal Ox Integer constants preceded by Ox are in hexadecimal Menu gt Menu Option The boldfaced letter and the character gt indicate a menu option UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company limited MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Microsoft WindowsNT operating system Microsoft Windows 98 and Windows 2000 operating system Microsoft WindowsMe operating system Microsoft WindowsXP operating system are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Using the application note Renesas recommends that the application note be read as follows Using H8S and H8 300 C C gt compiler package for first time Develop your program using an HE
175. 00 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Generate file for inter module optimization Check Box Command Option Function goptimize Outputs inter module optimization additional information file Outputs no inter module optimization additional information file Switch statement Specifies the switch statement expansion method Dialog Menu Command Option Function Auto case auto Determines switch statement expansion method depending on the speed option specification If then case ifthen Performs switch statement expansion in if then method Table case table Performs switch statement expansion in table jump method Function call Selects the function call method Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa s aa 8 indirect Selects normal function call Selects memory indirect function call Data access Selects data access mode Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa a Selects normal data access aa 8 abs8 Selects 8 bit absolute address access aa 16 abs16 Selects 16 bit absolute address access 5 Other Tab H8S H8 300 C Compiler Options Debug C C source file Source Object List Optimize Other Jopu Miscellaneous options Check against EC language specification Generate browser information IO OF xi Interrupt handler saves restores MACH and MACL registers gt User defined options Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 7 REJ05B0464 0300 2 NE SAS Section 4 HEW
176. 00 advanced mode 20 H FFF00 to H FFFFF H8S 2000 advanced mode H8 300H advanced mode H8SX normal mode 16 H FF00 to H FFFF H8S 2600 normal mode H8S 2000 normal mode H8 300H normal mode H8 300 Example To access the variables a b and c allocated in the 8 bit absolute address area C C program Specification using the pragma statement pragma abs8 a b c const char a 1 char b 1 char c void func void c b a Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified _func _func MOV B 1 ROL MOV B 1 ROL MOV B ROL _b 32 MOV B ROL _b 8 MOV B ROL _c 32 MOV B ROL _c 8 RTS RTS SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION SABS8C DATA ALIGN 2 DATA B H 01 DATA B BY OL SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION SABS8D DATA ALIGN 2 DATA B HPO DATA B AY OL SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION SABS8B DATA ALIGN 2 RES B i RES B ii Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 18 14 18 14 14 Specified 10 10 10 10 10 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 59 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 16 16 12 Specified 10 10 10 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 14 11 28 22 22 Specified 10 9 20 18 18 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 10 10
177. 0000000BE2 0002z00000000000BE6 0002100000000000860 d002co0000000000862 0001S0000000000086E 0001t00000000000874 nOnnr7ononononnonnononec 2 Trace Search MOV MOV JSR STM MOV MOV BRA MOV MOV BNE L L H OUER4 lt O0FFEO45 if strcmp H OUER1 lt 00000EE0 _strPC lt O0000BBE ER4 OOFFFFFO lt 00000 _stremp ERO EER6 lt 00000000 ER1 EER5 lt 00000EE0 H OBPC lt 00000BCC BERG RAL 00 GERS5 ROL 73 ROL R BH OBPC 00000BD8 BERG ROL lt 00 RO RO0 0000 ERS RSL lt 73 R5 R5 0073 R5 RORO FF8D SP ER4 lt 00FFE045 PC 00000860 R0 RORO FF8D GH OSPC 0000086E H OOERIc 00000EE6 else if s ERS EERO lt 00000000 nnCc2 00000nnmr First right click on a Trace window to display the popup menu and select Find to open the Trace Search dialog box C Address C Instruction Value P REL Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 66 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program Set the search item Item and the search content Value click on the OK button and execute Trace Search If you find the applicable trace information highlight the first line If you continue Trace Search for the same search content Value right click on the Trace window to display the popup menu and select Find Next In the next step highlight the next line PTR Cycle Address CCR Mult Instruction Acce
178. 0002 0x0000000 G INT TID SCID 000000004 3 INT MI 0x00000486 0x00000002 0x0000000 G3 INT TGIBB TPU3 0x00000004 G3 INT OVI 0x00000482 0x00000002 Ox000000 3 INTIRO9 0x00000004 D INT TOE 0x00000476 0x00000002 0x0000000 G3 INT TEID SCIO lt 0x00000004 gt 3 INT TGD Ox00000456 0x00000002 0x0000000 G3 INT CMIB2 TMRA lt 0x00000004 3 INT IRG1 0x0000042a 0x00000002 0x0000000 E INT OvTl TMRI D INT OMI 0x00000484 0x00000002 Ox00000004 intpre obj E INT TCE 0x00000474 0x00000002 Ox00000004 intpre obj G3 INT_Tan Ox00000004 intpreobj G3 INT TGDD Status Bar O0x00000004 intpre obj D INT TGID p Ox00000004 intpre obj bal H8SX Advanced Find Stack size ce Ode qe de dm qe de de de de de de de qe de de d 4 ES Note The stack amount of the assembly functions except the standard library is displayed as zero Refer to section 7 3 4 Editing the Stack Information File to set the stack amount Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Call information view Linked level structure between symbols is displayed The amount used by stack is displayed at the left side of each symbol 1 Symbol display Symbol classification Category signs are displayed at the left side of each symbol by icon Symbol classification Category signs are as follows Editing file Assembler label 3
179. 0866 Orcs MOV ER4 ERS 00000868 01006961 MOV GER6 ER1 D0000086c DACl ADD ER4 ERL 0000086e 7A020100 MOV f H O01001FD6 ERZ2 00000874 1FA1 CMP ERZ ER1 00000876 4210 BHI GH 0888 8 00000878 01006961 GER6 ER1 anapannan ner mns ooooooot Name OOFFEOOL IntGlob 01001FDI BoolGlob oooooo0t ChariGlob DOFFEFO9I CharZGlob ooocbo tArraylGlob IOHUN ArrayZGlob C Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 55 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 11 Referencing to a Local Variable Selecting Locals from the View menu causes the system to display a Locals window which shows the local variables that can be referenced from the current PC position and their values Pressing the Step button allows the user to enter the function The following section describes the step execution of programs 2 3 12 Step Execution of a Program Let us now execute the program in steps by using Step In Step Over and Step Out from the Run menu In the case of a subroutine call Step In moves the PC into the subroutine Step Over moves the PC from one a subroutine call line to another Step Out moves the PC from a subroutine call line to the next line Step Step Over Step Out Selecting Run from the Run menu causes the system to open the Run dialog box which allows the user to change the unit of steps Run Program Program Counter H ODODOC DO
180. 0H H8 300 and H8 300L Further details of the topics covered in this application note may be found in the following related manuals High prformance Embedded Workshop 3 User s Manual H8S and H8 300 Series High prformance Embedded Workshop Tutorial H8S and H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual H8S and H8 300 Series Simulator Debugger User s Manual Hardware and Programming Manuals of each product This application note is organized as follows Section 1 provides an overview and describes installation methods and the programming development procedure Section 2 illustrates the debugging process using various samples Section 3 explains the expansion functions used for user program development Section 4 explains HEW options Section 5 explains how to use the optimization feature and the optimization function for the inter module optimizer Section 6 illustrates efficient programming techniques Section 7 illustrates the utilizing method using HEW Section 8 illustrates efficient C programming technique Section 9 explains how to use the Optimizing Linkage Editor Section 10 provides answers to questions frequently asked by the users The appendixes cover the following topics A List of floating point operation capabilities B Added Features C List of Limitations D ASCII code table This application note mainly covers HEW3 0 and H8 Compiler Version 6 0 If operations of HEW1 2 and H8 Compiler Version 3
181. 1 3 4 Creating Custom Project Types 7 1 4 5 Multi CPU Feature 7 1 5 eo Networking Feature 7 1 6 7 Converting from Old HEW Version 7 1 7 8 Converting a HIM Project to a HEW Project 7 1 8 o gt Add Supported CPUs 7 1 9 10 Simulations Pseudo interrupts 7 2 1 11 Convenient Breakpoint Functions 7 2 2 12 Coverage Feature 7 2 3 13 File I O 7 2 4 14 Debugger Target Synchronization 7 2 5 15 How to Use Timers 7 2 6 16 Examples of Timer Usage 7 2 7 17 Reconfiguration of Debugger Target 7 2 8 18 Call Walker Making stack information file 7 3 1 19 Starting Call Walker 7 3 2 20 File Open and Call Walker Window 7 3 3 21 Editing the stack information file 7 3 4 22 Stack area size of assembly program 7 3 5 23 Merging stack information 7 3 6 24 Other functions 7 3 7 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 1 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 7 Using HEW 7 1 Builds 7 1 1 Regenerating and Editing Automatically Generated Files Description HEW will automatically generate I O register definition interrupt function and other various files if you select Application for the project type when creating a new workspace However when creating a new project you may sometimes skip this automatic file generation process because you then believe that the files are unnecessary You may also forget to edit or set such files If you do you can use this feature to automatically generate and edit files after creating a project However this feature is only available wh
182. 10 itt datal i data2 i Expanded into assembly language code before optimization func R3 RO ER4 R1 ER3 6 R6 R6 R6 ERS R5 R4 ERO R5 ERO R3 ER1 R5 ER1 ER1 R1 R1 ERO 1 R6 10 16 R6 L6 8 SSS SHHHH He ER3 Object Size Table byte ERA4 ER6 SP SP ERA ER6 C language program after optimization void func int datal int data2 int i for i20 i 10 itt datal data2 datal data2 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization func ER5 ERO ER5 110 16 E0 ER1 RO RO GER5 2 ER5 2 ER1 1 E0 L7 8 ER5 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 46 38 40 38 40 After 24 22 28 26 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 42 42 34 After 18 18 18 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 171 152 482 336 428 After 107 102 216 208 238 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 156 164 155 After 79 81 80 6 5 Data Structures 6 5 1 Ensuring Data Compatibility Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Data items are allocated in the order in which they are declared The efficiency of ROM and RAM utilization can be improved by effectively specifying the order in which data items
183. 11 32 ERO ER1 ER1 100 8 R1L MULL 3 8 ERO G g 11 32 _g_12 32 ERO ER1 ER1 100 R1L SDIVL 3 8 ERO _g_12 32 _g_12 32 ERO ER1 ER1 4 R1L SDIVL 3 8 ER1 _g_12 32 ER1 ERO 1 For more details of indirect memory access space please refer to section 5 4 13 Using Indirect Memory Format and section 5 4 14 Using Extended Indirect Memory Format 2 This option is valid for object files generated by C C Compiler or Assembler Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 4 8 Optimizes Branch Instructions Size O Speed O Description C C Compiler calls functions by the absolute addressing mode JSR when access functions in other files and when access over the address range which can be accessed by the PC relative addressing mode BSR As the optimizing linkage editor performs optimization at linkage it can recalculate the branch range of which the branch destination is in other file The branch instruction can be changed to the PC relative addressing mode BSR if possible Though the original branch range exceeds the address range which can be accessed by the PC relative addressing mode the branch instruction can be also changed to BSR if the branch range is reduced by other optimization If any other optimization item is executed this optimization is always performed regardless of whether it is specified or not Note The add
184. 12 5 54 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Example To call the function noregf from the function regf C C program Not specified void regf void noregf int void fune extern int X Y Z XX void regf void i int A X Y A noregf X Z A void noregf int P int B P Y B func X Z B Assembly expansion code Not specified Specified pragma regsave regf pragma noregsave noregf void regf void noregf int void func extern int X Y Z2 XX void regf void int A X Y A noregf X Z A void noregf int P int B P Y B Eune X Z B Specified R6 _X 32 R6 R6 _Y 32 R6 RO0 noregf 8 R6 2 32 R6 R6 RO R6 R6 Yv 32 Q X 32 R0 _func 24 R6 _Z 32 R6 Object Size Comparison byte ER2 ER3 SP ERA4 ER6 SP Q X 32 R6 R6 0 Yv 32 R6 RO R6 _noregf 8 R6 R6 _2 32 SP ER4 ER6 SP ER2 ER3 RO R6 R6 _Y 32 Q X 32 R0 Q func 24 R6 2 32 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 66 52 66 52 52 Specified 80 66 68 54 54 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 55 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 68 66 52 Specified 78 76 62 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specifie
185. 12 6 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 21 17 46 38 38 After 21 17 44 36 36 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 13 13 12 After 13 13 12 6 3 Loop Processing 6 3 1 Selecting a Loop Counter Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by using a decrement counter and comparing the end condition with zero Description During the execution of a data transfer instruction MOV instruction in the H8S and H8 300 Series microcomputer both N and Z flags of the condition code register change This eliminates the need for a compare instruction immediately after the data transfer instruction which improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Copy all elements of the array a to the array b C language program before optimization unsigned char a 10 b 10 int i void func void for i 0 i 10 i b i sa il C language program after optimization unsigned char a 10 b 10 qnt ag void func void for i 9 i gt 0 i b il alil Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization func Object Size Table byte ER4 ER5 S
186. 2 20 ROL ROL _b _a ERO ERO R1 1 R1 R1 ERO _b ERO ERO RIL 2 R1L R1L ERO 32 B DATA ALIGN 2 Object Size Comparison byte 10 R4 20 R5L 1 R4 2 R5L H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 52 40 48 40 40 Specified 20 20 16 16 16 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 38 36 28 Specified 18 16 16 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 37 30 70 60 60 Specified 15 14 26 24 24 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 21 21 18 Specified 12 12 12 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 53 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Notes a This option can be used for variable definitions and variable declarations after the pragma global register is declared b This option can be used for simple type or pointer type global variables It cannot be used for double type variables c The initial value cannot be specified In addition addresses cannot be referenced d Referencing a specific variable from a link destination without a register specification in the file is not guaranteed e Specifications or references in interrupt functions are not guaranteed f Variables and registers cannot be specified in duplicate This option cannot be specified together with the pragma abs8 or pragma abs16 declaration When this option is speci
187. 2 _func2 8 RO _ret 32 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 28 24 28 24 24 After 24 20 24 20 20 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 32 28 24 After 24 24 20 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 20 16 40 32 32 After 19 15 38 30 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 16 16 15 After 16 16 16 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 6 2 Macro calls Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both size efficiency and processing speed can be improved by defining the frequently called functions as macros Description When identical processing routines are defined as macros they are inline expanded at the location where they are called This eliminates the generation of codes and improves efficiency Example Call the function abs C language program before optimization extern int a b c int abs x int x return x 0 x x void f void Expanded into assembly language code before optimization _abs R6 RO R6 L9 8 R6 R1 L10 8 R6 R1 R1 R1 RO R6 _b 32 R0 _abs 8 RO _a 32 Q c 32 RO0 _abs 8 RO _b 32 C language program after optimization define abs x x gt 0 x extern int a b c void f void x a abs b b abs c Expanded into as
188. 2 Ox00000004 CallWalker2 3 stop Ox000008 Ox00000002 Ox00000004 CallWalker2 G INT TG I Ox000004 Ox00000002 Ox00000004 intpre obj DG INT TGID I Ox000004 QxO0000002 QxO0000004 intpre obj fal INT TAM T AvNANANA n nnnnnnno n nnnnnnn eines nhi For each symbol address attribute and the amount used by stack are displayed After click symbol click the right mouse button to execute each editing command e Status bar For Help press F1 H85X Normal Find Stack size Function information CPU type and other information of the current stack information file are displayed Maximum stack size J E CallWalker3cal Max Ox00000006 Tff main Ox00000006 The static maximum amount used by stack of the current stack information file is displayed e Selecting standard library version Standard Library Version Standard library H8 V6 The standard library version of the current stack information file can be selected Using this information the stack amount of the assembly functions in the standard library is displayed When only one HEW package is installed there is no need to select this Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 7 3 4 Editing the Stack Information File After selecting a symbol in the symbol details view right frame on the screen choose Add Modify Delete command in Edit menu to add change delete th
189. 2310 E Undefined external symbol class name static member variable name referenced in file name is output at linkage Solution This error occurs because the static member variable is not defined Add either of the following definition as shown on the next page If there is an initial value int A num 0 If there is no initial value int A a Unable to assign an initial value No initial value is assigned to a static member variable to be initialized Solution A static member variable to be initialized handled as a variable with an initial value is created in the D section by default Thus specify the ROM implementation support option of the optimization linkage editor and in the initial routine copy the D section from the ROM to the RAM using the _JNITSCT function Note This solution is not required if HEW automatically creates an initial routine Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program class A private static int num public A void A void Defining a static member variable void main void Creating a class A type class object Incrementing a static member variable 8 3 How to Use Options 8 3 1 C Language for Embedded Applications Description The ROM RAM sizes and the execution speed are important for an embedded system The C language for embedded applications EC is a subset of the C l
190. 26004 v Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 60 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 2 Allocating Memory Resources Memory resources should be allocated in order to run an application that has been developed Check the settings because memory resources are automatically allocated in the Demonstration Project e Select Simulator gt Memory Resource from the Option menu to display the current memory resources 3 sample High performance Embedded Workshop T Edit View Project Options Build Debug Memory Tools Window Help H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain LN a amp cy 10 8 er aoa El m d amp Build Phases amp Simb ebug_H85 26004 Build Configurations jg m 8 e Debug Sessions Debug Settings Radix lowlv src EB C source file Simulator d Tb System t ll Memory Resource Simulator System i zixl System Memory Memory Map 00000000 00001 FFF OOFFEOOO DOFFEFBF DOFFFF3F OOF FFFBF OOFFFFCO ODFFFFFF Sal xg 238 PETER Resource ES ES Xa Attribute 00000000 ODDD7FFF Read Write DOFFEOQ00 OOFFEFBF Read Write DOFFF800 OOFFFF3F Read Write DOFFFF60 OOFFFFFF Read Write OK Cancel Apply Readable writable area from H 00000000 through H 00007FFF is allocated for a program area and the area from H O0FFECOO through H OOFFFFFF is allocated for a stack area e Click on the Clo
191. 3 00 2005 09 12 8 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 2 Introduction to C Functions 8 2 1 How to Reference a C Object mportant Points Use an extern C declaration to directly use in a C program the resources in an existing C object program Likewise the resources in a C object program can be used in a C program Example of Use 1 Use an extern C declaration to reference a function in a C object program C program C program extern C void CFUNC extern void CFUNC void main void void CFUNC X XCLASS while 1 XCLASS SetValue 10 CFUNC 2 Use an extern C declaration to reference a function in a C object program C program C program void CFUNC extern C void CPPFUNC void CPPFUNC void CPPFUNC while 1 t e Important Information 1 A C object generated by a previous version compiler cannot be linked because the encoding and executing methods have been changed Be sure to recompile it before using it 2 A function called in the above method cannot be overloaded Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 2 2 How to Implement new and delete Important Points To use new implement a low level function Description If new is used in an embedded system the dynamic allocation of actual heap memory is realized us
192. 300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example 1 Decimal operation To add decimally the 6 digit 4 bit BCD data 3 bytes starting from the address specified by ptr to the 4 bit BCD data starting from the address specified by ptr2 and store the result in a 3 byte area starting from the address specified by rst C C program include lt machine h gt char ptr1 3 0 1 2 char ptr2 3 2 1 0 char rst 3 void f dadd char 3 ptrl1 ptr2 rst Outputs DAA instruction Compiled assembly language expansion code STM L ERA ER6 SP MOV L _ptr1 2 32 ER0 OV L _ptr2 2 32 ER1 OV L _rstt 3 32 ER5 OV B 13 8 R6L ANDC B 34 8 CCR MOV B ERO R4L OV B ER1 R4H ADDX B R4H R4L DAA R4L OV RAL Q ER5 DEC 1 ERO DEC 1 ER1 DEC R6L BNE L49 8 LDM SP ERA ER6 RTS Remarks and notes The first parameter for the functions dadd and dsub is a constant 1 to 255 2 TAS instruction To set the MSB bit 7 of the memory contents to 1 after testing the memory contents by comparing with 0 C C program extern unsigned char data define ADR volatile unsigned char 0x00fff000 include lt machine h gt void main tas char amp ADR P l hr Compares memory contents with 0 sets the result in data get ccr CCR and ccr data else if or ccr data Stores either AND or OR to the CCR depending
193. 300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Examples of S type Files As the following examples OxFF records are added to the unused areas in the range of data existing If this option is not specified the records in the range of data not existing are not output If this option is specified OxFF records are added to the area in the range of data not existing according to the output range specification in the output option Divided output files NOT Specify value filled in unused area S DE000062696E20202020206D6F 74C8 s107000000000400F 4 1070014000004140C6 107001C0000041CBC S10700200000041EB6 107002400000420B0 10700280000042244 107002C0000042444 1070040000004268E 10700440000042888 10700480000042482 107004C0000042C7C 10700500000042E76 10700540000043070 Range of Data Existing 11308901F9045ECTA00000008CB 7A01000008D2D 7 1130840401801006D0401006D0501006D06 4006 4D 11308B06C4AGGEAUBOGTFD445FGTF3045E40120F 4 10808C06D766D72547048 SIOFOSCEO00008DA000008DEQ0FFE42A4D STOBOSD200FFEQOO00FFE42A2E S1O708DA00FFEO0A2D STOF SDE 780000046BA00000200C54708C S8030400F8 on lt Specify value filled in unused area H FF gt S DEU00062696E20202020208D6F 7 4C8 s107000000000400F 4 S1130004FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF8 107001400000414CB S1070018FFFFFFFFE4 107001C0000041CBC 10700200000041EBB 107002400000420B0 10700280000042244 S107002C0000042444 S1130030FFFFFFFFFFFFFF
194. 376 14 996 16 134 5 715 5 937 0 3 19 016 14 604 15 742 5 519 5 741 15 log10 1 2 20 138 15 260 16 532 5 686 5 929 2 5 20 254 15 464 16 736 5 788 6 031 0 999 20 764 16 008 17 280 6 060 6 303 0 3 20 372 15 572 16 844 5 482 6 085 16 modf 256 3 3 518 2 890 3 388 914 975 0 032 3 342 2 760 3 252 850 908 10000 2345 3 608 2 962 3 460 950 1 011 17 pow 2 3 4 2 43 236 33 010 35 340 12 577 13 074 45 2 5 43 642 33 412 35 742 12 789 13 286 4 56 3 47 134 36 326 39 066 13 678 14 231 85 55 476 45 988 35 406 38 064 13 360 13 904 18 sqrt 2 4 918 1 878 1 980 829 852 3 4 966 1 910 2 012 845 868 0 1 4 906 1 890 1 992 835 858 19 ceil 0 3 2 998 2 452 2 790 749 801 0 6 1 806 1 314 1 502 393 426 20 fabs 5 126 38 40 24 27 5 126 38 40 24 27 21 floor 0 3 1 806 1 314 1 502 393 426 0 6 z 2 998 2 446 2 784 746 798 22 fmod 11 1 3 2 1 964 1 498 1 654 533 564 500 55 0 4 2 436 1 858 2 014 713 744 1 05E 06 9 54E 07 4 178 3 186 3 342 1 377 1 408 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 3 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance A 1 2 Single Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8SX H8SX No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 1 acos 0 4 6 108 6 403 6 397 1 57075 495 438 438 0 6 6 079 6 373 6 368 0 4 6 100 6 396 6 390 2 asin 0 4 5 880
195. 4 1437 Sometimes specifying the inline expansion to all functions may reduce efficiency not only in size but also in speed It is because the increase of the function size disables optimization When using automatic inline expansion be careful not to increase the number of nodes as much as possible If a specific function must be inline expanded specify it in the pragma inline statement for efficiency For further details on the SPEED option refer to section 5 4 7 speed Option 5 2 2 Tuning the Optimization Options 1 Using the block transfer instruction eepmov Use the block transfer instruction EEPMOV for the substitute of structures The following shows the execution results Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles SPEED option 3420 1325 SPEED option block transfer instruction 3366 1285 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other select Use EEPMOV in block copy for Miscellaneous option Command line eepmov The EEPMOV instruction includes the following restrictions with the CPU specification EEPMOV B Does not detect interrupt other than NMI EEPMOV W Does not detect interrupt other than NMI If an NMI interrupt occurs during this instruction execution transfer results are not guaranteed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Open the compile list to search for the EEPMOV instruction in the object list Make
196. 4 8 20 Shortens the addressing mode 9 4 9 21 Optimization partially disabled 9 4 10 22 Confirm Optimization Results 9 4 11 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 1 Input Output Options 9 1 1 Input Options Description The optimizing linkage editor can input the following four files according to user usage This is one of the convenient features e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Show entries for Command line Input suboption file name gt Library lt file name gt Binary lt suboption gt file name gt Available Input Files Kind of Files Command line Object Files input Relocatable Files input Library Files library Binary Files binary 1 Object Files Ordinary files output from the compiler or the assembler 2 Relocatable Files Relocatable Address Unresolved Files This file consists of one or more object files and is generated from the optimizing linkage editor with output options Symbols in relocatable files are linked even if other files don t refer to them So in case of using the relocatable files be careful about the above not to increase ROM size by linking unnecessary files Relocatable Files Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 3 Library Files Relocatable Address Unresolved Files This file consists of one or more o
197. 5 09 12 4 51 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 8 Category Subcommand file 00 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim EIL SimDebue H amp S 2600A zl Category Stent mal SS All Loaded Projects 549 C source file G source file Use external subcommand file Ea Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Ssubcommand tle path LL Medi Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIhtPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 N Use external subcommand file Check Box Command Option Function Subcommand Specifies option by subcommand file Specifies no subcommand file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 2 4 Standard Library Generator Options Select Standard Library Tab from the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box 1 Category Mode 300 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library Joru Sim EI SimDebug_H8S 26004 v E Category All Loaded Project E E iria Made Build a library file option changed E C source file E C source file F Assembly source file H 0 Linkage symbol file Library tile gt CONFIGDIRI PROJEC TNAMED lib Modify Options Standard Library cpu 26004 24 outputz CONFIGDIFO PRO JECTNAME
198. 6 219 6 220 1 57075 340 309 309 0 6 5 885 6 195 6 196 0 4 5 884 6 225 6 226 3 atan 0 11 2 167 2 550 2 549 0 27 3 542 4 012 4 011 0 547 3 449 3 919 3 918 0 777 3 643 4 122 4 121 0 975 3 595 4 055 4 054 54 45 4 769 5 308 5 307 154 233 4 828 5 368 5 367 54 45 4 773 5 314 5 313 0 975 3 599 4 061 4 060 0 777 3 647 4 128 4 127 4 atan2 0 3 0 7 4 370 4 811 4 806 0 2 0 1 5 570 6 088 6 085 0 1 0 9 3 146 3 497 3 493 5 cos 0 523333333 2 039 2 347 2 349 1 046666667 2 229 2 658 2 660 1 9625 2 208 2 543 2 547 2 7475 2 222 2 552 2 556 3 5325 2 201 2 408 2 411 4 3175 2 371 2 732 2 737 5 1025 2 256 2 593 2 597 5 8875 5 2 240 2 572 2 576 0 52333333 2 045 2 351 2 353 1 04666667 2 305 2 662 2 664 1 9625 2 214 2 547 2 551 2 7475 2 228 2 556 2 560 3 5325 7 2 108 2 412 2 415 4 3175 2 377 2 736 2 741 5 1025 2 262 2 597 2 601 5 8875 2 246 2 576 2 580 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8SX No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 6 sin 0 523333333 2 385 2 459 2 460 1 046666667 2 464 2 537 2 539 1 9625 2 308 2 377 2 380 2 7475 s 2 650 2 728 2 733 3 5325 2 497 2 571 2 575 4 3175 2 501 2 574 2 578 5 1025 2 361 2 430 2 433 5 8875 2 663 2 741 2 746 0 52333333 2 397 2
199. 800 B R 0 m Show entries for Dialog Menu Command Option Function Section start Specifies each section start address and linkage order Symbol file fsymbol Outputs external definition symbols processed by linkage function to a file in assembler directive format Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 6 Category Verify 00 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim gt SimDebue_H8S 26004 mE El e All Loaded Projects Category GPU information check o ERSTE M J C source file No check H E G source file GP information J Assembly source file Add Modify Linkage symbol file Remove GPU information Tile path Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 TN CPU information check Dialog Menu Command Option Function No check Checks no CPU allocation Check CPU Checks memory allocation according to the CPU information file Use CPU information file CPU Checks memory allocation according to the existing CPU information file CPU information Dialog Menu Subcommand Function ROm RAm Cerates or modifies CPU information file CPU adaress range Specifies memory types and then specifies each memory address CPU information file path D
200. 8s26a3 lib Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 300 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other Input files Relocatable files and object files Add Library files E Hew Tools Hitachi H8 3 Oa O lib c8s26a Insert Modify Remove eee eee Define Wale Add Remove IV Use entry point ms in Use external subcommand file OK Cancel For a detailed information for global options and the related libraries refer to table 1 1 The Relationship between Standard Libraries and Compile Options in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual In HEW2 0 or later global options are set in common for the compiler Assembler and Library Generation Tool and they should not necessarily be set with the optimizing linkage editor If the library in the older version is set on Link Library Tab Category Input Library files the modification as shown above is necessary 11 1 30 Optimizations That Cause Infinite Loops Question Why do infinite loops occur when I upgrade the compiler or turn optimization on Answer Infinite loops may occur due to compiler optimization such as in the following common source in which substitution for a is read from the register instead of from memory preventing the value of d from being reflected when changed via interrupt This optimization is part
201. 8sxn H8sxa H8sxx 117 Rightshit SRI 3 68 28 28 17 17 17 418 SRL 3 110 29 81 18 18 18 419 SRUC 3 23 25 120 SRUI 3 68 gt 26 28 E 421 SRUL 3 110 gt 29 31 122 Register fp regld 3 52 70 80 129 Savelrestore Sfp rgld3 3 46 60 70 i 1424 fp regsv 3 52 70 80 z E E 125 fp rgsv3 3 46 60 70 z 1426 sp regld 3 58 80 90 E 427 sp rgld3 3 52 70 90 z 128 sp regsv 3 58 80 90 129 sp rgsv3 3 52 70 90 430 spregld2 3 50 66 70 i 481 sprgld23 3 40 56 60 3 132 Other SWI 3 124 Remarks Measurements are from entry into the runtime routine until exit 11 1 5 H Family Object Compatibility Question Are there any problems with linking an object compiled with the compile options cpu 300 or 300h 2000 2600 h8sx Answer In essence the H8 CPUs are upward compatible so that an H8 300 object and an H8S 2000 object can be linked and then executed on the H8S 2000 This means that previous resources can continue to be used without modification H8SX objects H8S 2600 objects H8S 2000 objects H8 300H objects H8 300 objects l Object Compatibility Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 6 Questions on Host Machines and OSes Question How can I identify the version of host machine and the OS where the compiler is operated Answer The operating
202. 9 053 18 sqrt 2 885 859 859 3 893 867 867 0 1 889 863 863 19 ceil 0 3 446 390 390 0 6 246 215 215 20 fabs 5 21 21 21 5 21 21 21 21 floor 0 3 246 215 215 0 6 445 393 393 22 fmod 11 1 3 2 367 413 415 500 55 0 4 581 627 629 1 05E 06 9 54E 07 1 388 1 434 1 436 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance A 2 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance A 2 1 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2600 H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 1 acos 0 4 88 070 44 762 47 294 20 277 21 016 1 57075 4 646 3 786 4 284 1 814 1 994 0 6 88 396 44 974 47 506 20 383 21 121 0 4 88 114 44 730 47 262 20 269 21 008 2 asin 0 4 86 796 43 666 46 062 19 681 20 369 1 57075 3 542 2 834 3 196 1 290 1 419 0 6 87 104 43 862 46 258 19 779 20 466 0 4 86 882 43 678 46 074 19 695 20 383 3 atan 0 11 29 172 18 570 19 780 7 784 8 156 0 27 41 948 25 560 27 142 11 126 11 590 0 547 41 590 25 512 27 094 11 099 11 563 0 777 E 43 906 26 862 28 484 11 640 12 114 0 975 41 862 25 714 27 250 11 218 11 669 54 45 53 282 30 720 32 546 13 589 14 113 154 233 53 626 31 070 32 896 13 764 14 288 54 45 53 368 30 730 32 556 13 602 14 126 0 975 41
203. 9 3 868 3 5325 12 660 9 098 9 916 3 456 3 614 4 3175 12 298 8 992 9 702 3 443 3 602 5 1025 11 560 8 350 8 982 3 231 3 379 5 8875 13 382 9 814 10 710 3 702 3 871 7 tan 0 3925 16 682 12 494 13 374 4 768 4 997 1 1775 17 522 13 240 14 198 5 055 5 276 1 9625 16 908 12 634 13 514 4 863 5 074 2 7475 17 696 13 344 14 302 5 111 5 332 8 cosh 0 33 44 886 33 624 35 796 13 237 13 735 0 78 46 018 34 462 36 646 13 354 13 864 0 33 44 904 33 636 35 808 13 243 13 741 0 78 46 036 34 474 36 658 13 360 13 870 9 sinh 0 33 12 538 9 004 9 660 3 375 3 520 0 98 47 040 35 310 37 568 13 689 14 209 0 33 12 538 9 004 9 660 3 375 3 520 0 98 47 058 35 322 37 580 13 695 14 215 10 tanh 0 0033 00 9 772 7 102 7 710 2 553 2 672 11 exp 0 33 21 860 16 184 17 180 6 471 6 713 0 98 22 588 16 740 17 742 6 598 6 846 0 33 E 21 980 16 212 17 208 6 485 6 727 0 98 22 684 16 732 17 734 6 594 6 842 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 12 frexp 0 3 186 102 118 54 60 400 186 102 118 54 60 13 Idexp 0 3 30 1 382 964 1 068 316 337 0 1 100 1 382 964 1 068 316 337 14 log 1 2 18 766 14 272 15 410 5 353 5 575 2 5 18 882 14 476 15 614 5 455 5 677 0 999 19
204. A value of 1024 or greater is recommended After making this change re open the DOS prompt 11 1 4 Runtime Routine Specifications and Execution Speed Question Tell me about the speed of the runtime routines provided by the compiler Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Answer The following is a list of runtime routine speeds speeds when using internal ROM and RAM The options for creating a library are default specifications List of Runtime Routine Speeds 1 No Type Function Name 300 300HN 300HA 2000N 2000A H8sxn H8sxa H8sxx 1 Add ADDD 3 1002 746 480 206 208 175 175 175 Bo SADDF 3 426 216 174 102 104 87 87 87 3 ADDL 3 76 A 4 Subtract SUBD 3 1212 618 626 268 272 240 226 226 5 SUBF 3 448 224 228 106 108 A 91 91 6 SUBL 3 76 gt i p 7 Multiply MULD 3 1886 984 992 606 610 539 539 539 B MULF 3 702 388 392 220 222 192 192 192 go MULI 3 102 40 MULL 3 304 130 134 95 88 3 41 MULXSB 3 60 i 42 MULXSW 3 168 p 38 MULXUW 3 148 44 CMLI 3 142 gt 15 Divide DIVC 3 82 s 46 DIVD 3 7304 2544 356 1236 1238 1248 1248 1248 47 DIVF 3 1688 1176 1180 551 553 649 649 649 48 DIVI 3 262 2 z 49 DIVL 3 1068 154 162 95 99 91 91 91 20 DIVUI 3 208 z p a DIVUL
205. AS Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 H8 300 NRM ADV NRM ADV 14 log 1 2 43 214 25 574 26 854 10 931 11 341 2 5 7 43 360 26 242 27 522 11 265 11 675 0 999 44 000 25 250 26 530 10 769 11 179 0 3 F 43 580 25 936 27 216 11 112 11 522 15 log10 1 2 45 900 27 160 28 580 11 654 12 117 2 5 46 022 27 808 29 228 11 978 12 441 0 999 46 718 26 858 28 278 11 503 11 966 0 3 46 266 27 516 28 936 11 832 12 295 16 modf 256 3 4 458 4 044 4 484 1 795 1 945 0 032 4 148 3 712 4 148 1 632 1 780 10000 2345 z 4 434 3 898 4 338 1 722 1 872 17 pow 2 3 4 2 96 904 56 372 58 948 23 829 24 677 45 2 5 97 438 55 556 58 132 23 432 24 280 4 56 3 101 770 59 090 62 090 24 943 25 891 85 55 476 100 174 59 292 62 206 25 111 26 039 18 sqrt 2 30 274 9 906 10 040 4 940 5 000 3 30 374 9 922 10 056 4 948 5 008 0 1 x 29 250 9 780 9 914 4 877 4 937 19 ceil 0 3 3 720 3 196 3 572 1 451 1 578 0 6 2 238 1 816 2 034 827 915 20 fabs 5 214 166 188 102 112 5 214 166 188 102 112 21 floor 0 3 2 238 1 816 2 034 827 915 0 6 3 720 3 190 3 566 1 448 1 575 22 fmod 11 1 3 2 2 716 2 070 2 258 1 047 1 127 500 55 0 4 3 724 2 524 2 712 1 274 1 354 1 05E 06 9 54E 07 7 624 3 904 4 092 1 964 2 044 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 9 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arith
206. ATH PATHS C Hew2 Tools Hitachi H8 5_0_1 bin RET This should be added to an existing PATH 2 Setting CH38 This indicates the location of the system include file used by the compiler Example If the system include file is located in C Hew2 Tools Hitachi H8 5_0_1 include c gt set CH38 C Hew2E Tools Hitachi H8 5_0_1 include RET 3 Setting CH38TMP Set the intermediate file directory for files generated by the compiler Example If the intermediate file directory is C temp c gt set CH38TMP C temp If this is not specified intermediate files are created in the current directory Usually this specification is not required however sometimes it is necessary such as when the disk space in the current directory is insufficient Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 4 Setting H38CPU Specify the CPU operation mode Example To specify a CPU operation mode 2600a 24 c gt set H38CPU 2600a 24 This designation can also be specified in a compiler option If this specification differs from a compiler option the compiler option takes priority Remarks If the message insufficient area for environment variables is displayed at the compiler startup with this environmental specification modify the settings as follows Open DOS Prompt Properties MS DOS Prompt Properties Increase the initial allocation size for the Conventional memory environment variable
207. B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Remarks This option is valid for the Optimizing Linkage Editor Ver 9 0 or later 9 3 Effective Options 9 3 1 Output to Unused Area Description The optimizing linkage editor can output any data to unused area This is useful for ROM transfer and this is useful to detect an abnormal interrupt by executing unused area with no data when program hangs A 1 2 or 4 byte value is valid for output data size If an odd number of digits are specified the upper digits are extended with O to use it as an even number of digits The maximum size of output data is 4 byte If a value over 4 byte is specified the lower 4 byte is used This option is available only when output file is S type file Binary or HEX e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Specify value filled in unused area Command line space lt numerical value e Examples 1 Divide file and specify the range to fill unused area with data by Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Divided output files output C bin Debug a bin 00 OF FFF 2 Specify the filling data by Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Specify value filled in unused area space FF The example of the following page Specify value filled in unused area H FF gt shows how unused area is filled with data Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 10 REJ05B0464 0
208. Check this condition before specifying this option To output the EEPMOV instruction only in a part of the structure data transfer specify the eepmov built in function Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Use EEPMOV in block copy Command line eepmov Example To substitute the structure s2 to s1 C C program struct S char cc short ss long 11 long 112 sl1 s2 void main sl s2 Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified PUSH L ER2 STM L ERA ER6 SP MOV _s2 ERO MOV L s2 ER5 MOV _s1 ER1 MOV B 12 R4L SUB ER2 ER2 MOV L _s1 ER6 MOV 12 R2L EEPMOV B JSR Q MVN 3 24 Expanded into EEPMOV instruction Processed by a run time routine call LDM L SP ERA ER6 POP L ER2 RTS RTS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 30 22 30 22 22 Specified 28 24 26 22 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 28 26 22 Specified 22 22 18 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 117 102 270 224 256 Specified 58 55 226 210 168 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 66 66 57 Specified 24 24 24 5 4 7 speed Option Description The compiler usually outputs an ob
209. D value 19 999 TPU TSTR BIT CSTO 1 TPUO start while 1 Ox00000a6c whi leC TPUO TSR BIT TGFD OxO0000a7 TPUO TSR BIT TGFD 0 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 1 When the TGIED TGR Interrupt Enable D bit in TIER Timer Interrupt Enable register becomes 1 the interrupt is enabled 2 Setthe value of TGRD 3 Start the TPUO timer 4 Clear the compare match flag Program execution The program waits until a compare match occurs When a compare match occurs the program passes control to the following interrupt routine The interrupt routine services the interrupt lowers the interrupt priority level in IMFA and returns control to the program Interrupt processing can be completed in this way The program can then be ready to accept the next compare match interrupt For further information refer to the pertinent hardware manual In accordance with the HEW specification when an interrupt occurs the PC stops at the beginning of the function that has caused the interrupt When simulating a cyclic handler you need to advance the PC at each cycle by using the Go command or similar method a intpre c vector 91 TGIOD TPUD 0x00000456 yet seem vet tf void INT TGIOD TPU void OxOO000045c printf 3d timexn a 0x00000470 att 0x00000478 INTC IPRF BIT _TPUO 0 return vector 3 TCIO0V TPUO mad af TAUE TqarDL TAL d S E fu fnm n ET
210. ES W 1 2 byte data T URES B 1 1 byte data Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 12 10 12 10 10 Specified 10 8 10 8 8 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 8 8 6 Specified 8 8 6 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 11 9 22 18 18 Specified 10 8 20 16 16 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 8 8 7 Specified 8 8 7 5 4 2 Extended Interpretation of Multiplication Division Specifications Size O Speed O Description The code expansion of multiplication division operations is output by expanding interpretation of the ANSI standard When this option is specified calculation results may be different from those without this option because the interpretation differs as listed below Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Operand Size of us1 us2 at Operation for H8S 2600 Expanded Interpretation ANSI Standard Interpretation unsigned us1 us2 operated as unsigned long us1 us2 operated as unsigned short short us1 us2 Output example MOV W _us1 Rd MOV W 9 us2 Rs MULXU W Rs ERd MOV L ERd Q ul unsigned long ul ul us1 us2 The result of us1 us2 is assigned to
211. ESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Example To refer the variable b by the two bytes pointer C C program Specifying in key word abs16 int a int ptrl16 b int d void func void void func void specifies ptr16 specifies abs16 int ptrl6 amp a Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified _a 32 _b 16 4 a ER1 _b 16 ERO R1 _b 16 10 8 ERO R1 R0 _b 16 ERO ERO ERO _c 16 10 8 ERO _b 16 R0 ERO ERO _c 16 Object Size Comparison byte H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 36 36 24 Specified 34 34 24 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 23 19 16 Specified 22 18 16 Remarks and Notes This keyword is valid only with H8SX advanced mode and H8SX maximum mode This keyword must be specified before an indirection operator Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 67 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 4 16 Boundary alignment value and boundary alignment Size O Speed O Description The align option relocates variables so as to reduce space by boundary alignment The align 4 option divides a data section into a 4 byte boundary alignment section a 2 byte boundary alignment section and a 1 byte boundary alignment section align 4 is valid only with H8SX So size efficiency and execution speed are im
212. Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion struct Vector int x int y int z void main void struct Vector plus Vector Vector struct Vector const struct Vector void main void struct Vector a struct Vector b struct Vector c a plus Vector Vector amp b amp c return struct Vector plus Vector Vector struct Vector const this struct Vector vec static struct Vector ret this gt x vec x this gt y vec gt y this z vec z Reference using the this pointer return amp ret Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 7 Overloading of Functions Development and Size Reduction O Speed O maintenance e Important Points In C you can overload functions i e give the same name to different functions Specifically this feature is effective when you use functions with the same processing but with different types of arguments Be careful not to give the same name to functions with no commonality because it is sure to cause malfunctions The use of this function will not influence the size or processing speed e Example of Use In the following example the first and second parameters are added and the resultant value is used as a return value All the functions have the same name add but different parameter and return val
213. FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOC S1070040000004268E 10700440000042888 10700480000042482 Range of Data Existing Range of Data NOT Existing S113FFBAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFT3 S113FFBAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB3 S113FFARFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF53 S113FFBAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF43 S113FFCAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF33 S113FFDAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF23 S1 I3FFEAFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFI3 S108FFFAFFFFFFFFFFFF 3 8030400F8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples of Binary Files As the following examples the unused areas in the range of data existing are changed from 0x00 to OxFF If this option is not specified the records in the range of data not existing are not output If this option is specified OxFF records are added to the area in the range of data not existing according to the output range specification in the output option Divided output files NOT Specify value filled in unused area 00100 OO 00 OO 00 00 00 0O 0O 0O 00 OO 0O 00 OO QO OQ Le 000110 00 00 Q0 00 00 00 00 O0 OO 00 OO QO 00 ON 0O OQ Le 000120 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 O0 OO 00 OO QO 00 ON OO OO Le 000130 00 00 00 00 00 O0 OO 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO Le 000140 00 00 04 6E 00 O0 04 70 00 00 04 72 00 OU Od 74 n p r t 000150 00 00 04 76 00 00 04 78 00 00 04 7A 00 00 O4 7C v x z 000160 00 00 04 7E 00 00 04 30 00
214. For further details refer to section 5 4 1 Using 1 Byte enum Type Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 2 Specifying the number of parameter passing registers Increase the number of parameter passing registers from 2 to 3 which results in the following performance characteristics Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles 2 parameter passing registers 3048 1580 3 parameter passing registers 3034 1528 Specification method Dialog menu On CPU tab select Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 Command line regparam 3 These performance characteristics are related to the number of function parameters in the program Choose between the 2 and 3 options by determining the number of parameters that are allocated to registers the number of available registers and the types of available registers If it is not possible to check all parameters try different options and select the one that produces the smallest object size When combined with the specification of the 1 byte enum type this item results in the following performance characteristics Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Default 3048 1580 1 byte enum type 3034 1527 3 parameter passing registers For further details refer to section 5 4 3 Specifying the Number of Parameter Passing Registers 3 Expanding the number of variable allocation regist
215. H 0000F000 Data size ho sz Count D1 e File input action example Let s see the following practical action example As the result of the above setting the breakpoint is at H 00000814 and the input file contains H FF Run the program using the Go command or similar method Source code fragment E IntBP c int b Ox00000808 ai main void Ox0000080c a 1l 0x00000814 b 9 0x0000081c i 00000820 n abort void Ox00000824 You can see that when the PC reaches H 000008 14 the break condition is satisfied and as a consequence the memory contents of address H F000 change Address Data Ox0000F000 00 00 v x000 FF Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW File output setting example The method for file output setting in the Set Break dialog box is similar to the method for file input setting For file output breakpoints PC breakpoint is also used so that a break condition is considered as satisfied when the PC reaches the following address Click on the Action tab select File Output in the Action Type field specify an output file name an output address and other items and then click on the OK button Condition tab Action tab Set Break Set Break Condition Action Condition Action Break type Action type File Output z Address Ho000081 4 Count pi Output file fe hew2 Samplet dat z
216. H 14 8 Q si2 32 MOV H 14 8 _si2 32 RTS RTS Notes and Remarks This option is valid only when the CPU type is H8SX or H8S without legacy v4 option 1 When this option is specified inline expansion is only applied to the functions specified with pragma inline or keyword inline included in the file specified by lt file name gt If the speed inline option is specified simultaneously inline expansion is applied to all possible functions in the file 2 If a global function is defined twice or more in some files specified by this option no operation is guaranteed using a single function definition randomly selected for inline expansion 3 The extension of the file name specified by file name cannot be omitted 4 A wild card or cannot be specified for file name 5 wm If a file has pragma asm endasm pragma inline asm or __asm it will not be expanded 3 7 6 Division of Optimizing Ranges Description When the Division of Optimizing Ranges option is specified the compiler divides the optimizing ranges of the large size functions into some blocks When the Division of Optimizing Ranges option is NOT specified the compiler does not divide the optimizing ranges When the optimizing range is expanded the object performance is generally improved although the compilation time becomes longer However if registers are insufficient the object performance may not be improved Use this option at perfo
217. H8S H8 Standard Toolchain the warning will not be issued When you select BUILD ALL in HEW Linkage editor generates a standard library at first For the first project you created it is necessary to build a standard library and so you must select the Build a library file in the Standard Library mode of the HEW OPTIONS H8S H8 Standard Toolchain However a standard library is already created in the file for which BUILD ALL is once specified and so the automatic generation of a standard library is not necessary for this file In this case since a standard library is automatically generated for each BUILD ALL specification the existing library is backed up If you select the Use an existing library file this warning message can be avoided Also this can save the time required for automatically generating a standard libray on BUILD ALL 0 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt Category Mode All Loaded Project e amp m sis Mode Build a library file option changed Build a library file tanvtime meas tile Build a library file option changed G source file Use an existing library file e Assembly source file Do not add a library file Linkage symbol file Library file SACONFIGDIRAES4PRO JECTNAMEJ Iib Modify Options Standard Library cpu H8SXA 24 output CONF
218. IGDIR PROJECTNAME lib reent head runtime new stdio stdlib zi owes Standard Library Dialog Box Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 57 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 3 5 Size of Memory Used as Heap Question Tell me how to calculate the size of the memory used as heap Answer The size of the memory used as heap is the total of memory areas assigned by the memory management library functions calloc malloc ralloc new in a C C program However these functions use four bytes as management area each time they are called Calculate the heap size by adding this size to the size of the actually assigned area The compiler manages the heap in 1024 byte unit Calculate the size of the area allocated as heap HEAPSIZE as follows HEAPSIZE 1024 x n n2 1 area size allocated by memory management library Management area size HEAPSIZE The I O library functions use the memory management library functions in internal processing The size of the area allocated during I O is 516 bytes x maximum number of concurrently open files Note The area freed by the memory management library function free or delete is reused by a memory management library function for allocation Even if the total size of the free area is sufficient repeating allocations causes the free area to be divided into smaller ones making the allocation of newly requested large areas impossible To prevent this situation use the heap area acco
219. ML Before 10 10 8 After 10 10 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 2 Operations 6 2 1 Unifying Common Expressions Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by unifying common components in multiple arithmetic expressions Description If common expressions occur in multiple expressions the results of the operation on the first expression should be used in the second and subsequent expressions which reduces the number of arithmetic operations performed This improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed If a common expression occurs three or more times in a local variable the compiler performs optimization Example Add the variables x y and z store the results in the variable a Similarly add variables x y and w store the results in the variable b C language program before optimization C language program after optimization unsigned char a b w X Y Z unsigned char a b w x y Zz void func void void func void a xt y z unsigned char tmp b xt ytw tmp xty a tmp z b tmp tw Expanded into assembly language code Expanded into assembly language code before optimization after optimization Funes _func MOV _x 32 R1L OV MOV Q y 32 RO0H OV ADD R1L ROH ADD MOV ROH R1H OV MOV Q z 32 RO0L ADD ADD ROL ROH OV MOV ROH _a 32
220. Moving Invariant Expression from the Inside to the Outside of a Loop eese 6 29 6 3 4 Merging Loop Conditions sinsi eiie ete deri tei tci eret eiecit 6 31 64k Polmtersztuii eee RU UR mei pde pU eb ted stu m eim 6 32 64 1 Using Pointer Variables te one ap D DUREPIROP REED DE IER 6 32 6 Data Structures ie RAI I ete seti pec ote e waa 6 34 6 5 1 Ensuring Data Compatibility essent enne Er E TEETE ToS rennen ene 6 34 6 5 2 Techniques for Data Initialization eese enne enne trennen nennen tenete enne nns 6 36 6 5 3 Unifying the Initialization of Array Elements seseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeen nennen nennen rennen 6 37 6 5 4 Passing Parameters as a Structure Address nennen nennen eene ene 6 39 65 5 Assigning Structures t Registers cus Deere Ite en Der n ite ree P eee crine 6 40 6 6 Functions zoo e oh ace DA meae eene ENG eee 6 42 6 6 1 Improving the Program Location in Which Functions Are Defined sse 6 42 6 62 Macro calls eene tot e UR D DEN UO OD GR I e REED 6 44 6 6 3 Declaring a Prototype onis sese tee ete e iet eee eite irte geriet ete e e eere rece ants 6 45 6 6 4 Optimization of Tail Recursions essessessssseseseeeeeeeeren eene rennen E oes ET EESTE SEE EEEE Ee re enne ene 6 47 6 6 5 Improving the Way Parameters Are Passed sese nennen nennen eene ene 6 48 6 7 JBranch s 5nsns nest roe eR ROURG DU nRIRER Gedeo
221. NC 1 R1 _fune MOV R1 ERO MOV _a 32 ERO RTS MOV ERO R1 INC 1 R1 SUB RO RO MOV R1 ERO MOV RO _a 32 RTS BRA _func 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 54 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 26 20 24 20 20 After 24 18 22 18 18 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 18 18 14 After 16 16 12 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 21 17 40 34 34 After 19 15 36 30 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 14 14 13 After 12 12 11 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 55 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 56 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Section 7 Using HEW This chapter describes the use of HEW for build and simulation related processes Note that the supported functions and methods vary from one HEW version to another The appropriate version is indicated under Comments for each topic The following table shows a list of the items relating to the use of HEW No Category Item Section 1 Builds Regenerating and Editing Automatically Generated Files 7 1 1 2 Makefile Output 7 1 2 3 Makefile Input 7
222. Not specified 44 33 66 52 66 Specified 44 33 66 52 66 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 23 24 18 Specified 23 24 18 Remarks In the above example codes with improved speed and reduced size are generated because the table method is adopted However depending upon the value of a better codes may be output when this option is not specified 7 Disabling Run Time Routine Calls Size X Speed O Description When this option is specified arithmetic operations comparison expressions or assignment expressions are expanded into codes without using a run time routine for some expressions this option is disabled Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options expression Command line speed expression Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Example To perform a multiplication C C program long a b char void main a b c Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified ER2 ER3 SP Q c 32 RO0L RO ERO Q b 32 ER1 QSMULL 3 24 _b 32 ER1 E0 R2 ERO _a 32 Object Size Comparison byte R1 ER2 E1 R3 RO ER3 R1 ERO R2 E0 R3 E0 ERO _a 32 SP ER2 ER3 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 32 26 32 26 38 Specified 52 46 48 42 46 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not s
223. O SP ER2 ER3 b 32 ER0 RO R1L H R1L L ERO c 32 ER0 RO RIL H R1L L ERO d 32 ERO0 RO RIL H R1L L ER ili UJ UJ UJ E UJ UU UJ E ooo JJ UJ Co Ht ZU UU CO db WD WD co dk E UJ UJ UJ E UJ UJ UU UJ E UU UJ CJ CU E UD E E Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 50 36 60 50 50 After 50 36 48 40 40 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 32 32 24 After 32 32 24 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 36 28 156 64 64 After 36 28 56 48 48 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 20 20 18 After 20 20 18 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Remarks and Notes This technique is effective for the compilers before Ver 3 0 Improvements with the compiler Ver 4 0 or higher made variables be assigned to registers and therefore using local variables may expand the compiler the same assembly language code Assembly expansion code object size and execution speed in this section code the results of compiling by the compiler Ver 3 0 other than H8SX In some cases the local variable to which an external variable is assigned is not assigned to a register Check the object list to determine which local variables are register assigned 6 2 7 Assigning an f to float Type Const
224. O O 5 4 1 2 Extended interpretation of multiplication division specifications O O 5 4 2 3 Specifies the number of parameter passing registers A A 5 4 3 4 Increases the number of variable allocation registers A A 5 4 4 5 Optimizes external variables 5 4 5 6 Block transfer instruction X O 5 4 6 7 SPEED option 5 4 7 8 Speed improving expansion of register save restore codes X O 5 4 7 1 9 Speed improving code expansion of shift expressions X O 5 4 7 2 10 Substitute code expansion of structures and double type X O 5 4 7 3 data 11 Speed efficiency code expansion for switch statement X O 5 4 7 4 12 Inline expansion of small size functions X O 5 4 7 5 13 Speed efficiency code expansion of loop expressions A O 5 4 7 6 14 Disables run time routine calls X O 5 4 7 7 15 Allocates registers to global variables A 5 4 8 16 Controls output of register save restore codes at function O O 5 4 9 entry exit points 17 Specifies inline expansion of functions X O 5 4 10 18 Uses 8 bit absolute address area O O 5 4 11 19 Uses 16 bit absolute address area O O 5 4 12 20 Allocates to indirect memory area O X 5 4 13 21 Extended memory indirect O X 5 4 14 22 2 bytes pointer O O 5 4 15 23 Boundary alignment O O 5 4 16 24 Unifies constants strings 5 4 17 1 25 Eliminates unreferenced variables functions 5 4 17 2 26 Optimizes access to variables 5 4 17 3 27 Optimizes access to functions 5 4 17 4 28 Optimizes register save restore code
225. OV MOV Q w 32 RO0L ADD ADD ROL RIH OV MOV R1H _b 32 RTS RTS Q x 32 RO0H Q y 32 RO0L ROL ROH Q z 32 RO0L ROH ROL ROL _a 32 Q w 32 RO0L ROL ROH ROH _b 32 UJ UJ UJ UU UJ UU UJ UJ tU CJ UJ UJ UJ UJ UU UJ UJ CJ UJ Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 44 32 46 34 34 After 46 34 44 32 32 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 44 44 32 After 46 46 34 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 32 25 66 52 52 After 33 26 64 50 50 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 21 21 19 After 22 22 19 Remarks and Notes Although the compiler performs the optimization by unifying the common expressions for local variables it does not perform that for external variables 6 2 2 Improving the Condition Determination Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points ROM efficiency can be improved by evaluating similar condition expressions in one operation Description Similar condition expressions should be evaluated in on operation to reduce the number of times condition determination and condition expressions are evaluated This improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Determine the logical product of variables a and b return the r
226. OV B void src unsigned char size Size can be a variable void eepmovw void dst const Always expanded to EEPMOV W void src unsigned int size Size can be a variable void eepmovi void dst const Expanded to EEPMOV mye gt void src unsigned int size Can resume transfer after an Interrupt Size can be a variable 2 EEPMOV void eepromb void dst const Sets the value to ECR instruction void src unsigned char size volatile Expanded to EEPMOV B EEPMOV P W with ECR unsigned char ecr unsigned char J ecrval Size can be a variable Setting void eepromw void dst const void src unsigned int size volatile unsigned char ecr unsigned char ecrval EEPMOV void eepromb epr void dst const Sets the value to ECR EPR instruction void src unsigned char size volatile Expanded to EEPMOV B EEPMOV P W with EPR unsigned char ecr unsigned char i and ECR ecrval volatile unsigned char epr Size can be a variable Setting unsigned char eprval void eepromw_epr void dst const void src unsigned int size volatile unsigned char ecr unsigned char ecrval volatile unsigned char epr unsigned char eprval Note 1 valid only with H8SX Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example 1 eepmov eepmovb eepmovw To perform a block transfer from the address indicated by the second parameter to the address indicated by the first parameters in bytes indicated by the third parameter
227. Options E G source file E Assembly sourg Linkage sym Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list GCONFIGDIRX PRO JECTNAME map show isymbolreference nooptimize start Also specify here the output of symbol optimization information and the number of symbol references to this list Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program In the next step specify in the Link Library Tab Category Section the way files are to be assigned at linkage Here change the address of section to which section B is assigned to H OOFF0000 First click the Address field and press the Modify button to specify the address Section address 2 x Address OxFFOoO0 4 Hexadecimal Sen The address is modified as shown below Standard Toolchain Configuration Debug hd e All Loaded Projects sample 7 3 C source file Address E dbsctc intpre c resetpre c PIntPRG P E G sample c OCSDSEC D B IR sbrk c Default Options C source file Assembly source file E Linkage symbol file Import Export Options Link Library noprelink romzD R nom listz CONFIGDIRI S PRO JEC TNAME map showzsymbolreference nooptim
228. P d i ER5 1 R0 RO ER5 L8 8 RO R1 ERI ER1 ER4 _a 32 ER4 ROL ROL _b 32 ER4 1 R1 R1 ER5 ER5 RO 10 R0 L6 8 SP ER4 ER5 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization fung ER4 ER5 SP _i ER5 9 RO RO ER5 L8 8 RO R1 ERI ER1 ER4 _a 32 ER4 ROL ROL G b 32 ER4 1 R1 R1 ER5 ER5 RO L6 8 SP ER4 ER5 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 46 30 54 38 38 After 48 34 52 36 36 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 30 30 24 After 36 36 32 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 163 121 624 366 386 After 164 132 582 324 324 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 125 107 98 After 106 118 108 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 27 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 3 2 Selecting a Repeat Control Statementt Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by using a do while statement for loop statements that are executed at least once Description If a loop statement is executed at least once it should be coded using a do while statement to reduce the determination of the loop count by one operation which improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Copy the contents of the array p2 to the
229. PEAT AWHILE expansions Structured show structured Outputs structured assembly expansions Code show code Outputs the lines that exceed the number of source statement lines to be displayed in the object code display Cross reference cross_refernce Outputs a cross reference list Section section Outputs a section information list Note If default is selected for each option directive in the source list is specified 4 Tuning Tab mbler Options Debug amp C Assembly input file Source Object List Tuning Other CPU Option to set Cm Specify all symbols Add Modify Option to set Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa 8 abs8 Specifies 8 bit absolute address symbol 2aa 16 abs16 Specifies 16 bit absolute address symbol Note Selects external reference symbols or external definition symbols Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Specify all symbols Check Box Function Assigns the specified size to the external reference symbols and external definition symbols Assigns a specific size to each symbol or does not assign a size 5 Other Tab Source Object List Tuning Other Jopu Miscellaneous options Remove unreferenced external symbols 1 User defined options Miscellaneous options Dialog Menu Check Box Command Option Function Remove unreferenced y exclude Disables unreferenced
230. R RR AR kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck Kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck kk k ke kk ko k k ke k kk ke ke ke ek f ay FILE iodefine h ay DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 DESCRIPTION Definition of I O Register y CPU TYPE H8S 2621 7 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 9 ay BRK IKK KKK IK KR I KKK KR I KAR A A IK AR ko kk ko IK A I A I I I KK RR RK ARR ARR ARR ARR ARR ARR ARR AA eee pE H8S 2623 Group Include File Ver 1 1 af BRK IKK KK KI KKK I KK RK A IK AR A AK AR ke kk kc I A IA I I I f struct st_hcan struct HACN union gx MCR af unsigned char BYTE Byte Access struct Jh Bit Access unsigned char SLPME f SLPME unsigned char she f AU unsigned char SLPM 1 SLPM unsigned char 2 x unsigned char MSM 1 x MSM Xf unsigned char HALT 1 HALT unsigned char RST 1 RST BIT Ny MCR mor union GSR 2A unsigned char BYTE Byte Access struct Bit Access unsigned char 4 5 xy unsigned char id RSF NU unsigned char 15 MSEF unsigned char slz fF SRWF unsigned char 2d L BOF yd BIT GSR omitted define volatile struct st hcan OxFFF800 Address define volatile union un scrx OxFFFDB4 Address define volatile union un sbycr OxFFFDE4 Address define volatile union un syscr OxFFFDES5 Address define volatile union un_s
231. R1 SP ERO 8 RO0 GSFTOD 3 24 ERO ER1 L5 ER2 SP ERO GSADDD 3 24 GSDTOF 3 24 ERO _a 32 16 R7 ER2 H 3FF00000 H 00000000 1 1 func MOV MOV L JSR MOV L RTS RES L RES L Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _b 32 ERO 1065353216 ERI1 SADDF 3 24 ERO _a 32 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 76 66 70 60 62 After 28 24 28 24 26 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 78 72 66 After 30 28 24 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 351 337 798 770 1076 After 124 119 260 250 352 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 259 260 261 After 96 97 103 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 21 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 2 8 Specifying Constants in Shift Operations Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points For shift operations if the shift count is a variable the compiler calls a runtime routine to process the operation If the shift count is a constant the compiler does not call a runtime routine which significantly improves the execution speed Description If a constant is resolved the compiler can process it directly Example Shift the variable data by 8 bits C language program before optimization int data int sht 8 void func void data data lt lt sht Expa
232. RO RTS DATA f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 78 64 66 62 76 After 56 36 56 34 34 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 94 78 58 After 50 50 36 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 51 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle 6 7 2 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 31 28 74 54 68 After 27 18 42 26 26 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 24 32 24 After 19 20 18 Coding a Program in Which Case Statements Jump to the Same Label Size O Speed O Stack size A Important Points case statement containing the same expression should be grouped together to minimize the number of branch instructions and to reduce the object size Description In the case of an if then expansion method for a switch statement the smaller the number of branch instructions the smaller the code size and the greater is program efficiency Example Assign a value to JJ depending on the value of c long 11 void func void char c switch c case 0 case 1 case 2 case 3 case 4 C language program before optimization C language program after optimization long 11 void func void cher ci switch c case 0 case 1 11 0 case 2 case 3 ll 1 case 4 11 2 break break break
233. RO ER1 ER6 ERO co p E se Doe D DH func01 8 E E RO ER6 R6 ER1 ERO The optimizing linkage editor replaces an instruction with a smaller size instruction when the code size of the displacement or immediate value can be reduced As compile is performed for each file the distance between the address of the instruction which refers a variable and the address of the variable define is unknown As the address of instruction and variable is determined at linkage the distance between them can be calculated and this optimization can be performed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Use short disp imm Command line optimize short format Examples C Source Programs The following example shows substitution for array and the address of variables is stored to variables filel c short str1 4 short str2 4 void main void void funcO01 short void func02 void char g cl unsigned long g 11 void main void ant i for i O i lt 4 i strl i str2 i funcOl i 1 func02 void funcOl short s1 strl s1 s1 str2 s1 s1 4 void func02 void g ll unsigned long amp g cl Examples Codes Examples of codes before and after this optimization are as follows 32 bit accesses are changed to 16 8 bit access r
234. Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization funos Object Size Table byte 2 SP 11 32 ER1 1 16 SP ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL ERO ERO 2 8 ROL ERO GER1 2 SP 1 _func Expanded into assembly language code after optimization 2 SP _11 32 ER1 1 16 SP ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL 8 8 ROL Or 1s ERO ERO 1 8 ROL L13 8 ERO ERO 2 8 ROL ERO ER1 2 SP H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 49 45 63 59 69 After 45 43 57 53 61 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 55 55 47 After 51 51 45 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 33 30 82 72 68 After 20 18 82 72 68 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 24 24 23 After 13 14 12 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 53 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Remarks The above performance measurements are based on the case where c 4 This technique can be used for the compilers before Ver 3 0 Improvements with the compiler Ver 4 0 or higher made it possible to group together the jumping destinations of case statements and therefore the compiler expands the same assembly language code other tha
235. S Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 26 20 26 20 24 Specified 24 18 24 18 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 26 26 20 Specified 24 24 18 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 24 20 62 54 136 Specified 23 19 60 52 184 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 14 14 13 Specified 14 14 12 5 4 3 Specifying the Number of Parameter Passing Registers Size A Speed A Description The number of registers to assign parameters can be set with this specification When a parameter is assigned to a register the access size is reduced than the case assigned to a stack On the other hand when the number of parameter passing registers is increased the work register area is reduced and sometimes such as at a complicated operation data is not assigned to registers In this case the object program efficiency is lowered The number of parameter passing registers can also be specified with an option Compare execution results of both specifications and adopt the better one Specification Method Dialog menu CPU tab Change number of parameter passing registers from 2 default to 3 Command line regparam 3 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimizatio
236. SH and options POP instruction at a higher speed Switch speed switch Develops the switch statement at a higher speed judgement Shift to multiple speed shift Develops the shift operation at a higher speed Struct speed struct Performs the expansion of structures and substitution assignment expression at a higher speed Expression speed expression Performs arithmetic operation comparison and substitution expression processing at a higher speed Loop speed loop1 Deletion of induction variables optimization Loop unrolling speed loop2 Deletion of induction variables and loop expansion Inline function Maximum node speed inline lt data gt Automatic inline expansion s Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 57 RENESAS REJ05B0464 0300 Section 4 HEW Generate file for inter module optimization Check Box Command Option goptimize Function Outputs inter module optimization add on information Outputs no inter module optimization add on information Switch statement Specifies the switch statement expansion method Dialog Menu Command Option Function Auto case auto Determines switch statement expansion method depending on the speed option specification If then case ifthen Performs switch statement expansion in if then method Table case table Performs switch statement expansion in table jump method Function call Selects the function call method Dialo
237. SR f2 8 SUB W RO RO SUB W RO RO MOV W R0 Q a 32 MOV W R0 GQ a 32 RTS RTS file2 c 5 4 18 Disable of Inter Module Optimization The inter module optimizer supports functions to disable a specific optimization function When this function is used for a program in which a specific optimization item should be disabled detailed specification can be provided and then the disable of optimization is performed concisely The inter module optimizer supports the following functions to disable optimization items Optimization Disabled Item Unit to Specify Dialog Menu Subcommand Disables deletion of unreferenced Symbol name Elimination of dead code symbol forbid symbols Disables elimination of same codes Function Name Elimination of same code samecode forbid Disables allocation of short absolute Variable name Use of short addressing to variable forbid address areas Disables indirect address calls Function name Use of indirect call jump to function forbid Disables register reallocations Address size Memory allocation absolute_forbid RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 75 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 76 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques In addition to the optimization performed by the H8S and H8 300 C C compiler the performance of a program can f
238. Specification Default options are used when option specification methods are not described in each section Measurement Conditions Conditions H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8SX Bus Width 16 16 32 Access State to Memory 2 1 1 Fetch Size 32 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Following is a list of effic ient programming techniques No Type Item Size Speed Referenced Section 1 Type Using 1 byte data types char unsigned char O O 6 1 1 2 declarations Using unsigned variables O O 6 1 2 3 Suppressing redundant type conversions O O 6 1 3 4 Using the const qualifier O O 6 1 4 5 Using consistent variable sizes O O 6 1 5 6 Specifying in file functions as statics O 6 1 6 7 Operations Unifying common expressions O O 6 2 1 8 Improving the condition determination O O 6 2 2 9 Condition determination using substitution values O A 6 2 3 10 Using a suitable algorithm O O 6 2 4 11 Using formulas O O 6 2 5 12 Using local variables O O 6 2 6 13 Assigning an f to float type constants O O 6 2 7 14 Specifying constants in shift operations O O 6 2 8 15 Using shift operations O O 6 2 9 16 Unifying consecutive ADD instructions O O 6 2 10 17 Loop Selecting a Loop counter O O 6 3 1 18 processing Selecti
239. THF Specifies mathf h stdarg h Head STDARG Specifies stdarg h stdio h Head STDIO Specifies stdio h stdlib h Head STDLIB Specifies stdlib h string h Head STRING Specifies string h ios EC Head lOS Specifies ios EC complex EC Head COMPREX Specifies complex EC string EC Head CPPSTRING Specifies string EC Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 54 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 3 Category Object H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 21x C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library OPU Deb gt Configuration Debug Y E1 All Loaded Projects E 5 Sample E C source file El C source file E Assembly source file Ez Linkage symbol file Category O Ver 4 0 Optimization technology generation Generate reentrant library Section Program section P z Store string data in P Const section Mul Div operation specification Group by alignment Based on ANSI 6bit 1 6bit 1 Gbit x Auto Output file path S CONFIGDIR PRO JECTNAME lib Modify Options Standard Library cpu 2600A 24 output CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME lib head runtime new stdio stdlib TN Ver 4 0 Optimization technology generation supported by the HEW Ver 4 0 or later Check Box Command Option Function legacy v4 Output object which is compatible with that generated by Ver 4 0 optimization technology of
240. The execution results are as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler Option 2906 1232 Inter module optimization function Compiler Option 2906 1232 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified The execution speed is improved For further details refer to section 5 4 9 Controlling Output of Register Save Restore Codes at the Function Entry Exit Points Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 2 5 Using the Inline Expansion Features 1 Specifying the inline expansion of a function pragma inline declares a function that performs inline expansion instead of a function call When an inline expansion is provided the execution speed is improved though the object size increases However as described in the section on the automatic inline expansion of the SPEED option specifying the inline expansion of all functions not only reduces performance in object size but also in execution speed The pragma inline statement should be used to declare functions that are called from a deep nesting level which will improve the execution speed effectively Nesting relationships in the program Dhrystone Ver 2 1 are shown below malloc strcpy Proc 1 Proc 3 Proc 7 Proc 6 Func 3 Proc 7 Func 2 Func 1 strcmp Func 1 Proc 8 Proc 7 Proc 6 Func 3 Proc 5 Proc 4 Func 2 In this case funct
241. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 5 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http www renesas com inquiry 2 NE S AS 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gr
242. U do you want to use for this Which CPU do you want to use for this project project CPU Series CPU Series If there i is no CPU type to be selected select the GPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other If there i is no GPU type to be selected select the CPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other Notes This feature is supported by HEW 2 2 or later 7 2 Simulations 7 2 1 Pseudo interrupts Description Pseudo interrupt buttons which simulate certain interrupt causes when clicked on can cause pseudo interrupts manually For each button specify an interrupt priority and interrupt condition Usage 1 When you choose View gt CPU gt Trigger the following view appears Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 2 Click the right mouse button on this view and choose Setting The Trigger Setting dialog box appears If you check the Enable check box the interrupt identified by trigger number 1 is enabled In addition specify an interrupt name interrupt priority and interrupt condition vector number The interrupt button identified by trigger number 1 becomes active Trigger Setting Trigger No z I Enable Name fi Interrupt Type H o0000000 3 The setting is now complete When one of the buttons that was set during the above procedure is clicked on the program will stop as sp
243. W tool for first time HEW Install Start up E Execute a sample program Debug your program using an HEW tool for first time HEW Require to know details on expansion function used for program development Require to know the options Specified on the HEW screen Change the platform from HIM SS Implement an existing microcomputer program Improve execution speed or reduce program size Require to utilize HEW Require to utilize C Require to utilize MISRA C Rule Checker Questions Debug Use optimization function Modify programs Use Optimizing Linkage Editor Section 7 Section 8 Section 10 Contents Section MM rud PREND 1 1 VA SUMMARY ecc 1 1 Z y Beatures 5o Se eU eU RU OUR Gu cote gs Saeed RU UE et nane 1 2 1 3 Installation Method eee RU eU IR RERO I ro ret eR 1 3 I34 JPG Version doit ere enel tee Ee Yee eco ep tei Pe ed 1 3 1 3 2 UNIX Version EEE DRUEHD DRE DRIED p eden 1 4 T4 Startup Method io etae ite RU tete Ie rti P Rede eoe EDO Diet retibus 1 7 L4 Stamme the HEW sic o nere pP a n DR pro Re enr hes samen ee deena ade 1 7 1 4 2 Starting the Compiler Using a Command eese enne eene 1 8 1 5 Procedure for Program Development e reete eie inepte ate c SEERE ETS teoer ISa EE Er ires 1 9 Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program eere 2 1 2 Creating a proJect i eese E qtu eet ERE UE rare ent
244. X Hew exe Hew3 4 p yP CPU family fouperH RISO engine Tool chain Hitachi SuperH Standard x Properties Note This feature is supported by HEW 2 0 or later 7 1 5 Multi CPU Feature Description When inserting a new project in the workspace you can insert a CPU of another type This enables SH and H8 projects to be managed in a single workspace Example of inserting a different CPU family 1 When an SH H8 project is open click on Project gt Insert Project In the Insert Project dialog box select a new project and click on the OK button Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 2 The following Insert New Project dialog box appears Select a project name select SH H8 as the CPU type and click on the OK button You can place different CPU types in addition to the current CPU types in the workspace Insert New Projects Workspace Name amp Assembly Application Jssd asaf Ell Demonstration Project Name Q Empty Application E t Import Makefile Library Directory O Hew exe Hew3_ene asdtasdt Browse GPU family H8S H8 300 hd i90 engine Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Properties 3 With the procedure above you can mix SH and H8 projects in a single workspace E C source file Dependencies SH3 E Assembly source file E source file Dependencies S projects Templates lt Nav
245. a 0 1 2 3 unsigned char b abcdefg unsigned char c ABCDEFG C language program after optimization void f void struct x unsigned char a 4 unsigned char b 8 unsigned char c 7 A 0 1 2 3 abcdefg ABCDEFG Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization Ez R R R E 2 7 f R V T E R r R2 SMVNS3 24 L8 ERO P ERI R2 ER2 foe w N Li SMVN 3 24 20 R7 R2 W oh Lr H cO cHe Dr C2 cHe E cHe T zHeOUO cHe CO che X cHe O0 HH Hi DATA B H 00 H 01 H 02 H 03 SDATAZ abcdefg SDATAZ ABCDEFG Object Size Table byte Expanded into assembly language code after optimization Es PUSH L ER2 SUB 20 R7 MOV L4 ERO MOV SP ER1 SUB ER2 ER2 MOV 19 R2L JSR SMVNS 3 24 ADD 20 R7 POP ER2 RTS DATA B H 00 H 01 H 02 H 03 SDATAZ abcdefg SDATA ABCDEFG H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 120 106 122 106 110 After 81 69 81 75 79 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 104 104 96 After 79 77 69 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 294 256 690 572 632 After 162 145 488 324 376 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 51 48 41 After 90 89 79 Remarks and Note
246. a void subl char unsigned char unsigned char b char a void func void unsigned char b void func void subl a b subl a b Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization optimization _func _func Q b 32 RO0L b 32 R0H RO _a 32 ROL Q a 32 R1L Q subl 24 R1 RO EO R1 RO _sub1 24 Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 22 18 24 20 18 After 18 14 16 20 12 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 24 22 18 After 20 18 14 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 19 16 40 34 32 After 23 18 32 26 26 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 15 15 14 After 19 17 17 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 6 4 Optimization of Tail Recursions Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points If a function makes a function call investigate whether or not the function call can be moved to the end of the calling function This can improve both ROM efficiency and execution speed Description The tail recursion optimization is performed when all of the following conditions are satisfied The calling function does not place its parameters or return value address on the stack The function call is followed by the RTS
247. ading of Functions o ep RE EUR Uere dues p eei ree REEL n tpe 8 23 84 8 Reference Type oeoeos ese eDim ERERTII Dep uS 8 25 8 49 Static Function ecco e idea Sti Sela We olea A ca tae e te es 8 26 84 107 Static Member Variable oec prem oo piti Oto eric E ee him EN 8 29 84 1 Anonymous union niet EU HI aH P UOS 8 32 8 4 12 Virtual Functions e deci epi pie tei eite ti etie e rete tee dete o eie 8 33 Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor isst cam eee ae SRI I IA EU odi biilastatia seis 9 1 91 Input Output Options ee eerte e e URP Ere EI eed lette Ee e iere Ret 9 2 ONT InputOPptions eoe eret EUR EE E e e EE IET RR e ies 9 2 9 12 Output Options 5 nete PRG DIO RUDU fea bests ecto OD DOR DE DID 9 5 9 22 Last Options ute uoa Soupe ne t ERO OE Ht I eoa iet iti eh thoes 9 7 9 2 Symbol Information List ence eie ee URP HEP ere e RI Rr ore PUE erg 9 7 9 22 Symbol Reference C t ono eR ER UE ERE UE tidied EDI Nolin diets 9 8 9 2 3 Cross Reference Information nueces ene tet i e yodsonsbengscensgesseasces osehsode ete Ere iier S aat 9 9 9 3 Bffectve Options nsns AS Gait Reale ei RIBe ip RA Ae eines RAS eee 9 10 O32 Output to Unused Area oe en Dp eh euren gie en e Ot ren boe iret te 9 10 9 3 2 End Code of S Type Filey noni oe tee el eet el pU nr 9 14 9 3 3 Debug Information Compression seesteinen ese aeeoe eap i ENESTE Eeo Sies men aaeeea K E eene tenen 9 14 9 3 4 vink Time Reduction itg A eae he A tie ea et no
248. al number of macro names defined by the define statement No limitation 9 Number of parameters specifiable in macro definitions and macro No limitation calls 10 Number of macro name replacements No limitation 11 Depth of nesting levels for the if ifdef indef else and elif No limitation statements 12 Total number of operators and operands specifiable in the if or No limitation elif statements 13 Declarations Number of function definitions No limitation 14 Number of externally linked identifiers external names No limitation 15 Number of identifiers internal names that can be used in a function No limitation 16 Total number of declarations in the pointer type the array type and 16 declarations the function type which qualify the base type 17 Number of array dimensions 6 dimensions 18 Size of arrays or structures H8SX normal mode 65535 bytes H8S 2600 normal mode H8S 2000 normal mode H8 300H normal mode H8 300 H8SX middle mode 32767 bytes H8SX advanced mode with ptr16 option H8SX maximum mode with ptr16 option H8 300H advanced mode 16777215 bytes H8SX advanced mode without ptr16 option 2147483647 bytes H8SX maximum mode without ptr16 option 4294967295 H8S 2600 advanced mode if legacy v4 is H8S 2000 advanced mode specified bytes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 D 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix D List of Limitations No Category Item Limitation 19
249. allocate registers Eliminate same code Forbid item Elimination of dead code Use external subcommand file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Optimize Specifies optimization items Dialog Menu Subcommand Function All Optimize Enables all optimization items Speed OptimizeAspeed Performs optimization in speed Safe OptimizeAsafe Performs safe optimization Custom OptimizeA Enables optimization item selection Unify strings String unify Unifies constant or string literal Eliminate dead code Symbol delete Deletes unreferenced symbols Use short addressing Variable access Uses short absolute addressing mode Reallocate registers Register Reallocates registers Eliminate same code Same code Eliminates same codes Eliminated size Samesize Specifies the object size for same code elimination Use indirect calljump Function call Uses indirect addressing mode Optimize branches Branch Optimizes branch instructions None Nooptimize Disables optimization Output information Check Box Subcommand Function information Displays optimized function name Displays no optimized function name Generate optimize list Dialog Menu Subcommand Function E Mlist Afile name Outputs optimization information list Contents Symbol showAsymbol Outputs symbol optimization information Reference showAreference Outputs symbol reference count Forbi
250. alog Menu Machine code obj IV Generate debug information Section Program section P P Store string data in INEAN Mul Div operation specification Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit Output directory dXhewde mo test10 test10 Debug Modify Command Option code machinecode Function Outputs a machine language program Assembly source code src code asmcode Outputs an assembly language program Preprocessed source file p pp Generate debug information preprocessor Outputs a source program after preprocessor expansion Check Box Command Option Function debug Outputs debugging information nodebug Outputs no debugging information Section Dialog Menu Command Option Function Store string data in Dialog Menu Const section section Command Option string const Changes the default section name Function Outputs string literal to the constant area Data section string data Outputs string literal to the initialization data area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Mul Div operation specifications Dialog Menu Command Option Function Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit X nocpuexpand Develops multiplication or division in codes according to the as a result of 16bit 16bit ANSI C language specifications Non ANSI Guarantee 32bit asa cpuexpand Develop
251. am y CPU TYPE H8S 2621 gt ay This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 y J FOECECKCKCKCkCkCkCk kk KC KK KOKOKOKCKCKCkCkCk Ck k ck ck kcK CK kc KCKCkCkCKCKCkCk ee Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k ck kk ke ke ke ke ke ke ek include machine h Includes the embedded function include file include stacksct h pragma entry PowerON Reset Specifies the PowerON Reset as an entry function The compiler outputs a code for initializing the SP to extern void main void the entry function ifdef cplusplus extern C endif extern void INITSCT void ifdef cplusplus endif ifdef _ cplusplus Remove the comment when you use SIM I O extern C endif extern void INIT IOLIB void extern void CLOSEALL void ifdef cplusplus endif extern void srand unsigned int Remove the comment when you use rand extern char _slptr Remove the comment when you use strtok cont Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program continued from the previous page ifdef cplusplus Remove the comment when you use Hardware Setup extern C endif extern void HardwareSetup void ifdef _ cplusplus endif pragma section ResetPRG void PowerON Reset void Sets the CCR interrupt flag to enabled void PowerON Reset void i set imask cc
252. ame Selecting Method C C Compiler Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain gt C C Tab Cross Assembler Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain gt Assembly Tab Optimizing Linkage Editor Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain gt Link Library Tab Standard Library Generator Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain gt Standard Library Tab CPU Option Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain gt CPU Tab RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 1 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 4 HEW In addition Help can be referenced from each option screen H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 7 Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim gt SimDebue H8S 2600 A bd Category Source x E All Loaded Projects Show entries for Include file directories C source file C source file Include file directories E Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Specify the directory path name where include files are E fetched The list of the directory paths is shown Double dlick E an item to modify it Preinclude files Specify an include file which will be inserted into the head a C C source file The list of the include file paths is shown Double click an item to modify it Defines Specify definitions of macro names The list of the definitions of macro names is shown Double click an item to modify i Messages Specify whether allow th
253. amic cast Operator Use the dynamic cast operator for example to cast at run time a pointer or reference of the derived class type to a pointer or reference of the base class type between a class including a virtual function and its derived class include lt string gt class Base protected string pnamel public Base pnamel new string if pnamel pnamel Base virtual string Show return pnamel virtual Base Virtual if pnamel destructor delete pnamel class Derived public Base string pname2 public Derived pname2 new string if pname2 pname2 Derived string Show return pname2 Derived Virtual if pname2 destructor delete pname2 void main void Cast to Base at run time Derived pderived new Derived Base pbase dynamic_cast lt Base gt pderived string ddd ddd pbase Show Acquiring class name Base delete pbase Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 3 3 Exception Handling Function Description Unlike C C has a mechanism for handling an error called an exception An exception is a means for connecting an error location in a program with an error handling code Use the exception mechanism to put together error handling codes in one location For the Compiler specify the following option to use the exception mechanism e Specific
254. amp al num getNum__A __ct__A amp a2 num getNum A dt__A amp a2 2 _dt__A amp al 2 int getNum__A void Accessing the static member variable struct A __ct__A struct A this if this struct A 0 this struct A nw FUl1 1 struct A 0 num 1A return this void __dt__A struct A const this int flag if this struct A 0 num__1A if flag amp 1 dl FPv void this Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 10 Static Member Variable Development and Size Reduction O Speed O maintenance e Important Points In C a class member variable with the static attribute can be shared among multiple objects of a class type Thus a static member variable comes in handy because it can be used for example as a common flag among multiple objects of the same class type Example of Use Create five class A objects within the main function Static member variable num has an initial value of 0 This value will be incremented by the constructor every time an object is created Static member variable num shared among objects will have a value of 5 at the maximum Additionally the use of a class will influence the code efficiency However the use of a static member variable itself will not influence the size and processing spee
255. and the inter module optimizer can be coded in a subcommand as follows start VECTTBL INTTBL 0 PRsetPRG IntPRG 0400 P C D 0800 B R XX 0ECOO S Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A lt HEW1 2 gt HEW2 0 or later eso In output load module Y andard Toolchain C source file C source file E Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Stype via absolute vi we None In output load module Y ROM to RAM mapped sections v noprelink rom D R PXX XX nomessage listz CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P PXXC C DSEC CSBSEC D 0 v Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A In the subcommand specify as follows using rom rom D R rom PXX XX Use the subcommand file including this code to start the optimizing linkage editor and the inter module optimizer lt HEW1 2 gt optlnk38 sub test sub RET the inter module optimizer lt HEW2 0 or later optink sub test sub RET the optimizing linkage editor Remarks and notes When the above processing is performed the warning message 1300 SECTION ATTRIBUTE MISMATCH IN ROM OPTION SUBCOMMAND XX may be displayed by the HEW1 2 inter module optimizer This message is displayed because a program section was specified with the __sectop and __secend operat
256. anguage For EC some of the C functions not appropriate for an embedded system have been removed Using EC you can create an object appropriate for an embedded system e Specification method Dialog menu C C tab Category Other tab Check against EC language specification Command line eccp Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques Unsupported keywords An error message will be output if either of the following keywords is included catch const cast dynamic cast explicit mutable namespace reinterpret cast static cast template throw try typeid typename using Unsupported language specifications A warning message will be output if either of the following language specifications is included Multiple inheritance virtual base class 8 3 2 Run time Type Information Description In C a class object with a virtual function may have a type identifiable only at run time A run time identification function is available to provide support in such a situation To use this function in C use the type info class typeid operator and dynamic cast operator For the Compiler specify the following option to use run time type information Additionally specify the following option at linkage to start up the prelinker e Specification method Dialog menu CPU tab Enable disable runtime type information Command line rttizon off Dialog menu L
257. anted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document b
258. anteed An object program created by Ver 4 0 cannot be linked with an object program created by Ver 6 01 if one or both of the object programs contain assembly coding which depends on the compiler output coding such as the order to save and restore register contents 2 For details on linkage with an OS middleware and so on contact your sales agency Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix C Notes on Version Upgrade Appendix C Notes on Version Upgrade This section describes notes when the version is upgraded from the earlier version H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Package Ver 4 x or lower C 1 Guaranteed Program Operation When the version is upgraded and program is developed operation of the program may change When the program is created note the followings and sufficiently test your program 1 Programs Depending on Execution Time or Timing C C language specifications do not specify the program execution time Therefore a version difference in the compiler may cause operation changes due to timing lag with the program execution time and peripherals such as the I O or processing time differences in asynchronous processing such as in interrupts 2 Programs Including an Expression with Two or More Side Effects Operations may change depending on the version when two or more side effects are included in one expression Example a it b i iincrement order is undefined f itt
259. antss Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points In the case of a floating point arithmetic operation involving a constant that is within the allocable range of values for the float type 7 0064923216240862e 46f to 3 4028235677973364e 38f assign the letter f following the numeric value to eliminate the possibility of a superfluous type conversion to the double type Description Floating point constants are normally treated as double type constants If used directly such constants are computed in the double type which requires extensive operations If the constant is a logarithmic constant whose value is within the range 7 0064923216240862e 46f to 3 4028235677973364e 38f the letter f should be attached to the end of the constant so that it will be treated as a float type constant This substantially reduces the number of instructions generated and improves ROM efficiency RAM efficiency as well as the execution speed Example Assign the sum of the variable b and a constant to the variable a C language program before optimization C language program after optimization float a b float a b void func void void func void a b 1 0 a b 1 0f Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization tune 2L Object Size Table byte ER2 16 R7 Q b 32 E
260. apping at the assignment In this case the function can fit within the area however if the INDIRECT section exceeds the memory indirect area those functions that receive frequent accesses should be assigned individually using the pragma indirect statement In addition use the pragma indirect section statement to divide the section at the assignment This option specification is the same as the following pragma indirect main malloc Procl Proc2 Proc3 Proc4 Proc5 Proc6 Proc7 Proc8 Funcl Func2 Func3 pragma indirect MVN 3 When combined with the options that have proved efficient the following results are provided Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma abs8 Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob 2902 1496 pragma abs16 Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob Ptr Glob Next Ptr Glob pragma noregsave specified Compiler options inter module optimization functions pragma indirect specified For further details refer to section 5 4 13 Using Indirect Memory Format Function calls may be performed in the memory indirect format with the inter module optimization features according to the CPU capacity even if this option is not specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 2 Optimization for Speed 5 2 1 Specifying the SPEED Option To provide the optimization for speed specify the SPEED option The execution results are
261. are declared so as to eliminate the generation of dummy memory areas Description If a variable greater than or equal to 2 bytes is allocated from an odd numbered memory address when it is necessary to maintain even numbered memory addressed the compiler creates a 1 byte dummy area To avoid this problem variables of the same size should be declared in a single group to as to minimize the creation of dummy data areas for data alignment This consideration is applicable not only to external variables but also to local variables members of structures and commons and function parameters Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Allocate a total of 8 bytes of data C language program before optimization char a long b char Oc short d Data assignment before optimization 0 2 C language program after optimization char char long short 6 6 L3 Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 10 10 10 10 After 8 8 8 8 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 8 8 After 8 8 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before After H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before After Remarks and Notes The above results other than H8SX are those by Ver 3 0
262. ariables Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Avoid optimizing external symbols treating them as volatile Command line volatile Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Example To assign the values 0 1 and 2 to the external variable a in this order C C program unsigned int a void func Assembly expansion code Not specified Specified a 2 code only 42 RO0 R0 8 a 32 Remarks and Notes When the optimization of external variables is disabled all external variables in the file are changed into volatile variables To set volatile individually to each variable specify as follows volatile unsigned int a void func Outputs the same code as shown in the above example with the volatile option By default the optimization of external variables is enabled with the compiler option RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 37 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 4 6 Block Transfer Instruction Size X Speed O Description Structure substitutions are usually processed by calling run time routines When this option is used a block transfer instruction is output at the structure substitution expression and then the execution speed is improved However if NMI interrupt occurs during the EEPMOV W instruction execution the transfer results are not guaranteed
263. array p1 C language program before optimization unsigned char a 10 1en 10 unsigned char p1 10 p2 10 void func void char i for i len i gt 0 i pl i 1 p2 i 1 Expanded into assembly language code before optimization tune PUSH L ER5 MOV B _len 32 R1L BRA L9 8 EXTS W R1 EXTS L ER1 MOV L ER1 ER5 MOV B _p2 1 32 ER5 ROL MOV B ROL _p1 1 32 ER5 DEC B RIL MOV B R1L R1L BGT L8 8 POP L ER5 RTS Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization unsigned char a 10 len 10 unsigned char p1 10 p2 10 void func void char i len do pl i 1 p2 i 1 while i Expanded into assembly language code after optimization func PUSH LER5 MOV B _len 32 R1L L9 EXTS WR1 EXTS LERI MOV L ER1 ER5 MOV B 8 p2 1 32 ER5 ROL MOV B ROL _p1 1 32 ER5 DEC B R1L BNE L9 8 POP L ERS RTS H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 47 29 47 39 33 After 43 25 43 35 29 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 35 35 29 After 31 31 25 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle 6 3 3 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 210 142 388 324 296 After 195 127 358 294 266 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 134 134 133 After 117 117 116 Moving Invariant Expression from the Inside to the
264. ata declared as double precision type and floating point constants are both dealt with as floating point type 10 Strengthening noregsave Functions When functions declared with pragma noregsave or noregsave are called the contents of the register are guaranteed by the caller 11 Specifying Multiple Sets of Include Directory by Using Environment Variables Multiple sets of include directories can be specified by using the environment variable CH38 12 Allocate Structure Parameter or Return Value to Register Option structreg is used to allocate a small structure parameters or return values to registers Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features 13 Allocate 4 Byte Parameter or Return Value to Register cpu 300 Option longreg is used to allocate 4 byte parameters or return values to registers 14 Conditions for Moving a Non volatile Variable Outside a Loop A non volatile external variable in an iteration condition inhibits external variable optimization from moving out the loop even though there are no function calls or assignment expressions in an iteration condition 15 Supporting speed loop 112 Option speed loop 112 controls optimization of loop expansion 16 Modifies Data Allocation by the Boundary Alignment Data can be reallocated for each boundary alignment so that gaps that are generated by the boundary alignment are minimized 17 Added Implicit Declarations HITACHI and
265. ata section string data Outputs string literal to the initialization data area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Mul Div operation specifications Dialog Menu Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit Command Option nocpuexpand Function Develops multiplication or division in codes according to the ANSI C language specifications Non ANSI Guarantee 32bit as a result of 16bit 16bit cpuexpand Develops multiplication or division in codes according to the CPU instruction specifications Output directory Dialog Menu Command Option Function object Specifies object file output directory Template Dialog Menu Command Option Function None template none Does not generates instances static template static Generates instance as internal linkage only for referenced templates Used template used Generates instance as external linkage only for referenced templates All template all Generates instances for templates declared or referenced Auto template auto Generates instances at linkage Bit field allocation order Specify the CPU tab from HEW4 0 or later Dialog Menu Command Option Function Left bit order left Stores members from upper bit Right bit order right Stores members from lower bit Group by alignment Dialog Menu Command Option Function None noalign Allocates defined variables in the defined order Auto align Allocates variables so as to
266. ata whose size is a multiple of 4 to 4byte aligned data section r Section Name Changing the section name of P C B or D into S by the section option causes a warning error S is the reserved name for the stack area s Added Implicit Declarations __ H8SXN__ H8SXX HAS MULTIPLIER__ __HAS_DIVIDER__ _ JINTRINSIC LIB DATA ADDRESS SIZE H8 RENESAS VERSION _ and RENESAS are implicitly declared using define directive by the compiler H8SXM__ __ H8SXA E t Reentrant library If the reent option is specified to the library generator a reentrant library is created Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features u Support of Little endian Space only in H8SX A little endian space is supported depending on a chip of H8SX A 2 or 4 byte datum in a little endian space should be written and read with its own data size In order to do so the feature of the _ evenaccess keyword is enhandced B 3 2 Notes on Optimizing Features of the Compiler Ver 6 0 Notes below about optimization apply in a case where an H8SX object program is created with Ver 6 0 optimization For the other cases optimization is similar to that of Ver 4 0 or earlier Adopting the newest compiler optimization technology allows the optimization processing in Ver 6 0 to analyze aliases for pointers or external variables and analyze data live ranges including the control flow whi
267. ater Use of this feature will lower the HEW performance 7 1 7 Converting from Old HEW Version Here the method for specifying the compiler version within the Renesas Integrated Development Environment is explained Compiler versions can be specified by upgrading the Renesas Integrated Development Environment If the workspace created in an old version such as HEW1 1 H8C 3 0C is opened in a new version such as HEW3 0 H8C 6 0 the following dialog box appears Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 1 Checking the project to be upgraded Check the name of the project to be upgraded Toolchain miss ing Tool Chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain version 5 0 2 0 is missing from the following projects Select projects for upgrade link1428 Sample0823 High performance Embedded Workshop 2 Specifying the Compiler Version Select the Compiler version which can be upgraded Change Toolchain Version Toolchain name Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Current version 5020 Cancel CPU Family 9 I Information Toolchain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchai Toolchain version 6020 X Toolchain build phases H8S H8 300 Assembler H8S H8 300 C C Compiler H8S H8 300 C C Library Gen OptLinker Change Toolchain Version Dialog Box Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 3 Confirmation
268. ation and products Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corp semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corp for further details on these materials or the products contained therein Preface This application note explains how to effectively create application programs that run on any of the following family of microcomputers by using the C C compiler package H8SX H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 30
269. ation is specified at compilation e Optimization is specified at linkage and constants are unified 9 3 6 Reduce Empty Areas of Boundary Alignment Description When this option is specified the empty areas which are generated as the boundary alignment of sections for each object file are filled at linkage As a result the unnecessary empty areas generated by boundary alignment are filled reducing the size of the data sections as a whole This option affects constant area C section initialized data area D section and uninitialized data area B section e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Reduce empty areas of boundary alignment Command line data stuff Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Examples The following example shows how empty areas of boundary alignment are reduced filel c short sl char cl file2 c char c2 When data stuff is not specified When data stuff is not specified one byte empty area of boundary alignment is generated between filel c and file2 c because boundary alignment value is 2 for H8 CPU specification In this example if the size of the top data which is linked next is one byte there is no need of this boundary alignment But the top data of the next file is 2 bytes or more boundary alignment at the end of this file filel c should be performed A
270. ation method Dialog menu CPU tab Use try throw and catch of C Command line exception Example of Use If opening of file INPUT DAT fails initiate the exception handling and display an error in the standard error output C program example for exception handling void main void try if fopen INPUT DAT r NULL char cp cannot open input file n throw cp catch char pstrError fprintf stderr pstrError abort return Important Information The coding performance may deteriorate Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 12 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 3 4 Disabling Startup of Prelinker Description Starting up the Prelinker will reduce the link speed The Prelinker need not be running unless the template function or run time type conversion of C is used To use the Linker from a command line specify the following noprelink option If Hew is used and the Prelinker control list box is set to Auto the output of the noprelink option will be automatically controlled e Specification method Dialog menu Link Library tab Category Input tab Prelinker control Command line noprelink 8 4 Advantages and Disadvantages of C Coding The Compiler when compiling a C program internally converts the C program to a C program to create an object This chapter compares a C program and a C program after conversion and describ
271. ave any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics 24 NEC SAS gt O C um io Pa O et D H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Package Application Note Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Renesas Electronics www renesas electoronics com Rev 3 00 2005 09 Keep safety first in your circuit designs Renesas Technology Corp puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corp or a t
272. b hp RIS 9 15 9 3 5 Notification of Unreferenced Symbol sess E E R a A 9 16 9 3 6 Reduce Empty Areas of Boundary Alignment eeseeseeeeeeeeeee nennen nene rennen nenne 9 16 9 4 Optimize Spic 9 18 94 Optimization at LINKA gen roeines erene aanas sop eneO OD BRIED DEP FII Rede 9 18 9 442 Unifies Constants Strings i ies oett ette egeta eie erre eei Ie eere e Er Petri eee denen 9 19 9 4 3 Eliminates Unreferenced Variables Functions eeeesssssesseseeeeeneneeenenee nee nene trennen 9 20 9 4 4 Uses Short Absolute Addressing Mode 000 ee ee eecesecesecesecnseceecseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseesecsaecsaeesaesaeeeeeee 9 22 9 4 5 Optimizes Register Save Restore Codes ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen rennen nene 9 23 94 6 Unities Common Codes nacht iate eene pP Ped RES 9 26 DAT Uses Indirect Addressing Mode eee Up eo rU est eben diiit 9 28 9 4 8 Optimizes Branch Instructions eee eeeeeceeecesecesecesecsseeeseeeaeeeeesseeesecesecsecaecsaecsaecaaecaeesaeseaeeeneees 9 31 9 4 9 Shortens ithe Addressmg Mode eee ose inrer e ee d neret ence e dte d teris 9 32 9 4 10 Optimization Partially Disabled eese nennen nennen nennen enne tenete 9 34 9 4 11 Confirm Optimization Results sisse iseset seise eee teen nren trennen eren r Se iok tenen 9 35 section 10 MISRAN eins unii eid etnia true e b EA 10 1 10 1 MISRA
273. be assigned to an address that is an integral multiple of 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler C C program include lt machine h gt int ptr1 10 0 1 2 3 int ptr2 10 9 8 7 6 int ptr3 2 9 8 long 11 12 void func lli2mac 100 ptrl ptr2 4 11 100 0 9 1 8 2 74 3 6 122macl 100 ptr1l ptr3 4 4 12 100 0 941 84 2 94 3 8 Compiled assembly language expansion code func PUSH L ER2 OV L 100 32 ER0 CLRMAC LDMAC L ERO MACL OV L f ptr2 32 ER0 4 ptrl1 32 ER1 ER1 ERO ER1 ERO ER1 ERO ER1 ERO MACL ERO ERO _11 32 100 32 ERO0 ERO MACL f ptr3 32 ER0 4 ptrl1 32 ER1 5 32 ER2 ER1 ERO R2 ERO ER1 ERO R2 ERO ER1 ERO R2 ERO ER1 ERO R2 ERO MACL ERO ERO _12 32 ER2 Remarks and notes lt a multiply accumulate operation The functions mac and macl can be used only when the CPU operating mode is specified as 2600a 2600n or H8SX 4 MULS U MULU U instruction mulsu muluu is expanded to the MULS U or MULU U instruction which performs 32 bit x 32 bit 64 bit multiplication 32 bit parameters vall and val2 for this intrinsic function are multiplied and the upper 32 bits are returned as the operation result RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 17 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 3 Compiler C C program include lt machine h gt lon
274. bject files and is generated from the optimizing linkage editor with output options Symbols in relocatable files are not linked if other files don t refer to them px e Library Files CD NE ER 4 Binary Files Binary Files are available to input This file consists of one or more object files and is generated from the optimizing linkage editor with output options When input binary files section name should be specified This section name is located with the start option As binary files have no debug information C C source level debugger can t be used id Binary Files Specification Method 1 Section name should be specified Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Show entries for Binary files Command line binary bin_c bin PPP Add binary file Relative to Custom directory xl Cancel Full file path OXHew exexHew3 H8V6Xbintbin koX DebueXbin c bin Browse Boundary alignment Ibyte Symbol Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Specification Method 2 Symbol can be defined at the head of the binary files Specify symbol name with section name to do this For a variable name referred by a C C program add an underscore at the head of the symbol name Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Show entries for Binary files Command line binary bin c bin PPP func fidd binary file R
275. bol Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 67 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Adding files to the project In the next step use Project gt Add Files to specify the C source files to be added to the project Add the files init c vectbl c scttbl c and cmain c for HEW1 2 and resetprg c intprg c dbsct c and main c for HEW2 0 3 sample Hitachi Embedded Workshop S2 ES 3 Debug c pd c as Ei ey S X Bs Rr A n ca Project Files H E emain c init c E scttblc vectblc For Help press F1 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 68 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Selecting compiler options Use Options gt H8S H8 300 C C Compiler for HEW1 2 and C C Tab Category Optimize for HEW2 0 or later to specify compiler options In this step specify the output of an Inter Module Optimization add on information tool here lt HEW1 2 gt 300 C Compiler Options Debug Ey C C source file B A C source file i B _init c T pem perm eue I B scttbl c Sf ub options A j Bl Suyitehfjudgenent Default Optic n C source file HEW2 0 or later tandard Toolchain EE 2d d All Loaded Projects pti EG sample i Se source tie soo EC 5 b options 4 o Default Options c biu Assembly source file Linkage symbol file J 2byte pointer cpu 26004 24 object
276. branch instruction Check Box Command Option Function goptimize Outputs inter module optimization information Outputs no inter module optimization information Output directory Dialog Menu Command Option Function 2 object 3 Category List Standard Toolchain Configuration SimDebug H8S 2600A EG All Loaded Projects B E sample H C source file H E C source file Assembly source file 9 Linkage symbol file Generate list file Specifies object output directory Category List program Default Cross reference Default Section Default Source program list Contents Status Contents Default Default Default Default Default Dieu Conditionals Definitions Calls Expansions Structured Cada Options Assembly cpu 28004 24 debug object CONFIGDIRO FILELEAF obj list CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF lis nologo cheincpath TN Check Box Command Option Function list Outputs assembly list nolist Outputs no assembly list Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 39 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Source program Dialog Menu Command Option Function Shown source Outputs source program list Not shown nosource Outputs no source program list Cross reference Dialog Menu Command Option Function Shown cross_refernce Outputs cross reference list Not shown nocross_refernce Outputs no cross reference list Sectio
277. bsct obj intpra obi resetpra obi O sample lib Move up sample obj 0 sbrk obj Move down vecttbl obj Move to to p Move to bottom Current configuration Debug Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 62 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 4 3 Excluding a Project File Question I would like to eliminate a project file from Build temporarily Answer The file is eliminated from Build if choose Exclude Build file by pressing a right button of mouse onto the file of Projects tab on work space window If sending a file back to Build again please choose Include Build lt file gt by pressing a right button of mouse on the file of Projects tab on work space window Ey testi B E testl Be Assembly source file ii B dbsctsrc sm 5j resetr Open intprg src X Y stack Build intprg src Build Options Add Files Remove Files Exclude Build intprg src Version Control Configure View iv Allow Docking Hide Properties Show Differences Exclude Build Menu Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 63 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 4 4 Specifying the Default Options for Project Files Question I would like to automatically specify a default option into file when adding a project into file Answer The list of files is displayed on the left of the H8S H8 Standard Toolchain see the figure below Please open the folder in file group in which Defaul
278. byte cpu 2600A 32 H8S 2600 Advanced 256M byte cpu 2600A 28 H8S 2600 Advanced 16M byte cpu 2600A 24 H8S 2600 Advanced 1M byte cpu 2600A 20 H8S 2600 Normal cpu 2600N H8S 2000 Advanced 4G byte cpu 2000A 32 H8S 2000 Advanced 256M byte cpu 2000A 28 H8S 2000 Advanced 16M byte cpu 2000A 24 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 63 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW CPU H8S 2000 Advanced 1M byte Specification cpu 2000A 20 H8S 2000 Normal cpu 2000N H8 300H Advanced 16M byte cpu 300HA 24 H8 300H Advanced 1M byte cpu 300HA 20 H8 300H Normal cpu 300HN H8 300 cpu 300 H8 300L cpu 300l Multiple Divide Dialog Menu Command Option Function None cpu l no multiplier and divider Multiple and Divide cpu hDD multiplier and divider specification Multiple cpu IM multiplier specification Divide cpu ID Stack calculation divider specification Dialog Menu Command Option Function Small STAck Small Calculates stack address by 1 byte Medium STAck Medium Calculates stack address by 2 bytes Large STAck Large Calculates stack address by 4 bytes Change number of parameter passing registers from 2 default to 3 Check Box y regparam 3 Command Option Function Specifies the number of parameter passing registers as 3 regparam 2 Treat double as float Check Box Y DOuble Floa
279. byte sign int ovfnegw int dst int Obtains the 2 s complement of 2 byte data dst stores the conversion and rst result in the area indicated by rst if rst 0 CCR setting 12 4 byte sign int ovfnegl long dst long Obtains the 2 s complement of 4 byte data dst stores the conversion and rst result in the area indicated by rst if rst 0 CCR setting Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example To test to see whether the result of an addition has overflowed perform the appropriate processing C C program include machine h extern int dst src void f if faddw dst src 0 a sfrsecr Checks whether addition between dst else and src generates an overflow dst Compiled assembly language expansion code ER6 _dst 32 ER6 ER6 RO Src 32 RI R1 R0 L48 8 QER6 RO 1 R0 L50 8 GER6 RO 1 R0 RO ER6 ER6 Remarks and notes Condition code operation functions can be specified only in expressions that test the conditions in an if do while or for statement 3 2 5 Transfer Instructions Description The following functions are available to enhance the system control transfer instructions No Item Format Description 1 MOVFPE void movfpe char addr char data Expands into the MOVFPE instruction that transfers instruction char _movfpe char addr data in synchronous with the E clock 2 MOVTPE void movtpe char data c
280. c2has3 lib H8S NRM 2 c8s26n lib c8s26ns lib ec226n lib ec226ns lib 3 c8s26n3 lib c8s26ns3 lib ec226n3 lib ec226ns3 lib H8S ADV 2 c8s26a lib c8s26as lib ec226a lib ec226as lib 3 c8s26a3 lib c8s26as3 lib ec226a3 lib ec226as3 lib Legend NRM normal mode ADV advanced mode Size efficiency and speed efficiency can be specified regardless of the compiler option However the CPU type and the number of parameter passing registers should conform to the compiler option specification For HEW2 0 or later check that a standard library is created by selecting Standard Library tag Category on Mode Build a library file Option Changed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 2 The problem may occur because an I O or memory management library is specified In order to specify a function declared in the C library function stdio h or stdlib h a low level interface routine is necessary When creating a low level interface routine refer to section 9 2 2 Execution Environment Settings in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Also refer to the example of a low level interface routine included in the sample program The following low level interface routines are available Name Function open Opens a file close Closes a file read Reads from a file write Writes to a file Iseek Sets a file read write position sbrk Allocates a me
281. ce file CPU TYPE H88 2612 C un E sctc 1 1 1 ES cbsct c This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 intpre c fed 2 lowsre c ea a a A A A RR p o aee e ooa EEE EE EE EEE EE EE EEE EE EE m 2 sf Xl Phase H8S H8 300 C C Compiler starting n IGX Hew3XsampleXsamplexdbsct c Read write 4 33 Note An error may occur if the user uses the subcommand file for the inter module optimizer supplied as a sample of this product This is because the standard library has not been specified and the CPU information check file has not been defined in an appropriate directory To avoid this error copy the subcommand file and CPU information check file and specify the standard library Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 71 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 72 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Once an operating load module has been prepared the performance of the object program need to be improved to make the load module be more efficient and effective There are four approaches to improve the performance of an object program i Performs optimization by using various options ii Performs optimization by using the inter module optimizer iii Performs optimization by using expansion functions
282. ces A When specifying multiple suboptions they should be separated by commas ch38A goptimizeA debugA show object allocationAtest1 c RET The following short format can also be used for option specification ch38A gA debA sh o aAtest1 c RET When compiling multiple programs whether the option is effective on the program differs according to the position where the option is specified lt Example The specified option is specified for all source programs gt The option specified prior to the first source program is effective for all source program ch38A gA debA sh o aAtest1 cAtest2 cpp RET lt Example 2 The option is specified separately for each program gt The option specified following the source program test2 cpp is effective only for test2 cpp ch38Atest1 cAtest2 cppA debA sh o a RET Note 1 The compiler distinguishes C and C files depending on file extensions and lang and lang options For details on file extensions refer to section 8 File Specifications in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 5 Procedure for Program Development Figure 1 5 shows the procedure used to develop a C C language program Standard include file Assembly source program User assembly program H8S H8 300 Series assembler SYSROF ELF object library object library ELF DWARF
283. cess a static class member variable without changing the private attribute in such a case create a member function to be used as an interface and specify the static variable in the function A static function is thus used to access only static class member variables e Example of Use As shown on the next page use a static function to access a static member variable Although the use of a class will influence the code efficiency the use of a static function itself will not influence the size and processing speed Note For details on a static member variable refer to section 8 2 3 Static Member Variable Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program class A private Static member variable public static int getNum void Static function A void A void int A num 0 void main void int num num A ge A al A a2 int A getNum void Accessing the static member variable Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 27 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion struct A char dummy H void nw FUl unsigned long void dl FPv void Static member variable struct A ct A struct A void dt A struct A const int as Static function void main void int num struct A al struct A a2 num getNum_A ct A
284. ch were not possible so far in Ver 4 0 or lower This provides a wider range of optimization than Ver 4 0 within the limits of the language specifications However a program that was previously running because it was not optimized enough may not run because it has become a target of optimization Examples of programs that were not optimized so far but will become targets of optimization in Ver 6 0 are shown below a Access to External Variables or Pointer Variables without volatile Declaration A volatile declaration guarantees that the volatile qualified variable is accessed whenever it is used because the variable may be updated outside the program sequence For example data values are changed by interrupt processing or hardware processing The compiler assumes that variables without a volatile declaration are changed only by successive processing of the program sequence or function calls In Ver 4 0 or earlier external variables without a volatile declaration were optimized as shown in the example below Example int a int ptr amp a ptr 1 Only this assignment expression is eliminated ptr 2 In Ver 6 0 optimization is further performed in the cases below To disable the optimization declare the relevant variable with volatile Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Example 1 int a In this example while statement 2 has become an inf
285. cified 58 52 70 54 54 Specified 66 48 68 50 50 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 70 64 50 Specified 62 62 46 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 75 58 152 118 118 Specified 78 58 158 118 118 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 49 46 43 Specified 50 50 44 Remarks and Notes The INDIRECT section should be allocated to the memory area 00 to FF where can be accessed in the indirect memory format at linkage The indirect memory area is output to the INDIRECT section The section name can be modified using the pragma indirect section statement 5 4 14 Using Extended Indirect Memory Format Size O Speed X Description When frequently used functions are accessed in the indirect memory format ROM efficiency is improved When the CPU is H8SX the extended memory indirect addressing mode can be used additionally This can also improve ROM efficiency There are the following two ways to specify the extended indirect memory format 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format indirect ex vect2 vector number gt type specifier function name gt type specifier indirect ex vect2 vector number gt function name gt Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 64 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 2 Specifying with an option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Opti
286. ckcr 0xFFFDE6 Address cont When not using the project generator in the samples that are supplied with the product locate the include file and the C source file that are named identically with the CPU Use these files after carefully checking that they are the correct files Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 4 Creating Interrupt Functions HEW project file name intprg c sample program name vecttbl c These programs define functions that make interrupt calls lt HEW1 2 gt 8K RRR ARR ARR A RR ARR A RR ARR A A A A I I a FILE intprg c DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 DESCRIPTION Interrupt Program CPU TYPE H8S 2621 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 BK RR RK ARR ARIA RR ARR A RR A AR AR A I a a include lt machine h gt include vect h pragma section IntPRG vector 2 Reserved vector 3 Reserved lt Defines a section name tor 4 Reserved tor 5 Treace NT Treace void sleep tor 6 Reserved 7 NMI NMI void sleep p Uber es 21 sks 1 Defines interrupt functions r TRAPl void sleep 9 User breakpoint trap _TRAP2 void sleep 10 User breakpoint trap _TRAP3 void sleep 11 User breakpoint trap _TRAP4 void sleep tor 12 Reserved tor 13 Reserved tor 14 Reserved Note If pragma section I
287. clarations Implicit declaration of __AES5__ and ABSI have been added B 4 2 Notes on Optimizing Features of the Compiler Ver 6 01 Notes below about optimization apply in a case where an H8SX and H8S without the legacy v4 option object program is created with Ver 6 01 optimization For the other cases optimization is similar to that of Ver 4 0 or earlier Adopting the newest compiler optimization technology of H8SX and H8S allows the optimization processing in Ver 6 01 to analyze aliases for pointers or external variables and analyze data live ranges including the control flow which were not possible so far in Ver 4 0 or ealier This provides a wider range of optimization than Ver 4 0 within the limits of the language specifications So especially when a development of H8S has been done with H8C Ver 6 0 and the project will be updated to Ver 6 01 the generated code will be for different from that of the old project because of the new optimization technology described above However a program that was previously running because it was not optimized enough may not run because it has become a target of optimization Examples of programs that were not optimized so far but will become targets of optimization in Ver 6 01 are shown below a Access to External Variables or Pointer Variables without volatile Declaration A volatile declaration guarantees that the volatile qualified variable is accessed whenever it is used becau
288. commands When synchronized debug is enabled you can perform the following actions in synchronized mode User action Target debugger session 1 Target debugger session 2 Run during one of the Run Run sessions Step during one of the Step Step sessions ESC pressed during one of Stop Stop the sessions Stop due to a breakpoint or user Stop same as when ESC is pressed program error Stop same as when ESC is Stop due to a breakpoint or user program error pressed CPU reset during one of CPU reset CPU reset the sessions e Synchronized debug example An example of executing the step command is provided below 1 Execute the step during SH1 SimSessionSH 1 The following condition results SH SimSessionSH 1 state H8300 SimSessionH8 300 state resetprg c Previous PC pragma entry Power N Reset P pragma section void Power N Reset PC void 0x00000400 entry vectz void Powert i 0x00000404 0x00000406 set imask ccr 1 set vbr void char 0x00000806 fe INITSCTO _INITSCTO CALL INITO CALL INITO 5H1 DefaultSession Ht sionH8 3 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 3 As shown below you can see that the PC has also moved to the next line during the H8300 SimSessionH8 300 session SH SimSessionSH 1 state H8300 SimSessionH8 300 state
289. compiler they should be translated into assembly source code after compile The assembly program written in the asm block can be compiled into an object file directly so the symbols can be referred in the source level debugger For details about asm refer to section 10 2 1 3 in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual C C program abs8 unsigned char a b lt 8 bit absolute address by abs8 Set 0xa0000 to SBR void main void asm mov 1 0xa0000 er0 ldc l er0 sbr lt Access 8 bit absolute address from 0xa0000 Section Allocation As 8 bit absolute address space is declared by __abs8 SABSSB section is output Optimizing Linkage Editor allocates the ABS8B section at 0xa0000 in the above example Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Examples of C C Program When using HEW delete the comments of the following bold type parts in resetprg c to make them available When NOT using HEW add the same expression in the initial routine entry vect 0 void PowerON Reset void Remove the comment when you make the initial setting of SBR VBR for H8SX asm 0xa0000 er0 er0 sbr 0x00000000 er0 er0 vbr set_imask_ccr 1 _INITSCT 8 bit absolute address space is NOT used 8 bit absolute address space is used abs8 unsigned char cl c2 uns
290. ct lt vector number gt Example To specify a vector number to create a vector table C C program CPU 2600a pragma entry f1 vect 0 lt Allocating the entry function f1 to the vector number 0 void f1 eet Interrupt CERA VEDRCRQUE Allocating the interrupt function f2 to the vector number 4 void f2 voed pragma indirect f3 vect 5 unsigned char 3 voed lt Allocating the indirectmemory access function f3 to the vector number 5 memory map contents SVECTO 00000000 00000003 SVECTA 00000010 00000013 SVECT5 00000014 00000017 Remarks and notes i The vector table specification vect should always be specified in lowercase characters ii Be careful not duplicate an allocating vector number with other vector tables 111 Vector Table automatic generation functions is supported by C C Compiler Version 4 0 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 2 Built in Functions CPU instructions that are not supported in the C C language specifications such as the setting of the condition code register are supported as expansion built in functions When using a built in function be sure to declare the system include file machine h Referenced No Item Function Section 1 Condition code register CCR Sets an interrupt mask 3 2 1 2 References an int
291. ction 9 2 2 Execution Environment Settings in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program HEW project file name sbrk h RR A KR IKK kk kk ko kk kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck ke kk Ck ko kk ke kk Ck ke kk ck I ke kk ko ke kk ko ke kk ke ke ke aA FILE sbrk h x DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 E DESCRIPTION Header file of sbrk file Ay CPU TYPE H8S 2621 i 7 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 BR KKK IKK I kk kk kk Ck kk Ck kk I ko kk Ck kk ko kk Ck Ck kk Ck ko kk kk kk ke kk kc ko kk koc kk ko koe kk kk ke ke ex size of area managed by sbrk define HEAPSIZE 0x400 This is an include file that is used for the definition of a low level routine sbrk The include file indicates the size of the heap area To change the size of the heap area after the project has been specified modify this value Example Changing the size of the heap area to 514 0x202 bytes define HEAPSIZE 0x202 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 3 Defining an I O port file HEW project file name iodefine h sample program name CPU name gt h An I O port file is defined so that I O ports can be accessed using the variable names R
292. d unsigned long unsigned int lt lt constant e signed int signed int lt lt constant signed int f signed int unsigned int lt lt constant signed int g signed int unsigned int lt lt constant unsigned int h unsigned int signed int constant signed int Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler i unsigned int unsigned int constant signed int j unsigned int unsigned int lt lt constant unsigned int Examples of codes Example of unsigned signed long unsigned signed int lt lt constant cpuexpand legacy v4 cpuexpand V6 legacy v4 MOV W _i1 32 R0 MOV B Q i1 1 32 R0H MOV W 1024 E0 SUB B ROL ROL MULXS W EO ERO SHLL W 2 R0 MOV L ERO _11 32 EXTU L ERO MOV L ERO _11 32 Shift result is stored to unsigned long Shift result is zero expanded and stored to unsigned long Notes and Remarks This option is valid when CPU type is 2600A 2600N 2000A or 2000N and legacy v4 is specified 3 7 3 Enabling Register Declarations Description The compiler allocates registers to variables in order based on the analysis results in the compiler regardless of whether or not the registers are declared When the enable register option is specified the registers are allocated first to the variables with the register declaration Specification Method enable register Example of use int gil void func register lo
293. d 18 15 48 42 94 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 17 15 14 Specified 17 15 14 2 Speed efficiency Code Expansion of Shift Expressions Size X Speed O Description Object codes for shift operations are generated with improving speed rather than reducing size Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Shift to multiple Command line speed shift Example To shift the variable a multiple times C C program unsigned char a 0x80 int dat void main void a gt gt dat Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified Q a 32 RO0L _a ERO _dat 1 32 ROH _dat 32 R1 SDSRUCS 3 24 A Processed by calling a run time routine ROH L8 8 ROL L7 8 ROL _a 32 Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 25 19 19 15 15 Specified 49 43 29 23 23 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 25 25 19 Specified 25 25 19 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 39 33 78 64 64 Specified 29 25 40 32 32 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 14 14 12 Specified 14 14 12 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the
294. d 39 32 78 72 124 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 18 14 14 Specified 18 14 14 4 Inline Expansion of Functions Size X Speed O Description When an inline expansion is specified with the option small size functions are inline expanded which improves the execution speed However if any of the following conditions is met inline expansion is not performed e A function is defined prior to a pragma inline specification e A variable parameter is included e An address of a parameter is referenced e The types of a real parameter and a dummy parameter are not the same e The size limitation of an inline expansion has been exceeded The size limitation of an inline expansion indicates the number of nodes of the specified function The number of nodes indicates the processing unit used in the compiler internal processing which can be selected within the range from 1 to 65535 If a small number of nodes is specified only a small function is inline expanded however if a large number is specified a large size function can also be inline expanded The default number is 105 If pragma inline is specified for a function the function is inline expanded regardless of the inline expansion size limitation Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Maximum nodes of inline function Command line speed inline node Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5
295. d 66 54 132 108 108 Specified 91 79 266 232 190 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 46 43 38 Specified 60 58 60 5 4 10 Specifying Inline Expansion of Functions Size X Speed O Description When the inline expansion is specified the expansion is performed within the calling function but the function is not called and then the execution speed is improved There are the following two ways to specify the inline expansion 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format pragma inline function name 2 Specifying with an option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Maximum nodes of inline function Command line speed inline node When a function is called normally the JSR or BSR instruction is output However when the inline expansion is specified codes are expanded directly at the location where a function is called Therefore the JSR or BSR instruction at calling a function and the RTS instruction at returning from a function are not output which improves the execution speed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 56 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Example To perform the inline expansion of the function func C C program Specification in the pragma statement pragma inline func int a b void func at b void main a 0 func Assembly expansion code Not specified Specified _b 32 R0 _a ER1
296. d because the Compiler internally handles member variable num as if it is an ordinary global variable Note For details on a static member variable refer to section 8 2 3 Static Member Variable Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program class A private static int num public A void A void u int A num 0 void main void Creating a class A type class object Incrementing a static member variable Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion struct A char dummy u void nw FUl unsigned long void dl FPv void struct A ct A struct A void dt A struct A const int Handled by the Compiler as if it is void main void i an ordinary global variable struct ls C A struct reating class A type class objects struct Struct struct Calling constructors Calling destructors struct A __ct__A struct A this if this struct A 0 this struct A nw FUI1 l struct A Incrementing a static member variable return this void dt A struct A const this int flag if this struct A 0 num__1A if flag amp 1 4 dl FPv void this Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques
297. d code Eliminate dead code Same code 7 Optimizes branch instructions Optimize branches Branch Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions The following shows the most efficient optimization specifications with the compiler Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Valid compiler optimization options 3034 1527 1 byte enum type specification 3 parameter passing registers In the inter module optimizer no optimization is performed by default if HEW is used and a simply linked module is produced Therefore the default produces the same result as the compiler optimization 2 Specifying inter module optimization items a Specify the optimization items for the inter module optimizer one by one Optimization Function Inter Module Optimization Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler optimization options 3034 1527 specified Unifies constants strings 3034 1527 Deletes unreferenced variables 3034 1527 functions Optimizes access to variables 2970 1513 Optimizes access to functions 3024 1538 Reallocates registers 3018 1535 Eliminates dead code 3034 1527 Optimizes branch instructions 3034 1527 b Enabling all inter module optimization features Enable all inter module optimization features Optimization Function Inter Module Optimization Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler optimization options 3034 1527 specified Optimi
298. d f void func while ST a lt 1 if a lt 2 f0 lt 3 In this example because ST a may be updated in f ST a is not assumed as loop invariant value in the loop Therefore ST cannot be treated as volatile even though specified so with the volatile_loop option e If the condition in 2 is satisfied 3 is executed and the ST a value may be updated Accordingly after the function call ST a is to be reloaded e If the condition in 2 is not satisfied the ST a value is not updated so the ST a value used in the previous conditional at 1 can be directly used B 4 3 Compatibility between Ver 4 0 and Ver 6 01 To link an object program created by Ver 4 0 with an object program created by Ver 6 01 the following conditions need to be satisfied 1 C source program The following options that affect function interface must be specified equally e regparam e longreg nolongreg e double float e structreg nostructreg e stack byteenum e pack unpack Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features 2 Assembly program An assembly program must conform to the rules concerning function call which are described in section 9 3 2 Function Calling Interface in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Notes 1 Forinformation not mentioned in the manual the compatibility with an upgraded version is not guar
299. d item Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Elimination of dead code Symbol forbid Specifies the name of variable or function in which unreferenced symbol eliminating optimization is disabled Elimination of same code Samecode forbid Specifies the name of the function in which same code eliminating optimization is disabled Use of short addressing to Variable forbid Specifies the name of the variable in which optimization using short absolute addressing mode is disabled Use of indirect call jump to Function forbid Specifies the name of the function in which optimization using indirect addressing mode is disabled Memory allocation in Absolute forbid Specifies the address area to which address allocation is not performed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Section Tab 00 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section verity Other Relocatable section start address Section Add Hoo000000 VECTTBL INTTBL Modify H O0000400 PResetPRG IntPRG Mew Overlay H 00000800 H O000ECO0 HooooFSFo Generate external symbol file Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Relocatable section start address Dialog Menu Subcommand Function start Specifies each section start address and linkage order Generate external symbol file Dialog Menu Subcommand Function fsy
300. de IntParlO IntLoc IntGlob EnumLoc Identl tl if Enum oc RBs break Copy Find Set Address Set Line Register ERO oooo0000c ChariGlob Go io Giso ERL ooooo0nc IntLoc Bet PC Bee ERZ oooooo00c IntLoc Instant Watch ER3 0000000t IntParIO Add Watch ER4 oDODODOt IntGlob D O Go to Disassembly ERS oooooo00t EnumLoc ER ooooooot Identi ER ooooo0nc Add variable under cursor to watch window i Num 7 fa ofa aN em ig ger s Hi at La 10 8 2 s A T After making these preparations try to execute the program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 54 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 10 ResetGo Command Selecting RestGo from the Run menu causes the system to execute the program until the PC reaches the breakpoint sl ResetGo On the C source program right click to display the popup menu and select Go to Disassembly to display a Disassembly window The rightmost column on the Disassembly window is the Source column where the C source program associated with the disassembled code is displayed g interface sam 3 0a OX sampleXcmain c Address Label Assembler Source 00000852 4040 main BRA Proc0 8 Procl 00000854 0100 6DFZ2 MOV L ERZ ER7 char mallo 00000858 01206DF4 STM L ER4 ER G SP 0000085e opo4 MOV W RO R4 0000085e 7A0600FF MOV L H OOFFEFBS ERG if a 00000864 17F4 EXTS L ER4 0000
301. de file at the beginning of a compilation unit Defines define Defines the macro name Messages message Outputs an information message Message level charge message Change message level File inline path file inline path Specifies the path name where obtains a file that has function 2 Category Object definitions to be expanded as inline functions Object Category in HEW 4 0 is different from that of the previous versions HEW 3 0 or earlier Both of them are displayed in the following charts lt HEW2 0 to HEW3 0 gt 00 Standard Toolchain Configuration Sim Debue_H85 26004 z El e All Loaded Projects sample C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim EI Category O Output file type E Qype AR Machine code obj C source file v Generate debug information Template Assembly source file Section Auto E B9 Linkage symbol file Proeram zl Store string data in P Const section Mul Div operation specification Based on ANSI Guarantee 16bit as a result of 16bit 16bit Output directory fs CONFIGDIR Modify Options C C cpu 26004 24 object CONFIGDIRD FILELE AF obj debug nolist chgincpath nologo owes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW lt HEW4 0 gt H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 2 x C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb
302. de tease ue eed UO Peas D 39 Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1 1 Summary The H8S and H8 300 C C Compiler enables effective creation in either C or C language of programs which takes advantage of functions and performance of the Renesas Technology H8S and H8 300 series of single chip microcomputers for embedded applications This compiler supports the following CPUs e H8SX Series H8SX e H8S 2600 Series H8S 2600 e H8S 2000 Series H8S 2000 e H8 300H Series H8 300H e H8 300 Series H8 300 e H8 300L Series H8 300L e AES Series AE5 This document explains procedures for creating application programs using this C C compiler This document mainly explains the Compiler Version 6 0 HEW2 0 or later and also explains the previous Version 3 0 HEW 1 2 where it is necessary Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 2 Features The H8S and H8 300 C C compiler offers the following significant features Windows Version The H8S and H8 300 C C compiler of Windows version supports the integrated environment HEW High performance Embedded Workshop to allow the user to develop the programs thoroughly on the Windows display The HEW provides the following features Project generator Automatically generates template software projects for each CPU Combination interface with version management tools Supports the interface with the version management tools
303. disable output of a load module when an undefined symbol is found at linking Answer Undefined symbols can be checked using an option with the inter module optimizer for HEWI 2 When this option is specified an error message is displayed if an undefined symbol is included and the output of a load module is disabled Without this specification a warning message is displayed while a load module is generated Specification method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Check for undefined symbols Subcommand udfcheck Remarks Undefined symbols are always checked with the optimizing linkage editor for HEW2 0 or later and if an undefined symbol is included an error message is displayed and the output of a load module is disabled 11 2 7 Unify Output Forms of S Type File Question I would like to unify mixed output forms S1 S2 S3 of S type file Answer These can be output by specific data record S1 S2 S3 irrespective of load address by options Example optlnk test abs form stype output test mot record s2 All data records are output by S2 11 2 8 Dividing an Output File Question I would like to divide an output file for each ROM devices into some files Answer If specify a start address and termination address in the end of an output file name an object of specified area can be output An output file name can be specified more than two Example An area of 0x0 OxFFFF is output into optl
304. dition Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Adding a new user By default an administrator and a guest have been added You can register new users 1 Click on the Log in button shown on the previous page Log in as a user granted administrator access right s rights dfasdf User access rights User name list Access C Administrator C Full read write access Access rights selection C Read write file access only C Read only access Cancel 2 Click on the Access rights button to open the following User access rights dialog box 3 Click on the Add button to open the Add new user dialog box 4 Enter a new user name and password Password specification is mandatory Add new user User Cancel Password WK Confirm Password oko Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW e Selecting the server machine Select the machine that will work as the server If you want to make your own machine the server you do not have to do anything If you want to specify another machine as the server click on the Select server button in the Options dialog box Choose Remote in the following dialog box and then specify a computer name Click on the OK button Your specification will be put into effect er Location Computer name Note This feature is supported by HEW 3 0 or l
305. e loop as a result of optimization e Obtains the control flow including the for loop control expression e Due to analyzing the control flow analysis and alias analysis of external variables a in 3 is handled as a constant value in the loop e 3 which is the reference expression to a is moved outside the for loop 2 as follows temp a for i 0 i lt 10 i 2 b i temp 3 Therefore the variable a in expression 3 is unchanged in the loop Example 5 int a fO a 0 lt 1 while 1 lt 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features In this example the statement 1 is assumed as unnecessary and eliminated as a result of optimization e Since 2 is an infinite loop this function is judged to have no exit e Since a is not referenced in the infinite loop specification 1 is assumed as unnecessary coding and is eliminated b volatile loop Option If the loop control variable is a non volatile external variable and also the conditional expression is simple the volatile loop option regards the loop control variable as volatilequalified to prevent an infinite loop from being created However if the loop control variable is not loop invariant it cannot be treated as volatile qualified In Ver 6 01 declare the relevant variable with volatile An example program is given below Example struct unsigned char a 1 ST int a extern voi
306. e method on another machine 1 The following installation environment is created for the directory that was created at step 5 of the project type storage method Installation environment directory C3 project a sample hsc sample huf a Setup exe 2 Copy the above installation environment and install the copy on another machine When you run Setup exe the following dialog box opens Specify the location in which HEW2 exe is installed and click on the Install button Directory example c Hew2 HEW2 exe 22 Install custom generator What is the location of the HEW executable CX Hew exex ReneHew2X HEW 2 Ys lew exeXReneHew exel Browse A 3 The environment has been built up completely P i Installation complete Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Custom Project Generator usage example An example of using the installed Custom Project Generator template is provided below 1 Start HEW and choose Create a new project workspace in the Welcome dialog box The installed project type is added to the Projects list Click on the project type and click on the OK button You can now proceed with program development using the stored project template for any new project Projects Application Workspace Name Ei Demonstration CJ Empty Application Project Name 353 Import Makefile aa D Lhi Sample Directory Created project type TAN C
307. e the inline expanded function is used only in the same file 5 4 11 Using 8 Bit Absolute Address Area Size O Speed O Description The H8S or H8 300 Series provide an 8 bit absolute address area When byte data frequently accessed are allocated to this area those data can be accessed in the 8 bit absolute address format which improves ROM efficiency RAM efficiency and the execution speed compared with accessing normally in the absolute address format There are the following two ways to specify the 8 bit absolute address area 1 Specifying with an expansion function Format pragma abs8 variable or structure name array name gt 2 Specifying with an option Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Data access aa 8 Command line abs amp When the pragma abs 8 is specified variables to be accessed in the 8 bit absolute address format can be specified When this is specified using the option format all 1 byte data in the file are set to be accessed in the 8 bit absolute address format The following lists the range of 8 bit absolute address area for each CPU operation mode Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 58 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions CPU Type Address Space Size 8 Bit absolute Absolute Address Area H8SX maximum mode 32 H FFFFFFOO to H FFFFFFFF H8SX advanced mode 28 H FFFFFOO to H FFFFFFF H8SX middle mode 24 H FFFFO00 to H FFFFFF H8S 26
308. e 40 40 36 After 31 29 32 6 6 Functions 6 6 1 Improving the Program Location in Which Functions Are Defined Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Both ROM efficiency and execution speed can potentially be improved by defining in the same file any functions that are frequently called in a module Description In cases where the branch destination address is within the 128 to 127 byte range the H8S or H8 300 Series microcomputer uses the PC relative addressing mode BSR Compared with the absolute addressing mode JSR which is declared by an externally referencing function this mode can improve both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Call the function func2 from the functions func and funcl C language program before optimization C language program after optimization extern int func2 void int ret int ret int func2 void void func void return 0 int i i func2 void func void ret i ine i void func1 void i func2 t i int i i func2 i funcl void ret i Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization func Object Size Table byte Q func2 24 RO _ret 32 _ func2 24 RO _ret 32 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _func2 RO RO Funes _func2 8 RO _ret 3
309. e S1768 eset rii ERE re r EE TESTES be HERR RE rirse 6 8 6 1 6 Specifying In File Functions as static Functions eessessssssseseeeeeee eene eene eene eene 6 9 O 2 Operations souedest EE Or Doi RHEINE RpDDp 6 11 6 2 1 Unifying Common Expressions essesseeseeseeeeeeeenneeneenneen nennen nnne tren reete ene enne enne enne enne ennt tenen 6 11 6 2 2 Improving the Condition Determination sese nennen rennen tnter trennen 6 12 6 2 3 Condition Determination Using Substitution Values eese 6 14 6 24 Using a Suitable Algorithm eee tete e e i e n ee en eed 6 15 6 25 Using Formulas Sian Goa A eI uH 6 17 6 256 Using Local Variables se ti cove sees teens Ege Up o P Uta rU Sovseets oon bau Shee dee 6 18 6 2 7 Assigning an f to float Type Constants ee eecesecesecesecnsecscecseeeaeseneeesecseceaecsaecsaecsaecaeesaeseneeeneees 6 20 6 2 8 Specifying Constants in Shift Operations 0 00 eee cece cece ereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeesseseaeeeaeees 6 22 6 2 9 Using Shift Operations zen e eere tee heed in et pee m eere Bie aI 6 23 6 2 10 Unifying Consecutive ADD Instructions eeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeenen eene nennen rennen rennen enne 6 25 6 3 Eoop Processing osea RURSUS EU nhe ungue 6 26 6 3 1 Selecting a Loop Counter iiec eror ehe oce eic Pa eee etu ie ree c edre 6 26 6 3 2 Selecting a Repeat Control Statement nennen nennen nein enne 6 28 6 3 3
310. e SHONI SAATON Disable all Category Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize startzPResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C O DSEO C BSEC D 0800 Cee Generate list file Check Box Command Option Function list Outputs a list file Outputs no list file Contents Dialog Menu Command Option Function Show symbol show symbol Outputs a list of symbol names Show reference show reference Outputs the number of symbol references Show section sher section Outputs a list of sections Show cross reference show xreference Outputs the cross reference information Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Category Optimize Standard Toolchain Configuration si mDebue_H8S 26004 v Category Show entries for Csowca fils Optimize items C source file Optimize None Eliminated size 0x001 mem Assembly source file E Linkage symbol file Unify strings E felude profile Eliminate dead code Ll Ise short addressing Optimize Mad ity Reallocate registers Eliminate same code Use indirect call jump lOptimize branches Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage listz CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize startzPResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C O DSEO C BSEC D 0800 UN Show entries for
311. e compiler to show information Iqvel messages or not If Jat the upper right corner is clicked and then an item to be referenced is clicked a description similar to that shown above appears Please use this help function for quick reference Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 1 Specifying Options in HEW1 2 For details on specifying options in HEW2 0 or later refer to section 4 2 Specifying Options in HEW2 0 or later 4 1 1 C C Compiler Options 1 Source Tab H8S H8 300 C Compiler Options Debug C C source file Source Object List Optimize Other CPU Show entries for Include file directories Include file directories Preinclude files Add Defines Messages Insert Remove MoJe up Moge down Show entries for Dialog Menu Command Option Function Include file directories include Specifies the path name of the include file directory Preinclude files preinclude Specifies file contents as a include file at the beginning of a compilation unit Defines define Defines the macro name Messages message Outputs an information message Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Object Tab 300 C Compiler Options Debug C C source file Source Object List Optimize Other CPU Output file type Machine code Gkobjp Output file type Di
312. e file _ Default Optio Gop optimization Expression Shit to multiple Struct assignment Weximurm nodes of inline function 9 Generate file for inter module optimization Switch statement Function call Data access auto ess ess 2 Select test c from the left side of the screen and select Speed oriented optimization from Speed or size on the Optimize tab Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A HEW2 0 or later standard Toolchain Configuration C C Toolchain Option Debue E Category Optimize GQ All Loaded Projects E i test E1423 C source file Speed or size Size oriented optimization Z dbsct c Speed sub opea EA AEE intpre c peed oriented optimization smia w Register E resetpre c EUR A B sbrk c ann h judgement Function call Shift to multiple aa V Optimization Default Options Struct assignment gt Data access C source file Inline function Default os x CJ Assembly source file S Hm Linkage symbol file ZEB inii Generate file for inter module optimization Options C C cpu 2000N object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj debug nolist cheincpath lang c nologo UN Select test c from the left side of the screen and select Speed oriented optimization from C C Tab Category
313. e following possibilities to cause this problem 1 Deleting a substitution to a local variable If a value is substituted to a local variable but is not referenced the substitution operation itself is deleted by the optimization void func void funcs PUSH L ER6 int resl res2 res3 resl datal data2 MOV W _datal 32 R0 MOV W _data2 32 E0 MULXU W E0 ERO MOV W RO R6 res2 data2 data3 lt Because res2 is not referenced hereafter res3 data3 datal th ion itself is deleted MOV W datal 32 R1 e expression itself is deleted MOV W Q data3 32 E1 MULXU W El ER1 sub res1 resl res3 lt Coding error in the second parameter Code MOV W RO EO is Bi dale JSR Q sub 24 resi resz to avol eletion POP L RTS ER6 Because a local variable is effective as far as the end of the function normally unreference of a local variable does not occur when the value is substituted in the function Therefore this problem is caused by a coding error as shown in the above example 2 Optimizing substitution to external variables The following types of substitution expressions to external variables are optimized and only the last arithmetic expression results are reflected int glb void main main ra lt Code glb 0 is not generated MOV W 1 16 R0 MOV W R0 8 glb 32 RTS If volatile is specified at a declaration of an external valuable type the code glb 0 is genera
314. e for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 Debugging Using the HDI Let us use the newly created HEW workspace to perform debugging with an HDI The HDI can be operated from both HEW1 2 and HEW2 0 or later 2 3 1 Running with HEW 1 Select Customize on the Tools in the HEW menu to open the Tools Customize dialog box and specify the location of the HDLexe in the HDI location field Then the HDI can be started by pressing the Launch Debugger button on the HEW menu Tools Customize Launch Debugger Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 45 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 2 Selecting a Target On the following screen select the desired CPU type and debugger type This example under the previously selected H8S 2600 advanced mode selects the H8S 2600A Simulator After selecting a target click OK Eite Edit View Run Memory Setup Window Help nuc gBmc4gmBEE WEI susc me a q H E xo woods Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 3 Allocating Memory Resources In the next step allocate memory resources necessary for operating the load module Either select Memory Mapping Window from the View menu or click on the Memory Mapping button on the Toolbar E Memory Mapping This displays a Memory Map dialog box Me
315. e object size Description Rewriting switch statements using a table can substantially reduce the program size although data size increases If the value of a case statement ranges widely however rewriting switch statements in terms of a table can lead to an overall increase in program size Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Branch to a function depending upon the value of the function a C language program before optimization extern void f1 void extern void f2 ey extern void f3 void extern void f4 void extern void f5 void extern int a void sub void switch case 0 case case case case C language program after optimization extern void f1 void extern void f2 void extern void f3 void extern void f4 void extern void f5 void extern int a void sub void static int key 5 j 1 2 3 4 5 keyla 0 Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _sub MOV W _a 32 R0 MOV ROH ROH BNE L15 8 CMP 0 8 R0 BEQ L10 8 CMP 1 8 R0 BEQ L11 8 CMP 12 8 R0 BEQ L12 8 CMP 3 8 R0 BEQ L13 8 CMP 4 8 R0 BEQ L14 8 RTS JMP Q f1 JMP Q f2 JMP Q 33 JMP Q f4 JSR Q f5s RTS Object Size Table byte optimization _sub MOV W Q a 32 R0 EXTS L ERO SHLL L 2 ERO MOV L L9 32 ERO ERO JSR E
316. e of a reference type parameter will enable simple coding of a program and improve the development and maintenance efficiency Additionally the use of the reference type will not influence the size or processing speed e Example of Use As shown below reference type passing instead of pointer passing will enable simple coding In a reference type not the values but the addresses of a and b are passed The use of a reference type as shown in the C program after conversion will not influence the size and processing speed C program void main void void swap int amp int amp void main void int a 100 int b 256 swap a b void swap int amp x int amp y int tmp tmp x x yi y tmp C program after conversion void main void void swap int int void main void int a 100 int b 256 swap amp a amp b void swap int x int y int tmp tmp x txo SY y tmp Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 9 Static Function Development and Size Reduction O Speed O maintenance e Important Points If the class configuration becomes complex due to derived classes etc it will be increasingly more difficult to access static class member variables with the private attribute until they need to be changed to the public attribute To ac
317. e setting according to section 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace 2 HEW2 0 No HEW2 0 or later File Description 1 resetprg c Initialization routine 2 intprg c Vector table settings 3 dbsct c Section initialization routine 4 main c Main function file 5 2600a sub user s own make Subcommand file 1 Set the desired environment e PC version set path lt HEW install directory gt tools hitachi h8 v3_0a_O bin path set CH38 lt HEW install directory gt tools hitachi h8 v3_Oa_O include set hlnk_linrary 1 lt HEW install directory gt tools hitachi h8 v3_0a_O lib c8s26a lib unix version Refer to section 1 3 Installation Method 2 Compile Compile the C program files ch38A cpu 2600aA debugAinit cAvectbl cAscttbl c RET ch38A cpu 2600aA debugA show allocation objectA goptimizeAcmain c RET 3 Create a CPU information file The address range can be specified only for HEW1 2 and not for HEW2 0 or later In the unix version start the cia38 to specify the ROM RAM address range to be used For a description of how to use the cia38 refer to appendix J Creating a CPU Information File in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual In the PC version you can use the HEW Refer to section 2 1 1 10 Setting options This example uses the CPU information file 2600a cpu located in the sample directory Create a subcommand file for the inter module optimization process
318. e symbol Click the right mouse button at the symbol details view to execute the same editing command This tool can measure the static maximum amount used by stack In the case such as multiple interrupt users should edit the file information to measure the dynamic maximum amount used by stack Drag and drop a symbol in the call information view left frame on the screen to move the symbol While a symbol is moved or edited a check mark is displayed at the side of the symbol in the call information view left frame on the screen as follows m G3 PowerON Reset lt 0x00000014 INITSCT 0x00000010 E K main lt 0x0000000c gt E K fune lt 0x00000004 Vx Ox00000000 3 funci 0x00000008 Ef Undef 0x00000004 E abort Ox00000004 Ta Undef 0x00000004 o The editing commands are explained in the following section Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 45 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Add command 1 Adding an existing symbol Click Add to display the following dialog box The right frame is the existing symbol list of the current file Choose a symbol in this list and click on the OK button to add the existing symbol Existing symbol list Ox bj i 0 _abort 0 New symbol Symbol abort INT CMIB1 TMRI Ox00000480 intpre obj Ox000000C j Ox0000082e sbrk obj Ox000000C S Functior INT 0x00000428 intpre obj Ox000000C Ox00000806 CallWalker2 obj Ox0000000
319. e used in C programs Therefore the meaning of a program in version 3 0 may differ from that of version 2 0 Example of version 2 0 int b a Comment 4 The meaning of the program is int b a 4 a a Example of version 3 0 int b a Comment 4 lt The meaning of the program is int b a a a B 2 Features Added between Ver 3 0 and Ver 4 0 B 2 1 Common Additions and Improvements 1 Loosening Limits on Values Limitations on source programs and command lines have been greatly loosened e Length of file name 251 bytes gt unlimited e Length of symbol 251 bytes gt unlimited e Number of symbols 65 535 gt unlimited e Number of source program lines C C 32 767 ASM 65 535 gt unlimited e Length of C program line 8 192 characters gt 16 384 characters e Length of C program string literals 512 characters gt 16 384 characters e Length of subcommand file lines ASM 300 bytes optlnk 512 bytes gt unlimited e Number of parameters of the optimizing linkage editor rom option 64 gt unlimited 2 Hyphens for Directory and File Names A hyphen can be specified for directory and file names 3 Specification of Copyright Display Specifying the logo nologo option can specify whether or not the copyright output is displayed 4 Prefix to Error Messages To support the error help function in Hitachi Embedded Workshop a prefix has been added to error messages for the compiler
320. easured Performance Option Funct ion Name Proc Hele x Gee Performance Analysis Index Function Cycle Count Histogram 0 0 1 CO J QV Cn 4 CJ P9 HPNBPRREER oo oo eo eae O After executing the program the performance of each label is displayed as a result For details of HDI features refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 59 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 Debugging Using the Simulator Debugger Debugging became enabled on the HEW beginning with HEW2 0 Note that it is not available with HEW1 2 Use the sample project created by selecting Demonstration as the project type setting to execute the simulator debugger 2 4 1 Setting Configuration e Select Build Configrations from the Option menu to invoke the Build configurations screen and select the environment to be used In this case select SimDebug_H8 2600A If you modify the configuration execute the building process 3 sample High performance Embedded Workshop dbsct c D gug amp X H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain T a Build Phases Iz b gh E 2 Build Configurations Debug Sessions Qj sample Debug Settings E sample a C source file Radix Ja emit Tear sling sania Build Configurations 2h xj Build configurations Current configuration SimDebue_H8S
321. eceding an infinite loop Specify optimizing range Dialog Menu Command Option Function All opt range all Optimizes external variables within the entire function No loop opt range noloop External variables in a loop and external variables used in a loop iteration condition are not to be optimized No block opt range noblock External variables extending across branches including loops are not to be optimized Allocate registers to global variables Dialog Menu Command Option Function Disable global allocz0 Disables allocation of external variables to registers Enable global alloc 1 Allocates external variables to registers Default global alloc 1 Allocates external variables to registers Propagate variables which are const qualified Dialog Menu Command Option Function Disable const var propagate 0 Disables constant propagation of external constants declared by const Enable const var propagate 1 X Performs constant propagation of external constants declared by const Default const var propagate 1 X Performs constant propagation of external constants declared by const Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 60 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW b Details Button Miscellaneous Tab Optimize details Global variables Miscellaneous Specify maximum unroll factor Default 1 v Allocate registers to struct union members hline memcpy strcpy TN Delete vacant loop Check Box
322. ecification Description pragma bit order bit order option can specify the order of bit field members Sometimes Bit Field Order Rules are different between CPUS this function may increase the compatibility of programs between different CPUs When this option is omitted BIt order Left is selected Specification Method 1 Extended Function Format fpragma bit order left right 2 Option BIt order Left Right Example Switches the order of bit field assignment as the following examples When left is specified bit field members are assigned from the most significant bit side When right is specified members are assigned from the least significant bit side If pragma bit order is specified without left or right specifiler the interpretation of the bit order option is effective below the line C C program assigned from the most significant bit assigned from the least significant bit pragma bit order left pragma bit order right struct f struct unsigned char a 2 unsigned char a 2 unsigned char b 3 unsigned char b 3 x Xx void func void void func void X a xa x b x b Assigned Data Order 765 43 2 10 765 43 2 10 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 7 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 6 1 This section explains options and expansion functions that are newly added to the Compiler Ver 6 1 3 7 1 legacy v4 Description
323. ecified by the pertinent vector table Note This feature is supported by HEW 2 1 or later 7 2 2 Convenient Breakpoint Functions Description The HEW breakpoint facility includes the following convenient functions which will be activated not only upon ordinary breaks but when a break condition is satisfied File input File output Interrupt How to display a breakpoint view HEW 2 2 or earlier Choose View gt Code gt Breakpoints HEW 3 0 or later Choose View Code Eventpoints Note For HEW 3 0 or later go to the Breakpoints view and click on the Software Event tab e File input setting example Right click on the Breakpoints view and choose Setting to open the following Set Break dialog box As shown below PC breakpoint is used so that a break condition is considered as satisfied when the PC reaches the following address The setting method is similar for other breakpoint types Click on the Action tab select File Input in the Action type field specify an input file name an input address and other items and then click on the OK button Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Condition tab Action tab Set Break Set Break Condition Action Condition Action Break type Action type File Input x Address Ho000081 4 Count pi Input file Je hew2 Samplet dat X Browse Destination Address
324. ected as 2000a 2600a or 300ha the size of address space can also be specified Example setenv H38CPU 2600a 24 RET setenvAHLNK_TMPA usr tmp RET Specify the directory for storing the intermediate files created by the linkage editor or by inter module optimization Here it is assumed to be usr tmp If no directory is specified a current directory is used as default setenvAHLNK_LIBRARY1A usr cross_soft lib RET setenvAHLNK_LIBRARY2A usr cross_soft lib RET At linkage a library can be input implicitly without using the LIBRARY option or subcommand option For details refer to the H8S H8S 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual v Unmount the CD ROM For Solaris umountA cdrom h8s sparc RET For HP UX umountA cdrom RET Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview b Installing the integrated development manager and the integrated development manager definition files i Load the installer from the tarfile on the CD ROM This assumes that the CD ROM driver device name is cdrom tarAxvfA cdrom idm tarAidm install RET For Solaris ii Start the installer idm install RET Follow the onscreen installation instructions For details refer to the H8S and H8 300 definition file installer c Installing the Acrobat Reader The manual can be viewed from within Windows The software used to view the manual the Acr
325. ed For details on how to change the global options and standard library refer to section 11 2 1 Output of Undefined External Symbol 4 New project Step 3 On this screen specify the contents of an initialization program and press NEXT gt Check this option when using the file I O library Specify the maximum number of files to be kind of initialization routine opened concurrently NO would you like to create V Check this option when Use I O Library using the memory management library Specify the size of the memory to be used as a heap area za v Use Runtime Library Heap Size H 400 Specify whether the main function to be called by the initialization function is to be generated If the main function is already created remove the check mark goray Dat kution Flex Specify whether a hardware setup function is to be generated If one is to be generated None z specify whether it is an assembly language or C language function Generate Hardware Setup Function Specify whether a definition file is to be used to access the internal peripheral function for I O ports If not remove the check mark Notes 1 Available memory library functions are malloc realloc calloc and new 2 On this dialog box a main function should not be created In Step 9 a sample program that contains the main functio
326. ed Development Environment into the CD ROM drive Here it is assumed that the CD ROM drive is drive D ii From the Windows Start menu click on Run iii Specify in the Run dialog box either H8 xxxx PDF Japanese or eH8_xxxx PDF English where xxxx denotes the year and the month in the Manuals directory on the CD ROM example D Manuals jH8_0110 PDF and then click OK Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 4 Startup Method 1 4 1 Stating the HEW Upon completion of H8S and H8 300 C C compiler package installation the installer for the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW creates a folder named High performance Embedded Workshop within the Programs folder in the Windows Start menu and within this folder the program High performance Embedded Workshop can be started up e Call Walker EY H85 H8 300 Simulator Debugger Help g High performance Embedded Workshop 2 Help 2 High performance Embedded Workshop 2 Read Me 8 High performance Embed shop 2 HIM To HEW Project Converter 3 Mapview Bs Programs 17 Online Manuals H85 H8 300 English 03 04 ER gt t3 Online Manuals SuperH English 03 04 e DIE EX SuperH RISC engine Simulator Debugger Help B Settings Ox Find amp Help zi Bun iy Shut Down The following Welcome dialog box appears Welcome Cancel C Open a recent project workspace iit
327. ed as 2 byte data On the SH int type data are treated as 4 byte data however on the H8S H8 300 Series they are treated as 2 byte data Confirm that there is not any problem on the range of values 2 Some expanded functions cannot be used Functions on the SH series C C compiler and the H8S and H8 300 series C C compiler are compatible by using the pragma statement for example however there are some differences between them in the expanded functions and specifications Note that built in functions are CPU specific 3 Notes on assembler embedding Because of differences in architecture the H8S H8 300 Series cannot handle any code in which an SH series assembly source is embedded Remarks If you wish to use C source files created in the M16C development environment in the H8 development environment Translation Helper is available This is a support tool to translate smoothly the all C source files created in the M16C development environment to the H8 development environment Translation Helper can be free downloaded from Renesas Development Environment site Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 22 How to Modify Global Options Question When the number of parameter passing registers is changed the inter module optimizer generates an error What causes this problem Answer The compiler option to specify the number of parameter passing registers is a global option w
328. ed assembly language expansion code STM ER4 ER6 SP MOV _b ER6 MOV _a ER5 MOV H 000A 16 R4 MOV 1 4 H 00123457 32 MOV B 1 4 H 00123456 32 EEPMOV P W MOV B R4L _x 32 RTS L ER4 ER6 Remarks and notes i This intrinsic function is valid when the CPU type is AES or when H8SX and the eeprom option is specified ii Refer to the hardware manual for the details of ECR EPR and other related issues Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 2 10 Block Transfer Instructions of H8SX Description The following function is available to enhance the block transfer instruction of H8SX No Item Format Description 1 MOVMD void movmdb void dst const Expands into MOVMD instruction instruction void src unsigned int count void movmdw int dst const int src unsigned int count void movmdl long dst const long src unsigned int count 2 MOVSD unsigned int movsd char dst Expands into MOVSD instruction instruction const char src unsigned int size Example 1 movmdb movmdw movmdl The MOVMD B MOVMD W or MOVMD L instruction transfers a memory block of 1 2 or 4 bytes respectively the number of times specified by count from the address specified by src to the address specified by dst In the following example 100 bytes transfer movmdb transfers 1 byte each 100 times movmdw transfers 2 byte each 50 times movmdl transfers 4 byte each 25 times C C
329. ed from a C language program what should I do on the assembly language program 2 When a C language program subroutine is called from an assembly language program what should I do on the assembly language program Answer 1 When can assembly language program subroutine is called from a C language program and the following listed registers are used save restore registers at the entry exit points of the function Number of Parameter Passing CPU Series Registers 2 Number of Parameter Passing Registers 3 H8SX Optimization specified ER2 to ER6 Optimization specified ER3 to ER6 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 Optimization not specified ER2 to ER5 Optimization not specified ER3 to ER5 H8 300H H8 300 Optimization specified R2 to R6 Optimization specified R3 to R6 Optimization not specified R2 to R5 Optimization not specified R3 to R5 2 When a C language program subroutine is called from an assembly language program the following register values are not guaranteed on the C language program before and after the subroutine is called If the register is used in the assembly language program save it before the C language program is called Number of Parameter Passing Number of Parameter Passing Registers 3 CPU Series Registers 2 H8SX H8S 2600 ERO ER1 ERO ER1 ER2 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 RO R1 RO R1 R2 Remarks For a detailed description of linkage with an assembly language program refer to section 9 3 Linking C C Pro
330. ed int static union long dummy Dummy for 4 byte boundary char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed by sbrk heap area static char brk char amp heap area End address of area assigned J FCECKCKCKCKCKCkCkCkCkck ck ck ck ck ko ko ko kOKOKOkCkCkCkCkCkck ck ck ck ck ck koh ck ck kCkCkCkCkCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ok A k k Ck Ck Ck Ck k ck ck ck ck kk ke ke ke ke ek f sbrk Data write ay Return value Start address of the assigned area Pass 1 Failure J CKCKCECKOKCkCkCkCkCk ck ck ck ckck ko kk kk CkOkCkCkCkCkCkck ck k ck ck ck ok oko ck kCkCkCKCKCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ok kk ke ke ke ke kf char sbrk unsigned long size Assigned area size char p if orkt tsize gt heap_area heap HEAPSIZE Empty area size return char 1 p brk Area assignment brk size End address update return p 8K KK AA AAA ok ok ck AAA ck ck ckck k AA ke ke oe ok INIT OTHERLIB Initialize C library Functions if necessary Define OTHERLIB on Assembler Option J FCKCKCKCKCKCKCkCkCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ko ko ko OK OKOkCkCkCkCkCkck ck ck ck ck ck koh ko KC kCkCkCKCkCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ckck k Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck ck ck ck ck kk ke ke ke ke ke ke f void INIT OTHERLIB void srand 1 _slptr NULL The method for creating low level interface routines is described in Low level interface routines in se
331. eecaeseneseaeees 8 2 8 1 1 Initialization Processing and Post Processing of Global Class Object eee eeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 8 2 Introduction to C FUnCHODS srie areor rr eren eene enne tere tene trente entren reete etre enn rennen enne 8 4 8 2 1 How to Reference C Object naci eset ete ee tee i ci egeta eee ee testes 8 4 8 2 2 How to Implement new and delete rosenie iire eer EErEE EEEE en EE rennen 8 5 823 Static Member Variable sec cU pU ir e peii meee 8 6 83 Howto Use Options e ioindghhe o heRote Dn RUD PU HERR EU BERE Dep IP 8 8 8 3 1 C Language for Embedded Applications en rennen enne 8 8 8 3 2 Run time Type Information oerte terr er aer ERR EE Ht he ire Poet shee 8 9 8 3 3 Exception Handling Function essent nennen nennen eene ene en rennen nennen tenen 8 12 8 3 4 Disabling Startup of Prelinker senescere ete pert REPE epe etit gest 8 13 8 4 Advantages and Disadvantages of C Coding eee sess nren nennen eene nene 8 13 SAULT Constructor 1 ee eene Meee hes UO REO Hte end 8 14 8 4 2 Constructor 2 sess ee eure P IR PRI anaes 8 15 8 4 3 Default Parameter ioter one ne PR en o eb d ote ete e eR e 8 17 844 Inline Expansion esos Sect DE Ret te DERE tp PSESE ae Ero 8 18 84 5 Class Member Function asc esse tocca apie e eee sie ces te xb rie tege ct ree etd 8 18 84 6 operator Operator ice ete e RO ORE reete ETE TE EESE 8 21 84 7 Overlo
332. eene nennen en eene eene tenete B 17 B 2 2 Added and Improved Compiler Functions essere eene B 18 B 2 3 Added and Improved Functions for the Assembler seseseeeeeeeeeeeee nennen B 21 B 2 4 Added and Improved Functions for the Optimizing Linkage Editor sees B 21 B 3 Added and Improved Features in Upgrade from Ver 4 0 to Ver 6 0 sss B 22 B 3 1 Added and Improved Compiler Functions esssseseseseeeeeneneeenne eene nennen nennen B 22 B 3 2 Notes on Optimizing Features of the Compiler Ver 6 0 nennen B 24 B 3 3 Compatibility between Ver 4 0 and Ver 6 0 enne nre nennen B 28 B 4 Added and Improved Features in Upgrade from Ver 6 0 to Ver 6 1 B 29 B 4 1 Added and Improved Compiler Functions eeeseeeeeeeeee eene eene nenne nennen B 29 B 4 2 Notes on Optimizing Features of the Compiler Ver 6 01 sese B 30 B 4 3 Compatibility between Ver 4 0 and Ver 6 01 ssssssssssssesssseseeenereneeneen eene nennen tren B 33 Appendix C Notes on Version Upgrade idee ee petuo dice ode duet oie Bes C 35 C Guaranteed Program Operation co ere eed pite io e eti Eroe heo EKES eed ie eive ene C 35 C2 Compatibility with Earlier Version issues Dee onde RR E ESEESE SEak De EUR Hn C 36 Appendix D List of Limitations 123 220 cedex eed deett ias ete ede agir or dee eee D 37 Appendix E ASCII Code Table eise b i enata de Cor
333. efault parameter value int b int retl int ret2 retl sub 1 ret2 sub 3 2 0 sub int a return a b Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 4 Inline Expansion Development and O Size Reduction A Speed O maintenance e Important Points When coding the definition of a function specify inline in the beginning to cause inline expansion of the function This will eliminate the overhead of a function call and improve the processing speed e Example of Use Specify function sub as an inline function and inline expand it in the main function Then remove the function sub code However function sub cannot be reference from other files Use inline expansion with caution because although the processing speed is certain to improve the program size will become too large unless only small functions are used C program after conversion C program int a int a void main void Expanding the content of function sub 1 2 3 inline int sub int x int y a 3 return x y return void main void sub 1 2 8 4 5 Class Member Function Development and Size Reduction A Speed A maintenance Important Points Defining a class will enable information hidingand improve the development and maintenance efficiency However use this technique wit
334. elative to Custom directory x Cancel Full file path lox Hew exekHew3 H8V6Xbinbin koX Debue bin c bin Browse Section PPP Boundary alignment f byte Symbol func Specification Method 3 When input binary files boundary alignment value can be specified When the boundary alignment specification is omitted 1 is used as the default for the compatibility with earlier versions This boundary alignment specification is valid in the Optimizing Linkage Editor Ver 9 0 or later Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Show entries for Binary files Command line binary bin_c bin PPP lt boundary alignment func boundary alignment 11214181 16132 default 1 Add binary file Relative to Oustom directory x Cancel Full file path OXHew exeXHewd3 H8V6Xbintbin koX DebueXbin c bin Browse Section Boundary alignment Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 1 2 Output Options Description Some type of ROM writer can input only HEX files or only S type files The optimizing linkage editor can output the following eight files according to user usage User can change the kind of output file if necessary e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Output Type of output file Command line orm absolute relocate object library s library u hexadecimal stype
335. elcome dialog box Cancel C Open a recent project workspace Administration o test test hws C Browse to another project workspace Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 1 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 1 Setting the Project type When the following screen appears enter the desired project name in the Name field New Project Workspace Cancel Directory o samp le Browse CPU family H85 H8 300 Y Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Prosect type N Application e Assembly Application Demonstration y Empty Application Library Then select the Project type column Project type Description Application A project type when creating an application that includes C C program files Assembly Application A project type when creating an application that includes assembly language programs only Demonstration Sample project type Empty Application Empty project creation Library Library creation project type By clicking the OK button after selecting the desired project type you can move on to the step for initializing the new project The explanation below assumes that you have selected Application as a project type Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 New project Step 1 Specify the CPU to be used and press NEXT gt
336. en you select Application for the project type when creating a new workspace Usage HEW Menu Project Edit Project Configuration e Files that can be regenerated I O Register Definition Files iodefine h Generation method You can regenerate iodefine h by checking I O Register Definition Files overwrite on the I O Register tab in the Edit Project Configuration dialog box If you modify iodefine h inadvertently you can regenerate it and overwrite it on the modified file Edit Project Configuration VO Register Stack Target I CXHew exex ReneHew2XInterruptlXInterruptlXiodefine h Definition of I O Register Files that can be re edited Stack size setting file stacksct h Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 2 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Editing method You can edit the initial values of Stack Pointer Address and Stack Size on the Stack tab in the Edit Project Configuration dialog box Edit Project Configuration VO Register Stack Target Stack Pointer Address power on reset Initial Value Stack Size H200 n Note Regenerating and re editing files are supported by HEW 2 0 or later 7 1 2 Makefile Output Description HEW allows you to create a makefile based on the current option settings By using the makefile you can build the current project without having to install HEW completely This is convenient when you wan to send a project to a pe
337. enerate file for inter module optimization Check Box Command Option Function goptimize Outputs inter module optimization information Outputs no inter module optimization information Output directory Dialog Menu Command Option Function object file name gt Specifies object output directory 3 List Tab t Tuning Other CPU T Gontents Source program Default Conditionals Default m Definitions pes m Calls Deta m Expansions peau Structured Default Code Default Cross reference petaut Section Default Generate list file Check Box Command Option Function list Outputs assembly list nolist Outputs no assembly list Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Contents Specifies the contents to be output on the list files Dialog Menu Command Option Function Source program source Outputs the source program list corresponding to the assembly list Conditionals show conditionals Outputs the parts in which conditions specified in AIF or AIFDEF are not satisfied Definitions show definitions Outputs macro definitions AAREPEAT and AWHILE definitions and INCLUDE ASSIGNA and ASSIGNC directives Calls show calls Outputs macro call statements and AIF AIFDEF and AENDI directives Expansions show expansions Outputs macro expansions and ARE
338. epe iftius Ee 3 1 3 1 Specifying an Interrupt Function ener tr te ip E ERE e rhe E TEn E rE T ESE E ee ESE i iE Erare 3 1 3 1 1 Stack Switching Specification teen ener tene tren treten tenen rennen ene 3 2 3 1 2 Trap Instruction Return Specification eee eecceecesecesecesecesecesecseecseeeseseaeeseeseeesseenseeeseeaeesaessaeaes 3 3 3 1 3 Interrupt Function Complete Specification sesssssssssssseseeeeeeneenne enne nre 3 4 3 1 4 Vector Table Automatic Generation Functions sessssssseeeeeeeeeneenne eene nennen trennen 3 5 32 Bult PUN CHONS s seed erret ene Hte ton e e pee of b P e 3 6 3 2 1 Setting and Referencing the Condition Code Register CCR see 3 7 3 2 2 Setting and Referencing an Extended Register essere nenne 3 9 3 2 3 Setting Vector Base Register echec rig URP rre E Hier Eoo Pe eee sees 3 10 3 2 4 Opration with Overflow V Flag Test sessesseeeeeeeeeeee nennen emen nennen tenete trennen 3 11 3 2 5 Transfer Instructions o eee hee e peur Ree ure d 3 12 3 2 6 Arithmetic Operation Instructions eeeeeeeeseeeseeeeee nennen nennen eene eene entente teens 3 14 3 2 Shaft Instructions io ire ep shea TE E snc capa RE OP EHE EE O ETE ob ege b 3 18 3 2 8 System Control Instructions sesesseseeseeeeeene enne nennen trennen rennen emet tene tene trennen trennen 3 19 3 29 Block Transfer Instructio
339. er 11 1 10 How to Specify Include Files Question 1 How can I specify an include file in another directory 2 How can I provide include specification to an existent file Answer These can be specified with the compiler functions The following gives the description 1 The compiler option to specify the include file in the specified directory has been prepared Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Source Show entries for Include file directories Command line include 2 This option specifies a file as an include file even if the file is not included in the source file Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Source Show entries for Preinclude files Command line preinclude Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 11 Program Coding Using Japanese Fonts Question Is it possible to code character strings and comments in a program in Japanese Answer Yes you can code in Japanese However the Japanese environment differs according to the host machine The Japanese environment for each host machine is listed below Host Machine Japanese Code PC Shift JIS code HP9000 Shift JIS code SPARC EUC code For example when a file created on a SPARC machine is compiled on a PC the way the compiler recognizes Japanese should be modified using an option The following command options are available Command Option Description Sji
340. er Object files generated by Assembler are not optimized RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 25 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 4 6 Unifies Common Codes Size O Speed Description Multiple strings representing the same instruction are unified into a subroutine and the code size is reduced with this specification This optimization increases the overhead of function call and decreases execution speed so should be careful The minimum code size for the optimization with the same code unification can be specified When inline expansion of functions is specified at compile this optimization is not performed as execution speed is decreased Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Eliminate same code Command line optimize same code e Specification Method for Unification Size Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Eliminated size Command line samesize size Examples C Source Programs Function func00 and func01 have the same lines of expressions filel c void main void void func00 void long g 11 9g 12 9 13 9 14 9 15 void main void func00 func01 void func00 void g 11 g 12 g 13 g 14 g l5 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor file2 c void func01 void extern long g ll g 12 g 13 g 1l4 g 15
341. eret nene trennen trennen eerte trennen 7 21 q 2 Coverage Peat reu isses ona Ron RU Re E S A 7 25 T2324 Buell cdi o EP or RERO E E ee a 7 28 7 2 5 Debugger Target Synchronization ssesesssseseeeeeeee enne enne nennen trennen eaen enne 7 30 q7 2 0 Howto Use Timers teen obe PD EPOD D E abst a coed os DR 7 33 7 2 Examples of Timer Usage eoe et e Ut teet obere eie e tee ocaeca iets 7 35 7 2 8 Reconfiguration of Debugger Target ssssessssssseeeeeeneneenneeeenne nennen rene eene erret tenene 7 38 TS Call Walker iiU UR qao et eit t ient tbi e lee ems 7 39 7 34 Making Stack Information File iei rie re eere e e ie ied rer ere eee 7 39 73 2 Starting Call Walker iem Rie is Reet ee AS Sees tee eee 7 40 7 3 3 Fil Open and Call Walker Window oet enD P reni ps men UII ex 7 41 7 3 4 Editing the Stack Information File sees en rennen eene enne 7 45 7 3 5 Stack Area Size of Assembly Program ssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen eoep sieer rs tren 7 47 7 3 6 Merging Stack Information eee eeceseceseceseceseceeecaeecseeeseseaeeeeeeseeeeeesecsaecsaecsaecsaecsaesaeeeseseneseaeees 7 48 T3 1 Other Eunctiofs nec eter ce te tee tete edere et te teet tede te cect en 7 50 Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques eese 8 1 8 1 Initialization Processing Post Processing ceseesecesecsseeseeseeceecseeeseeseeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeesseensecseaeecsaeca
342. errupt mask 3 Sets the CCR 4 References the CCR 5 Logically ANDs the CCR 6 Logically ORs the CCR 7 Logically XORs the CCR 8 Extended register EXR Sets an interrupt mask 3 2 2 9 References an interrupt mask 10 Sets the EXR 11 References the EXR 12 Logically ANDs the EXR 13 Logically ORs the EXR 14 Logically XORs the EXR 15 Vector Base Register VBR Setting VBR 3 2 3 16 Operation with overflow test Performs 1 byte addition and sets the CCR according to the 3 2 4 result 17 Performs 2 byte addition and sets the CCR according to the result 18 Performs 4 byte addition and sets the CCR according to the result 19 Performs 1 byte subtraction and sets the CCR according to the result 20 Performs 2 byte subtraction and sets the CCR according to the result 21 Performs 4 byte subtraction and sets the CCR according to the result 22 Left shifts 1 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result 23 Left shifts 2 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result 24 Left shifts 4 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result 25 Performs the sign conversion of 1 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result 26 Performs the sign conversion of 2 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result 27 Performs the sign conversion of 4 byte data and sets the CCR according to the result Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Referenced No Ite
343. ers By default the compiler uses registers E R3 to E R6 as variable allocation registers When this option is disabled the compiler uses registers E R4 to E R6 as variable allocation registers The following lists the performance characteristics of these two specifications Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Register variables E R3 to E R6 3048 1580 Register variables E R4 to E R6 3048 1580 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other select Increase a register for register variable for Miscellaneous option Command line regexpansion In this program there is no difference However unless an expression statement is too complicated the greater is the number of variable allocation registers the higher is the performance of the compiler in terms of object size In H8S V6 01 this option is not supported so there is no difference in the performance For further details refer to section 5 4 4 Increasing the Number of Variable Allocation Registers Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 4 Optimization of external variables The following table compares the results where the optimization of external variables is specified or disabled Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles External variable optimization enabled novolatile 3048 1580 External variable optimization disabled volatile 3076 1592 S
344. es the influences on coding efficiency of each function Development and No Function maintenance Size Reduction Speed Section 1 Constructor 1 A A 8 4 1 2 Constructor 2 A A 8 4 2 3 Default parameter O O 8 4 3 4 Inline expansion O A O 8 4 4 5 Class member function A 8 4 5 6 operator Operator A A 8 4 6 7 Function overloading O O 8 4 7 8 Reference type O O 8 4 8 9 Static function O O 8 4 9 10 Static member variable O O 8 4 10 11 Anonymous union O O 8 4 11 12 Virtual function A A 8 4 12 SameasC O Requiring caution in use A Performance decrease Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 1 Constructor 1 Development and Size Reduction A Speed A maintenance Important Points Use a constructor to automatically initialize a class object However use it with caution because it will influence the object size and processing speed as follows e Example of Use Create a class A constructor and destructor and compile them The size and processing speed will be influenced because the constructor and destructor will be called in the class declaration and decisions will be made in the constructor and destructor codes C program class A private int aj public A void A void int getValue void return a void main void A a b
345. espectively In the following example which is in H8SX advanced mode ROM Size 80 bytes to 68 bytes Execution Speed 96 cycles to 96 cycles Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Before Optimization func02 e Remarks 1 This option is valid only when CPU is H8SXN H8SXM H8SXA or H8SXX 2 This option is valid for object files generated by C C Compiler or Assembler WQOQHERWE BH R1 R1 R1 RO 1 RO0 RO _str1 32 R1 W R1 RO RO RO _str2 32 R1 W 1 R1 4 3 R1 L36 8 1 R1 R1 RO func01 8 func02 8 RO _str1 32 R0 W RO EO 4 3 E0 E0 Q str2 32 R0 W 4 g c1 32 0 g 11 32 9 4 10 Optimization Partially Disabled Description When don t want to optimize some variables or functions by the optimizing linkage editor that variables or functions can be specified as follows After Optimization func02 Disablements by the symbol name and by the address range are available Disables elimination of unreferenced symbols e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Forbid item Elimination of dead code Command line symbol forbid symbol name gt e Disables unification of common codes R1 R1 RO 1 R0 RO h 0044 16 R1 W R1 RO RO RO h 004c 16 R1 W 1 R1 4 3 R1 L36 1 R1 R1 RO func01 8 func02 8 RO _str1 16 R0 W RO E0 4 3 E0 EO
346. ess Space Specification Environment variable Depends on environment variable H38CPU H8S 2600 Normal cpu 2600N Advanced 1 Mbytes cpu 2600A 20 16 Mbytes cpu 2600A 24 256 Mbytes cpu 2600A 28 4 Gbytes cpu 2600A 32 H8S 2000 Normal cpu 2000N Advanced 1 Mbytes cpu 2000A 20 16 Mbytes cpu 2000A 24 256 Mbytes cpu 2000A 28 4 Gbytes cpu 2000A 32 H8 300H Normal cpu 300HN Advanced 1 Mbytes cpu 300HA 20 16 Mbytes cpu 300HA 24 H8 300 cpu 300 H8 300L cpu 300 Change number of parameter passing registers from 2 default to 3 Check Box Command line Function Y regparam 3 Specifies the number of parameter passing registers as 3 regparam 2 Specifies the number of parameter passing registers as 2 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 9 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 4 HEW 4 1 2 Assembler Options 1 Source Tab Source Object List Tuning Other CPU Show entries for include file directories Defines Preprocessor variables Remove Move up Move down Show entries for Dialog Menu Command Option Function Include file directories include Specifies include file directory Defines define Defines string literal replacement Preprocessor variable assigna Defines integer type preprocessor variable assignc Defines character type preprocessor variable Note Specify using the following dialog box Add preprocessor variable Symbol Value String C I
347. esults to the calling function Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques C language program before optimization unsigned char a b unsigned char func void if a if a amp amp b return 1 return 0 return 0 Expanded into assembly language code before optimization func MOV B BNE SUB B RTS MOV B BEQ MOV B BEQ MOV B RTS Q a 32 RO0H L6 8 ROL ROL ROH ROH L7 8 bD 32 R 0L L8 8 1 ROL Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization unsigned char a b unsigned char func void if a amp amp b else return 1 return 0 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization t ncs MOV B BEQ MOV B BEQ MOV B RTS SUB B RTS Q a 32 RO0L L5 8 _b 32 ROL L5 8 1 ROL LS ROL ROL H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 26 22 30 24 24 After 26 22 26 20 20 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 26 26 22 After 26 26 22 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 18 15 42 36 36 After 18 15 36 30 30 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 15 15 14 After 15 15 14 Remarks and Notes The execution speed is measured by assuming that a 1 and b 1 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 2 3 Cond
348. ete Specification Description Functions declared in pragma interrupt are normally returned by executing the RTE instruction However when an interrupt function complete specification sy is enabled they jump to the specified address by the JMP instruction Example To jump to the address of function f2 by the JMP instruction C C program extern int f2 extern unsigned char a pragma interrupt fl sy f2 lt At the end of interrupt function f1 jumps to the address of function f2 by executing the a 0 JMP instruction void f1 void Compiled assembly language expansion code RO SUB B ROL ROL ROL _a 32 lt Returns on the JMP instruction Remarks and notes i This specification which can be set together with a stack switching specification cannot be set with a trap instruction return specification ii If specified as lt function name gt the function name is referenced by an assembly language program as the name without an underscore iii The interrupt function complete specification sp should always be specified in lowercase characters Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 1 4 Vector Table Automatic Generation Functions Description By specifying the vector number of pragma interrupt the vector table of functions is automatically generated Format pragma interrupt function name gt ve
349. eter Development and maintenance Size Reduction Speed mportant Points In C a default parameter can be used to set a default used when calling a function To use a default parameter specify a default value for parameters of a function when declaring the function This will eliminate the need of specifying a parameter in many of the function calls and enable the use of a default parameter instead thus improving the development efficiency A parameter value can be changed if a parameter is specified Example of Use The following shows an example of calling function sub when 0 is specified as a default parameter value in the declaration of function sub As shown below no parameter needs to be specified if the default parameter value is acceptable when calling function sub Moreover the efficiency of a program is not deteriorated even when it is converted into C In sum a default parameter ensures superior development and maintenance efficiency and has no disadvantage compared with C C program void main void int sub int int void main void int retl int ret2 retl sub 1 2 ret2 sub 3 sub int a int return a b Specifying 0 as a parameter value in the function declaration 0 No second parameter specified a b 0 C program after conversion void main void int sub int int void main void l Converted to the d
350. etprg Reset Program c sbrk h Header file of sbr h stacksct Setting of Stack 2 Finish Cancel For details on the files created in this section refer to section 2 2 Introduction of Sample Program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 8 New project Step7 Specifying Finish causes the display of the following screen Summary Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 9 Adding a main file Add the cmain c file for main processing to the project that has been completed In Project gt Add Files specify the HEW directory Tools HITACHI H8 3_0a_O sample cmain c ae sample eG sample E Project Files B J intprg src resetprg c sbrk c Ba Dependencies sbrkh stackscth vect inc X Sc annine Dependencies JScanninge Dependencies Finished Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 10 Setting options Select H8S H8 300 C C Compiler from the option menu 300 C C Compiler Specify the compiler options for cmain c On this dialog box specify the output of an inter module optimizer add on information file by checking the item indicated below H8S H8 300 C Compiler Options Debug B C C source file Ey C source file i
351. etting options may be changed according to the CPU series that has been selected on the Step 1 screen If you change the options after the project has been created you can do it on CPU Tab of Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain in HEW New Project Option Setting Er mem Nemo Advanced as the Specify global options operating mode When selecting the Advanced mode specify the size of the address space to be used Address Space Operating Mode Advancec Select either the code Multiple Divide optimized library or speed optimized library Merit of Library Stack calculation Medium 7 Specify SBR address Default zl HO Change number of parameter registers 4 Treat double as float Pass struct parameter via register Pass 4 byte parameter return value vi x 4 b lt Back Ne Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 4 New project 3 9 On this screen specify the contents of an initialization program and press NEXT gt Dd Check this option when using ify th the file I O library Specify the maximum number of files to be at kind of initialization routine opened concurrently buld you like to create Check this option when using the memory aC i D streams management library E Specify the size of the v Use Heap Memory memory to be used as a Specify w
352. ettings and modify the name 4 Abolition of Common Section Assembly Program With the change of the object format support for a common section has been abolished 5 Specification of Entry via END Assembly Program Only an externally defined symbol can be specified with END 6 Inter module Optimization Object files output by the earlier version of the compiler Ver 3 x or lower or the assembler Ver 2 x or lower are not targeted for inter module optimization Be sure to recompile and reassemble such files so that they are targeted for inter module optimization Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 C 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix D List of Limitations Appendix D List of Limitations The H8S and H8 300 C C compiler version6 01 has the following limitations No Category Item Limitation 1 Compiler startup Number of source programs that can be compiled in a single No limitation operation 2 Total number of macro names that can be specified in define option No limitation 3 File name length No limitation depends on the OS 4 Number of source Length of a line 32768 characters program lines H8SX H8S 16384 characters 300H 300 5 Number of source program lines per file No limitation 6 Number of compilable source program lines No limitation 7 Preprocessor Depth of file nesting levels created by include statement No limitation 8 Tot
353. expansion O O function 13 Uses 16 bit absolute address areas Option expansion O O function 14 Allocates to a memory indirect area Option expansion O X function Legend O effective A effective for some programs X reduces efficiency The following table lists the optimization functions supported by the inter module optimization tool No Description Specification Mode 1 Unifies constants and character strings Option 2 Deletes unreferenced variables and functions Option 3 Optimizes access to variables Option 4 Optimizes access to functions Option 5 Re allocates registers Option 6 Eliminates same codes Option 7 Optimizes branch instructions Option This section describes these optimization functions dividing them into two groups the optimization for size and that for speed The specification of each function is examined according to the following flowchart Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Specification procedure at optimization for size Specifies options Uses the 1 byte enum type Specifies expanded interpretation of multiplication division Specifies the number of parameter passing registers Increases the number of variable assignment registers Provides inter module Uses the inter module optimization tool features optimization Uses CPU specific Reviews the way 8 bit absolute address areas are specified instructions Reviews the way
354. external reference symbol external symbols information output noexclude Enables unreferenced external reference symbol information output User defined options Describes the command options Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 6 CPU Tab 300 Assembler Options Debug Assembly input file Source Object List Tuning Other CPU CPU Has 2600 Operating mode z Address space 7 EI Dialog Menu CPU Operating Mode Address Space Command Option Function default Validates CPU directive specification H8S 2600 Normal cpu 2600n H8S 2600 normal mode Advanced 1M byte cpu 2600a 20 H8S 2600 advanced mode 16M bytes cpu 2600a 24 H8S 2600 advanced mode 256M bytes cpu 2600a 28 H8S 2600 advanced mode 4G bytes cpu 2600a 32 H8S 2600 advanced mode H8S 2000 Normal cpu 2000n H8S 2000 normal mode Advanced 1M byte cpu 2000a 20 H8S 2000 advanced mode 16M bytes cpu 2000a 24 H8S 2000 advanced mode 256M bytes cpu 2000a 28 H8S 2000 advanced mode 4G bytes cpu 2000a 32 H8S 2000 advanced mode H8 300H Normal cpu 300hn H8 300H normal mode Advanced 1M byte cpu 300ha 20 H8 300H advanced mode 16M bytes cpu 300ha 24 H8 300H advanced mode H8 300 cpu 300 H8 300 H8 300L cpu 300l H8 300L Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 1 3 Inter Module Optimizer Options 1 Input Tab Z300 OptLinker opti
355. f this register are reserved and read as Os 31 12 11 0 Setting Vector Base Register by Compiler Ver 6 1 The built in function set vbr can set Vector Base Register in the C C language For details refer to section 3 2 3 Setting Vector Base Register Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example in Compiler Ver 6 0 In Compiler Ver 6 0 Vector Base Register VBR can not be accessed from C C language directly so it should be written in assembly instructions But by using the compiler extended function asm as follows assembly language instructions can be written in C C language Though assembly language instructions can be written by pragma asm in the old version compiler they should be translated into assembly source code after compile The assembly program written in the asm block can be compiled into an object file directly so the symbols can be referred in the source level debugger For details about asm refer to section 10 2 1 3 in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Switching Vector Base Register VBR should be done in the interrupt mask state Not in the interrupt mask state when interrupt process occurs during switching Vector Base Register VBR the correct processing of the exception handling can not be guaranteed C C program void main void asm orc b 0x80 ccr mov l
356. fication remember to change specifications of options in all files and linked libraries In addition if the program being optimized is linked to an Assembly program the interface to function calls also needs to be modified For a description of the linkage between a C C program and an Assembly language program refer to section 9 3 Linking C C Programs and Assembly Programs in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 5 4 4 Increasing the Number of Variable Allocation Registers Size A Speed A Description The number of registers to allocate variables can be set using this option 4 or 3 registers Most programs perform better when four registers are specified However if a program includes complicated expressions which cause a shortage of registers the specification of three registers results in better performance Specify four variable allocation registers for a usual execution and compare the execution results of both specifications when necessary such as at the program storage on ROM Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Increase a register for register variable Command line regexpansion Example In the following example the efficiency is improved when three variable assignment registers are specified C C program long func short a long b short c char d long e long x y z x atb y b c z a e return a x zt
357. fication should not be used Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 3 Combination of Size and Speed Efficiency As described in the preceding sections the compiler optimization supports functions reducing the size and those improving the execution speed For each function and specification method refer to the sections above The best approach to create a high performance program is that functions requiring compactness and functions requiring high speed performance are separated in different files and an optimization for size and that for speed can be chosen for each file Even if functions cannot be separated completely it is important to know what part requires the high speed performance most in the entire program The object performance can be improved effectively by specifying option expansion functions coding inter module optimization for a file or function requiring high speed and providing optimization for size to the other parts The results of the investigation carried out thus far can be summarized as follows Following lists the examination results with option and expansion function specifications that implement the best size efficiency Size Speed Specification Description Byte Cycle 96 Default 3048 100 1580 100 Compiler Options 1 byte enum type specified 3034 99 1527 97 3 parameter passing registers Compiler Options 1 byte enum type
358. fied the inter module optimization cannot be performed for libraries Exclude all library functions from inter module optimization objects as described below For PC lt HEW1 2 gt Delete directories having the same name as the library decompressed at its inter module optimization lt HEW2 0 or later With preinclude option in the Standard Library tag for Standard Library Generator specify include to the header file containing pragma global register declaration For UNIX Modify the name of directories having the same name as the library 5 4 9 Controlling Output of Register Save Restore Codes at Function Entry Exit Points Size O Speed O Description For all functions the compiler saves registers to be used in the function at the function entry point and restores them at the function exit point When register save restore processings are controlled with this option the size of register save restore codes can be reduced for the main function or a function including function calls only When the pragma regsave is specified all registers are saved restored Registers guaranteeing values before and after function calls are not assigned When the pragma noregsave is specified register save restores are disabled regardless of whether registers are used in the function or not Format pragma regsave lt function name gt pragma noregsave lt function name gt Rev 3 00 2005 09
359. fied by a command line is output in a list to a file 9 Strengthening Option message In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later any information message level message specified by the message option can be excluded from being output to a file 10 Character Code Conversion In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the Latin option enables the Latinl code to be used in the source code B 1 3 Modification of Language Specifications 1 Output of Warning Message for int p In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 2 0 an error message is output for int p In version 3 0 or later a warning message is output 2 Checking Prototype In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 2 0 if a prototype declaration without a parameter type specification and a prototype declaration with a parameter type specification are specified at the same time an error message is output In H8S H8 300 series C C compiler version 3 0 or later correct operation is enabled in such a case Example of version 2 0 void f void f int Error 2118 is output Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Example of version 3 0 void f void f int Correct compilation 3 Description of a Bit Field without a Name at the Head of a Structure In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later a bit field without a name can be written at the head of a s
360. file 3 INT IRQ9 0x0000043a intpre obj STA b User Program objl gere Created by optimization Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Modify command Choose the symbol of which the information is to be changed and click Modify to display the following dialog box Some kind of information can be modified here Symbol Category IG O Function Symbol Attributes Address category Runtime library 0Ox00000806 Created by optimization Address Interrupt Static T Virtual Stack size Use local stack ox00000004 a Source file Object file CallWalker2 obj owes Symbol attribute Delete command Choose the symbol of which the information is not to be used in the measurement of the amount used by stack and click Delete to delete the symbol 7 3 5 Stack Area Size of Assembly Program Unlike by C C program the stack area size used by assembly program cannot be calculated automatically in assembling Therefore the stack area size used by assembly functions should be edited by using Call Walker But the stack area size is specified in the assembly function by using STACK directive Call Walker displays the value specified by STACK directive Description of STACK directive Defines the stack amount for a specified symbol referenced by using Call Walker The stack value for a symbol can be defined only one time
361. file that has been proved through an analysis to contain no entity This file will not be added to the project It is ignored New Project Import Makefile Makefile path E Hew exe ReneHew2 Exception2000a make S Eig Project 5 C source file Q dbsctc Z lowsre c 8 sbrkc Sy C source file B exception2 cpp E intpre cpp B resetpre cpp B Assembly source file 4 By following the wizard specify CPU and other options and open the workspace You can then begin a development work Note This feature is supported by HEW 3 0 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 7 1 4 Creating Custom Project Types Description This feature allows a project created by a user to be used by another user as a template for program development on another machine Information that can be contained in the template may concern the project file structure build options debugger settings and anything else relating to the project Project type storing method 1 Activate the project you want to store project information in because the active project accepts project information when the workspace is open To activate a project select the project by choosing Project gt Set Current Project GREEN Hi Interrupt amp Sample The active project is identified by boldface characters 2 Open the following project type wi
362. from the File menu Select the absolute load module to be debugged When using a button click on the Load Program button on the Toolbar e Load Program Select the sample abs file and click on Open Load Program Offset Open aL IV Verify Cancel Eile name cxsa mpleXsampleXDebugXsample abs v The following screen appears The file is loaded The screen displays information on the memory areas into which the program code is written Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program a Module name C sample sample Debug sampleabs 1 Areas loaded O0000DCA OO000E19 00000800 O00000D67 O0000DC6 00000DC9 00000400 0000048F 00000000 00000153 O00000D68 00000DC4 2 5 Operating HDI with HEW 2 Select Save Session As from the File menu Savein C3 Debug amp c sample File name sample Save as type ubi Session Files hds Cancel Selecting Customize from Tools on the HEW menu opens the Tools Customize dialog box In this dialog box specify a session file name in the Session file field and a load module name in the Download module field Then the session can be loaded when the HDI is started by pressing the Launch Debugger button on the HEW menu Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 49 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program HD locatio
363. function can be specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 D 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix E ASCII Code Table Table E 1 ASCII Code Table Upper four bits Appendix E ASCII Code Table Lower four bits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 NULL DLE SP 0 P p 1 SOH DC1 1 A Q a q 2 STX DC2 i 2 B R b r 3 ETX DC3 3 C S C S 4 EOT DC4 4 D T d t 5 ENQ NAK 96 5 E U e u 6 ACK SYN amp 6 F V f v 7 BEL ETB 7 G WwW g w 8 BS CAN 8 H X h x 9 HT EM 9 l Y i y A LF SUB J Z j Z B VT ESC K k C FF FS L D CR GS M m E SO RS gt N A n e F SI US O o DEL RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 E 39 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix E ASCII Code Table Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 E 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Application Note H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Package Publication Date Rev 1 00 October 26 2004 Rev 3 00 September 12 2005 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Customer Support Department Global Strategic Communication Div Renesas Solutions Corp 2005 Renesas Technology Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan RenesasTechnology Corp Sales Strategic Planning Div Nippon Bldg 2 6 2 Ohte machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan 2CENESAS RENESAS SALES OFFICES http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com en network for the latest and detailed i
364. fying this option Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 2 4 Selecting Expansion Functions 1 Allocating registers to global variables Allocate the variables that were specified during size efficiency optimization to global registers A pragma global_register Int_Glob E4 Ch_1_Glob R4H Ch_2_Glob R4L Ptr_Glob ER5 Also specify as follows in order to increase the number of work registers B pragma global_register Int_Glob E4 Ch_1_Glob R4H Ch_2_Glob R4L C pragma global_register Ptr_Glob ER5 Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles SPEED option 3420 1325 SPEED option 3348 1249 Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers SPEED option 3318 1246 Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers pragma global_register A specified SPEED option 3370 1262 Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers pragma global_register B specified SPEED option 3296 1246 Block transfer instruction specified 3 parameter passing registers pragma global_register C specified For further details refer to section 5 4 8 Allocating Registers to Global Variables 2 Controlling the output of register save restore code at the function entry and exit points Specify as follows according to the results at optimization for size pragma noregsave main
365. g Menu Command Option Function aa a Selects normal function call aa 8 idirect2normal Selects memory indirect function call vec 7 idirect extended Selects extended memory indirect function call Data access Selects data access mode Dialog Menu Command Option Function aa Selects normal data access aa 8 abs8 Selects 8 bit absolute address access aa 16 abs16 Selects 16 bit absolute address access a Details Button Global variables Tab Optimize details Global variables Miscellaneous Kustom Contents Treat global variables as volatile qualified Delete assignment to global variables before an infinite loop Specify optimizing range fall Allocate registers to global variables Default x Propagate variables which are const qualified Default omen Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 58 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Level Specifies the level of external variable optimization Dialog Menu Command Option Function Level 1 Disables all of the external variable optimization volatile Treat global Checked infinite loop O0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range noblock Specify optimizing No block global allocz0 Allocate registers Disable const var propagate 0 Propagate variables Disable Level 2 Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier Disables optimization of external variables
366. g menu Link Library Tab Category Other Stack information output Command line STACk Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 39 RENESAS REJ05B0464 0300 Section 7 Using HEW Making profile information file pro Execute user program by the following Profile function After the execution click the right mouse button on Profile window and choose Output Profile Information Files in order to make a profile information file pro For more information about making profile information file refer to H8S H8 300 Series High performance Embedded Workshop 3 User s Manual 4 12 Viewing the Function Call History Choose View Performance Profile to open the Profile window Power N Reset 2 INITSCT F H 0000083A H View Source main F H 00000800 H View Profile Chart v Enable Profiler Not trace the function call Setting Properties Eind Clear Data _CLOSEALL i Remov Output Profile Information Files CALL ENDO Renov A 0x00000412 sleep v Allow Docking 0x00000414 o Hide 7 3 2 Starting Call Walker Use the following procedure to start Call Walker e Starting from start menu Click Program gt Renesas High performance Embedded Workshop gt Call Walker e Starting from HEW Click Tools gt Call Walker Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 7 3 3 File Open and Call Walker Window After starting Call Walker choo
367. g of Global Class Object Important Points To use a global class object in C you need to call the initialization processing function CALL INIT and the post processing function CALL END before and after the main function respectively What is a global class object A global class object is a class object that is declared outside of a function Class object declaration inside a function Global class object declaration void main void X XSample 10 X P amp XSample X XSample 10 void main void Declared outside of a function X P amp XSample P Sample2 P Sample2 e Why is initialization processing post processing necessary If a class object is declared inside a function as shown above the constructor of class X is called when function main is executed In contrast a global class object declaration is not executed even when a function is executed Thus you need to call CALL INIT before calling the main function in order to explicitly call the constructor of class X Likewise call CALL END after calling the main function in order to call the destructor of class X Operations when using and not using CALL INIT CALL END The following shows the values obtained when the value of member variable x of class X is referenced When not using CALL INIT CALL END no correct value can be obtained and no expression in the while statement will be
368. g svall sval2 sans unsigned long uvall uval2 uans void f void sans mulsu svall sval2 Upper 32 bits of Signed 32 bit multiplication Upper 32 bits of Unsigned 32 bit multiplication uans muluu uvall uval2 Compiled assembly language expansion code R2 Svall 32 ER1 Sval2 32 ER2 R2 ER1 R1 sans 32 uvall 32 ER1 uval2 32 ER2 R2 ER1 R1 uans 32 R2 Ed Dd Dd co co pd Dd c c pd Remarks and notes This function mulsu muluu is only valid when the CPU is H8SX with HSSX M MD 3 2 7 Shift Instructions Description The following built in functions are available to enhance the rotate instructions No Item Format Description 1 Rotate 1 byte data char rotlc int count char data Rotates 1 byte data to the left by count bits returns the to the left result 2 Rotate 2 byte data int rotlw int count int data Rotates 2 byte data to the left by count bits returns the to the left result 3 Rotate 4 byte data long rotll int count long data Rotates 4 byte data to the left by count bits returns the to the left result 4 Rotate 1 byte data char rotrc int count char data Rotates 1 byte data to the right by count bits returns to the right the result 5 Rotate 2 byte data int rotrw int count int data Rotates 2 byte data to the right by count bits returns to the right the result 6 Rotate 4 byte data long rotrl int count long data Rotates 4 byte data
369. ge program after optimization int a int a 1 void main void void main void a 1 Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization optimization main main MOV W 1 16 RO0 RTS MOV W RO _a 32 SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 RTS E SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 DATA W H 0001 RES W 1 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 12 10 12 10 10 After 4 4 4 4 4 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 8 8 6 After 4 4 4 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 11 9 22 18 18 After 5 4 10 8 8 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 8 8 7 After 6 6 6 6 5 3 Unifying the Initialization of Array Elements Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points In cases where several array elements must be initialized ROM efficiency can be improved by grouping them into a structure so that they can be initialized in a single operation Description By initializing data in a group the number of transfer instruction executions that are required can be reduced to one Example Initialize the arrays a b and c with respective values C language program before optimization void f void unsigned char
370. generated during the building process is stored in the same directory and this file can be opened and checked by clicking on File Open Look in E Debug e a dbsct h8c t sample abs a sample mot cpu dbsct obj at sample h8c a sbrk h8c e intprg h8c 1 ja sbrk obj ja intprg obj is sample ma ai Debug hdp a resetprg h8c a sample mot a resetprg obj a sample obj 2 Fie name Files of type a Files Cancel The map file is generated under the name sample map 2 1 3 Starting Tools from a Command Line Tools can be started from a command line as follows This example uses an H8S 2600 advanced mode CPU In HEW1 2 sample programs are supplied in the HEW directory YToolsYHITACHIMI8Y3 0a OWample No HEW1 2 File Description 1 init c Initialization routine 2 vectbl c Vector table settings 3 scttbl c Section initialization routine 4 cmain c Main function file 5 2600a cpu CPU information file 6 c2600a sub Subcommand file for inter module optimizer Sample programs are not available with HEW2 0 or later Therefore the sample programs of user s own make should be prepared or the following files to be generated when creating sample project should be used as sample programs Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program Create a sample project by selecting Demonstration as the project typ
371. grams and Assembly Programs in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 19 How to Check Coding Which May Cause Incorrect Operation Question Is there any function to check for potential problem code such as a missing prototype declaration for a function Answer When coding a program note that there are some kinds of codes which are not errors in language specifications but may produce incorrect operation results These codes can be checked by outputting information messages using an option The MISRA C check tool can be used with version 6 1 or later Example ch38 A message A test c RET C language program COMMENT 0001 String in a comment int 0002 A declaration without a declarator int tmp void func int void main void long a tmp a 30011 Reference to an undefined local variable func atl 0006 Function parameter expression is converted into the parameter type specified in prototype declaration sub 0200 No prototype declaration for called function Specification method Dialog menu C C tab Category Source Messages Display information level message Command line message Remarks In the dialog menu removing the left side checkmark from a message disables the output of the message In the command line specifying an error number in a sub op
372. gt 111 seconds lt memory low gt 73 seconds e Remarks This option is valid for the optimizing linkage editor Ver 8 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 3 5 Notification of Unreferenced Symbol Description When project is large it is difficult to find the externally defined symbol which is defined but not referenced When this option is specified the external symbol which is not referenced can be notified through an output message at linkage To output a notification message the message option must also be specified Note Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Output messages Repressed information level messages Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Output Show entries for Output messages Notify unused symbol Command line msg unused e Output Message L0400 T Unused symbol file symbol The symbol named symbol in file is not used e Remarks 1 This option is valid for the optimizing linkage editor Ver 9 or later 2 In any of the following cases references are not correctly analyzed so that information shown by output messages will be incorrect e goptimize is not specified at assembly and there are branches to the same section within the same file e There are references to constant symbols within the same file e There are branches to immediate subordinate functions when optimiz
373. guage program after optimization unsigned char a 5 const unsigned char a 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Expanded into assembly language code before Expanded into assembly language code after optimization optimization SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 a a DATA B H 01 H 02 H 03 H 04 H 05 DATA B H 01 H 02 H 03 H 04 H 05 Remarks and Notes The program before optimization requires the allocation of a data area of the size listed in the object size table in the RAM in addition to the ROM In the case of character string data its output destination can be specified in an option Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 7 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Specification method Dialog menu Command option string const data The default is data output to the Const section 6 1 5 Using Consistent Variable Sizes Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points C C Tab Category Object Store string data in Const section Data section When making comparisons in a loop statement use a uniform variable size to eliminate the need for expansion code and to reduce the resulting code size Description When comparing one data item with another the compiler first makes sure that these data items are of the same size By coding the program in such a way that these data items are of the same size the user can eliminate the need for expansio
374. h caution because it will influence the size and processing speed e Example of Use In the following example class member functions set and add are used to access private class member variables a b and c When calling a class member function the parameter specification in a C program either has only a value or no parameter Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 18 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques As shown in the C program after conversion however the address of class A struct A is also passed as a parameter Additionally private class member variables a b and c are accessed in the class member function code However the this pointer is used to access them In sum use a class member function with caution because it will influence the size and processing speed C program class A private int a int b int o public void set int int int int add i int main void A a int ret a set 1 2 3 ret a add return ret void A set int x int y int z x y z int A add return a b Cc Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion struct A int a int bj int c u void set 4A int int struct A const int int int int add A struct A const int main void struct A a int ret set A int int amp a 1 2 3 ret
375. har addr Expands into the MOVTPE instruction that transfers instruction data in synchronous with the E clock Note 1 valid only with H8SX Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example a MOVFPE instruction To load data from the memory address specified by a 16 bit absolute address synchronously with the E clock _movfpe is the same as function as movfpe except that it returns Destination data as its function value C C program include lt machine h gt define PIDR unsigned char OxOOFFFF60 extern unsigned char data Executes the MOVFPE instruction void f movfpe char amp P1DR data Compiled assembly language expansion code MOVFPE B 16777056 16 ROL MOV B ROL _data 32 RTS END C C program include lt machine h gt define PIDR unsigned char OxOOFFFF60 extern unsigned char data void f lt Executes the MOVFPE instruction data movfpe char amp PlDR Compiled assembly language expansion code MOVFPE B 16777056 16 ROL MOV B ROL _data 32 RTS END Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler b MOVTPE instruction To store data to the memory area specified by a 16 bit absolute address synchronously with the E clock C C program void f include lt machine h gt extern unsigned
376. hether the main Heap Size F420 heap area function to be called by the B soe ie as NE Generate main Function initialization function is to be generated If the main function c source file is al h um ES already Created Temove the Iv VO Register Definition Files check mark Generate Hardware Setup Specify whether a hardware Function setup function is to be None generated If one is to be generated specify whether it is an assembly language or C Finish language function Specify whether a definition file is to be used to access the internal peripheral function for I O ports If not remove the check mark Notes 1 Available memory library functions are malloc realloc calloc and new 2 The required size for a heap area can be calculated as follows Heap area size 2 Area size allocated by memory management library Management area size The management area sizes are as follows CPU Type Management Area Size H8S 2600 ADV H8S 2000 ADV H8 300H ADV 16 bytes H8S 2600 NRM H8S 2000 NRM H8 300H NRM H8 300 8 bytes ADV advanced mode NRM normal mode To modify the heap area size specified in this section after the new project has been initialized refer to section 2 2 1 2 Allocating a heap area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 5 New project 4 9 On this screen determine a standard l
377. hich must be the same specification through the project Therefore if the compiler option only is modified an error may occur There are two global options that specifying the number of parameter passing registers and that specifying the CPU type A global option can be modified as follows Example To change the number of parameter passing registers 1 Modify the compiler option Specification method Dialog menu CPU tab Change number of parameter from 2 default to 3 Command line regparam 3 This changes the option specification for all applicable C C files 2 Modify the Assembler file The registers used changes during the linkage of a C C program and an Assembler file This requires a modification of the Assembler file When the number of parameter passing registers is set to three used registers are changed as follows For an H8 300 CPU RO R1 gt RO R1 R2 Other CPUs ERO ER1 ERO ER1 ER2 For details of the interface refer to section 9 3 2 3 Rules concernig registers in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual The described interface is also applicable to assembly language codes that is embedded in a C C program 3 Change the standard library EC class library to be linked Use the inter module optimizer to change the library to be linked Modification on the HEWI 2 is shown below If the previously linked library is c8s26a lib change it into c
378. hird party Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp by various means including the Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the inform
379. hu Oct 02 2003 E DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section CPU TYPE H88 2812 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 sample c sbrk c ooo oa pea e epa e e eoo jo e op a A ipendencies pragma section DSEC static const struct char rom s Start address of the initialized data section in ROM char rom e End address of the initialized data section in ROM char ram s Start address of the initialized data section in RAM JDTBL s __sectop D secend D sectop R __sectop ABS8D __secend ABS8D sectop ABSBR __sectop ABS16D secend ABSI6D sectop ABSIBR liprasgzma section BSEC static const struct char b s Start address of non initialized data section char b e End address of non initialized data section jeTEL PETI Pere Double click on the source file name to initiate the editor A gt y Buita A Debug A _Find in Files JA Version Corto Ready Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 15 Verifying the generated files The following files are generated upon completion of the building process A directory with the same name as the project name is created under the project directory The absolute load module is generated under the name format sample abs in the debug directory in the new directory A map file
380. i dbsctc resetprg c Speed sub options zumm Hegister o Switch judzement i Default Optic RSS a G source file Shift to DUPIE Jo Struct assignment Hino SPU Teat ion Expression Maximam nodes OT Mite tinction Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program In the next step select Options gt H8S H8 300 IM Optlinker to specify options for the inter module optimizer First in the Optimize tab specify All to enable all inter module optimization features herel On this tab specify the output of an optimization information list the number of symbol references to this list the output of symbol optimization information ang Also specify herel O OptLinker options Debug Input O tgut Optimize Section Verify Other Optimize All liminated size T All H 001 E Unity strini Speed Safe gy Output information Lisa short Custom IV Generate optimize list Use shor None Eliminate ontents Eliminate same code v Symbol asciende a v Reference Eorbid item Elimination of dead code Reallocate registers Use external subcommand file OK Cancel In the next step specify in the section tab the way files are to be assigned at linkage Here change the address of section to which section B is assigned to H OOFFOO First click the Addre
381. ialog Menu Command Option Function Object list show object Outputs object list Statistics shows statistics Outputs statics information Allocation information show allocation Outputs symbol allocation list Source code listing show source Outputs source list After preprocessor expansion show expansion Outputs source program listing after macro expansion If the Enable all button is pressed all data items are output On the other hand if the Disable all button is pressed all data items are disabled and no data item is output to the object list file Tab size Dialog Menu Command Option Function 4 show tab 4 Specifies Tab size as 4 to appear in listing 8 show tab 8 Specifies Tab size as 8 to appear in listing Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Category Optimize Standard Toolchain Configuration Debug El Y All Loaded Projects E E sample E C source file 8 C source file ey Assembly source file H 0 Linkage symbol file C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt Category Optimize m Details Speed or size Speed oriented optimization m Speed sub options Register Switch judeement Shift to multiple Struct assignment zi Inline function Default Maximum 1104 node Switch statement Auto Function call aa Data access aa 2byte pointer Generate
382. ialog Menu Subcommand Function File name Specifies the existing CPU information file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 7 Category Other 0 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt ET si Category L2 SQ All Loaded Projects E ir sample C source file Always output 59 record at the end C source file Stack information output Assembly source file Compress debug information Linkage symbol file Low memory use during linkage User defined options Absolute Relocatable Library Miscellaneous options r Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC CEBSEC D 0800 w N Miscellaneous options Specifies other functions Dialog Menu Command Option Function Always output S9 record at the end S9 Outputs S9 record consistently Stack information output stack Outputs stack usage information files Compress debug information compress Compresses debug information nocompress Compresses no debug information Low memory use during linkage Memory high The occupied memory size is the same as usual Memory low The occupied memory size is reduced User defined options Specifies the command options Rev 3 00 200
383. ibrary organization to be used by the C C compiler If you change the standard library organization after the project has been created you can do it on Standard Library Tab of Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain in HEW w new Performs memory allocation and ctype h Handles and checks characte math h Performs numerical calculatio mathfh Performs numerical calculatic stdargh Supports access to variable vjstdio h Performs input output handlin Mlstdlib h Performs C program standarc stringh Performs string comparison ios EOC Performs input output pro complex EC Performs complex nu v b Enable all Disable all lt Back we Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 6 New project 5 9 Set the stack to be used and press NEXT On this screen set the stack area Initialized values to be set as stack area vary with CPU Type on the Step 1 screen If you change the stack size after the project has been created you can do it on Project gt Edit ProjectConfiguration in HEW ting the Stack Area What are the stack settings Specify the initial value Stack Porter Address for The stack pointer SP power on reset HFFEFCO Stack Size H 200 Specify the stack area size lt Back Ne Finish Cancel The size of
384. ication where results are not guaranteed Correct specification void f char x void f x char x xt 10 void main void xt 10 void main void char x f x char x f x This problem can be checked by using the Display information level message message option on C C tab Category Source Messages at compilation The output of each information message can be selected with this specification Whether a function is declared as a prototype or not can be checked with the 1 0200 No prototype function Remarks In the above Specification where results are not guaranteed example a prototype declaration of the function f parameters is not included In this case the parameter x is converted to the int type when it is called from the main function When no type declaration is provided by a prototype declaration of parameters the following type conversions occur e The char type and unsigned char types parameters are converted into int type e The float type parameters are converted into double type e No other types are converted Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 19 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 17 Failure at Bit Operation in Write Only Register Question The bit operation of a write only register does not produce the intended result What can be done about it Answer The compiler generates bit operation instructions for BSET BCLR BNOT BST and BIST These instructi
385. ify maximum unroll factor Dialog Menu Command Option Function Default max unroll 2 or 1 2 or 1 is assumed as the maximum number of loops to be expanded Custom max unroll Specifies the maximum number of loops to be expanded An integer numeric value gt from 1 to 32 can be specified for numeric value Allocate registers to struct union members Check Box Command Option Function struct alloc 1 Allocates structure union members to registers struct_alloc 0 Disables allocation of structure union members to registers Inline memcpy strcpy Check Box Command Option Function library intrinsic Performs inline expansion for memcpy and strcpy library function Makes function calls for memcpy and strcpy Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Category Other H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt Debug E Category E G All Loaded Projects E Sample H 0 C source file A meo J C source file Check against EC language specification 5D Assembly source file Interrupt handler saves restores MACH and MACL registers Miscellaneous options JAllow comment nest E Linkage symbol file gt User defined options Options C C cpu 26004 24 object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj debug nolist cheincpath nologo owes
386. igation E E Note This feature is supported by HEW 3 0 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 7 1 6 Networking Feature Description HEW allows workspaces and projects to be shared by different users via a network Therefore users can learn changes that other users have made by manipulating the shared project at the same time This system uses one computer as its server For example if a client adds a new file to a project the server machine is notified and then notifies the other clients of the addition In addition users can be granted rights for access to specific projects or files Server Report on file addition File addition Client A Client B Client C Network access setup 1 Choose Tools gt Options and select the Network tab Check the Enable network data access check box 2 An administrator is added Since the administrator does not have a password initially you need to specify a password The administrator should be granted the highest access right 3 Click on the Password button and specify a password for the administrator 4 Click on the OK button This allows the administrator access to the network Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Network Tab of the Options dialog box Password setting je Access rights setting User ad
387. igned char cl c2 void main void void main void cl c2 cl c2 Examples of assembly expansion code Examples of H8SX advanced mode 16M 8 bit absolute address space is used Access 0xa0000 0xa00FF 8 bit absolute address space is NOT used 7 4 _cl1 32 MOV B 7 8 ROL 255 8 _c2 32 MOV B ROL _c1 8 MOV B 255 8 ROL B ROL _c2 8 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Object Size byte H8SX CPU type MAX ADV NML Before Improvement 16 16 12 After Improvement 10 10 10 Execution Speed cycle H8SX CPU type MAX ADV NML Before Improvement 12 12 11 After Improvement 11 11 11 3 8 3 Switching Vector Table Address Description H8SX has the function that can allocate the vector area for exception handling at any address In H8 300 H8 300H H8S family the vector area for exception handling is fixed from zero When CPU is H8SX users can modify the allocation address of the vector area for exception handling by specifying Vector Base Register VBR Merit of Vector Base Register As the vector area for exception handling can be located at any address by Vector Base Register VBR the vector table can be made in fast internal RAM even though for internal ROM less chip This can improve the response of exception handling Register Format Vector Base Register VBR is a 32 bit register that has the valid upper 20 bits The lower 12 bits o
388. ii Mounting the CD ROM Mount the CD ROM as indicated below If mounting is performed automatically the following command is not required For Solaris mountA rA F AhsfsA dev dsk c0t6d0s2 h8s_sparcA cdrom h8s_sparc RET For HP UX mountA dev dsk c201d2s0A cdrom RET Gii Copying the compiler package Move to the newly created path and then decompress the files for the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler package from the CD ROM to the path created in 1 above For Solaris cdA usr cross soft RET tarAxvfA cdrom h8s sparc Program tar RET For HP UX cdA usr cross soft RET tarAxvfA cdrom PROGRAM TAR 1 RET iv Changing environment settings Environment variables and pathnames are set as follows Double asterisks indicate an appropriate value should be specified For detailed on environment variables refer to the H8S and H8 300 C C Compiler User s Manual The following shows an example to set environment variables and pathnames for C shell setenvACH38A usr cross_soft RET Set the storage area for the system include file setenvACH38TMPA usr tmp RET Specify the directory for storing the intermediate files created by the compiler or by inter module optimization Here it is assumed to be usr tmp If no directory is specified a current directory is used as default setenvAH38CPUA RET Select the CPU operating mode as among 2000n 2000a 2600n 2600a 300hn 300ha 300 and 3001 If CPU is sel
389. imulation of file opening Since these files are defined so that they should be created in C Hew2 stdio you must create the directory as explained in Item 3 If this directory does not exist HEW will not work normally When the simulator runs these files are opened by INIT IOLIB in the lowsrc c file contained in the project stdin 20 stdout 1 stderr 2 e Example of Use As in the following example consider the use of printf or a similar method to output characters to the standard output stdout Sample program code void main void printf ID 1 OK n When you run this program it creates a file named stdout in the c Hew2 stdio directory you have already created The file contents are as follows Contents of stdout ID 1 OK Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW How to redirect I O To redirect I O change this void INIT IOLTB FILE fp for fp _iob fp bufptr fp bufcnt 0 fp gt _buf len 0 fp gt _bufbase NULL fp gt _ioflagi 0 fp gt _ioflag2 0 fp gt _iofd 0 if f reopen stdin gt _ To stdin gt _ iof lagi I0READ stdin iof Z IE reopen E iter WstdioWetdout stdout 5 stdout io L if Freopan C Y hew stdio stderr stderr stderr gt _ inf Tue E _TOUNBUF 7 2 5 Debugger Target Synchronization Descrip
390. in CCR setting src int rst area indicated by rst if rstzO 3 4 byte addition and int ovfaddl long dst long Adds dst and src each 4 byte long stores the result in CCR setting src long rst area indicated by rst if rstzO 4 1 byte subtraction int ov subc char dst char Subtracts src from dst each 1 byte long stores the result and CCR setting src char rst in area indicated by rst if rstzO 5 2 byte subtraction int ovfsubw int dst int Subtracts src from dst each 2 byte long stores the result and CCR setting src int rst in area indicated by rst if rstzO 6 4 byte subtraction int ovfsubl long dst long Subtracts src from dst each 4 byte long stores the result and CCR setting src long rst in area indicated by rst if rstzO 7 1 byte left shift and int ovfshalc char dst char Arithmetically shifts left the 1 byte data dst by 1 bit stores CCR setting rst the result in area indicated by rst if rstzO 8 2 byte left shift and int ovfshalw int dst int Arithmetically shifts left the 2 byte data dst by 1 bit stores CCR setting rst the result in area indicated by rst if rstzO 9 4 byte left shift and int ovfshall long dst long Arithmetically shifts left the 4 byte data dst by 1 bit stores CCR setting rst the result in area indicated by rst if rstzO 10 1 byte sign int ov negc char dst char Obtains the 2 s complement of 1 byte data dst stores the conversion and rst result in the area indicated by rst if rst 0 CCR setting 11 2
391. indow Help endif IntLoc IntParIO 10 for 33 cmain c dbsctc if ChariGlob 4A intprg c resetpre c IntLoc sbrk c IntParlO IntLoc IntGlob vecttblc EnumLoc Ident ifl ependencies sbrk h if EnumLoc Identi E stackscth break E vecth Phase H Series Stype Converter starting Phase H Series Stype Converter finished Build Finished D Errors 2 Warnings For Help press F1 25 288 461 INS NUM 4 Edit and save this file to recompile it Note that the sample programs cannot be modified because they are a read only file When activated the HDI displays a message dialog box and asks whether the program is to be reloaded Selecting Yes causes the HDI to reload the program The debugging process can be performed in this manner The HDI also provides the performance analysis function To measure the performance of a program select Performance Analysis from the View menu which opens a Performance Analysis window Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 58 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program Performance Analysis Cycle Count Histogram To measure performance select Enable on the popup window Add Range Edit Range Reset Counts Times Analysis Enabled Delete Range Delete All Ranges On the Add Range option of the popup menu specify the label on which performance is to be m
392. information is output to the text file Specification method File menu gt Output List Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Find Two ways of search are available in the call information view by the following dialog Find 2 x Category me pass of maximum stack size 7 The pass of maximum stack size oe 1 Search the pass of maximum stack size 2 Search the symbol name Specification method Edit menu gt Find Edit menu gt Find Next Search next Edit menu gt Find Previous Search previous e Setting display format in the call information view Two ways of display format for the amount used by stack are available by the following command 1 Show Required Stack Stack size is added from lower symbol to upper 2 Show Used Stack Stack size is added from upper symbol to lower Specification method View menu Show Required Stack or Show Used Stack Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 51 RENESAS REJ05B0464 0300 Section 7 Using HEW Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques The Compiler supports the C and C languages This chapter describes in detail the options of an object oriented language C and how to use the various C functions Code a C program for an embedded system with caution Otherwise the program
393. ing for the function call or the save restore of registers that are not needed If only the necessary registers are saved restored and a run time routine is not called the execution speed is improved though the object size is increased Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Register Command line speed register Example To define the function sub while specifying the 300HA CPU operation mode C C program long a b The run time routine called at register long sub char cl short s2 short s3 save restore differs according to s3 atb whether optimization is specified or return cl s2 s3 not and the number of parameter passing registers Assembly expansion code Not specified Specified Ssp_regsv 3 24 ER5 R2 ROL R5L ROL RSL Q a 2 24 R1 Q a 2 24 R1 Q b42 24 R2 Q b42 24 R2 R RI R2 R1 R5 R5 E0 R5 E0 R5 R1 R5 R1 R5 ER5 ER5 ER5 ERO ER5 ERO QG spregld2 3 24 R2 ER5 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 24 20 28 24 38 Specified 24 20 28 24 44 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 24 24 20 Specified 24 24 20 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 18 15 48 42 134 Specifie
394. ing malloc Thus implement a low level interface routine sbrk to specify the size of heap memory to be allocated just as when using malloc Implementation Method To use HEW make sure that Use Heap Memory is checked when a workspace is created If this option is checked sbrk c and sbrk h shown on the next page will be automatically created Specify the size of heap memory to be allocated in Heap Size the value defined in HEAPSIZE in sbrk h To change the size after creating a workspace changk If HEW is not used create a file shown on the next pagewnd implement it in a project New Projec etting the Contents of Files to be Generated v Use Heap Memory Heap Size H420 ET unc c source file z IV I O Register Definition Files Generate Hardware Setup Function None E lt Back Nes Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques sbrk c include lt stdio h gt include sbrk h const size_t sbrk size Specifies the minimum unit of the defined heap area static union long dummy Dummy for 4 byte boundary f char heap HEAPSIZE Declaration of the area managed by sbrk heap_area static char brk char amp heap area End address of area assigned BR RR KK kk Ck Ck kk Ck ko kk ko kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck ke kk Ck Ck kk Ck ke kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk k
395. ing the Optimization Functions 2 Allocating to a short 16 bit absolute address area Allocate the variable selected during an optimization for size to 16 bit absolute address area pragma absl16 Int Glob Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob Ptr Glob Ptr Glb Next The following shows the execution results Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler Option 2906 1232 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified Compiler Option 2894 1231 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified pragma abs8 specified pragma abs16 specified Thus both the speed and the size are improved For further details refer to section 5 4 12 Using 16 bit Absolute Address Area 3 Allocating to a memory indirect area Allocate the variable selected during an optimization for size to a memory indirect area pragma indirect Proc0 main malloc Procl Proc2 Proc3 Proc4 Proc5 Proc6 Proc7 Proc8 Funcl Func2 Func3 The following shows the execution results Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler Option 2894 1231 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified pragma abs8 specified pragma abs16 specified Compiler Option 2892 1232 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified pragma abs8 specified pragma abs16 specified pragma indirect specified As a result the execution speed is reduced and this speci
396. inite loop as a result of optimization Due to alias analysis of the pointer ptr in 1 and ptr in 2 are handled as the same value int ptr amp a ptr amp 0x0080 1 while ptr amp 0x0080 2 Expression 1 is propagated to expression 2 Accordingly expression 2 is converted as follows while while ptr amp 0 while 0 gt while 1 ptr amp 0x0080 amp 0x0080 Therefore the expression in question is judged as true the judge statement is eliminated and the above while statement becomes an infinite loop Example 2 int a b f 4 a 1 1 if a 2 b 1 lt 3 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 25 REJ05B0464 0300 Appendix B Added Features In this example if statement 2 has been eliminated and 3 is always executed at all times as a result of optimization e Due to alias analysis of external variables a in 1 and a in 2 are handled as the same value e Constant value 1 is propagated to expression 2 Accordingly expression 2 is converted as follows gt if 1 Therefore the expression in question is judged as true the conditional statement is eliminated and the above expression 3 is always executed at all times Example 3 int a b c 4 a 1 lt 1 if c lt 2 b 1 3 a 2 amp 4 I
397. ink Library tab Category Input tab Prelinker control Then select Auto or Run prelinker Command line Do not specify noprelink default Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques Example of Use of type info Class and typeid Operator The type info class is intended to identify the run time type of an object Use the type info class to compare types at program execution or acquire a class type To use the type info class specify a class object with a virtual function using the typeid operator include typeinfo h class Base protected string pnamel public Base class Base pnamel new string if pnamel pnamel Base virtual string Show return pnamel virtual Base Virtual if pnamel destructor delete pnamel class Derived public Base string pname2 public Derived pname2 new string if pname2 pname2 Derived string Show return pname2 Derived Virtual if pname2 destructor delete pname2 he void main void Base pb new Base Specifying a class object Derived pd new Derived const type info amp t typeid pb const type infos tl typeid pd Acquiring type name Derived t name tl name Acquiring type name Base Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques Example of Use of dyn
398. interface the Hitachi debugging interface and the online manual can be installed on a network drive For details on procedure to define the tool chain or library interface installed on another PC on your PC refer to section 5 Tools Administration in the High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 00 User s Manual iii If High performance Embedded Workshop fails to appear in the Programs on the Windows Start Menu after HEW has been installed restart Windows Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview iv If the installer terminates abnormally during installation under Windows 998 restart the computer and reinstall b Installing the Acrobat Reader i Insert the CD ROM for the compiler package into the CD ROM drive Here it is assumed that the CD ROM drive is drive D ii From the Windows Start menu click on Run Gii Specify in the Run dialog box either Ar505jpn exe Japanese in the PDF_READ Japanese directory on the CD ROM or Ar505eng exe English in the PDF readWEnglish directory example D PDF_Read Japanese Ar505jpn exe and then click OK iv Follow the onscreen installation instructions c Referencing the Online Manual and other documents e If the Online Manual is installed Click either the Online Manual H8S H8 300 English xx xx English PDF file or the Online Manual H8S H8 300 Japanese xx xx Japanese PDF file on the High performance Embedded W
399. ion 11 Q amp A Referenced No Tool Name Description Section 34 Optimizing Linkage Output of undefined external symbol 11 2 1 35 Fditor Output of relocation size overflow 11 2 2 36 How to run programs in RAM 11 2 3 37 Fixing symbol addresses in certain memory areas for linking 11 2 4 38 How to implement an overlay 11 2 5 39 How to specify output of undefined symbol error 11 2 6 40 Unify output forms S type file 11 2 7 41 Dividing an output file 11 2 8 42 Output file format of optimizing linkage editor 11 2 9 43 How to calculate program size ROM RAM 11 2 10 44 Output of section alignment mismatch 11 2 11 45 Library Generator Reentrant and standard libraries 11 3 1 46 would like to use reentrant library function in standard library 11 3 2 file 47 There is no standard library file H8C V4 or later 11 3 3 48 Warning message on building standard library 11 3 4 49 Size of memory used as heap 11 3 5 50 How to reduce ROM size for I O libraries 11 3 6 51 How to edit library file 11 3 7 52 HEW Failure to display dialog menu 11 4 1 53 Linkage order of object files 11 4 2 54 Excluding a project file 11 4 3 55 Specifying the default options for project files 11 4 4 56 Changing memory map 11 4 5 57 How to use HEW on network 11 4 6 58 Limitations on file and directory names created with HEW 11 4 7 59 Failure of Japanese font display with HEW editor of HDI 11 4 8 60
400. ion 3 0 or later the long type data bit field has been added to the supported data type Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features 6 Extension of Limited Values In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the limitation values of the following items have been extended compared to the old version version 2 0 e Symbol size version 3 0 or later 250 characters version 2 0 31 characters e Nesting of compound statements version 3 0 or later 256 levels version 2 0 32 levels e Nesting of repeat statements while do and for statements version 3 0 or later 256 levels version 2 0 32 levels e Nesting of combinations of select statements if and switch statements version 3 0 or later 256 levels version 2 0 32 levels e Nesting of switch statements version 3 0 or later 128 levels version 2 0 16 levels e Nesting of for statements version 3 0 or later 128 levels version 2 0 16 levels e Number of characters in one line version 3 0 or later 8192 characters version 2 0 4096 characters e Memory size allocated by malloc in advanced mode version 3 0 or later size t version 2 0 INT MAX 7 Output of Optimized List In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later symbol reference count and optimized information list output functions have been added at the execution of the inter module optimizer 8 Output of Command Line The character string speci
401. ions start to be specified from the deepest nesting level The comparison with a node count of 105 for the automatic inline expansion the inline expansion specified in the option is shown below Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3052 1549 Automatic inline expansion 3306 1445 Inline expansion specified Proc7 Func3 3048 1589 Inline expansion specified 3048 1589 Proc7 Func3 Funci stremp Proc3 Proc6 Inline expansion specified 3048 1589 Proc7 Func3 Funci stremp Proc3 Proc6 malloc strcpy Proc5 Proc4 Proc1 Inline expansion specified for all functions 3322 1445 Note The functions Proc8 and Func2 are not inline expanded Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions These results indicate that the automatic inline expansion option makes a fast object program Thus a high performance object can be created by combining specifications appropriately considering function call relations the number of execution cycles and the object size The pragma inline declaration is valid only when the function itself and the associated function call included within a file If static is specified to the function to be inline expanded actual codes are not output and the codes are expanded only on the called function which makes the object size be reduced It is recommendable to always use this specification For further details refer to sec
402. is shown below There is H Series Librarian Interface which can startup the Optimizing Linkage Editor from GUI How to startup H Series Librarian Interface Select Tools gt Hitachi H Series Librarian Interface in HEW to startup H Series Librarian Interface A Modify Section Name of Module in Library The section name of the specified module in library can be modified to locate the section into any address 1 Open library and select module to assign into any address 2 Display the following dialog by Action gt Rename Section and modify section name by After button Rename Section Rename Information Module printf P P123 Rename Cancel Help Command line optlnk lib lt Library File Name rename lt Module Name in Library gt P P123 B Replace Module in Library Add Module to Library The module in library can be replaced New module can be added to library 1 Open library and select Action gt Add Replace 2 Open module with same name to replace Open module with new name to add Command line optlnk lib lt Library File Name replace lt Module Name in Library Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 59 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A C Delete Module in Library The module in library can be deleted 1 Open library and select module to delete multiple select available 2 Display Delete dialog by Action gt Delete and push Delete button Command line optlnk
403. it Parameter value changes according to increment order This results in f 3 4 or f 4 3 when the value ofiis3 3 Programs with Overflow Results or an Illegal Operation The value of the result is not guaranteed when an overflow occurs or an illegal operation is performed Operations may change depending on the version Example int a b x a b 10 This may cause an overflow depending on the value range of a and b 4 No Initialization of Variables or Type Inequality When a variable is not initialized or the parameter or return value types do not match between the calling and called functions an incorrect value is accessed Operations may change depending on the version File 1 File 2 The parameter of the caller function int f double d is the int type but the parameter of the callee function is the double type Therefore a value cannot be correctly referenced correctly referenced The information provided here does not include all cases that may occur Please use this compiler prudently and sufficiently test your programs keeping the differences between the versions in mind Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 C 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix C Notes on Version Upgrade C 2 Compatibility with Earlier Version The following notes cover situations in which the compiler Ver 3 x or lower is used to generate a file that is to be linked with files generated by the earlier version or with ob
404. it absolute address space H 000000 User Application Program H 200000 User Specified 8 bit absolute address space User Specified Area External Space H FFFFOO Default 8 bit absolute address space H FFFFF Specification Method Dialog menu CPU Tab Specify SBR address Command line sbr lt address gt ndard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb al gt Debug EY All Loaded Projects cru Hess Advanced 1oM byte 5 om i ivide None C C source file Multiple Divide E C source file Stack calculation Medium s Deseo Source 1e Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 Linkage symbol file Treat double as float Bass struct parameter via register Pass 4 byte parameter retum value via register Use try throw and catch of C J Enable disable runtime information Pack struct union and class Specify SBR address Custom x J Ox0040000 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 45 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example As SBR Short Address Base Register can not be accessed from C C language directly SBR should be written in assembly instructions But by the compiler extended function asm as follows assembly language instructions can be written in C C language Though assembly language instructions can be written by pragma asm in the old version
405. ition Determination Using Substitution Values Size O Speed O Stack size A Important Points When a substitution value is used in a condition expression for a determination statement ROM efficiency can be improved by treating the assignment statement as a condition determination statement Description The code size can be significantly reduced by performing the determination and substitution of a condition expression simultaneously Example Copy character string s C language program before optimization char s d void func void while s d st d s Expanded into assembly language code before optimization _func STM MOV MOV BRA MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV INC MOV MOV MOV BNE E tu E Et t UJ E E EE Ul Et Et t3 E Fee ER4 ER5 SP _s ER5 _d ER4 L7 8 ERO RIL ERO ER5S ER4 ERO RIL ERO ER4 ERO 1 ERO ERO ER4 ER5 ERO CERO RIL L6 8 ERO R1L ERO ER5 GERA ERO RIL ERO ER4 ERO 1 ERO ERO ER4 SP ER4 ERS C language program after optimization char s d void func void while d optimization _func STM MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV INC MOV L MOV BNE LDM RTS stt Expanded into assembly language code after ER4 ER5 SP _s ER5 _d ER4 ER5 ERO ERO RIL ERO ER5 ER4 ERO
406. ize Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program In the next step in the Link Library Tab Category Verify create CPU information to check the CPU assignment C source file 8 dbsctc intpre c E a C source file H E Assembly source file H Linkage symbol file ROM Ox00000000 OxO0FEFFFF CEU information ile pati noprelink ram D R no list CONFIGDIFO PRO JEC TNAME map showzsymbolreference nooptimize Selecting the Check in the CPU information check field allows the user to check the CPU information Pressing the Add button brings up a dialog box on which the ROM and RAM areas can be specified as shown below GPU information add x CPU information add 2 x Ox00000000 Ox00F FOOO0 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 29 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 14 Executing the building process Execute the building process to generate a load module A build can be executed by pressing here on the command button sample High performance Embedded Workshop di sct c E 8 x x Eile Edit View Project Options Build Memory Tools Window Help a x psuog s ejorcaljjeryaeies smesz jm JARA jt reaalelus zl e mm messsa jg scars erm o e o 9 E d sample 5 sample FILE dbsct c B C source file DATE iT
407. ject efficient in the code size When this option is specified an object efficient in the execution speed is output There are following items to specify the output of speed efficiency objects rather than size efficiency objects Description Reference Speed efficiency code expansion of register save restore codes 5 4 7 1 Speed efficiency code expansion of shift expressions 5 4 7 2 Assignment code expansion of structures and double type data 5 4 7 3 Inline expansion of functions 5 4 7 4 Speed efficiency code expansion of loop expressions 5 4 7 5 Speed efficiency code expansion for switch statement 5 4 7 6 Disabling run time routine calls for arithmetic operation 5 4 7 7 These items can be specified individually RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 39 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed oriented optimization Command line speed 1 Speed efficiency Code Expansion of Register Save Restore Codess Size X Speed O Description At entry and exit points of a function registers used in the function are saved or restored On the H8 300H or H8 300 series registers are saved restored by calling a run time routine when the number of registers to be saved restored is three or more When a run time routine is used the object size is reduced however the execution speed is lowered because of the process
408. ject files or library files that have been output by the assembler Ver 2 x or lower or linkage editor Ver 6 x or lower The notes also covers remarks on using the existing debugger supplied with the earlier version of the compiler 1 Object Format The standard object file format has been changed from SYSROF to ELF The standard format for debugging information has also been changed to DWARF2 When object files SYSROF output by the earlier version of the compiler Ver 3 x or lower or assembler Ver 2 x or lower are to be input to the optimizing linkage editor use a file converter to convert it to the ELF format However relocatable files output by the linkage editor extension rel and library files that include one or more relocatable files cannot be converted 2 Point of Origin for Include Files When an include file specified with a relative directory format was searched for in the earlier version the search would start from the compiler s directory In the new version the search starts from the directory that contains the source file 3 C Program Since the encoding rule and execution method were changed C object files created by the earlier version of the compiler cannot be linked Be sure to recompile such files The name of the library function for initial post processing of the global class object which is used to set the execution environment has also been changed Refer to section 9 2 2 Execution Environment S
409. k kk Ck kk kc kk ke kk I kk ke ek sbrk Data write f Js Return value Start address of the assigned area Pass ay 1 Failure BR KKK KK Ck kk Ck ko kk Ck kk Ck I kk ko kk ko kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck ko kk Ck kk kk kk Ck ko kk Ck kk ke kk kc ke I I ek char sbrk size_t size Assigned area size char p if brk size heap area heap HEAPSIZE Empty area size return char 1 p brk Area assignment brk size End address update return p sbrk h size of area managed by sbrk define HEAPSIZE 0x420 8 2 3 Static Member Variable Description In C a class member variable with the static attribute can be shared among multiple objects of a class type Thus a static member variable comes in handy because it can be used for example as a common flag among multiple objects of the same class type Example of Use Create five class A objects within the main function Static member variable num has an initial value of 0 This value will be incremented by the constructor every time an object is created Static member variable num shared among objects will have a value of 5 at the maximum Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques FAQ The following lists some frequently asked questions on using a static member variable L2310 Error Occurred When a static member variable is used message L
410. lag Zero flag Overflow flag Q lt NZC8 Carry flag Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 322 Setting and Referencing an Extended Register Description For setting and referencing an extended register the compiler provides the following functions No Item Format Description 1 Setting an interrupt void set imask exr unsigned Sets a mask value 0 to 7 to the interrupt mask bits mask char mask 12 to 10 of the EXR 2 Referencing an unsigned char References the value 0 to 7 of the interrupt mask interrupt mask get imask exr void bits I2 to 10 of the EXR Setting the EXR voir set exr unsigned char exr Sets the value of exr 8 bits in the EXR Referencing the unsigned char get exr void References the value of the EXR EXR 5 Taking the AND of void and exr unsigned char exr Logically ANDs the EXR and exr and stores the EXRs result in the EXR 6 Taking the OR of void or_exr unsigned char exr Logically ORs the EXR and exr and stores the EXRs result in the EXR 7 Taking the XOR of void xor_exr unsigned char exr Logically XORs the EXR and exr and stores the EXRs result in the EXR Example To change the status of the EXR with keeping the value of the EXR interrupt mask bits unchanged C C program include lt machine h gt extern unsigned char e void main unsigned char mask if mask get imask exr set exr unsigned char 0
411. lays external definition symbol names defined in a module Displays no external definition symbol names Generate section list Specifies section name list file output Check Box Option Subcommand Function slist Displays section contents Displays no section contents 4 2 Specifying Options in HEW2 0 or Later For details on specifying options in HEW1 2 refer to section 4 1 Specifying Options in HEW1 2 4 2 1 C C Compiler Options Select C C Tab from the H8S H8300 Standard Toolchain dialog box 1 Category Source H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain E 2 x Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library GPU Deb gt bebe rl Category Source z All Loaded Projects Show entries for Sample i i i 8 B Include file directories X z Include tile directories C source file Preinclude files Assembly source file Defines Linkage symbol file Messages Message level File inline path Moye down Options C C cpu H8SXA24 object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF 0bj debug nolist cheincpath nologo oma Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Show entries for Dialog Menu Command Option Function Include file directories include Specifies the path name of the include file directory Preinclude files preinclude Specifies file contents as a inclu
412. le inline expansion exists Specification Method Inter file Inline Expansion Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Details Inline Inline file path Command line FILe inlinez file name Inter file Inline Expansion Directory Specification Dialog menu C C Tab Category Source Show entries for File inline path Command line file inline path path name Files for inter file inline expansion are searched in the order of the File inline path directory and the current directory Examples of use In the following example the function func in which keyword inline is specified is called from other file For inline expansion specify the inter file inline expansion option at compile of the calling function test 1 c C C program ch38 cpu h8sxa file inline test 2 c test 1 c ch38 cpu h8sxa test 2 c test l c test 2 c void main void extern int sil si2 void func void void func void int sil si2 inline void func void void main void i 10 func i 20 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Examples of codes When specified the inter file inline expansion option codes of test 2 c are expanded in the calling function Not specified Specified test 1 c test 1 c main main JMP _func 24 MOV H A 4 sil 32 H 14 8 si2 32 RTS test 2 c test 2 func func MOV W H A 4 _sil 32 MOV H A 4 _sil 32 MOV W 41
413. lect H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain from the options menu 3 sample High performance Embedded Workshop File Edit View Project Options Build Memory Tools Window Help H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain Build Phases Build Configurations Debug Sessions Debug Settings B E C source Radix i A hent A Specify the compiler options for sample c Select C C Tab Category Optimize of Options gt H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain in HEW On this dialog box specify the output of an Inter module optimizer add on information by checking the item indicated below 8 300 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Toolchain Option bebe rj Category Optimize Q All Loaded Projects v Optimization Details sample E43 C source file Speed or size Size orieyfed optimization E 2 oe Speed sub options Switch statement tete c Register Auto en Function call Z sbrk c aa Default Options Struc Data access E G source file Gas Assembly source file E Linkage symbol file z 2byte pointer SER Options C C cpu 26004 24 objectz CONFIGDIFOS 4FILELE AF obj debug nolist goptimize cheincpath lang c nologo Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program In the next step specify All Loaded Project in the Project File List
414. lement to the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler In HEW2 0 or later the inter module optimization features of Standard Library Generator should be used to create the library By checking Standard Library Tab Category Optimize Generate file for inter module optimization an inter module optimization add on information file is output 1 Default optimization The inter module optimizer supports the following optimization functions No Description Dialog Menu Subcommand Option Unifies constants strings Unify strings String_Unify Deletes unreferenced Eliminate dead code Symbol_delete variables functions 3 Optimizes access to variables Use short addressing Variable_access 4 Optimizes access to functions Use indirect call jump Funcation_call 5 Reallocates registers Reallocate registers Register 6 Eliminates same code Eliminate same code Same_code 7 Optimizes branch instructions Optimize branches Branch Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions The most efficient optimization with the compiler is shown below Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Valid compiler optimization option 3348 1249 SPEED option block transfer instruction 3 parameter passing registers In the inter module optimizer no optimization is performed by default and a simply linked module is produced Therefore the execution results are the same result as the compi
415. ler optimization 2 Specifying inter module optimization items Specify the optimization items in the inter module optimizer one by one Optimization Function Inter Module Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler optimization 3348 1249 options specified Unifies constants strings 3348 1249 Deletes unreferenced variables functions 2984 1249 Optimizes access to variables 3258 1232 Optimizes access to functions 3332 1250 Reallocates registers 3332 1249 Eliminates dead codes 3348 1249 Optimizes branch instructions 3348 1249 3 Enabling inter module optimization for speed Perform the following functions the unification of constants strings deletion of unreferenced variables functions optimization of access to variables reallocation of registers and optimization of branch instructions Optimization Function Inter Module Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler optimization 3348 1249 options specified Optimization for speed 2906 1232 4 Enabling all inter module optimization functions Enable all inter module optimization functions Optimization Function Inter Module Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler optimization 3348 1249 options specified Optimizes all 2902 1232 When this function is specified the optimization may be applied to the part where the optimization should be disabled Check the list carefully before speci
416. like to create Specify the initial value for The stack pointer SP Vector Handlers PowerON Reset Manual Reset 0 Power On Rese 1 Manual Reset gt Displays the handler names that are output to the vector table lt Back Ne Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 8 New project 7 9 Specify the debugger target and press NEXT Select Check the debugger target to be used from Target You can select either no debugger target or multiple debugger targets ing the Targ em for Debugging H8 300 Simulator H8 300HA Simulator H8 300HN Simulator 1H8 300L Simulator 1H8S 20004 Simulator H8S 2000N Simulator H8S 26004 Simulator 1H8S 2600N Simulator H8SX Advanced Simulator H8SX Maximum Simulator H8SX Normal Simulator Target type z lt Back Ne Finish Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 9 New project 8 9 Set the options for the selected debugger target and press NEXT gt By default the HEW creates two configurations Release and Debug When a target for debugging is selected the HEW creates another configuration The name of the target is included The name of the configuration can
417. m Function Section 28 Transfer instructions MOVFPE instruction 3 2 5 29 MOVTPE instruction 30 Arithmetic instructions Decimal addition 3 2 6 31 Decimal subtraction 32 TAS instruction 33 MAC instruction 34 64 bit multiplication 35 Shift instruction Rotates 1 byte data to the left 3 2 7 36 Rotates 2 byte data to the left 37 Rotates 4 byte data to the left 38 Rotates 1 byte data to the right 39 Rotates 2 byte data to the right 40 Rotates 4 byte data to the right 41 System control instructions TRAPA instruction 3 2 8 42 SLEEP instruction 43 Block transfer instruction EEPMOV instruction 3 2 9 EEPMOV instruction Interrupt Request 44 Block transfer instruction MOVMD instruction 3 2 10 for H8SX MOVSD instruction 45 NOP instruction NOP instruction Note Can be used only in the case of H8SX 3 2 1 Setting and Referencing the Condition Code Register CCR Description For setting and referencing the condition code register the compiler provides the functions listed in the table below No Item Format Description 1 Setting an interrupt mask void set imask ccr unsigned Sets a mask value 0 or 1 to the interrupt char mask mask bit of the CCR 2 Referencing an interrupt unsigned char References the value 0 or 1 of interrupt mask mask get imask ccr void bit I of the CCR 3 Setting the CCR void set_ccr unsigned char ccr Sets the value of ccr 8 bits to the CCR Referencing the CCR unsigned char get_ccr void References the val
418. mbly language code after optimization Fa ER6 R6 R6 L R1 fel o R6 ERO n e _a 32 ER0 L R6 0 R6 J Nx ove oco 4 pi Dd E s UU Dd Dd Dd UJ Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 58 48 62 44 50 After 46 32 46 32 34 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 38 38 34 After 28 28 24 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 245 197 558 418 468 After 188 134 432 350 342 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 175 177 168 After 125 117 117 6 4 Pointers 6 4 1 Using Pointer Variables Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points In cases where the same variable external variable is referenced several times or an array element must be accessed both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by using a pointer variable Description The use of pointer variables can generate a code that incorporates an efficient addressing mode Rn Rn Rn Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Copy the elements of the array data2 to the array datal C language program before optimization void func int datal int data2 int i for i20 i
419. mbol Outputs external definition symbols processed by linkage function to a file in assembler directive format Note Output file name is project name gt fsy Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 5 Verify Tab OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other CPU information check CPI information Device Modify CPU intormation tle path Stop linkage on GPU information warning Use external subcommand file OK Cancel CPU information check Dialog Menu Subcommand Function No check Checks no CPU allocation Check Checks memory allocation according to the CPU information file Use CPU information file CPU Checks memory allocation according to the existing CPU information file CPU information Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Cerates or modifies CPU information file CPU Specifies memory types and then specifies each memory address CPU information file path Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Specifies the existing CPU information file Stop linkage on CPU information warning Check Box Subcommand Function CPUCheck Outputs error information during memory allocation check according to the CPU information file Outputs no error information during memory allocation check Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 21 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 6 Other Tab D OptLinker option
420. mbol file User defined options Options C C cpu 26004 24 object 4CONFIGDIFO KFILELE AF obj debug list CONFIGDIRO FILELEAF Ist show tab 4 speed register switch shift struct expression loop 2 inline N Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 12 Output of Illegal Value in Operand from the Cross Assembler Question When a file output with the assembly source by the compiler is assembled by the Cross Assembler the message Illegal value in operand is displayed Why is it Answer Be sure that the Assembly embedding is not performed with the pragma asm and pragma endasm or pragma inline asm In this case the branch width containing assembler intrinsic code is output in a 16 bit displacement and this message is output because the actual branch width exceeds that range To solve the problem modify the assembly language program output by the compiler using the JMP instruction to reach the branch range Example To modify the program as follows Results of Assembly expansion _a 32 ERO CERO ER1 1 ER1 ER1 ERO f a 32 ER1 ER1 ERO 2 32 ER0 ASM embedded here ER1 ERO 1 ERO ERO ER1 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 13 Deletion of Large Amount of Codes by Optimization Question Large amount of codes are deleted after the compilation Why is it Answer There are th
421. me is unchanged Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 69 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions When the CPU type is H8SX the speed of access to a 4 byte data aligned on a 4 byte boundary address is improved Section B 4 Section B v 4 Section B Section B v Section B 1 Section address allocation at align 4 To locate the 1 byte or 4 byte data section at specific addresses with align 4 specified each section needs to be explicitly specified with the start option of the optimizing linkage editor In HEW Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Section is used Example Allocate the section with 4 to a multiple of 4 addres Allocate the section with 1 in order to minimize the empty area Object Size Comparison byte RAM size H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 16 16 16 16 24 Specified 14 14 14 14 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 16 16 16 Specified 14 14 14 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 70 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 45 38 90 76 156 Specified 45 38 90 76 156 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 28 28 24 Specified 27 26 23 Remarks and Notes This option align 4 is valid only with H8SX Note Execution speed is improved only with H8SX Generally 4 bytes
422. measured Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Data access aa 8 Command line abs amp The short 8 bit absolute address area must be allocated within the memory range H FFFFOO to H FFFFFF If this range is exceeded all sections in the ABS8 cannot be allocated to the short 8 bit absolute address area Therefore do not specify the abs8 option to the entire file but choose variables to be allocated to the short 8 bit absolute address area The criteria are variables that can fit within the area and receives frequent access Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 13 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions The sizes of variables can be checked with a compiler output object list while the number of accesses can be checked with an optimization information list that is produced by the inter module optimizer Specify the use of the short absolute address area with the optimization option of the inter module optimizer and examine the resulting optimization information list Variable Accessible with Abs8 SYMBOL COUNTS OPTIMIZE ECh 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob This file indicates the number of times variables are referenced Based on this information make an appropriate specification in the pragma abs8 statement pragma abs8 Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob The execution results are as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048
423. meter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 14 log 1 2 8 345 7 889 7 889 2 5 8 640 8 181 8 181 0 999 8 258 7 799 7 799 0 3 8 538 8 079 8 079 15 logi0 1 2 8 114 8 313 8 316 2 5 8 400 8 599 8 601 0 999 8 035 8 234 8 236 0 3 8 304 8 503 8 505 16 modf 256 3 s 1 226 1 194 1 194 0 032 1 065 1 035 1 035 10000 2345 1 150 1 118 1 118 17 pow 2 8 4 2 17 485 17 294 17 295 45 2 5 17 060 16 868 16 870 4 56 3 17 965 17 820 17 820 85 55 476 18 237 18 076 18 078 18 sqrt 2 3 882 3 912 3 912 3 3 888 3 918 3 918 0 1 3 837 3 867 3 867 19 ceil 0 3 892 908 908 0 6 482 509 509 20 fabs 5 51 55 55 5 51 55 55 21 floor 0 3 482 498 498 0 6 893 894 894 22 mod 11 1 3 2 688 750 749 500 55 0 4 921 983 982 1 05E 06 9 54E 07 1 712 1 774 1 773 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Appendix B Added Features B 1 Features Added between Ver 2 0 and Ver 3 0 B 1 1 Addition of Embedded Extended Functions l entry Function In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 new version or later pragma entry can specify the entry function The entry function is executed first when the power is turned on or at reset The entry function enables the creation of a C C program without the use of the stack pointer SP initial value or assembly language embedded in a C C program 2 Section Address Operator In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later operators sec
424. metic Operation Performance A 2 2 Double Precision Floating Point Operation Performance H8SX H8SX No Function Parameter 1 Parameter 2 NRM ADV MAX 1 acos 0 4 16 203 16 305 16 306 1 57075 1 097 1 136 1 135 0 6 16 220 16 323 16 324 0 4 16 185 16 289 16 291 2 asin 0 4 15 881 15 903 15 904 1 57075 738 805 804 0 6 14 895 15 916 15 918 0 4 14 888 15 910 15 911 3 atan 0 11 5 081 5 873 5 872 0 27 8 163 9 066 9 065 0 547 8 089 8 992 8 991 0 777 8 512 9 425 9 424 0 975 8 271 9 159 9 158 54 45 10 528 11 515 11 514 154 233 10 693 11 680 11 679 54 45 10 534 11 522 11 520 0 975 8 277 9 166 9 164 0 777 8 518 9 432 9 430 4 atan2 0 3 0 7 9 791 10 739 10 740 0 2 0 1 12 161 13 208 13 209 0 1 0 9 6 978 7 815 7 816 5 cos 0 523333333 4 653 4 928 4 927 1 046666667 5 340 5 691 5 691 1 9625 5 147 5 443 5 443 2 7475 5 028 5 355 5 355 3 5325 4 788 5 060 5 060 4 3175 5 418 5 771 5 771 5 1025 5 181 5 479 5 479 5 8875 5 039 5 369 5 368 0 52333333 4 656 4 931 4 931 1 04666667 5 341 5 692 5 693 1 9625 5 151 5 447 5 448 2 7475 5 032 5 359 5 360 3 5325 4 792 5 064 5 065 4 3175 5 422 5 775 5 776 5 1025 5 185 5 483 5 484 5 8875 5 043 5 373 5 373 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 A 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix A Lists of Floating Point Arithmetic Operation Performance
425. ming access by byte and bit operation instruction For registers that can only be accessed for 16 bits when a byte access or bit operation instruction is generated I can t properly read the register value What should I do Answer As long as there are no particular specifications in the program bit field members are accessed by compiler optimized instructions As a result access may be performed by unintended instructions Specify __evenaccess to perform access using the type set for the member variable To prevent changes to access methods and multiple accesses by the compiler specify __evenaccess explicitly for variables for which you would like to prevent such changes C source without evenaccess struct bit reg void main reg b6 1 Assembler source without evenaccess _main function main STACK _main 4 BSET B 1 _reg 32 RTS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A C source with evenaccess evenaccess struct bit reg void main reg b6 1 Assembler source with __evenaccess _main function main STACK _main 4 MOV W Q reg 32 R0 BSET B 1 ROH MOV W RO _reg 32 RTS Remarks For details on evenaccess keyword refer to section 3 5 3 Even Byte Access Specification Features 11 1 33 Common Invalid Instruction Exceptions That Occur When Programs Are Run for an Extended Period of Time Question Once the device has been running for 10
426. minutes to 2 hours a common invalid instruction exception occurs and a reset is necessary Is there some way to analyze from where the problem is occurring Answer Ultimately this means that a common invalid instruction is occurring but the system may lose control and cause a common invalid instruction exception due to the following reasons If the system loses control after an extended period of operation 2 is very likely 1 An unintended interrupt is being performed 2 A stack overflow is corrupting valid RAM data 3 A problem exists with the board environment such as a data conflict or memory software error To find the cause of the problem perform the following and operate the device e Enable instruction tracing e Set breakpoints for the interrupt function jumped to during the common invalid instruction exception Once the device is operating and the common invalid instruction exception occurs processing will stop at the breakpoint set for the interrupt function When this occurs analyze the status of the instruction trace and determine the cause of the problem Use the following analysis method when a stack overflow is causing the problem e Set read write break access for the address immediately before the address of the start of the stack area Once the device is operating and an access occurs that overflows the stack processing will stop at the breakpoint set above When this occurs if the access instruction i
427. mize Function call 2 vec 7 Command line indirect2 Extended The address ranges of the extended indirect memory addressing H8SX Normal Mode the Area from 0x0100 to OxO1FF H8SX Other Modes the Area from 0x0200 to OxO3FF Example To call the function func in the extended indirect memory format When vector number is not specified by vect the function address are stored in the section EXINDIRECT as the address table When vector number is specified the section VECT as the address table is stored In linkage the Optimizing Linkage Editor allocates the secttion to the corresponding address automatically C C program Specifying in the key word indirect ex void func int int lt specifies indirect ex extern int a b c int dj void main void b 0 func a b functo cj func c a d c Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified ER2 ER3 SP ER2 E0 E0 E0 _b 32 _func ER2 Q a 32 R0 ER2 _b 32 R0 _c ER3 QER3 EO ER2 Q a 32 E0 ER3 RO ER2 ER3 _d 32 ER2 ER3 E0 E0 E0 _b 32 _a 32 RO0 SSfunc 7 _b 32 R0 c ER2 ER2 E0 SSfunc 7 Q a 32 E0 ER2 RO SSfunc 7 ER2 _d 32 ER2 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 65 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 82 76 58 Specified 74 74 54
428. mizing Linkage Editor 11 2 1 Output of Undefined External Symbol Question The inter module optimizer outputs the message Undefined external symbol XX X when the symbol XXX is not used Why is this Answer 1 Is a compiler supplied standard library or an EC class library linked A standard library includes both C library functions and runtime routines operation routines that are necessary for the execution of C language programs Even when the user program does not include C library functions the compiler generated object program sometimes may require functions that are provided in a standard library In such a case the library option of the inter module optimizer should be used to specify a standard library For HEW1 2 the standard library EC class library to be specified must be selected according to the type of CPU used the optimization method employed and the number of registers to which parameters are passed as indicated in the following table CPU No of Parameter Std C Library EC Class Library Operation Mode Passing Registers Size Priority Speed Priority Size Priority Speed Priority H8 300 2 c38reg lib c38regs lib ec2reg lib ec2regs lib 3 c38reg3 lib c38regs3 lib ec2reg3 lib ec2regs3 lib H8 300H NRM 2 c38hn lib c38hns lib ec2hn lib ec2hns lib 3 c38hn3 lib c38hns3 lib ec2hn3 lib ec2hns3 lib H8 300H ADV 2 c38ha lib c38has lib ec2ha lib ec2has lib 3 c38ha3 lib c38has3 lib ec2ha3 lib e
429. mory Map System Configuration Memory map FFFFECOO FFFFEBFF RAM 16 1 FFFFFCOD FFFFFFFF 1 0 8 2 System memory resource Modify Delete Reset Help Close Press the Add button to allocate memory resources on the System Memory Resource Modify screen In this case specify all areas For a ROM area specify the memory area from addresses H O to H OOFEFFFF for a RAM area specify H OOFF0000 through H OOFFFFFF For the ROM area and RAM area access types specify Read and Read Write respectively Press the OK button System Memory Resource Modify Start address H 00000000 End address H OOFEFFFF Cancel IE tvpe Read C Write Read Write Help System Memory Resource Modify Start address H 00FF0000 End address H 00FFFFFF Access type 5 Read Write Read Write Help Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program The memory resources are then specified as shown above Memory Map System Configuration Memory map CPU H8S 2600 00000000 FFFFEBFF EXT 8 2 Address Space Size 32 FFFFECO0 FFFFFBFF RAM 16 1 Program Area Size 24 FFFFFCOO FFFFFFFF I 0 8 2 Exec Mode STOP 2 System memory resource 00000000 OOFEFFFF Read QO0FFO000 OOFFFFFF Read Write Modify Delete Reset Hele Close Press the Close button to close this window 2 3 4 Downloading a Load Module Select Load Program
430. mory area 11 2 2 Output of Relocation Size Overflow Question The message Relocation size overflow is displayed during linking with the HEW2 0 or later optimizing linkage editor and the HEWI 2 inter module optimizer What should I do Answer First check the linkage map e Are the ABS8 and ABS16 sections included within the range accessible with 8 bit absolute addresses and 16 bit absolute addresses of the CPU e Is the INDIRECT section included within the range from 0 to FF of the CPU This warning message is displayed if data specified to be assigned to an 8 bit absolute address a 16 bit absolute address or an indirect memory address with an option or pragma operator is not assigned to the correct address For details on the ranges refer to each programming manual Check the range and if a section is assigned out of the range it should be adjusted appropriately Confirm that assembly coding is correctly provided in those program locations where assembly code is to be embedded This message is sometimes displayed when a branch width is not appropriate when an attempt is made to embed assembly code in a C C program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 3 Howto Run Programs in RAM Question How can I allocate a program in fast RAM ROM RAM pro 2 Transfer Answer You can use the ROM support functions of the HEW2 0 or later optimizing linkage editor and the
431. mp table allocated in the constant area is increased in proportion to the number of case labels contained in switch statements however the execution speed is always constant When the SPEED option is specified a processing method improving the execution speed is selected depending on the above mentioned conditions Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Switch judgement Command line speed switch Example To replace the value of the variable a C C program extern unsigned a void sub void switch a case 0 a 1 break case 2 a 2 break case 4 a 3 break case 6 a 4 break case 8 a 5 break case 10 a 6 break case 12 a 7 break case 14 a 8 break case 16 a 9 break case 18 a 10 break case 20 a 11 break Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Sub MOV L MOV MOV t i pH t iE pH S D t iE A 5al E 52 UO 1O U IO U ONON OMN OMON O UO 0 IO 0 IO 0 d t z z z z z z B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B C B R O B O B O B O B O B O B O B O B O B O B OOo Su zi ox NPRPPRP PP PEE UORDMDWANKRENOOH wae OO CO CO OO CO CO CO OO CO OO CO OO Lil 1 16 L26 8 12 16 L26 8 13 16 L26 8 14 16 L26
432. n Dialog Menu Command Option Function Shown section Outputs section information list Not shown nosection Outputs no section information list Source program list Contents Specifies the contents to be output on the list files Dialog Menu Command Option Function Conditionals show conditionals Outputs the parts in which conditions specified in AIF or AIFDEF are not satisfied Definitions show definitions Outputs macro definitions AAREPEAT and AWHILE definitions and INCLUDE ASSIGNA and ASSIGNC directives Calls show calls Outputs macro call statements and AIF AIFDEF and AENDI directives Expansions show expansions Outputs macro expansions and AREPEAT AWHILE expansions Structured show structured Outputs structured assembly expansions Code show code Outputs the lines that exceed the number of source statement lines to be displayed in the object code display Note If default is selected for each option directive in the source list is specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Category Tuning Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim 1 SimDebue_H85 26004 zi Category z EN i El All Loaded Projects Option to set ess m B E sample E C source file Specify all symbols EH C source file Add H E Assembly source file J Linkage symbol file Modify Options Assembly
433. n code and improve the speed Example Call the function func by looping C language program before optimization extern char tb 5 void sub void int i for i20 i lt 2L itt funcl tb il Expanded into assembly language code before optimization _sub PUSH L R6 SUB W 6 R6 L6 R6 _tb 32 ER6 ROL _funcl 24 1 R6 R6 2 ER6 6 8 R6 EXTS L MOV B JSR INC W EXTS L CMP L BLT POP L RTS D E4 2 Dri zo CO C Dd C language program after optimization extern char tb 5 void sub void unsigned int i for i20 i 2L i funcl tb i Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _sub PUSH L ER6 SUB W R6 R6 L6 EXTU L ER6 MOV B QG tb 32 ER6 ROL JSR _ funcl 24 INC W 1 R6 CMP W 2 R6 BLO L6 8 POP L ER6 RTS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 8 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 34 30 40 34 50 After 34 28 36 26 28 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 32 30 26 After 32 30 24 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 59 50 124 102 378 After 59 49 116 86 90 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 43 43 41 After 43 43 37 6 1 6 Specifying In File Functions as static Functions Size O Speed O Stack size O
434. n 6 40 o CM Hew Hdi4 HBY Hdi exe T S ssion file C sample sample Debue sample hds gt Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 50 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 6 Displaying a Source Program Click on the Program Source button Program file inti gt l Ff geing interface sample jl ulato SS Sia mm m iof x File Edit View Run Memory Setup Window Help n am m ioo SRRS UOC OAEAWWem suave EL 21x Lokin c A eH fear 2000 _initlib zn init 2600 a _otherlib a lowsre 300 n abort ln onexit 300h callmain a scttbl a _closeal mm an testi a _ init a exit a vec tbi File name emain Files of type Jan Files Select the cmain c file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 51 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 3 7 Setting a Breakpoint On the BP column in the program window double click on the source line at which a breakpoint is to be set For example double click herel for setting a breakpoint when the main function is started Eile Edit View Run Memory etup Window Help SETETE IEE Misi E OOP aaa dg NE inci cmain c Of x Line Address B Label Source 274 0000089c 6 Proc2Z H 275 REG OneToFifty IntLoec 276 REG Enumeration EnumLoc 277 278 ifdef DEBUG 279 printf ProcZ executed IntParIO d n IntParIO 280
435. n Deve DUREE Rei dee 6 50 6 7 1 Rewriting switch Statements as Tables sesseseeeeeeeeneeeeeneneee nennen nennen rene ene 6 50 6 7 2 Coding a Program in Which Case Statements Jump to the Same Label esse 6 52 6 7 3 Branching to a Function Coded Directly below a Given Statement esee 6 54 Section 7 Usine HEW e cose EU debeam adde dete esca cate end a allem ela beue 7 1 DEDI totes cyte ct baw eek cey a E htgest alc e oases ee neato T 7 2 7 1 1 Regenerating and Editing Automatically Generated Files sese 7 2 74 2 Makefile Outp ut deed ere eH eO REI Hue Rena eue e Ride Peer eves EENE 7 3 7 43 Makehle Input secet eq DRE DDR 7 4 7 1 4 Creating Custom Project Types sosisini ioiei va eneee e e eines nene tenete ne ebere E ener enne enne tenen 7 6 TAGS Mult CPU Feature eer prebere dri qr i eT e o ec be erp 7 9 7 1 6 Networking Feature iet n pe ERU ERE HE ERE U Ee da EREE E EN 7 11 7 1 7 Converting from Old HEW Version s neteeente phe e t RR ERR RE etie on siin 7 14 7 1 8 Converting a HIM Project to a HEW Project sssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee nennen nennen nennen nennen 7 16 PALO Add Supported CPUS ea ier REIR pst QU nen UU pe 7 19 222 Simulations yc guns eel ee UU a dud Une aped 7 20 7 2 Pseudozinterrupts eiecit ette aede deg e ende pipes Pee ee tr end eerta 7 20 7 2 20 Convenient Breakpoint Functions eesessesseseeseeee
436. n Functions Example In the following example the efficiency is improved when three parameter passing registers are specified C C program extern short ee void func short a short b short c short d long e ee a b c d e Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified PUSH L SUBS L MOV W MULXU W MULXU W MOV W MULXU W EXTS L MOV W MOV L MOV L JSR MOV W POP L RTS ER2 2 SP RO R2 E0 ER2 R1 ER2 R2 R1 El ER1 ER1 RO SP ER1 ERO 10 16 SP ER1 SDIVLS 3 24 RO _ee 32 ER2 Object Size Comparison byte Specified ER3 2 SP RO R3 E0 ER3 R1 ER3 R3 R1 E1 ER1 ER1 RO SP ER1 ERO ER2 ER1 GSDIVL 3 24 RO _ee 32 2 SP ER3 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 42 40 46 44 72 Specified 38 36 42 40 70 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 36 36 36 Specified 34 34 32 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 144 138 294 282 686 Specified 140 134 284 272 682 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 44 43 44 Specified 39 39 41 Remarks and Notes This specification is applied to all the files and linked libraries It cannot be specified individually to each file Therefore when modifying this speci
437. n H8SX Assembly expansion code object size and execution speed in this section code the results of the compilation by the compiler Ver 3 0 other than H8SX As a general rule of the values of case in a switch statement that are frequently executed should be tested first to improve the execution speed The user is encouraged to try this technique during program execution 6 7 3 Branching to a Function Coded Directly below a Given Statement Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points If a function call occurs at the end of functions the called function should be placed directly below the function call Description If the tail recursion optimization is in effect the called function should be placed directly below the function call to take advantage of the optimization which has the effect of deleting the function call code Since the function call code is deleted the program size is reduced and the processing speed is increased Example Call the function func from the function main C language program before optimization C language program after optimization int a int a void func void func void func void main att a 0 func void main void func a 0 func att Expanded into assembly language code Expanded into assembly language code after before optimization optimization _func main MOV _a ERO SUB RO RO MOV ERO R1 MOV RO _a 32 I
438. n a Status window e Select CPU gt Status from the View menu to open a Status window Display Platform sheet from within the Status window Status x Status H8S 2600A Simulator H8S 2600A Stop Ready Ready Execute From Reset Exec Instructions Cycles 2 4 7 Registers Window Values of registers can be confirmed on a Registers window e Select CPU gt Registers from the View menu Register Nare Register Value ERO H OoO0000000 ER1 H OoO0000000 ER2 H OoO0000000 ER3 H OoO0000000 ER4 H OoO0000000 ERS H 00000000 ER6 H oo000000 ER H 00000000 PC H 000000 CCR EXR MACH H OO000000 MACL H OoO000000 ic Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 65 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 8 Using Trace 1 Trace Buffer By using the trace buffer you can see the history of execution of instructions e Select Code Trace from the View menu to open a Trace window Scroll up to the top of the window oxi PTR Cycle Address CCR Mult Instruction Access Data Source Label 0003s00000000000850 0003 00000000000856 000350000000000085C 0003 00000000000BBE 0003s00000000000BC2 0003 lt 00000000000BC4 0003200000000000BC6 0003z00000000000BCC 0003100000000000BCE d003C00000000000BD0 d00z2s00000000000BD2 0002 000000000005D8 0002700000000000BDA 0002 00000000000BDC 0002500000000000BDE 0002400000000000BE0 000220000
439. n is added as a preparation for section 2 3 Debugging Using an HDI 3 The required size for a heap area can be calculated as follows Heap area size 2 Area size allocated by memory management library Management area size Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program The management area sizes are as follows CPU Type Management Area Size H8S 2600 ADV H8S 2000 ADV H8 300H ADV 16 bytes H8S 2600 NRM H8S 2000 NRM H8 300H NRM H8 300 8 bytes ADV advanced mode NRM normal mode To modify the heap area size specified in this section after the new project has been initialized refer to section 2 2 1 2 Allocating a heap area 5 New project Step 4 Set the stack to be used and press NEXT gt ecif y the initial What are the stack settings m ior the stack pointer SP Stack Pointer Address Ower on reset H FFEFBO Stack Size H200 Specify the stack area size lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel The size of the stack to be used can be determined as follows Calculate the size of the stack area for the deepest nest of calls in the call relationships among the functions The maximum value obtained in this manner is the stack area size For example if the deepest function call nest is the following sum all the stack sizes main function stack size 10 bytes func function 20 bytes sub f
440. n rennen ener ennt eene 11 36 11 2 Optimizing Linkage Editor ett eee eret b E nre pe pe t tue pes 11 37 11 2 1 Output of Undefined External Symbol essseseeseeeeeeeeeeeee nennen trennen rennen nennen 11 37 11 2 2 Output of Relocation Size Overflow sess nennen rennen ener nenne tenene 11 38 11 2 3 How to Run Programs mn RAM nie reete esr e teen ap b erhebt rr bees tete rid 11 39 11 2 4 Fixing Symbol Addresses in Certain Memory Areas for Linking seeeeeeeee 11 43 11 2 5 How to Iniplement Overlay ceret ere e dni e es evened etos 11 45 11 2 6 How to Specify Output of Undefined Symbol Error sese 11 47 11 2 7 Unify Output Forms of S Type File eese tene nren trennen nnne nenne 11 47 11 2 8 Dividing an Output File erre Or a e rhe iet ree bee ERR Hte cheese 11 47 11 2 9 Output File Format of Optimizing Linkage Editor eese 11 48 11 2 10 How to Calculate Program Size ROM RAM eeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne nnne tenen nennen een 11 49 11 2 11 Output of Section Alignment Mismatch esessesssseseseeeseee nennen nennen enne ener nenne 11 50 11 3 Library Generator nennt ete rte e DERE OPE NBM Mise eT OR ERE Bees 11 51 11 3 1 Reentrant and Standard Li braries esesseseseeseeeeeeeereneenne ener nennen nente enne 11 51 11 3 2 Like to Use Reentrant Library Function in Standard Library File
441. n this example expression 1 has been eliminated as a result of optimization e Obtains the control flow including the conditional of the if statement expression e Due to analyzing the control flow analysis and alias analysis of external variables it is proved that the value set in a in 1 is not used Therefore the above expression 1 is a redundant expression that is not referenced and thus it is eliminated Example 4 int a int b 10 A int i lt 1 for i 0 i 10 i 2 blil a 3 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 26 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features In this example a in expression 3 is referenced once before the loop and is always handled as a constant value in the loop as a result of optimization e Obtains the control flow including the for loop control expression e Due to analyzing the control flow analysis and alias analysis of external variables a in 3 is handled as a constant value in the loop e 3 which is the reference expression to a is moved outside the for loop 2 as follows temp a for i 0 i 10 i 2 b i temp 3 Therefore the variable a in expression 3 is unchanged in the loop Example 5 int a a a 0 1 while 1 2 In this example the statement 1 is assumed as unnecessary and eliminated as a result of optimization e Since 2 is an infinite loop this function is judged to have
442. nction RU ig name function name Name of interrupt function unction specification iie constant Absolute address lt function lt function name gt Name of interrupt function without an Danes underscore 3 1 1 Stack Switching Specification Description This function specifies a separate interrupt function stack area When an external interrupt occurs the stack switching specification sp switches the stack pointer to a specified address so that the interrupt function can be operated using that stack Upon return this function resets the pointer to the condition that existed before the interrupt occurred Example To specify a new stack address with a variable or constant In the following example the array STK 100 is set as a stack to be used by the interrupt function f C C program extern int STK 100 extern unsigned char a pragma interrupt f sp STK 100 void f void a 0 Compiled assembly language expansion code SP _STK 96 32 MOV L _STK 96 32 SP PUSH W RO SUB B ROL ROL MOV B ROL _a 32 POP W RO Sai QSP SP lt Specifies an interrupt function and switches the stack pointer lt Changes the stack pointer lt Interrupt function returns on RTE instruction Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Remarks and notes i This specification can be set toge
443. nction Y nomessage Outputs no information level messages message Outputs information level messages Notify unused symbol Check Box Command Option Function Y msg unused Notifies the user of the defined symbol which is never referenced z NOT notify the user of the defined symbol which is never referenced Divided output files Check Box Command Option Function Y output Specifies an output file name and sets output range Specifies an output file name but does not set output range Output padding data Check Box Command Option Function Y Space Specifies a value to output to unused area numerical value A value to output to unused area is not specified Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 45 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Reduce empty areas of boundary alignment Check Box Command Option Function data_stuff Reduces empty areas generated as the boundary alignment of sections after compilation NOT reduce empty areas generated as the boundary alignment of sections after compilation 3 Category List Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim gt SimDebue_H8S 2600A Y E E is Loaded Projects v Generate list file 2 0 ES Contents H C source file C source file Show symbol Enable all Assembly source file Show reference H 0 Linkage symbol fil
444. nction with the same name in each of a base class and a derived class Otherwise the function call cannot be properly made as intended If a virtual function is declared these calls can be properly made as intended Use a virtual function to improve the development efficiency However use it with caution because it will influence the size and processing speed Example of Use In the main3 function call two pointers store class B addresses If virtual is declared the class B foo function is properly called If virtual is not declared one of the pointers calls the class A foo function The use of a virtual function resulting in creation of a table etc as shown on the next page will influence the size and speed C program void main1 void class A A a t Virtual function a foo private declaration int a public void main2 void virtual void foo void B b b foo Virtual class B public A function call private Virtual function void main3 void int b declaration public B ob virtual void foo void A pa amp b B pb B amp b void A foo void pa gt foo pb foo void B foo void Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion tables etc for virtual functions struct __T5585724 struct type info struct X T5584740 struct _ T5579436 struct A struct B ex
445. nd options Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 36 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 2 2 Assembler Options Select Assembly Tab from the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box 1 Category Source 0 Standard Toolchain Configuration Sim Debug H8S 2600A z n All Loaded Projects Category Show entries for Corre Tis Include file directories E G source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Options Assembly cpu 26004 24 debug object CONFIGDIRD FILELEAF obj nolist nologo cheincpath errorpath N Show entries for Dialog Menu Command Option Function Include file directories include Specifies include file directory Defines define Defines string literal replacement Preprocessor variable assigna Defines integer type preprocessor variable assignc Defines character type preprocessor variable Note Specify using the following dialog box Add preproc Symbol Value String C Integer Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 37 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Category Object Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim 41 gt SimDebue_H8S 2600A v E i All Loaded AI on Debug information ER EEF soiree file with debug information H E C source file Generate assembly source file after preprocess Assembly source file H
446. nded into assembly language code before optimization _funes _data ERO _sht 32 R1 SDSLI 3 24 H 0008 1 Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization define SHT 8 int data void func void data data lt lt SHT Expanded into assembly language code after optimization _func MOV B Q data 1 32 RO0H SUB B ROL ROL MOV W RO _data 32 RTS _data RES W H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 26 20 20 16 16 After 16 12 16 12 12 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 26 26 20 After 16 16 12 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 44 38 166 136 140 After 14 11 28 22 22 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 14 14 12 After 11 11 10 6 2 9 Using Shift Operations Size O Speed O Stack size O Important Points In performing multiplication and addition operations whenever possible use shift operations Description Composite assignment operators amp I and so forth and shift operators are designed to take advantage of the performance characteristics of the CPU in which they are used When used judiciously these operators can reduce the code size and improve both size and speed In particular when multiplying a
447. ndirect ex keyword or the indirect extended option can be used to declare functions to be called in extended memory indirect addressing mode Also pragma indirect section can modify the section name of not only INDIRECT the function address area for memory indirect addressing mode aa 8 but also SEXINDIRECT the function address area for extended memory indirect addressing mode aa 7 e Assembly Capability only in H8SX The asm keyword can be used to allow the assembly language to be used in a C C source program f Disabling line Output The noline option can be used to disable the line output at preprocessor expansion g Specifying Inline Expansion for Functions memcpy and strcpy only in H8SX The library option can be used to specify inline expansion of two library functions memcpy and strcpy h Changing Error Level The change_message option can be used to individually change the error level of information level and warning level error messages i Specifying 8 bit Absolute Area Address only in H8SX Option sbr can be used to specify the address to locate the 8 bit absolute area j Strengthening Optimizing Feature only in H8SX The optimization details can be further specified by the following added options opt range del vacant loop max unroll infinite loop global alloc struct alloc const var propagate and volatile loop Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features
448. nformation Renesas Technology America Inc 450 Holger Way San Jose CA 95134 1368 U S A Tel 1 408 382 7500 Fax 1 408 382 7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH United Kingdom Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd 7th Floor North Tower World Finance Centre Harbour City 1 Canton Road Tsimshatsui Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2265 6688 Fax 852 2730 6071 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co Ltd 10th Floor No 99 Fushing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 2715 2888 Fax 886 2 2713 2999 Renesas Technology Shanghai Co Ltd Unit2607 Ruijing Building No 205 Maoming Road S Shanghai 200020 China Tel 86 21 6472 1001 Fax 86 21 6415 2952 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte Ltd 1 Harbour Front Avenue 06 10 Keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Technology Korea Co Ltd Kukje Center Bldg 18th FI 191 2 ka Hangang ro Yongsan ku Seoul 140 702 Korea Tel 82 2 796 3115 Fax 82 2 796 2145 Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jalan Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 603 7955 9390 Fax 603 7955 9510 Colophon 3 0 H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Package Application Note
449. ng HEW 7 3 Call Walker Call Walker stack analysis tool displays the stack amount by reading the stack information file sni output by the optimizing linkage editor or the profile information file pro output by the simulator debugger For the stack amount of the assembly program that cannot be output in the stack information file the information can be added or modified by using the edit function In addition the stack amount of whole systems can be calculated The information on the edited stack amount can be saved and read as the call information file cal And some call information files can be merged 7 3 1 Making Stack Information File According to the following procedures you can make a stack information file or a profile information file Making stack information file sni You can make a stack information file by the following option of the Optimizing Linkage Editor Standard Toolchain Configuration Debus E Category m Il Loaded Projects Miscellaneous options 3 M 0 source file E G source file E Assembly source file zd Linkage symbol file ow memory use during linkage x User defined options bsolute Relocatable Library PARAD Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage listz CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start P ResetPRG PIhtPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 w Specification Method Dialo
450. ng Linkage editor Options seeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nennen ren rennen trennen 4 43 4 2 4 Standard Library Generator Options esses ener nenne nennen neen ne en nennen 4 53 4 25 CPU OptonSi doge schoo pep ae pate due itenim e pee 4 63 4 3 Building Existing Files with HEW sssri dunne pinn e nennen nennen nein teen en E EE r nennen retener entrent 4 65 Section 5 Using the Optimization PUNCHONS da Inest pee eti den i dideducadei iva eb paetbase s Mo QUEUE 5 1 Deli OptimiZatiOn POL SIZ6 2 55 oo sodote t OUR IR e Het elite det e E Ute a as ested 5 5 3Ll Default Compilations sss one eere on eee E ete cbe ee tie eee eie hehe 5 5 5 1 2 Without Optimization Specification sssesssseeseeeeeeneeennee nenne nennen nennen nennen tenerent 5 5 OLB Optimization FUnng suce e rh no p p ene o ltd een i ee rero e eee 5 5 5 1 4 Using the Inter Module Optimization Features sees 5 8 5 1 5 Selecting Expansion Functions eseeseeseeeeeeee eren nnen trennen rennen Ke aV EKOS TE tenter 5 10 5 1 6 Using CPU Specific Instructions ener iet rro tre ete rper i ere ete ete heil 5 13 5 2 Optimization for Speed reeni aeaoe e e IU o E pie RU RUE EU E T Eee RE tee tees 5 18 532 1 Specifying the SPEED Option uneep iet te PRETERITO EHRERU D repiten pts 5 18 5 2 2 Tuning the Optimization Options ssseseeseeeeeneneenee eene nennen trennen eren rene tnn tene tene 5 19 5 2
451. ng Reg 11 999 long 12 126 long 13 248 switch g il case 2 Reg_ll break case 3 12 5 break case 4 12 7 break case 9 break case 10 break printf Sd d sd n Reg_11 12 13 Since the value of Reg l1 is passed to printf via ERI allocating ER1 to Reg l1l improves efficiency Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Examples of codes enable register not specified func STM SUB MOV SUB MOV SUB MOV MOV MOV MOV BNE CMP BEO CMP BEQ CMP BEQ CMP BEQ CMP BNE MOV BRA BRA BRA Notes and Remarks MOV MOV tUzimuttub npzat ER4 ER6 SP 8 16 R7 H 000003E7 ER5 ER6 ER6 H 7E 8 R6L ERA ERA H F8 8 R4L _g_il 16 R0 RO R1 ROH ROH L26 8 2 8 R1 L27 8 3 8 R1 L28 8 4 8 R1 L29 8 9 8 R1 L30 8 R5L LWORD L45 16 R0 ER6 SP ERA 6 4 16 SP ER5 ER1 _printf 16 8 16 R7 SP ERA ER6 enable_register func STM L ERA ER6 SP SUB W 8 16 R7 MOV L H 000003E7 ER1 SUB L ER4 ER4 MOV B H 7E 8 R4L SUB L ER6 ER6 MOV B H F8 8 R6L MOV W _g_il 16 R0 MOV W RO R5 MOV B ROH ROH BNE L26 8 CMP B 12 8 R5L BEQ L27 8 CMP B 3 8 R5L BEQ L28 8 CMP B 4 8 R5L BEQ L29 8 CMP B 19 8 R5L BEQ L30 8 CMP B H 0A 8 R5L BNE L26 8 MOV B H E5 8 R6L BRA MOV B H ED 8 R6L BRA
452. ng a repeat control statement O O 6 3 2 19 Moving invariant expression from the inside to O O 6 3 3 the outside of a loop 20 Merging loop conditions O O 6 3 4 21 Pointers Using pointer variables O O 6 4 1 22 Data structures Ensuring data compatibility O 6 5 1 23 Techniques for data initialization O O 6 5 2 24 Unifying the initialization of array elements O O 6 5 3 25 Passing parameters as a structure address O O 6 5 4 26 Assigning structures to registers O O 6 5 5 27 Functions Improving the program location in which O 6 6 1 functions are defined 28 Macro calls O O 6 6 2 29 Declaring a prototype 6 6 3 30 Optimization of tail recursions O O 6 6 4 31 Improving the way parameters are passed O O 6 6 5 32 Branches Rewriting switch statements as tables O O 6 7 1 33 Coding a program in which case statements O O 6 7 2 jump to the same label 34 Branching to a function coded directly below a O O 6 7 3 given statement Legend O Higher efficiency A No change X Lower efficiency Not applicable Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 1 Type Declarations 6 1 1 Using Byte Data Types char unsigned char Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points For improvements in ROM efficiency and execution speed data that can be represented in 1 byte size should be declared as a char unsigned char type Description The H8S and H8 300 Series CPU
453. nk test abs form stype output test1 mot 0 FFFF test2 mot 10000 1FFFF test1 mot an area of 0x10000 0x 1 FFFF is output into test2 mot Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 47 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 9 Output File Format of Optimizing Linkage Editor Question Tell me about the load module file format available to a ROM writer Answer The load modules output by the optimizaton linkage editor are shown below e When creating a load module for a ROM writer output it in the hexdecimal or SType format In this case no debugging information is output Optimization linkage editors supporting the C C Compiler V4 0 or later output load modules in the ELF DWARF2 format at debugging The load modules created by earlier versions is output in either the SYSROF or ELF DWARF1 format and so the format should be changed with the ELF DWARF format converter to use in the latest version Optimizing Linkage editor ELF DWARF2 Hexdecimal SType Binary Load Load Load Load module module module module ELF DWARF For ROM writer format converter Debugger SYSROF ELF DWARF1 Load load odule module Optimizing Linkage Editor Output Load Module Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 48 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 10 How to Calculate Program Size ROM RAM Question How can I calculate the accurate size of ROM RAM Answer It can be calculated by the list file output from the Optimizing Linkage Editor
454. nker noprelink Does not run prelinker Run prelinker Runs prelinker Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Category Output H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 2 x C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt Category 7 Type of output file Stype via absolute x Data record header None None Debug information h output load module Show entries for Output file path x CONFIGDIRI PRO JECTNAME mot Modify Configuration Debug E S All Loaded Projects E GE Sample H C source file G source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file cid Type of output file Dialog Menu Absolute ELF DWARF Command Option form absolute Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIhtPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 B R 0 e Ses Function Outputs absolute load module in ELF DWARF format Absolute SYSROF form absolute helfcnv exe Outputs absolute load module in SYSROF format Relocatable form relocate Outputs relocatable load module System library form library s Outputs system library User library form libraryzu Outputs user library Hex via absolute form hexadecimal Outputs a HEX file S
455. not called by i any other functions Declare intr1 in the pragma regsave statement Similarly declare proc1 proc2 and proc3 in the pragma noregsave statement In this manner register save restore for three functions can be replaced by register save restore for one function The following table shows the execution results when a combination of effective options 1 byte enum type and 3 parameter passing registers specified is specified with the inter module optimization and the pragma noregsave statement in the previous Dhrystone Ver 2 1 program Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma noregsave specified 2944 1517 Compiler options Inter module optimization For further details refer to section 5 4 9 Controlling Output of Register Save Restore Codes at the Function Entry Exit Points 5 1 6 Using CPU Specific Instructions 1 Allocating to a short 8 bit absolute area The following shows the results when data of the char unsigned char type is accessed with 8 bit absolute addresses Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 8 bit absolute address specified 3014 1566 Note In this case when the 8 bit absolute address area is exceeded when a short 8 bit absolute address area assignment is specified as an option the simulator does not operate correctly due to an insufficient area and the number of execution cycles cannot be
456. not resolved Displayed when a function is called by the table as follows Example static int key 3 Faos stop playl 3 main lt 0x00000008 void func int x KY func COx0D000004 gt key 8 3 OO x 0x00000000 Ta Omitted symbol Since this tool displays all linking layers the display amounts will be very large if the size is large So only the first layer is displayed and other same parts are omitted by omitted symbols in order to reduce the display amounts Choose View gt Show All Symbols Show Simple Symbols to switch this display format Example Show All Symbols Show Simple Symbols BG main 0x00000006 G main 0x00000006 f funci C0x00000004 E J funci Ox00000004 gt 3 func3 0x00000002 i E func3 0x00000002 c 3 func2 0x00000004 C 3 func Ox00000004 gt K func3 0x00000002 Te func3 Ox00000002 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW e Symbol details view Symbol Attri Address Size Stack size Source G INT TN I Ox000004 Ox00000002 O0xO00000004 intpre obj 3 abort Ox000008 Ox00000002 Ox00000004 CallWalker2 KY sbrk Ox000008 Ox0000002c OxO00000008 sbrk obj K sub Ox000008 Ox00000002 Ox00000004 CallWalker2 3 nop Ox000008 Ox00000002 Ox00000004 CallWalker2 G3 PowerON Ox000004 Ox00000016 OxOO000004 resetpre obj G3 play Ox000008 Ox0000000
457. ns 5o inet ertet e nce d iae niet E Ot e edv ene 3 21 3 2 10 Block Transfer Instructions of H8SX sssseeeseeseeeeeeeee eene nennen een een eene eere nennen 3 25 3 3 Section Address Operators ger one op HER NER UR SURE PURUS SEEN EUR 3 27 34 C ELanguage Settings oot evo einsenden mere ode p 3 29 344 1 Setting an EC Class DIbragy e eter e t estet rr E ERE eR 3 29 3 4 20 Changing the Initialization Method 00 0 ee eecesecesecesecesecssecaaecaeecaeeeseseaeeseeseeesseeesecsesesecsaessaeeaes 3 30 3 4 3 Changing a Structure Boundary Alignment essessseseeeeereee enne nenne tenete nennen 3 31 3 5 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 4 0 eseseeesssssseseeeseeeeee trennen een rennen 3 33 3 5 1 Vector Table Automatic Generation Functions eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen rennen 3 33 3 5 2 Specifying the Number of Parameter Passing Registers eene 3 34 3 5 3 Even Byte access Specification Features eeeseeseseeeeeeeeeee enne nennen rennen ene 3 35 3 6 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 6 0 esses nnne eene enne trennen trees 3 36 3 6 1 Bit Field Order Sp cification esnean eene en eene eene tene trennen trennen rennen ene 3 36 3 7 New Expansion Functions of Compiler Ver 6 1 essere eene enne tne 3 37 IRL de gacysv4d ess eoo e etre eisai tes AG EN E RMIeed aep is ites tue el OS et RS og 3 37 SW ep expand VO E voRDiaeeeeeer ao 3 37
458. ns equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions Fur
459. nsion code STM L ER4 ER6 SP MOV L _ST1 ER6 MOV L _ST2 ER5 MOV W 256 16 R4 EEPMOV W MOV W R4 R4 BNE 128 8 lt Executes until rest of transfer size is zero RTS L ERA4 ER6 Remarks and notes This function eepmovi is valid only when the CPU is H8SX 3 eepromb eepromw To perform a block transfer from the address indicated by the second parameter to the address indicated by the first parameters in bytes indicated by the third parameter The eepromb intrinsic function transfers a memory block with the EEPMOV B instruction and eepromw with the EEPMOV P W instruction respectively These intrinsic functions set the first second and third parameters to the registers set ecrval to the address pointed by ecr and then transfer the memory block If transfer completes successfully O is returned If transfer fails the remaining size of the memory block left is returned The size of eepromb can take 0 to 255 and size of eepromw can take 0 to 65535 However if size is 0 no transfer occurs C C program include lt machine h gt define ecr_ptr volatile unsigned char 0x123456 char a 10 b 10 unsigned char x void f void x eepromw b a 10 ecr_ptr 1 Executes the EEPMOV P W instruction Compiled assembly language expansion code STM ER4 ER6 SP MOV _b ER6 MOV _a ERS MOV H 000A 16 R4 MOV B 1 4 H 00123456 32 EEPMOV P W MOV B R4L _x 32 RTS
460. nt code can be used There is the following relationship between the and the C comment code The parts that can be recognized as comments are underlined void func abc 0 comment lt Code after is recognized as a comment def 1 comment ghi 2 comment Code enclosed in is recognized as a comment Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 21 How to Specify Options for Each File Question How can I modify options for each file in a project on the HEW system Answer The HEW system supports functions to modify and specify options individually on each file with the compiler or the Assembler When specifying with a compiler option expand the directory of the C C source file on the left side of the option screen Then click on a specific file to set the desired options If an options is specified in the folder unit it is effective on all the files in the specified directory In the following example the speed efficiency option is specified only to the file test c in a project lt HEW1 2 gt 8 300 C Compiler Options Debug Ch C source file Source Object List Optimize Other aa sors tile V Optimization dbsct c sbrkc Speed or size Size oriented optimization x resetpre c Speed sub opti size oriented optimization Speed oriented optimization IeETETer VIESTI Default Optior J C sourc
461. ntPRG is specified the functions are assigned to the section named PIntPRG Care must be taken before changing the section name by the inter module optimizer Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 39 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program HEW2 0 or later BRK KK KKK IK ko kk e kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck ke kk Ck Ck kk ke kk kc kk I I koe ke eek FILE intprg c DATE Tue Aug 20 2002 DESCRIPTION Interrupt Program CPU TYPE H8S 2612 This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 BRK KK KKK kk Ck Ck kk Ck I kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk KC kk e e kk Ck Ck kk kc kk kc ko K k ko ke k k kk I eek include lt machine h gt pragma section IntPRG vector 2 Reserved The description of _ interrupt vect 5 generates a vector table vector 3 Reserved automatically vector 4 Reserved vector 5 Trace terrupt vect 5 void INT Trace void sleep vector 6 Reserved vector 7 NMI terrupt vect 7 void INT_NMI void vector 8 User breakpoint trap terrupt vect 8 void INT_TRAPO void vector 9 User breakpoint trap terrupt vect 9 void INT_TRAP1 void vector 10 User breakpoint trap terrupt vect 10 void INT_TRAP2 void vector 11 User breakpoint trap terrupt vect 11 void INT_TRAP3 void vector 12 Reserved vector 13 Reserved vector 14 Reserved vector Reserved For details on interrupt functions refer
462. nteger Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Object Tab Source Object List Tuning Other CPU Debug information With debug information Generate assembly source file after preprocess Optimize Default of branch displacement size e bit Generate file for inter module optimization Output file directory o test3 test3 Debug Modify Debug information EI Dialog Menu Command Option Function Default Validates DEBUG directive only With debug information debug Enables debugging information output Without debug information nodebug Disables debugging information output Generate assembly source file after preprocess Check Box Command Option Function expand Outputs preprocessor expansion results Outputs no preprocessor expansion results Optimize Check Box Command Option Function optimize Specifies optimization nooptimize Default of branch displacement size Specifies no optimization Dialog Menu Command Option Function bit br relativez8 Specifies the displacement size as 8 bits if the forward reference displacement is selected for the branch instruction 16bit br_relative 16 Specifies the displacement size as 16 bits if the forward reference displacement is selected for the branch instruction Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW G
463. nvert HIM project into HEW project You can use H8C V 3 0A with new HEW after conversion Debug Absolute file abs cannot be used You can only use S type format file Moreover debugging program at C source level is not available Only at assembler level is available H8C V 3 0A lt Build gt The tool chain can be registered in the latest HEW Therefore building by new HEW is available But you cannot create new project with the latest HEW In case of creating new project you must use HEW V 1 bundled with the older compiler package Once you create project by HEW V 1 you can open it with in new HEW lt Debug gt Absolute file abs cannot be used You can only use S type format file Moreover debugging program at C source level is not available Only at assembler level is available H8C V 4 lt Build gt The tool chain can be registered in the latest HEW Therefore building by new HEW is available But you cannot create new project with the latest HEW In case of creating new project you must use HEW V 1 bundled with the older compiler package Once you create project by HEW V 1 you can open it in new HEW lt Debug gt Absolute file abs can be used By registering absolute file debugging at C source level is available H8C V 5 or later lt Build amp Debug gt There is no limitation You can use all functions of new HEW Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 68 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix A
464. obat Reader should be installed on a computer running Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Acrobat Reader copyright 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems and are registered in specific jurisdictions The following procedure is used to execute installation Any running applications should be terminated before proceeding with installation i Insert the CD ROM for the Integrated Development Environment into the CD ROM drive Here it is assumed that the CD ROM drive is drive D ii From the Windows Start menu click on Run Gii Specify in the Run dialog box either Ar40jpn exe Japanese in the PDF_READ Japanese directory on the CD ROM or Ar40eng exe English in the PDF_read English directory example D PDF_Read Japanese Ar40jpn exe and then click OK iv Follow the onscreen installation instructions d Referencing the Online Manual and other documents e If the Online Manual is installed Click either the Online Manual H8S H8 300 English xx xx English PDF file or the Online Manual H8S H8 300 Japanese xx xx Japanese PDF file on the High performance Embedded Workshop menu in the Programs on the Windows Start menu where xx xx denotes the year and the month Example Online Manual H8S H8 300 Japanese 01 10 e Ifthe Online Manual is not installed i Insert the CD ROM for the Integrat
465. object program created by Ver 6 0 the following conditions need to be satisfied 1 C source program The following options that affect function interface must be specified equally regparam longreg nolongreg e double float e structreg nostructreg e stack e byteenum e pack unpack Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features 2 Assembly program An assembly program must conform to the rules concerning function call which are described in section 9 3 2 Function Calling Interface in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Notes 1 Forinformation not mentioned in the manual the compatibility with an upgraded version is not guaranteed An object program created by Ver 4 0 cannot be linked with an object program created by Ver 6 0 if one or both of the object programs contain assembly coding which depends on the compiler output coding such as the order to save and restore register contents 2 For details on linkage with an OS middleware and so on contact your sales agency B 4 Added and Improved Features in Upgrade from Ver 6 0 to Ver 6 1 B 4 1 Added and Improved Compiler Functions a Support for AES AES is supported b Enhanced Conformance with the ANSI Standard strict ansi brings the associative rule of floating point operations into conformance with the ANSI standard c Compatibility of Output Object Code with
466. ode 16 Bit Absolute Address Area 0 to H 7FFF H FFFF0000 to H FFFFFFFF 0 to H7FFF H FFF0000 to H FFFFFFF CPU Type Address Space Size H8SX maximum mode 32 H8SX advanced mode 28 H8SX middle mode 24 0 to H 7FFF H FF0000 to HFFFFFF H8S 2600 advanced mode 20 H8S 2000 advanced mode H8 300H advanced mode Example 0 to H7FFF H F0000 to H FFFFF To access the variables a b and c allocated in the 16 bit absolute address area C C program Specification using the pragma statement pragma abs16 a b c const int a 1 int b 1 int c void func void c b a Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified main main MOV W 1 RO0 MOV W MOV W RO _b 32 MOV W MOV W RO _c 32 MOV W RTS RTS SECTION C DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION DATA W H 0001 DATA W SECTION D DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION DATA W H 0001 DATA W SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION RES W 1 RES W 1 R0 RO _b 16 RO _e216 SABS16C DATA ALIGN 2 H 0001 SABS16D DATA ALIGN 2 H 0001 SABS16B DATA ALIGN 2 1 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 61 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Object Size Comparison byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 22 18 22 18 18 Specified 18 18 18 18 18 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 18 18 14 Specified 14 14 14 Execution Speed Comparison cycle
467. ol file Program section P zl Store string data in P Const section 7 Mul Div operation specification Group by alignment Based on ANSIG6bit T6bitz16bit m Auto x Output file path S CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME lib Modify Options Standard Library i cpuz HBSXA 24 output CONFIGDIR P ROJECTNAME lib reent head runtime new stdio stdlib Standard Library Dialog Box 11 3 3 There Is No Standard Library File H8C V4 or Later Question There are several kinds of standard libraries in H8C V3 But there is no standard library file in H8C V4 or later Answer Since H8C V4 the specification of the standard library was changed and the options became to be able to be specified This enabled the user to have the standard libraries tuned by the options Please generate a standard library file by using a library generator since a standard library file has not been attached to a product in H8C V4 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 56 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 3 4 Warning Message On Building Standard Library Question L1200 W Backed up file a lib into b Ibk may be output when generate a standard library file Answer This is just warning message which HEW will make backup files when it generates new library files If you select Use an existing library file at Standard Library mode in HEW OPTIONS
468. on memory contents Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Compiled assembly language expansion code 16773120 32 ERO0 RO ta 32 ERIT RO ER1 78 R1L R1H R1H R H H R Remarks and notes The function tas is valid only when the CPU operating mode is 2600a 2600n 2000a or 2000n 3 MAC instruction The H8S 2600 microcomputer contains the multiply accumulate register MAC which is a 64 bit register that stores the results of multiply accumulate operations The following diagram shows how this register is organized 63 41 32 Code expansion MAC 31 0 The MAC instruction performs a multiplication between memory data items and adds the result to the MAC register Using this register 16 x 16 bits 32 bits 32 bits multiply accumulate operations can be performed The following interpretations are made in the example given below Function mac Assigns the value 100 to the MAC register as an initial value Multiplies the 2 byte data items indicated by ptr and ptr2 on a signed basis adds the resulting 4 byte data to the MAC register and increments both ptr1 and ptr2 by 2 Repeats this operation four times and at the end returns the contents of the MAC register Function macl Performs a multiply accumulate operation with 4 because the function uses the data at ptr2 for ring buffering Because the function uses ptr2 amp mask as an address ptr2 must
469. on is valid for object files generated by C C Compiler or Assembler 9 4 5 Optimizes Register Save Restore Codes Size O Speed O Description The relationships between function calls are analyzed and redundant register save restore codes are deleted with this specification In addition depending on the register state before and after the function call the register numbers to be used are modified e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Reallocate registers Command line optimize register Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples of Optimizes register save restore codes Function main calls function func01 and func01 calls func02 filel c void main extern void funcOl long long long long long g 11 g 12 g 13 9 14 void main g 11 i g_12 i g_13 D g 1424 funcOl amp g l1 amp g 12 amp g 13 amp g 14 file2 c extern long g ll g 12 g 13 g 14 extern void func02 long long long long void funcOl long 1 pl long 1 p2 long 1 p3 long 1 p4 g 1222 g 12 1 pl func02 amp g l1 amp g 12 amp g 13 amp g 14 file3 c extern long g ll g 12 g 13 g 14 void funcO2 long l pl long l pZ long 1l p3 long 1 p4 gulit t _pl g Ilj Examples of Codes by Optimizes register save restore codes Examples of codes befo
470. ons Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other Input files Relocatable files and object files 2 43 Library files B d hewdemo toolchains hitachi h8 301 lib Defines Define 0 ae Use entry point Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Input files Specifies a load module and library to be linked Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Relocatable files and object files input Specifies input file Library files library Specifies library file Note This option is specified when inputting obj other than a project file or when changing the project file input order Defines Dialog Menu Subcommand Function define Forcibly defines external reference symbol Use entry point Dialog Menu Subcommand Function entry Specifies execution start address Use external subcommand file Dialog Menu Subcommand Function z subcommand Specifies the existing subcommand file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 2 Output Tab 300 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other Format of load module Type of load module Absolute Debug information i output load module ROM to RAM mapped sections D R Generate map file Load module directory dXhewde mo test10 test 0 Debug Modify Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Format of load module Specifies load module o
471. ons read data in byte units and after performing a bit operation write them back in byte units On the other hand when a write only register is read the CPU fetches undefined data regardless of the register contents As a result a bit operation instruction in a write only register may change values of bits other than the operated bit Countermeasure Avoid performing a bit operation directly in a write only register Perform any operation after substituting a value to a 1 byte data The following shows an example Include file 300x h C language program struct S p4ddr include 300x h unsigned char unsigned char DDR unsigned char Specify data to back up unsigned char write only register unsigned char void sub void unsigned char unsigned char unsigned char DDR amp P0 P4DDR Schar DDR PRPRPRPRPRPRPR unsigned char he union SS unsigned char Schar struct S_p4ddr Sstr define P4DDR union SS JOxffffcb define PO 0x1 Remarks There are various kinds of write only registers such as I O port registers or peripheral device registers When developing a program confirm that the appropriate write only registers are operated by referring to the hardware manuals supplied with each product Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 18 Notes on Linking with Assembly Language Programs Questions 1 When an assembly language program subroutine is call
472. operations and therefore the compiler expands the same assembly language code Assembly expansion code object size and execution speed in this section code the results of the compilation by the compiler Ver 3 0 other than H8SX Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 2 10 Unifying Consecutive ADD Instructions Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Addition should be coded consecutively to ensure unification and to reduce the code size Description When encountering consecutive addition codes the compiler performs a unification optimization To take advantage of this optimization whenever possible addition operations should be coded consecutively Example Sum the value of the variable a C language program before optimization int a b void main at 10 b 10 at 20 Expanded into assembly before optimization language code _main MOV ADD MOV MOV ADD MOV RTS Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization int a b void main b 10 at 10 at 20 Expanded into assembly language code after optimization main MOV MOV MOV ADD ADD MOV RTS H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 28 22 32 26 26 After 28 22 30 24 24 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 18 18 14 After 18 18 14 Rev 3 00 2005 09
473. or Creating and Debugging a Program 1 Setting a data section address HEW project file name dbsct c sample program name scttbl c Sets the addresses of the initialized and uninitialized data sections that are used by a routine that initializes them BR I KR kCkCk Ck kk Ck kk kk kk Ck Ck kk Ck kk Ck Ck kk Ck Ck kk ke kk Ck kk Ck ko kk ke kk Ck ke kk ck II ke kk kk kk ke ke kk ke ke ke fe ay FILE dbsct c A DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 DESCRIPTION Setting of B R Section ey CPU TYPE H8S 2621 y ay This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 5 BKK KK hock CkCkCk A KKK ok kk CkCkCk ok kk Ck RRR koc RRR IRR oko ko ke kk ke koe ke ke ke ee f tion DSEC 7 EET die oes Sets the section address for an initialized data area static const struct char rom_s Start address of the initialized data section in ROM char rom_e End address of the initialized data section in ROM 7 char ram_s Start address of the initialized data section in RAM DTBL __sectop D secend D __sectop R __sectop SABS8D secend SABS8D __sectop SABS8R sectop SABS16D secend SABS16D sectop SABS16R THRONE eckson MINUS Sets the section address for an uninitialized data area static const struct char b s Start address of non initialized data section char b e End address of non initialized data section JBTBL __sectop B
474. or output Messages are output the same as HEW compile errors A tag jump can be performed by double clicking the message or right clicking the message and choosing Jump The source code can be easily corrected by the same operation as the compile error Note that an explanation is displayed by right clicking the message and choosing Help b CSV file A file format that can be read by spreadsheet software allowing reviews to be performed more easily c SQMmerger SOMmerger is a tool for merging a C source file with CSV formatted report file generated by SQMlint into a file that contains C source lines and their associated report messages To execute SQMmerger use the following command entry format sqmmerger src lt c source file name gt r lt report file name gt o lt output file name gt Displays both the source file and test results as shown in figure 10 7 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 10 MISRA C void func void void func void LABEL MISRA 55 Complain label LABEL should not be used goto LABEL MISRA 56 Complain the goto statement shall not be used Figure 10 7 SQMmerger 10 2 4 Development Procedures Figure 10 8 shows how to perform development using SQMlint Code completion Can be corrected ickl ee Compile and Correct perform MISRA C test Investigation necessary List of violation areas Unacceptable rule Correct violation
475. order to create a ROM program convert the object load module in the SYSROF type in this case into the S type format as follows cnvsAtest abs RET HEW1 2 Command Line As the Optimizing Linkage Editor has Converting Function for HEW2 0 or later the S type format can be converted without using the converter Describe form stype in the subcommand file to output the S type format Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 33 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 2 Introduction of Sample Program 2 2 1 Initialization Required for ROM Programs The following description revolves around programs created by the project generator as an example The following diagram shows the file organizations of programs created by the project generator and sample programs that are supplied with this product Sample programs are supplied with HEW1 2 and not with HEW2 0 or later The sample programs vecttbl c and vect h are not generated under HEW2 0 or later any more due to a description of expansion functions of intprg c Supplied sample Project Generator programs HEWI1 2 only created programs Description of processing dbsct c Sets data section addresses secttbl c Allocates a heap area iodefine h VO port definition file CPU name h intprg c Creates interrupt functions resetprg c stacksct h sample c cppmain cpp Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure f
476. orkshop menu in the Programs on the Windows Start menu where xx xx denotes the year and the month Example Online Manual H8S H8 300 Japanese 01 10 e If the Online Manual is not installed i Insert the CD ROM for the compiler package into the CD ROM drive Here it is assumed that the CD ROM drive is drive D ii From the Windows Start menu click on Run iii Specify in the Run dialog box either jH8_xxxx PDF Japanese or eH8_xxxx PDF English where xxxx denotes the year and the month in the Manuals directory on the CD ROM example D Manuals jH8_0110 PDF and then click OK 1 3 2 UNIX Version The procedure for installing the H8S and H8 300 C C compiler on a UNIX system is described below Caution Do not use spaces in the name for the installation directory 1 Recording medium The compiler is distributed on a single CD ROM 2 Installation Method Please use the following procedure to install the compiler Wherever RET appears in the instructions the Enter Return key is to be pressed a Installing the compiler package The procedure for compiler package installation is as follows i Creating a path for the compiler package Create a path for storage of the compiler files using any arbitrary name Hereinafter installation directory is assumed to be usr cross soft mkdirA usr cross soft RET Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview
477. ormally unreference of a local variable does not occur when the value is substituted in the function Therefore this problem is caused by a coding error as shown in the above example Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 15 Regarding Optimization Options Question What will be changed by optimization option speed size Answer Generated codes are changed by specified optimization option Do not change Algorithm of User program by optimization By optimization optimize codes like inline expansion of a function and loop unrolling so the number of times of run time cycles is changed Thereby the timing of operation is also changed First of all please verify enough about timing of operation Moreover optimization of variable access is also considered as concern matters other than the above The case that an instruction of data can be realized between registers without memories and it is corresponded to optimization of variable access it may be said Timing verification If you want Do not want to optimize variable please confirm including a necessity of an addition of volatile declaration 11 1 16 Failure to Pass Function Parameters Question Parameters of functions are not passed correctly Why is this Answer When the parameter type is not declared as a prototype specify the same type to the calling function and the called function in order to pass parameters correctly Specif
478. ormation C C source level debugger can t be used For details of HEX file please refer to section 19 1 2 HEX File Format in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 6 S type Files Output S type Files As this files have no debug information C C source level debugger can t be used For details of S type file please refer to section 19 1 1 S Type File Format in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 7 Binary Files Output Binary Files As binary files have no debug information C C source level debugger can t be used Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 2 List Options 9 2 1 Symbol Information List Description The optimizing linkage editor can output symbol address size and optimization information in addition to linkage map information by specifying additional sub options 1 symbol address ADDR 2 size SIZE 3 optimization OPT ch changed cr created mv moved e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Contents Show symbol Command line list 2 file name gt show symbol lt map file gt Options Error information Mapping List Symbol List SECTION FILE START END SIZE SYMBOL 1 ADDR 2 SIZE INFO COUNTS 3 OPT SECTION P FILE C Hew exe Hew3_SHV9 bin
479. ors In this case this can be ignored Improvements with HEW2 0 or later no longer cause the message to be displayed normally But when in the following case the warning message L1323 W Section attribute mismatch FXX may be displayed like by the HEW1 2 In this case this can be also ignored 1 the program section P is changed to other name by the section option of the C C Compiler 2 the section of 1 is specified as the source section 11 24 Fixing Symbol Addresses in Certain Memory Areas for Linking Question After fixing a program in internal ROM I want to develop the program for external memory and in future want to update only the external memory program Answer When fixing a program in internal ROM the link command fsymbol can be used to output a definition file of externally defined labels for the internal ROM A definition file is created by the assembler EQU statement and so when creating an external memory program this file can be assembled and input to reference a fixed address in ROM Example of Use Illustrates an example in which the feature A of a product A is modified to the feature B to develop the product B Using this by resolving the addresses of symbols in shared ROM the common ROM can be used Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 43 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A NR Common j Common Common Je quiessy JOoype eBexur J USAU0D ROM Product A Product B Example
480. orted control register Supported H8SX IPRF A e Timer simulation method Choose Options Simulator gt System to open the following Simulator System dialog box check the Enable Timer check box and specify a ratio between the external clock and the peripheral module clock Simulator System Memory Data Area Bit size Multiple Divisor D 24 Program Area Bit Size Simulated IYO Address v Enable D 24 H oono0000 7 gl Address Map Mode Execution Mode fi 6M Stop ba Detail Response Round Mode 4 Round To Nearest x Peripheral Clock Rate Fetch Size pal Peripheral Clock Rate v Enable Timer Enable Timer f z check box oes wv In addition you can use timer control registers and write program code to enable them as shown below If you create a clock that drives timers via a peripheral module specify the frequency division ratio using an appropriate timer control register TPUO start Enable timer ITUO TPU TSTR BIT CSTO 1 TPUO Overflow interrupt enable TPUO TSR BIT TCFY 1 TPUO TIER BIT TCIEV 1 while Note Before setting the value to the timer registers confirm that the access to the timer registers can be done in the memory tab on the Simulator System dialog box If the access isn t permitted you can nither set the value to the registers nor use the timer Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW
481. overage information that covers the entire program You may want to increase the coverage percentage while repeating coverage collection steps each of which is performed under a different test condition For this purpose specify a file that has been saved in the Save Data and select Open a recent coverage file or Browse to another coverage file in the Open Coverage dialog box Then click on the OK button Open Coverage Options C New Window Start SS End i 7 5 File E C Open a recent coverage file CX Hew exeX Hew3_ene aaa aaa Debue aaa v Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 27 REJ05B0464 0300 tENESAS Section 7 Using HEW The coverage view opens Run the program again under a new condition As shown below the coverage view and the editor display new information reflecting the current run such as the number of runs and the new CO coverage value Pass Address Assembler Source Mov B ROL H O11LO6DF4 32 0000081E H OOFFE46E ERS 00000824 H 00FFE000 ER4 00000824 GERS RO 0000082C ERO 0000082kE 8 c 32 R1 00000834 R1 ERO 0000084E RO EO iValue func a b 00000850 GER4 RO 00000852 8 func 8 00000854 R0 8 iValue 32 0000085E 7 2 4 File I O Description HEW used to rely on the I O simulation feature in order to simulate file I O operations instead of actually performing file I O However HEW now allows actual files to be input or output if the following files are
482. pecification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Details Global variables Treat global variables as volatile qualified Command line volatile Note that some external variables should not be optimized Example 1 Example 2 volatile int a First substitute is deleted In Example 1 two substitutes are made consecutively to the variable a which results in the deletion of the first substitute statement due to optimization However if an interrupt occurs between the two substitute statements and the value of a is referenced the result will be in error When the volatile is specified optimization is disabled and the code for the first substitute statement is generated which avoids this problem However this approach disables the optimization of all external variables which significantly reduces object performance To disable the optimization only for the appropriate external variables specify a volatile declaration in the source program on the variables and I O registers that are used in interrupt functions as shown in Example 2 In this way compile the program by turning off this option For further details refer to section 5 4 5 Optimization of External Variables 5 Extended interpretation of multiplication division specifications An expanded interpretation of multiplication division code expansion from the ANSI standard results in the following performance characteristics Optimization
483. pecifications the PXX section is copied to the XX section at startup Next specify the start address of the destination section XX with the optimizing linkage editor and the inter module optimization tool lt HEW1 2 gt Input Output Optimize Section Verity Other Relocatable section start address Address Section HOO000400 PResetPRG IMPRG Modify New Overlay Remove Down i Generate external symbol file Add Remove Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 40 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A HEW2 0 or later itandard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb lt gt bebe zl Category Section x EE ed Projects Show entries for Section z C source file Section Add C source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage list CONFIGDIRO PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PlhtPRG 0400 P PXXC CEDSEC CHBSEC D 0 w N After that allocate the same area as the area occupied by the source section PXX in the RAM with the ROM implementation support option When ROM is specified the size of this area is equal to that of the PXX section This operation of the optimizing linkage editor
484. pecified 30 30 24 Specified 30 30 24 Execution Speed Comparison cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 63 57 180 168 410 Specified 54 50 266 248 366 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 51 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 18 18 17 Specified 18 18 17 5 4 8 Allocating Registers to Global Variables Size A Speed A Description When frequently used external variables are allocated to registers the access codes are shortened Note that external variables that are not optimized such as I O variables cannot be allocated to registers Registers where external variables can be allocated to are shown below ER4 ER5 For the CPU of 300 R4 and R5 can be used Format pragma global register variable name gt lt register name variable name gt lt register name gt Example To assign 1 byte and 2 byte data to registers C C program pragma global register a R4 b R5L int a char b void func void main a 10 b 20 func void func att b 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Assembly expansion code Not specified main MOV MOV MOV MOV funge MOV MOV INC MOV MOV MOV ADD MOV RTS SECTION wwes WWW SS H 10 RO0 Specified RO _a 3
485. proved Specification methods Dialog menu C C Tab Category Object Group by alignment Command line ALign 4 Default is ALign NOALign Example The explanations of data allocation order are as follows They differ according to the option specification C C program char a short b char c long d pragma section short e long f pragma section void func void 127 Ox7fff 30 Ox7fffffff 0x1000 Oxlffff Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 68 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 1 noalign specified Data is located in the order of declaration to section B and section B v As follows 2 byte aligned data is always located at an even address thus generating an empty area being unused after odd size data Section B Section B v 2 align specified In order to minimize the empty area 2 byte aligned data short long float is allocated before 1 byte aligned data to section B and section B v Thus no empty area is generated as follows Section B Section B v 3 align 4 specified Data are categorized into the following 3 groups a data whose size is a multiple of 4 b data whose size is odd c the others data whose size is even but is not a multiple of 4 And the section name is changed as follows respectively a 4 is appended after the original section name b 1 is appended after the original section name c the section na
486. provided by the third party Hierarchy project support Can define multiple subprojects in a project and hierarchically manage them Network support Provides development environment under WindowsNT CSS UNIX Version The H8S and H8 300 C C compiler of UNIX version supports the integrated development manager IDM to allow the user to develop the programs from editing to debugging The IDM provides the following features The editor can be started up when an error occurs during compilation or assembly A cursor appears on the source code line where an error occurs The program development can be automatically executed from assemble compilation object module linkage to loading to the debugger Debugging at source level is supported using the graphical user interface Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 1 2 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 1 Overview 1 3 Installation Method 1 3 1 PC Version This section describes the operating environment for the Windows 98 Windows amp Me WindoswsNT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP compatible H8S and H8 300 C C Compiler package and the procedures for installing it on a Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP system 1 Operating environment Host computer IBM PC compatible machine CPU CPU capable of running Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP OS Windows 98 Windows amp Me WindowsNT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP
487. prox size of generator 17810KB 4 A project type template named Custom Project Generator has thus been created To use this template on another machine choose Tools gt Administration to open the following dialog box When you check the following Show all components check box you will see Project Generators Custom Click on the created project type and click on the Export button Tools Administration Registered components Component A F3 ERE iz Toolchains EE System Tools Utility Phases Register Debugger Components TNT Extension Components Communication Tools Properties LJ System Extension Components C Project Generators o bpt Search disk Tool information Uninstaller M Show all components urrent HEW tools database location O Hew exe Hew3_ene Modify Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 7 REJ05B0464 0300 2 NE SAS Section 7 Using HEW 5 The following dialog box opens Select a directory in which the Custom Project Generator template will be stored The directory must be empty The project type storage process is now complete Export Custom Project Generator Directory to export to must be empty or not exist Export c Hew2 project C ance Installing Custom Project Generator Use the following procedure to install the Custom Project Generator template created by the above project type storag
488. py the contents of section X to section Y C C C C program char X BGN char X END char Y BGN void func void char p q X BGN char sectop X X END char secend X Y BGN char sectop Y for p X_BGN q Y_BGN p lt X_END p q q p Compiled assembly language expansion code ER4 ER5 SP _X_END 32 ER4 STARTOF X 32 ER0 ERO _X_BGN 32 STARTOF X SIZEOF X 32 ERO0 ERO ER4 STARTOF Y 32 ERO0 ERO _Y_BGN 32 Q X BGN 32 ER1 ERO ER5 Lniz 8 ER1 ROL ROL ER5 1 ER1 1 ER5 ER4 ERO ERO ER1 L11 8 SP ERA4 ER5 Remarks If the section specified by the section address operator does not exist the operator creates a section of size 0 The attribute of this section is data with a boundary alignmet of 2 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 4 C Language Settings The C language requires the following settings in addition to the settings for the C language 3 4 1 Setting an EC Class Library In HEW1 2 the C language requires the linking of an EC class library in addition to the standard library As in the case of the standard library an EC class library must be selected as indicated below depending on the type of the CPU used the purpose of the optimization and the number of parameter passing registers used EC class libraries that do not match with the specification
489. r 7 1 3 Makefile Input Description HEW allows to input the makefiles that were generated by HEW or used by UNIX environment From the makefile you can automatically obtain the file structure of the project However you cannot obtain option settings or similar specifications This facilitates the migration from the command line to HEW e Makefile input method 1 When creating a new workspace select Import Makefile from the project type options in the New Project Workspace dialog box New Project Workspace Projects Application Workspace Name Assembly Application pde jl Demonstration Project Name D Empty Applicatio Ibcdef t Import Makefile COUTE Directory CXHew exexHew3 engXabcdefg Browse GPU family H8S H8 300 v Tool chain Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard z Properties Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 2 Specify the makefile path in the Makefile path field in the New Project Import Makefile dialog box and click on the Start button New Project Import Makefile Makefile path C Hew exe Rene Hew2 aacdi make aasdt mak Start n a 43 C source file Add C source file Assembly source file x Remave T Show file path lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 3 The Source files pane displays the makefile source file structure In this structure chart any file marked is a
490. r 1 Calls the section initialization routine _INITSCT INIT IOLIB Remove t comment when SIM I O srand 1 Remove commen hen rand _slptr NULL Remove commen hen strtok HardwareSetup Remove commen hen Hardware Setup main Calls the main function _CLOSEALL Remove the comment when you use SIM I O sleep Enters the low power consumption mode void Manual_Reset void void Manual_Reset void 8 Setting the stack size HEW project file name stacksct h BR KKK e KK I KK IK e e Fe e KK I e e e Fe e e RR e e KK I IK I k k kk kkk I 7 E FILE stacksct h EA DATE Thu Nov 04 1999 4 DESCRIPTION Setting of Stack area Wf CPU TYPE H88 2621 xy ss ey This file is generated by Renesas Project Generator Ver 3 0 AE Ey BRK IKK KKK IK KK e e e e e Fe e e e e e e e e e e e e e ke e e e e e e e IR e k k I k k k k k kk k kk k kk k pragma stacksize 0x200 Specify the desired stack size This specification creates a 512 byte stack section which has a fixed name of S The size of a stack section is equal to the stack size at the deepest nesting level in the function call relations Calculate the stack size by referencing the Total Frame Size that is output in the object list allocation information To change the stack size specification modify the value in this program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedur
491. ram Dhrystone Ver 2 1 is used as a sample program The data of size and speed given below reflect the results of a compilation in the H8S 2600 advanced mode 5 1 1 Default Compilation First compile a program without any optimization option The following table shows the results of the object size and the execution cycle count Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 Even if no optimization option is specified the compiler performs basic optimization tasks because several optimization options are enabled by default 5 1 2 Without Optimization Specification When the optimization is not specified the results are as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 No optimization 3582 1713 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize turn off the Optimization checkbox Command line optimize 0 5 1 3 Optimization Tuning 1 Specifying the 1 byte enum type This option is valid only for a program containing enum type data however we recommend to always specify it The object size and execution cycle count are as follows Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 1 byte enum type specification 3050 1580 Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other select Treat enum as char if it is in the range of char for Miscellaneous options Command line byteenum
492. rding to following suggestions a Large sized areas should be allocated immediately after the program starts to run b The size of the data area to be freed and reused should be constant 113 6 How to Reduce ROM Size for I O Libraries Question How can I reduce the ROM size of the I O library for standard include files Answer When the no float h include file is specified simple I O functions including no floating point conversion process can be used This specification is available for the following functions fprintf fscanf printf scanf sprintf sscanf vfprintf vprintf vsprintf Add the option no float h to specify a file as an include file before the standard I O file stdio h include no float h Macro declaration include lt stdio h gt void main void Example printf HELLOEn Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 58 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A For a file using an existent standard I O library use the preinclude option When simple I O functions are used the ROM size is reduced when the I O operations of files are performed However if this option is specified together with a floating point 6f e WE g E specification the runtime execution is not guaranteed 113 7 How to Edit Library File Question How can I edit the library file to reuse existing library files Answer It can be edited by specifying options in the Optimizing Linkage Editor The usage of the options
493. re and after this optimization are as follows Due to the addition of register save restore codes in the parent function register save restore codes in the child function are reduced In the following example which is in H8S 2600 advanced mode ROM Size 202 bytes to 198 bytes Execution Speed 172 cycles to 166 cycles Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Before Optimization save restore ER2 ER3 2 registers ER2 ER3 SP ERO ERO 1 ROL ERO _g_11 32 ER1 ER1 _g_13 ER2 ER2 g 12 ER1 _g_11 ERO Q func01 24 4 SP 4 SP SP ER2 ER3 save restore ER2 ER3 2 registers func01 ER2 ER3 Q SP g 12 ER1 _g_11 ERO Q func02 24 4 SP 4 SP SP ER2 ER3 save restore ER2 1 register func02 e Remarks ER2 _g_11 ER1 ER1 ER2 1 ER2 ER2 ER1 ER2 ERO ER2 After Optimization save restore ER2 ER4 3 registers ER2 ER3 SP ER4 ERO ERO 1 8 ROL ERO _g_11 32 ER1 ER1 1h 00 00004 32 ER1 1h 00 00000 32 ERO func01 8 4 SP 4 SP ER4 SP ER2 ER3 save restore ER2 1 register func01 PUSH L ER2 MOV L 4 g 12 ERl MOV L 4 g l1 ERO0 BSR func02 8 ADDS 4 SP ADDS 4 SP POP L ER2 RTS NO save restore 0 register func02 _g_11 ER1 ER1 ER2 1 ER2 ER2 GER1 ER2 GERO This option is valid only for object files generated by C C Compil
494. re bete ee ee Eb Eee tue aene 2 1 2 1 1 Creating New Workspace 1 HEWT2 eese esit eter Rep RR neg 2 1 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace 2 HEW2 0 isssseseeseeeeeeseeeneneen nennen nennen renim rennen treten nenne 2 14 2 1 3 lt Starting Tools from a Command Line eei ec poene tti ee Up M RH UR HEU 2 31 2 2 Introduction of Sample Program sees nne neen eene enne enne enne tenete ete ne tree tren trennen net 2 34 2 2 1 Initialization Required for ROM Programs sssssseseeeeeenereneneen eene enetrne tenete trennen 2 34 2 3 Debugging Using the HDI inet Det ORE dessus EEG RS EEK ERES O IE e dhssvasostdven s 2 45 2 3 1 Running with HEW 1 teo at ei eset d iba ide rete ipee 2 45 2 3 2 Selecting a Target ote te nre RR De re dre RE Ete ESE 2 46 2 3 3 Allocating Memory Resources eicere rre Een ee Bertin ives p Ease eie ap e eere ESEESE 2 47 2 3 4 Downloading a Load Module eremo nt ette ree Rer Henn tres 2 48 2 3 5 Operating HDI with HEW 2 ertet e ete ee eee teer ee trie ipei tr Pene 2 49 2 3 6 Displaying SouUrce PIOgtanyi ooi elegerit re tapa d getestet E aereis 2 51 2 3 4 Setting a Breakpoint sc si ETE SNR RN SIR n e 2 52 23 8 Displaying the Register Status eiie ettet ire eee teet pce ic Pee dr deed 2 53 2 3 9 Referencing to an External Variable sees eene eene nennen 2 54 2 3 10 ResetGo Command is sce D EORR mop edle eo E RU 2 55 2 3 1
495. reduce space by boundary alignment Abyte align 4 Divides a data section into 4 2 1 byte boundary alignment Compatibility of output object code HEW4 0 or later Check Box 4 Command Option legacy v4 section and allocates into multiple of 4 2 1 address in order to improve the speed of access Function Output objects generated by Ver 4 0 optimization technology of H8S Output objects generated by Ver 6 1 optimization technology of H8S Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 3 Category List 0 Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Sim_4 gt SimDebug_H8S 2600A coco EM E eJ All Loaded Projects E H Tab ample m fo 2i Tab size x 4 H source file m Gontents Cj C source file Object list Enable all 3 Assembly source file AStatistics amp i C Linkage symbol file Allocation information D isable all all Source code listing After preprocessor expansion Options C C cpu 26004 24 object CONFIGDIRO FILELE AF obj debug list CONFIGDIRO FILELEAF Ist show tab 4 cheincpath nologo EN Generate list file Check Box Command Option Function y list Outputs object list file nolist Outputs no object list file Contents Specifies data to be output to the object file list D
496. reference symbol User defined options Describes the command options information output Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 2 3 Optimizing Linkage editor Options Select Link Library Tab from the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box 1 Category Input Standard Toolchain Configuration SimDebue_H8S 2600A e All Loaded Projects H O C source file Category pipni Show entries for Library files G source file J Assembly source file J Linkage symbol file Show entries for Insert Remove t Up Down Prelinker control 0 s Use entry point Options Link Library noprelink rom D R nomessage listz CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIntPRG 0400 P C C DSEC C BSEC D 0800 v N Dialog Menu Command Option Function Library files library Specifies an input library name Relocatable files and input Specifies an input file object files Binary files binary Specifies an input binary file Defines define Forcibly defines undefined symbol Use entry point Check Box Command Option entry Function Specifies entry symbol and entry address Prelinker control Dialog Menu Auto Command Option Specifies no entry symbol and no entry address Function If there is no instance information file does not run prelinker Skip preli
497. replaced How to obtain files Download the files from the Guideline for File Operatable Low Level Interface Routines for Simulator and Debugger page on the following URL of Renesas Technology Corp http www renesas com How to create the environment 1 Create a project by HEW Select Application or Demonstration as the project type A number of files are created automatically under the created project If you have selected Application as the project type check the Use I O Library check box at project creation step 3 The value specified in the Number of I O Stream field must be at least the number of actually handled files 3 number of standard I O files 2 Of the created files replace lowsrc c and lowlvl src 3 Create the C Hew2 stdio directory 4 Perform a rebuild to create a simulator debugger environment in which file I O is possible Notes 1 lowsrc c These files are common to SH and H8 Replace the file with the lowsrc c file contained in the project Jowlvl src This file varies from one CPU to another Replace this file with the lowlvl src file contained in the folder corresponding to the CPU that has created the project Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 2 In the created environment standard I O files will be actually opened when program code for file I O processing is encountered unlike the practice performed so far s
498. ress in order to improve the speed of access Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 56 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 Category Optimize Standard Toolcha Configuration in C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library GPU Deb gt Debug x EMG All Loaded Projects comm E C source file G G source 3 m Assembly source file Linkage symbol file v Optimization file r op M Switch judgement Category elie eed sub options Switch statement Register Auto Function call aa Data access aa 2byte pointer Shift to multiple Struct assignment x Inline function Default z aximum 110 nodets G ienerate file for inter module optimization Options Standard Library cpu 260l output 04 24 CONFIGDIRI PROJECTNAME lib head runtime new stdio stdlib Details Speed or size Size oriented optimization EN Optimization Check Box Command Option Function N optimize 1 Specifies optimization optimize 0 Specifies no optimization Speed or size Specifies the optimiz Dialog Menu Size oriented optimization ation format Command Option Function Performs optimization in size Speed oriented optimization speed Optimization for speed Speed sub Register speed register Performs register store restore expansion by the PU
499. ress range which can be accessed by the PC relative addressing mode 126 to 128 bytes e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Optimize branches Command line optimize branch Examples C Source Programs Function main calls function func01 in other file filel c include lt machine h gt extern long func01 long long void main void long g 11 9g 12 void main void g 11 100 g 12 200 g 1 func01 g l1 g 12 file2 c long func01 long long long func01 long 11 long 12 return 11 12 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples Codes Examples of codes before and after this optimization are as follows Function func01 in other file is called by BSR In the following example which is in H8S 2600 advanced mode ROM Size 52 bytes to 50 bytes Execution Speed 46 cycles to 45 cycles Before Optimization ER6 _g_11 ER6 ERO ERO 100 ROL ERO ER6 56 ROL ERO _g_12 32 ERO ER1 ER6 ERO Q func01 24 ERO ER6 ER6 2d sL sdi func01 L ER1 ERO e Remarks After Optimization func01 L This option is valid for object files generated by C C Compiler or Assembler 9 4 9 Shortens the Addressing Mode Size O Speed z Description R6 g l1 ER6 RO ERO 100 8 ROL RO ER6 56 ROL RO _g_12 32
500. return g 11 100 long func02 void return g 12 100 long func03 void return g 12 4 Examples Codes Examples of codes before and after this optimization are as follows Function func01 frequently called is accessed in the indirect memory format In the following example which is in H8S 2600 advanced mode ROM Size 288 bytes to 274 bytes Execution Speed 491 cycles to 485 cycles RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 29 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Before Optimization e Remarks R6 _g_11 ER6 RO ERO 100 ROL RO ER6 func01 24 RO ER6 1000 ER0 RO _g_12 32 func02 24 R G8 qg 12 32 func03 24 RO _g_13 32 func01 24 RO ER6 func01 24 RO ER6 R6 E Ed o Ld o D c p co Dd sk D o Dd sk DH ch d Q g 11 32 ERO0 ER1 ER1 100 R1L QSMULL 3 24 ERO G g 11 32 Q g 12 32 ER0 ER1 ER1 100 R1L SDIVL 3 24 ERO _g_12 32 _g_12 32 ERO ER1 ER1 4 R1L SDIVL 3 24 ER1 _g_12 32 ER1 ERO After Optimization MOV SUB MOV MOV JSR MOV MOV MOV BSR MOV BSR MOV JSR MOV JSR MOV ER6 _g_11 ER6 ERO ERO 100 ROL ERO ER6 _ ind_opt1 8 ERO ER6 1000 ERO ce ERO _g_12 32 func02 8 ERO G g 12 32 func03 8 ERO g 13 32 _ ind_opt1 8 ERO ER6 _ ind_opt1 8 ERO ER6 ER6 Indirect Memory Call _g_
501. rmance tuning because it affects the object performance depending on the program Specification Method Dialog menu None Command line SCOpe NOSCope Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 42 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Examples of use In the following example ROM size of the C program which has 1000 variable declarations and each variable is set is shown When noscope option is specified ROM size is reduced by 6 bytes The following message is output when message option is specified and scope option is specified for Division of Optimizing Ranges Note In HEW C C Tab Category Source Show entries for Messages Display information level messages C C program cpu h8sxa scope specified 8010 bytes noscope specified 8004 bytes Message C0101 D Optimizing range divided in function function name Notes and Remarks This option is valid only when the CPU type is H8SX or H8S without legacy v4 option 3 8 Features of H8SX 3 8 1 Address Space Description H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2000 H8S 2600 has two CPU mode at most H8SX has the following four CPU operating mode Each mode is selected with the mode pins of the LSI or other sources When compile it is selected by specifying the CPU type and the operating mode options Since the usable modes and areas differ depending on the product refer to the hardware manual when specifying CPU mode Normal Mode CPU Operating Middle Mode Mode Advanced Mode
502. roject Create a new project according to section 2 1 1 Creating a New Workspace Select Empty Application as a project type 2 Selecting the CPU Select the CPU type on the 1 9 screen New Project 1 lect Target CPU Toolchain version Toolchain version a Which GPU do you want to use for this project GPU Series Other If there is no CPU type to be selected select the GPU Type that a similar to hardware specification or select Other Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 66 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 3 Selecting global options Select global options on the 2 9 screen lt HEW1 2 gt Specify global options Operating Mode Advanced Address Space fisem byte Merit of Library Code Size B Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 Required C Runtime Library c8s26a lib ec226a lib HEW2 0 or later 2 9 Option Setting Specify global options Operating Mode Advanced Address Space i Mbyte x Muliple Divid Nome Merit of Library Code Size v Stack calculation Medium x Specify SBR address Default M Ho Change number of parameter registers 4 Treat double as float JPass struct parameter via register ass 4 byte parameter return value vi lt Back Ne Finish Cancel For details on changing the global options after initialization refer to section 11 2 1 Output of Undefined External Sym
503. rson who has not installed HEW or manage the version of an entire build including the makefile Makefile production method 1 Make sure that the project that generates the makefile is the current project 2 Make sure that the build configuration that builds the project is the current configuration 3 Choose Build Generate make file 4 You will see the following dialog box In this dialog box select one of the makefile generation methods Generate make file C For all configurations in the currently active project Cancel C For all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace v Scan dependencies whilst building make file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Makefile generation directory HEW creates a make subdirectory in the current workspace directory and generates makefiles in this subdirectory The makefile name is the current project or configuration name followed by the extension mak debug mak for example HEW generated makefiles can be executed by the executable file HMAKE EXE contained in the directory where HEW is installed However user modified makefiles cannot be executed e Makefile execution method 1 Open the Command window and move to the make subdirectory that contains the generated makefile 2 Execute HMAKE On the command line enter HMAKE EXE lt makefile name gt Note This feature is supported by HEW 1 1 or late
504. s 5 4 17 5 29 Unifies common codes 5 4 17 6 30 Optimizes branch instructions m 5 4 17 7 Legend O Improvements attained A Improvements achieved in some programs X Efficiency reduced RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 29 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 4 1 Using 1 Byte enum Type Size O Speed O Description If the value of an enum type member is within the range from 128 to 127 1 byte type operations can be specified with this option An enum type value usually occupies 2 bytes according to the language specifications however when the enum option is specified a value of enum type members is operated as 1 byte data Because this option is not based on the language specifications it is set to be not specified in the default state of the compiler However it is recommended to always specify this option Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Treat enum as char if it is in the range of char Command line byteenum Example To set enum type data E1 to 1 C C program enum EN1 a 0 b c d e E1 RR said Euneivnid lt The value of the enum member is within the data range represented by one byte El 1 Assembly expansion code Not specified Specified func _func MOV W 1 R0 MOV B 1 ROL MOV W RO _E1 32 MOV B ROL _E1 32 RTS RTS SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 R
505. s H8SX can transfer data by transfer instructions not by runtime functions So the execution speed of before is faster than that of after Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 38 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 5 4 Passing Parameters as a Structure Address Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Parameters that are not assigned to a register should be passed using the address of a structure to reduce the program size Description The number of parameters used and their size should be adjusted appropriately so that they are assigned to registers For a description of how to pass parameters to a register refer to the appropriate user s manual In situations where large parameters are required or a large number of parameters are used they should be grouped in a structure before they are passed to their intended function to reduce the program size If parameters are declared as members of a structure and the starting address of the structure is passed as an parameter to the target function the receiving function can access the members based upon the received address Example Pass the long type data a b c and d to the function func C language program before optimization C language program after optimization void sub long long long long void sub struct ctag long a b c d struct ctag long a void func void long b long c sub a b c d long d
506. s Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other Miscellaneous options Alig Check for undefined symbols Check for unlinked sections User defined options Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Miscellaneous options Specifies other functions Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Exclude unreferenced external Exclude Disables unreferenced library linkage symbols Align section Align section Checks sections having different alignments Check for undefined symbols Udfcheck Outputs error information when undefined symbol is detected Check for unlinked sections Check section Checks sections to which addresses are not assigned Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 1 4 S Type Converter Options 1 Output Tab of Stype Object Converter Options Debug Data record header JERS Always output S9 record at the end Divide S type file S type file output directory o test3 testa Debug Modify Data record header Dialog Menu Command Option Function None S1 record s1 Outputs in S1 data record S2 record s2 Outputs in S2 data record S3 record s3 Outputs in S3 data record Always output S9 record at the end Check Box Command Option Function s9 Outputs S9 record at the end even if the entry address exceeds H 10000 Always outputs Divide S type file Check Box Command Option Func
507. s Review source code Acceptable rule violations Documentation Figure 10 8 Development Procedure Using SQMlint e Collect all compile errors SQMlint assumes that the C source code is valid e Find errors detected by SQMlint e Correct the errors that can be easily corrected e Create a list of the locations of rule violations that require investigation and perform a review e Perform corrections for rules deemed unacceptable upon review e Document rules deemed acceptable upon review to leave a record 10 2 5 Supported Compilers The following compilers are supported by SQMlint e H8C C Compiler Package V 6 01 Release00 and later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Section 11 Q amp A This section presents answers to questions frequently asked by users No Tool Name C C Compiler 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ERN E 12 13 ua 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 a 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Referenced Description Section How to change character string assignment destinations 11 1 1 Failure to identify 1 bit data 11 1 2 Startup from the DOS screen 11 1 3 Runtime routine specifications and execution speed 11 1 4 H8 family object compatibility 11 1 5 Questions on host machine and OSes 11 1 6 Failure in C source level debugging 11 1 7 Warning message
508. s Selects shift JIS codes euc Selects EUC codes latin1 Selects Latin 1 codes In the outcode option you can specify the Japanese code to be output to the object program The outcode sjis option outputs the Japanese codes in the shift JIS code Similarly the outcode euc option outputs the Japanese codes in the EUC codes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A On the HEW code in the User defined options on the Other tab when specifying the object program output codes for the Japanese environment You can specify these options in the same way as you would specify in a command line lt HEW1 2 gt ompiler Options Debug C source file Source Object List Optimize Other Jopu Miscellaneous options Allow comment nest Check against EC language specification Generate browser information lnterrupt handler saves restores MACH and MACL registers M gt User defined options euc outcode sjis HEW2 0 or later J0 Standard Toolchain Configuration Sim Debug H8S 2600A GY All Loaded Projects sample Soiree fila Allow comment nest C source file Check against EO language specification Assembly source file Interrupt handler saves restores MACH and MACL registers Category other Miscellaneous options Linkage sy
509. s a result data alignment and data size are s1 2 bytes c1 1 byte empty area 1 byte c2 1 byte 5 bytes 0000 0002 empty area 0004 When data stuff is specified When data stuff is specified empty area of boundary alignment is not generated if the size of the top data which is linked next is one byte as this example As a result data alignment and data size are s1 2 bytes c1 1 byte c2 1 byte 4 bytes Here the data size is reduced to 4 bytes As this program example empty areas generated as the boundary alignment of sections are filled at linkage However the order of data allocation is not changed Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor e Remarks 1 This option is valid for the optimizing linkage editor Ver 8 00 06 or later 2 The function of this option is not applicable to object files generated by the assembler 3 Specification of this option is invalid in any of the following cases library or object is specified as output format of the optimizing linkage editor e absolute is specified as input format of the optimizing linkage editor e memory low is specified optimization at linkage optimize is specified 4 Optimization will not be applied in the linkage of a relocatable file that was generated with this option specified 9 4 Optimize Options 9 4 1 Optimization at Linkage Description Compiler outputs the supplement informa
510. s a stack access instruction the cause of the problem is most likely a stack overflow Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 35 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 33 Failure at Integer Multiplication Question When the result of integer multiplication is assigned to the global variable of type long the result is not the intended value The result of 20 2000 is this example But 15 2000 produces the correct result The integer multiplication which exceeds the range of short does not produce the correct result even though the result is assigned to the variable of type long Why is this Example long 1l max oe 20 2000 Answer The compiler recognizes the integer described in constant expression as type int 2 bytes even though the result is assigned to the variable of type long Therefore 20 2000 is 0x9C40 after multiplication and is assigned to the variable of type long as OxFFFF9C40 because of sign extension 15 2000 is 0x7530 and assigned as 0x00007530 because the sign extension does not occur which is the intended value To get the intended result of multiplication the constant expression should be postfixed by L so that the compiler can recognize the constant as type long lt Example gt long l max max 20L 2000L constant with L postfixed one postfixed is OK at least Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 36 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 2 Opti
511. s multiplication or division in codes according to the result of 16bit 16bit CPU instruction specifications Output directory Dialog Menu Command Option Function s object Specifies object file output directory 3 List Tab C Compiler Options ia ae Source Object List Optimize Other CPU PE Contents Object list Enable all Statisti ageing l Disable all _ Allocation information Source code listing After preprocessor expansion Generate list file Check Box Command Option Function list Outputs object list file nolist Outputs no object list file Contents Specifies data to be output to the object file list Dialog Menu Command Option Function Object list show object Outputs object list Statictics showsstatictics Outputs statics information Allocation information show allocation Outputs symbol allocation list Source code listing show source Outputs source list After preprocessor expansion show expand Outputs list after macro expansion Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW If the Enable all button is pressed all data items are output On the other hand if the Disable all button is pressed all data items are disabled and no data item is output to the object list file 4 Optimize Tab 00 C Compiler Options Debug SEMEN Source Object List Optimize Other CPU IV Optimiza
512. s of functions frequently accessed are assigned to INDIRECT OPT section which is automatically allocated to the indirect memory access space As the functions are accessed in the indirect memory format size efficiency is improved Because this area is also used by the vector table should be careful ROM address should be specified by cpu option e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Use indirect call jump Command line optimize function_call e Specification Method for cpu option Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Verify Command line cpu lt memory type gt lt address range gt or cpu lt cpu information file name gt memory type ROm RAm XROm XRAm YROm YRAm address range start address gt lt end address gt Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples C Source Programs Function main calls function func01 func02 func03 Here the function func01 is frequently called filel c extern long func01 void extern long func02 void extern long func03 void void main void long qg 11 g 12 9g 13 g 14 g 15 void main void g 11 100 g 11 func01 q 12 1000 g 12 func02 g 13 func03 g 11 func01 g 11 func01 file2 c long func01 void long func02 void long func03 void extern long g ll g 12 g 13 g 14 g 15 long func01 void
513. s the start address of the 8 bit absolute area Bit field allocation order Dialog Menu Command Option Function Left bit_order left Stores members from upper bit Right bit order right Stores members from lower bit 4 3 Building Existing Files with HEW This section explains how to register as an HEW project files a series of load module creation procedures that has already been prepared without using the HIM In HEWI 2 sample programs are supplied in the HEW directory Tools HITACHI H8 3_0a_O sample No HEW1 2 File Description 1 init c Initialization routine 2 vectbl c Vector table settings 3 scttbl c Section initialization routine 4 cmain c Main function file 5 c2600a sub Subcommand file for inter module optimizer Sample programs are not available with HEW2 0 or later Therefore the sample programs of user s own make should be prepared or the following files to be generated when creating sample project should be used as sample programs Create a sample project by selecting Demonstration as the project type setting according to section 2 1 2 Creating a New Workspace 2 HEW2 0 or later Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 65 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW No HEW2 0 or later File Description 1 resetprg c Initialization routine 2 intprg c Vector table settings 3 dbsct c Section initialization routine 4 main c Main function file 5 2600a sub user s own make Subcommand file 1 Creating a new p
514. same as above 103 strtod 104 strtol 105 rand x Floating point 106 srand x 107 calloc x 108 free x 109 malloc x 110 realloc x 111 bsearch O 112 qsort O Recursive function 113 abs O 114 div A 115 labs O 116 Idiv A 10 string h 117 memcpy O 118 strcpy O 119 strncpy O Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 54 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A No Std Include File No Function Reentrant Remarks 10 string h 120 strcat O 121 strncat O 122 memcmp O 123 strcmp O 124 strncmp O 125 memchr O 126 strchr O 127 strcspn O 128 strpbrx O 129 strrchr O 130 strspn O 131 strstr O 132 strtok x 133 memset O 134 strerror O 135 strlen O 136 memmove O Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 55 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 3 2 Like to Use Reentrant Library Function in Standard Library File Question I would like to use reentrant library function in standard library file Answer There are reentrant function lists on 11 3 1 reentrant library Reentrant function can be generated by setting of library generator in H8C V6 0 or later e On command line use the lbg38 reent option e The setting in the HEW is shown below H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain E 7 Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library cPu Deb GY All Loaded Projects 5 t C D E n E aed Bit field alloc order Assembly source file Section Left v Linkage symb
515. se File gt Import Stack File to open a stack information file sni or a profile information file pro Choose File gt Open to open an existing call information file cal After that the following window is displayed File Edit View Tools Help OSES OW Ds dH WR BT Symbol Eun elit Version on library H8 V6 Tool Bar details View Galli 0 ynbol__ Attrib _Address _Size 3 ize Source 0x0000043e oxo000000 0x00000004 intpre obj ANT Ox00000436 Ox00000002 ox00000004 intpre obj O INT_ERD SO Ox00000490 Ox00000002 ox00000004 intpre obj pes Maximum Select Standard 0x00000466 0x00000002 0x00000004 intpre obj MV Ox00000488 0x00000002 0x00000004 intpre obj D Poweron R Stack Size Library Version Ox00000400 0x00000016 0x00000004 resetpre obj pd ieu dE G INTERE 0x000004a0 0x00000002 Ox00000004 intpre obj T ADDD 3 0x00000020 G3 INT CML Ox0000048a Ox000D0002 Ox00D00004 intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj intpre obj eco fs MULD 3 0x00000038 G INT ADD 000000442 0x00000002 0x0000000 test asm 0x00000000 3 INT TD 000000494 0x00000002 0x0000000 3 INTERE SCR 0x00000004 G3 INT TGIS 0x00000460 Ox00000002 0x0000000 3 INT CMIA3_TMR3 0x00000004 G3 INT IRQ9 Ox0000043a Ox00000002 Ox0000000 G INT ADID 0x00000004 D INT TEID 0x00000496 0x0000
516. se button to close the dialog box Memory resources can also be referenced or modified on the Simulator tab of H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box Mutual modification is reflected Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 61 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 3 Downloading a Sample Program Check the settings because a sample program to be downloaded is automatically set in the Demonstration Program e Select Debug Settings from the Option menu to open the Debug Settings dialog box Debug Settings SimSessionH8S 26004 Target Options samples Target H85 726004 Simulator Default Debug Format Elf Dwarf2 Download Modules Offset Address Add CONFIGDIR N H 00000000 Remove Hodiy UG Dov The files set in Download Modules will be downloaded e Click on the OK button to close Debug Settings dialog box e Select Download Modules gt All Download Modules from the Debug menu to download the sample program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 62 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 4 4 Setting Simulated I O Check the settings because Simulated I O is automatically set in the Demonstration Project e Select Simulator gt System from the Option menu to open Simulator System dialog box System Memory Data Area Bit Size System Gall Address J Enable p24 H o0000000
517. se the variable may be updated outside the program sequence For example data values are changed by interrupt processing or hardware processing The compiler assumes that variables without a volatile declaration are changed only by successive processing of the program sequence or function calls In Ver 4 0 or earlier external variables without a volatile declaration were optimized as shown in the example below Example int a fO int ptr amp a ptr 1 Only this assignment expression is eliminated ptr 2 In Ver 6 01 optimization is further performed in the cases below To disable the optimization declare the relevant variable with volatile Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Example 1 int a fO int ptr amp a ptr amp 0x0080 1 while ptr amp 0x0080 2 In this example while statement 2 has become an infinite loop as a result of optimization e Due to alias analysis of the pointer ptr in 1 and ptr in 2 are handled as the same value e Expression 1 is propagated to expression 2 Accordingly expression 2 is converted as follows while ptr amp 0x0080 amp 0x0080 lt 2 gt while ptr amp 0 while 0 while 1 Therefore the expression in question is judged as true the judge statement is eliminated and the above while statement becomes an infinite
518. sembly language code after optimization fs PUSH W MOV W BLT Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 38 30 46 38 42 After 32 26 50 42 46 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 38 38 30 After 34 34 26 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 45 36 106 88 112 After 24 20 74 64 64 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 36 36 34 After 20 20 17 6 6 3 Declaring a Prototype Size O Speed O Stack size Important Points Functions that have char type or unsigned char type parameters should be prototype declared before they are called to eliminate the output of superfluous type conversion code Description If called without a prototype declaration functions that have char type or unsigned char type parameters are converted into the int type which generates superfluous sign expansion instructions and zero expansion instructions In addition parameters can fail to be passed properly RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 45 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Example Call the function sub that has char type and unsigned char type parameters C language program before optimization C language program after optimization char
519. splay information on the projects to be generated in the Summary dialog box Check them and then click OK The information on the projects displayed in the Summary dialog box can be saved as a text file named Readme txt in the Project Directory by checking Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory Summary Project Summary PROJECT GENERATOR PROJECT NAME sample PROJECT DIRECTORY C Hew3_ene sample sample CPU SERIES 2600 Au Tae 2612 TOOLGHAIN NAME Hitachi H8S H8 300 Standard Toolch TOOLCHAIN VERSION 6 0 0 0 GENERATION FILES C Hew3_ene sample sample dbsct c Setting of B R Section C Hew3_ene sample sample sbrk c Program of sbrk C Hew3_ene sample sample iodefine h Definition of I O Register C Hew3_ene sample sample intpre c Interrupt Program C Hew3_ene sample sample resetpre c Reset Program Click OK to generate the project or Cancel to abort JV Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project directory 12 Other If demonstration is selected from Project Type low level library sample that can be used at simulator debugging will be included The files to be added are as follows e lowlvl src Standard I O Sample Assembler List e lowsrc c Low level Library Source File e lowsrc h Low level Library Header File Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 13 Setting options Se
520. ss Data Source Label l 0003s00000000000850 0003c00000000000856 000370000000000085C 0003 00000000000BBE 0003s00000000000BC2 0003 lt 00000000000BC4 0003200000000000BC6 0003z00000000000BCC 0003100000000000BCE 0003C00000000000BD0 d00z2s00000000000BD2 0002e00000000000BD8 0002700000000000BDA d002 00000000000BDC 0002500000000000BDE 0002 lt 00000000000BE0 0002200000000000BE2 0002z200000000000BE6 0002100000000000860 d002c00000000000862 0001S0000000000086E 0001t00000000000874 On0n01700n0n0nnoannnnnanc 2 4 9 Displaying Breakpoints MOV MOV JSR STM MOV MOV BRA MOV BNE MOV Enable Enable H OUER4 lt 00FFE045 if strcup H OUER1 lt 00000EE0 _strPC lt O0000BBE ERA 0DFFFFFO 00000 _stremp ERO EER6 00000000 ER1 EER5 lt 00000EE0 H OBPC lt 00000BCC BERG RAL 00 GERS ROL lt 73 ROL R H OBPC lt O0000BD8 BERG ROL lt 00 RO Ro lt 0000 ERS RSL lt 73 R5 R5 0073 R5 R RO FF8D SP ER4 lt 00FFE045 PC 00000860 RO RORO FF8D GH OSPC 0000086E H OUERI lt OO000EE6 else if s ERS EERO lt 00000000 eanne nnonannonnm PC H 00000A62 sample c 27 PC H 00000A66 sample c 29 Software Event All the Breakpoints lists set in the program can be displayed on a Eventpoints window e Select Code gt Eventpoints from the View menu The Eventpoints window allows the user to set Breakpoints define new Breakpoints
521. ss field and press the Modify button to specify the address Section address Address rroorFoooo 4 Hexadecimal omes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 11 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program The address is modified as shown below 8 900 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section verity Other Relocatable section start address Address Section Modify Add roor F000 B New Overlay Remove Generate external symbol file Use external subcommand file OK Cancel In the next step in the Verify tab create CPU information to check the CPU assignment 8 300 OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other CPU information check Check he CPU information Device GPU information tile path Stop linkage on CPU information warning Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 12 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program Selecting the Check in the CPU information check field allows the user to check the CPU information Pressing the Add button brings up a dialog box on which the ROM and RAM areas can be specified as shown below CPU information add Device ROM Device Address Address Start rrooooo000 Start HOOF Foo00 End HOOFEFFFF End HOOFFFFFF
522. ssions into local variables before operations are performed upon them Description Because most local variables are assigned to registers unlike external variables the use of local variables can generate an object that does not contain data transfers between memory and registers In the case of variables that do not change values due to a function interrupt and other causes those variables should be assigned to local variables before arithmetic operations are performed on them This also improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed for the reasons stated above Example Add the variable a to variables b c and d store the results in the variables b c and d C language program before optimization C language program after optimization unsigned char a b c d unsigned char a b c d void func void void func void b a ct a dt a unsigned char wk wk a bt wk ct wk dt wk Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Expanded into assembly language code before optimization Expanded into assembly language code after optimization funds _func STM MOV MOV MOV MOV ADD MOV MOV MOV MOV ADD MOV MOV MOV MOV ADD MOV LDM RTS ER2 ER3 SP _a 32 ER3 ER3 ROL _b 32 ER1 ER1 R2L ROL R2L R2L GER ER3 ROL 4 c 32 ER1 ER1 R2L ROL R2L R2L GER ER3 R3L _d 32 ERO ERO R1L R3L R1L R1L ER
523. stable Testable with limitations Table 10 3 Number of Rules Supported by SQMlint Number of testable rules Rule category Supported by SQMlint Total Required 67 93 Advisory 19 34 Total 86 127 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 10 4 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 10 MISRA C 10 2 2 Using SQMlint SOMIint start options can be set easily from the window for setting the HEW Compile Options Figure 10 6 shows the dialog box for specifying HEW options in which MISRA C rule check should be selected from Category HBS 118 300 Standard Toolchain Configuration C Ce Assembly Lirk Litray Standard Library CPU 4 gt Debug l AJ Ali Loaded Projects Bey resa LJ C source fie gg Cos source file Ali I Assembly source file Qg Linkage symbol fie Generate rapor fle Options C C f cpu 2600A 24 objecte CONFIGDIR NSSIFILELEAF obi debug roksi chamcpath nologo Figure 10 6 HEW Options Window Thus SQMlint will start at compile time The meaning of Inspection Option in this dialog is e All Performs testing for all rules Required Performs testing only for rules necessary according to the MISRA C rule e Custom Performs testing for the rules specified by the user Please select the rules by using the check box and the buttons of the right side 10 2 3 Viewing Test Results Test results can be output in the following three ways a Standard err
524. sure that the EEPMOV instruction is not influenced by the above usage restrictions When the EEPMOV instruction is used for the data transfer of specific structures rather than the entire file use the built in function eepmov For further details refer to section 5 4 6 Block Transfer Instruction 2 Tuning of other optimization options The following describes the specification combined with the options that have proved efficient in size First specify the 1 byte enum type Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles SPEED option 3420 1325 SPEED option 3366 1285 block transfer instruction SPEED option 3392 1296 block transfer instruction 1 byte enum type The execution speed reduced slightly Next specify three parameter passing registers Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles SPEED option 3420 1325 SPEED option 3366 1285 block transfer instruction SPEED option 3348 1249 block transfer instruction 3 parameter passing registers The execution speed is improved Then specify a variable allocation register count Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles SPEED option 3420 1325 SPEED option 3366 1285 block transfer instruction SPEED option 3366 1285 block transfer instruction no variable allocation register count extension Based on these results the options of a block transfer instruction specification and three parameter passing
525. swer When a library function that sets or references an external variable is used the object program is no longer reentrant The following table lists available reentrant libraries where the symbol denotes a function that sets the variable errno If these functions do not reference the variable errno in the program the reentrant is available Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 51 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A List of Reentrant Libraries Reentrant column O Reentrant X Non reentrant A Sets errno No Std Include File No Function Reentrant Remarks 1 stddef h 1 offsetof O Macro assert h 2 assert x Macro ctype h 3 isalnum O 4 isalpha O 5 iscntrl O 6 isdigit O 7 isgraph O 8 islower O 9 isprint O 10 ispunct O 11 isspace O 12 isupper O 13 isxdigit O 14 tolower O 15 toupper O 4 math h 16 acos A Floating point 17 asin A same as above 18 atan same as above 19 atan2 same as above 20 cos A same as above 21 sin A same as above 22 tan A same as above 23 cosh A same as above 24 sinh A same as above 25 tanh A same as above 26 exp A same as above 27 frexp A same as above 28 Idexp A same as above 29 log A same as above 30 log10 same as above 31 modf A Floating point 32 pow A same as above 33 sqrt A same as above 34 ceil A same as above 35 fabs A same as above 36 floor A same as above 37 fmod A same as abo
526. t Command Option Specifies the number of parameter passing registers as 2 Function Treats double type of variable value as float type Pass struct parameter via register Check Box Y STRUctreg Command Option Function Allocates structure parameter to register NOSTRUctreg Allocates no structure parameter to register Pass 4 byte parameter return value via register Check Box Y LONgreg Command Option Function Allocates 4 bytes parameter return value to register NOLONgreg Allocates no 4 bytes parameter return value to register Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 64 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Use try throw and catch of C Enable disable runtime information Check Box N Command Option RTti 0N Check Box Command Option Function Y EXception Enables an exception processing function NOEXception Disables an exception processing function Function Enables dynamic_cast typeid RTtizOFF Pack struct union and class Disables dynamic_cast typeid Check Box Command Option Function Y PAck 1 Specifies the boundary alignment of structures unions and classes to 1 PAck 2 Follows the boundary alignment number of data Specify SBR address Dialog Menu Command Option Function Default The default 8 bit absolute address is assumed Custom sbr lt address gt Specifie
527. t pp In this case no object program is created Therefore any optimization option specifications are not available Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Object Output file type Preprocessed source file p pp Command line preprocessor Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 26 How to Output Save Restore Codes for MACH or MACL Register Question How can I output the MAC register save restore code Answer The Output of save restore codes for the MAC register is specified with a compiler option Values of the MAC register are always guaranteed with this specification when the MAC register is used in an interrupt function by using the built in function mac or macl or when a function call is made within an interrupt function Even if this option is not specified the MAC register save restore codes are output whenever the MAC register is used in an interrupt function Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Interrupt handler saves resotres MACH and MACL registers if used Command line macsave Example To call the function sub from an interrupt function CC program extern void sub void pragma interrupt func void func void sub Compiled Assembly expansion code Without option With option ERO ER1 SP STM L ERO ER1 SP STMAC MACL ER1 PUSH L ERL STMAC MACH ER1 PUSH
528. t 3048 1580 Memory indirect area assignment 2994 1599 specification Specification method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize select Function call aa 8 Command line indirect Runtime routines can also be allocated to this area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions When the include indirect h statement is specified a runtime routine call is performed as a memory indirect call If the output of stack frame information is specified when the output of an object list is specified with the compiler a runtime routine called in the functions is displayed Function File hv21 dhry Line 309 Proc 1 Optimize Option Specified No Allocation Information Available Parameter Area Size 0x00000000 Byte s Linkage Area Size 0x00000004 Byte s Local Variable Size 0x00000000 Byte s Temporary Size 0x00000000 Byte s Register Save Area Size 0x0000000c Byte s Total Frame Size 0x00000010 Byte s Used Runtime Library Name SMVNS3 As a result the call MVN 3 has become a memory indirect call For specifying functions individually specify pragma indirect MVN 3 Because the memory indirect area is allocated in the range from 0x00000000 to 0x000000ff all functions can be assigned in this area At this time note that this area overlaps with the exception processing vector area It is necessary to divide the section in order to avoid overl
529. t Compatibihty 5 unn ne o teace oett RI PEE EeP e Eee S 11 9 11 1 6 Questions on Host Machines and OSES ccccsccccsssseceessecceceeaececseceecessaececsesaececeeeeeeeeeaeeecsesaesenseeeeeess 11 10 11 1 7 Failure in C Source Level Debugging iie i a e aE oe E rennen eerte nennen 11 10 11 1 8 Warning Message Displayed at Inline Expansion eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeneen eene 11 12 11 1 9 Output of Function not optimized sss eeestis esei nren rene rennen ener trente 11 13 11 1 10 How to Specify Include Files eese nennen nennen rene rennen enne RA 11 13 11 1 11 Program Coding Using Japanese Fonts sees een rennen nennen 11 14 11 1 12 Output of Illegal Value in Operand from the Cross Assembler eee 11 16 11 1 13 Deletion of Large Amount of Codes by Optimization sess 11 17 11 1 14 How to View Values of Local Variables at Debugging esesseseeeeeeeneneenneeeee enne 11 18 11 1 15 Regarding Optimization Options ssseseeeeeeeeeeneeeneeenenne nennen nere enne nett tent te enne tnne tenen 11 19 11 1 16 Failure to Pass Function Parameters eessssseseeeseesseee nennen nennen eene enne tnnt etre tene tenete 11 19 11 1 17 Failure at Bit Operation in Write Only Register nennen nenne nenne 11 20 11 1 18 Notes on Linking with Assembly Language Programs sese 11 21 11 1 19 How to Check Coding Which May Ca
530. t Option is to be specified by the file list Default Options icon is displayed in the folder Please choose an icon and click OK by specifying an option in the right side of an option dialog box This option can be applied when a file of the file group is first added to the project Standard Toolchain Configuration C C Toolchain Option Db e Category Source TEJ All Loaded Projects Show entries for El ac include file directories x 8 dbsctc 8 intpre c 5 resetprg c E sbrkc 8 testc Remove Lo Default Options C source file Move up Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Move down Options C C cpu H8SX4 24 object CONFIGDIRI FILELEAF obj debug nolist cheincpath lang c nologo omen Degault Options 11 4 5 Changing Memory Map Question A memory map can not be changed Answer When a memory source of the memory window has been mapped a memory map can not be changed in the system configuration window Please change a memory map after mapping of a memory resource was released Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 64 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 4 6 How to Use HEW on Network Question 1 Can the HEW be installed on a network 2 Can projects and programs be installed on a network Answer 1 The HEW system itself cannot be installed on a network 2 No problem Be careful not to access a
531. t ST s S a pst a 10 s b s a s c func s Expanded into assembly language code before optimization main STM L SUBS L SUBS L MOV L MOV B MOV B MOV B EXTS W MOV B EXTS W DD W OV W OV L UBS L UBS L ER2 ER3 SP 4 SP 2 SP SP ER3 10 ROL ROL _pst 32 ROL ER3 RO 4 16 ER3 R1IL R1 R1 RO0 R0 2 16 ER3 ER3 ERO 4 SP 2 SP SP ER1 ER2 ER2 6 R2L SMVNS 3 24 Q func 24 4 SP 4 SP 4 SP SP ER2 ER3 Oo PPPrragkengnng sp Object Size Table byte C language program after optimization struct ST short b char a char Cc pst void main struct ST s S a pst a 10 s b s at s c func s Expanded into assembly language code after optimization main PUSH L MOV B MOV B MOV B EXTS W MOV B EXTS W ADD W MOV W PUSH L JSR ADDS L POP L RTS ER6 10 ROL ROL _pst 2 32 ROL R6H RO R6L RIL R1 R1 RO RO E6 ER6 Q func 24 4 SP ER6 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 66 60 64 64 80 After 44 46 42 40 72 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 62 60 64 After 42 40 38 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 41 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 126 110 416 252 286 After 42 40 84 76 260 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Befor
532. t vbr void 0x20000 Set 0x20000 to VBR Clear interrupt mask bit set imask ccr 0 Compiled assembly language expansion code H 80 8 CCR ERO ERO 2 3 E0 ERO VBR H 7F 8 CCR Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Remarks and notes 1 The built in functions for setting Vector Base Register are valid only when the CPU operating mode is H8SXN H8SXM H8SXA or H8SXX 2 When the CPU operating mode is H8SXN the lower 16 bits of the specified value for Vector Base Register are valid 3 For details about Switching Vector Table Address refer to section 3 8 3 Switching Vector Table Address 4 Switching Vector Base Register VBR should be done in the interrupt mask state Not in the interrupt mask state when interrupt process occurs during switching Vector Base Register VBR the correct processing of the exception handling can not be guaranteed 3 2 4 Description Opration with Overflow V Flag Test The following built in functions are available for performing the operation with the overflow V flag test CC condition code No Item Format Description 1 1 byte addition and int ovfaddc char dst char Adds dst and src each 1 byte long stores the result in CCR setting src char rst area indicated by rst if rstzO 2 2 byte addition and int ovfaddw int dst int Adds dst and src each 2 byte long stores the result
533. tart and end addresses that identify the range from which you want to obtain coverage information If the HEW version is 3 0 or later you can specify a C or C source file name to identify the information you want to collect To complete the above specification click on the OK button Address specification Open Coverage Options New Window Start address 81a End address 872 CL File o e C Open a recent coverage file EZ C Browse to another coverage file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW File name specification Supported by HEW 3 0 or later Options New Window Start address Bla End address In File O Hew exe Hew3 5H1 x C Open a recent coverage file C Browse to another coverage file 2 When you click on the OK button the following coverage view appears On the right view click the right mouse button and choose Enable The coverage is enabled Statistic Statu Times Pass Address H 000008la H OO0 0 Disabl ff L 000081E MOV L 00000824 MOV L 00000824 MOV W 0000082C EXTS L 0000082E HMOV W 00000834 DIVXS W 00000838 MOV W 0000083A BEQ 0000083C ADD W 00000840 BRA 00000850 MOV W 00000852 BSR Assembler ROL H 01106DF4 32 H OOFFEO02 ERS H OOFFEO00 ER4 BERS RO ERO B c 32 R1 R1 ERO RO ER4 BH 0842 8 H 0008 R0 BH 0846 8 GER4 RO B func 8 Source if a
534. ted By specifying the volatile option with the compiler the volatile specification is applied to external valuables in the entire file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 14 How to View Values of Local Variables at Debugging Question Local variable values cannot be viewed I attempted to reference a local variable with the Debugger but the value cannot be referenced or an incorrect value is returned Why is it Answer There are the following possibilities to cause this problem 1 Constant operation at compiling A variable whose value is determined at compiling is operated at compiling not at the run time and then the variable itself may disappear int X hi on ili void func void n this case X X 3 is set to a at compi ing If the variable a is not used elsewhere it is 7 not necessary to treat a as a variable x xta Therefore it is deleted as debug information void func int a int b int tmp i eat len sq a a b b is set and the variable tmp is deleted tmp a atb b len sq tmp The problem may be due to these cases however the actual program execution is not influenced 2 Deletion of unreferenced variables int datal data2 data3 void func void int resl res2 res3 resl datal data2 res2 data2 data3 res3 data3 datal sub resl resl res3 Because a local variable is effective as far as the end of the function n
535. tegory Other Avoid optimizing external symbols treating them as volatile Command line volatile 11 1 2 Failure to Identify 1 bit Data Question When a 1 bit data is compared with 1 a branch operation sometimes fails why is this Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A Answer Make sure that the data is not declared as a signed variable int short char If 1 bit data is declared in a bit field as a signed variable the 1 bit data itself is interpreted as the sign Therefore only the values 0 and 1 can be represented To represent 0 and 1 the data should be declared as unsigned Example that always gives false results Example that gives correct results struct struct 1 char sale unsigned pi char sl unsigned p6 char ely unsigned ps char 15 unsigned p4 char zi unsigned p3 char sd unsigned pa char 1 unsigned pl char al unsigned po s1 s1 PRPRPRPRPR ER Se Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne ee if sl p0 if sl p0 1 sl pl 0 sl pl 0 11 1 3 Startup from DOS Screen Question How can I start the H8S H8 300C C compiler system in the PC version from the DOS screen using a command Answer To start the compiler from the DOS window set the following environment 1 Setting the PATH Set the PATH option to the place where the tool to be used is located Example If the tool to be used is C Hew2 Tools Hitachi H8 5_0_1 bin c gt P
536. tern void mainl Fv void extern void main2 Fv void extern void main3 Fv extern void foo__lAFv struct A const void extern void foo 1BFv struct B const struct T5585724 struct T5584740 tinfo long offset unsigned char flags i struct __type_info truct T5579436 vptr t T5584740 truct _ type info tinfo const char name char id struct __T5585724 bc u struct T5579436 long d this pointer offset long i Unassigned void For virtual function call struct A Class A declaration int a struct T5579436 vptr Pointer to a virtual function table struct B Class B declaration struct A b A int b i static struct __T5585724 __1T5591360 1 pragma section VTBL extern const struct __T5579436 __vtbl__1A 2 extern const struct __T5579436 __vtbl__1B 2 extern const struct __T5579436 __vtbl__02_ 3std9type info l pragma section extern struct T5584740 T 1A extern struct __T5584740 3 T 1B Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 34 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques static char TID 1A Unassigned static char TID 1B Unassigned static struct T5585724 X T5591360 1 Unassigned unsigned char 22U pragma section VTBL const struct T5579436 __vtbl__1A 2 Virtual function table for class A Unassigned area Unassigned area Unassigned area OL
537. the address of the destructor which is called with respect to a global class object Both functions are supplied in the standard library 3 4 3 Changing a Structure Boundary Alignment Description Either the pack option or pragma pack 1 pragma pack2 pragma unpack can be used to change the boundary alignment for a structure These specifications change the boundary alignment as follows Specification pragma pack1 fpragma pack2 pragma unpack or none unsigned char 1 1 1 unsigned short unsigned int unsigned long 1 2 pack option specified floating point type pointer type Structures unions and classes with a 1 1 1 boundary alignment value of 1 Structures unions and classes with a 1 2 pack option specified boundary alignment value of 2 Changing a boundary alignment When pragma pack is specified data except byte can be allocated at an odd address in order not to make a space for boundary alignment So data size may be reduced C C program pragma pack 1 struct S1 char a int bj char c struct S1 char a int b char o Data Allocation Data Size 6 bytes Data Size 4 bytes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 31 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 3 Compiler Remarks As changing a boundary alignment may reduce data size it is useful for such as block transfer However when pragma pack1 is specified it may increases the necessary access code which access word or long word members
538. the variable Int_Glob and Ptr_Glob should be allocated to the 16 bit absolute address area or to a global register When combined with the options that have proved efficient the following results are provided Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma abs16 Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob 2920 1484 Next Ptr Glob Ptr Glob Int Glob pragma abs8 Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob pragma noregsave specified Compiler options pragma 2958 1486 global register Int Glob E4 Ptr Glob ER5 pragma abs16 Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob Next Ptr Glob pragma abs8 Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob pragma noregsave specified Compiler options The results indicate that it is more efficient to allocate the variables Int Glob and Ptr Glob to the 16 bit absolute address area instead of global registers For further details of the abs16 specification refer to section 5 4 12 Using 16 bit Absolute Address Area Variables may be allocated to either the 8 bit or 16 bit absolute address area by the inter module optimizer according to the CPU capacity 3 Allocating to a memory indirect area Function calls are performed in the memory indirect format with this specification To reference the output object specify list output as well The following table shows the result when the memory indirect area assignment option is specified by default size efficient Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Defaul
539. ther Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electronics products or if you h
540. ther with a trap instruction return specification or an interrupt function complete specification ii The stack switching specification sp should always be specified in lowercase characters 3 1 2 Trap Instruction Return Specification Description Functions that are declared in pragma interrupt are normally returned by executing the RTE instruction However when a trap instruction return specification tn is enabled they are returned by executing the TRAPA instruction Example To initiate a trap exception processing by executing the TRAPA 2 instruction upon completion of the interrupt function C C program extern unsigned char a pragma interrupt f tn 2 lt The interrupt function f is returned on the execution of TRAPA instruction void f void a 0 Compiled assembly language expansion code RO SUB B ROL ROL MOV B ROL _a 32 POP W RO TRAPA 2 lt Returns on the execution of TRAPA instruction Remarks and notes i This specification which can be set with the stack switching specification cannot be set together with an interrupt function complete specification ii The trap instruction return specification tn should always be specified in lowercase characters ii This specification cannot be used when the CPU operating mode is specified as 300 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 3 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler 3 1 3 Interrupt Function Compl
541. thod can be modified by possible five ways For more about this refer to Description in this dialog Specification method Tools menu gt Merge Option Merge Option Merge type calling information amp effective symbol detailed information add all symbols to file amp Editing file z Sample view Opened Editing file Mereed file E Samplecal Max 36 Samplecal Max 48 fo A 36 Sd A e EMO A 44 O B 16 Modified EM B 28 Bd B 24 C 8 lt Deleted glo 8 falc a D 8 Moved oD 8 fo D 8 fo D 8 OE 2 E D 8 E 2 lt Deleted EMO F 18 lt Modified E C2 EMO F G4 GE 2 EMO F 4 OE 2 G H 2 lt Added Bo OG 6 Added fla 6 OH 2 Description Precondition Us PAPE describes when the user operates the following procedures for each symbol in the edited data 1 Reads file Sample sni with Import 2 Edits the read information as follows C under B Removed D under B Moved under E under amp Removed p ible the symbol detailed information changes the stack size from 12 to 16 le e Remarks This merge function is valid in Call Walker Ver 1 3 or later 7 3 7 Other Functions Realtime OS symbol Specify the following to display a realtime OS symbol as RTOS in the call information view left frame on the screen Specification method Tools menu gt Realtime OS Option Output list The stack
542. timization of entry functions or the functions whose address is before entry functions changes the jump address e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Eliminate dead code Command line optimize symbol delete e Specification Method for Entry Functions Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Input Use entry point Command line entryz symbol name gt address When specify symbol name add an underscore at the head of the name Example main gt _main Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 20 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Examples of eliminates unreferenced variables functions Variable g max2 and function func03 which are never referred are deleted filel c void main void extern void func01 long extern void func02 long nns dec Deleted long g maxl g max2 oO CO void main void g_maxl Ox7FFFF func01 g max1 3 func02 g maxl 3 f The char type variable g c1 is never referred but is not deleted file2 c void funeDl long void func02 long void func03 long extern long g_maxl void funcOl long 11 g maxi void func02 long 11 g_maxl 11 lt lt 1 Deleted void func03 long 11 00O g maxl 11 11 2 This is because H8 is 2 byte boundary alignment and if g c1 is deleted the address of next variable is not multiples of two The access for the odd
543. timizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 9 3 3 Debug Information Compression Description By specifying this option the loading time is reduced when loading files to debugger But on the contrary the link time is increased e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Compress debug information Command line compress uncompress e Remarks This option is valid only when output file is absolute file Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 14 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor 9 3 4 Link Time Reduction Description When this option is specified the linkage editor loads the necessary information at linkage in smaller units to reduce the memory occupancy As a result the link time may be reduced Try this option when processing is slow because a large project is linked and the memory size occupied by the linkage editor exceeds the available memory in the machine used e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Low memory use during linkage Command line memoryz high low e Examples The following example is the comparison of the link time when this option is specified or not At the following case the link time is reduced by 34 Measurement Conditions e 1 000 files e 100 symbols per each file e 1 000 function symbols e Specifies the same options except this option lt memory high
544. timizing range Dialog Menu Command Option Function Inline file path file_inline Specifies a file for inter faile inline expansion b Details Button Global Variables Tab Optimize details E 21x Inline Global variables Miscellaneous Koustom Contents Treat global variables as volatile qualified Delete assignment to global variables before an infinite loop Specify optimizing range fall x Allocate registers to global variables Default Propagate variables which are const qualified Default Gees Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 32 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Level Specifies the level of external variable optimization Dialog Menu Command Option Function Level 1 Disables all of the external variable optimization volatile Treat global Checked infinite loop O0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range noblock Specify optimizing No block global allocz0 Allocate registers Disable const var propagate 0 Propagate variables Disable Level 2 Optimizes external variables that do not have a volatile specifier Disables optimization of external variables which extend across loops or branches novolatile Treat global Not checked infinite loop 0 Delete assignment Not checked opt range noblock Specify optimizing No block global alloc O Allocate registers Disable const var propagate 0
545. tion Outputs S type file by separating it into arbitrary address areas Outputs S type file without separation Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW S type file output directory Dialog Menu Command Option Function Specifies S type file output directory 4 1 5 Librarian Options 1 Output Tab H Series Object Librarian Options Debug Output m Library attribute C System library Library file output directory cxribx lib Debug Modify Generate list file Show external symbol Generate section list Use external subcommand file OK Cancel Library attribute Specifies the attribute of a library to be output Dialog Menu Option Subcommand Function User library output Specifies user library as library attribute System library output Specifies system library as library attribute Library file output directory Dialog Menu Option Subcommand Function output Specifies library output directory Generate list file Specifies whether the library list file is output Check Box Option Subcommand Function list Displays library file contents Displays no library file contents Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Show external symbol Specifies the output of external definition symbol names defined in a module Check Box Option Subcommand Function list Disp
546. tion HEW allows you to debug multiple targets on a single instance of HEW stdout stderr in the _INIT_IOLIB function in the lowsrc c file gf iles fpt stdin NULL NULL NULL This means that you can debug multiple targets at the same time while synchronizing them with each other In addition you can raise an event such as a step or Go in one session in synchronization with the same event in another session Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 30 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW How to synchronize debugger targets 1 Choose Options gt Debug sessions to open the following dialog box and click the Synchronized Debug tab Check any session you want to synchronize and check the Enable synchronized debugging check box Debug Sessions Sessions Synchronized Debug v Enable synchronized debugging Sessions Debug Tarect d H8300 iv SimSessionH8 300 H8 300 Simulator DefaultSession H1 DefaultSession SimSessionSH 1 SH 1 Simulator In eynchranize Session 2 Select Sync session from the session combo box on the Standard tool bar Session combo box displayed during synchronized debug Standard Enable disable Sync n Synchronized debug synchronized debug amp SH1 DefaultSession Session list Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 31 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Available
547. tion Speed or size oriented optimization Speed sub options s 3l Hegister Iu Switch judgement Shift to multiple loop optimieation Maximum nodes of mime famen Generate file for inter module optimization Switch statement Function call Data access aute ess ess E Optimization Check Box Command Option Function optimize 1 Specifies optimization optimize 0 Specifies no optimization Speed or size Specifies the optimization format Dialog Menu Command Option Function Size oriented optimization Performs optimization in size Speed oriented optimization speed Performs optimization in speed Speed sub Register speed register Performs register store restore expansion by the PUSH and options POP instruction at a higher speed Switch speed switch Develops the switch statement at a higher speed judgement Shift to multiple speed shift Develops the shift operation at a higher speed Struct speed struct Performs the expansion of structures and substitution assignment expression at a higher speed Loop speed loop Develops the loop statement at a higher speed optimization Expression speed expression Performs arithmetic operation comparison and substitution expression processing at a higher speed Maximum speed inline Performs inline expansion automatically at a higher speed nodes of inline data function Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 6 REJ05B0464 03
548. tion 5 4 10 Specifying Inline Expansion of Functions 2 Specifying Inline expansion of an assembly language function At coding a program in C C sections that require enhanced performance specially are sometimes written in the assembly language In such a case if the function written in assembly language is specified with the pragma inline asm the function can be inline expanded at the location of the call For further details refer to section 10 2 1 pragma Extension and Keywords in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual 52 6 Using CPU Specific Instructions 1 Allocating to a short 8 bit absolute address area Allocate the variable selected during an optimization for size to 8 bit absolute address area pragma abs8 Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob The following shows the execution results Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles Compiler option 2906 1232 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified Compiler Option 2906 1232 Inter module optimization function pragma noregsave specified pragma abs8 specified Different from the case of size orientated optimization 5 1 6 there is no difference in this Dhrystone Ver 2 1 program However it is recommendable to use this specification For further details refer to section 5 4 11 Using 8 bit Absolute Address Area Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 25 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Us
549. tion is specified the performance of the program Dhrystone Ver 2 1 is improved a maximum of 5 in size and 22 in execution cycles by using options and expansion functions Specifications of the options and the expansion functions improve the program performance much more easily and effectively than modification of the codes Make great use of these items to create high performance object programs 5 4 Details of Optimization Functions The compiler provides the following optimization functions Items 1 through 23 represent functions with the compiler and items 24 through 30 with the inter module optimizer The performance is measured under the following conditions Cross Tools for Measurement H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator Ver 2 01 00 001 H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Ver 6 01 00 009 H8S H8 300 Assembler Ver 6 01 01 000 Optimizing Linkage Editor Ver 9 00 02 000 Option Specification Default options are used when option specification methods are not described in each section Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 28 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Measurement Conditions Conditions H8 300 H8 300H H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8SX Bus Width 16 16 32 Access State to Memory 2 1 1 Fetch Size 32 Size Speed Referenced No Optimization Function Reduction Improvement Section 1 Uses 1 byte enum type
550. tion of the nomessage option disables the output of the message This option is valid for an error number from 0001 to 0307 For details on error numbers refer to section 12 Compiler Error Messages in the H8S H8 300 Series C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual After generating information messages the compiler performs an error recovery and generates an object program Check that the error recovery performed by the compiler conforms with the aims of the program Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 22 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A 11 1 20 Comment Coding Question 1 How can I nest comments 2 How can I code C comments in a C language program Answer 1 There is an option that allows you to nest comments without generating an error In this case note that these comments are interpreted as described below While the nesting levels for comments in the compiler Ver 4 0 are unlimited up to 255 nesting levels can be used for comments in the compiler Ver 3 0 Specification method Dialog menu C C tab Category Other Miscellaneous options Allow comment nest Command line comment C C Source Code Nested Comments Not Allowed Nested Comments Allowed comment Recognized as a comment Recognized as a comment statement statement comment Coding error Recognized as a comment statement comment Recognized as a comment Coding error statement 2 The C comme
551. tion to each module when generating object files According to this supplement information the optimizing linkage editor performs the inter module optimization which is impossible at compile and links As a result both ROM size and execution speed are improved e Specification Method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category Optimize Optimize items Command line optimize lt suboption gt lt suboption gt is described in sections 9 4 2 to 9 4 9 The following specification for supplement information is necessary at compile assemble even if optimization at linkage is specified Without the following specification optimization at linkage is not available e Specification Method for Supplement Information Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Generate file for inter module optimization Dialog menu Assembly Tab Category Object Generate file for inter module optimization Command line goptimize Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 9 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 9 Optimizing Linkage Editor Inter Module Optimization Flow C C Assembly Program Program Specify for Y Y Supplement Optimizing Specify Linkage Editor Optimize Options Optimized Load Module 9 4 2 Unifies Constants Strings Size O Speed Description The same value constants and the same strings having the const attribute are unified across the modules This option deletes const section to improve Size Speed
552. tions Conforms to the ANSI standard for the following processing Associative rule of floating point operations Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 62 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW 4 2 5 CPU Options Select CPU Tab from the H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain dialog box H8S H8 300 Standard Toolchain 2 xl Configuration C C Assembly Link Library Standard Library CPU Deb gt E QQ All CPU Jem Advanced 16M byte E P Multiple Divide None z source file T H E C source file Stack calculation Medium UJ posted da Change number of parameter registers from 2 default to 3 i Treat double as float Pass struct parameter via register Pass 4 byte parameter return value via register Use try throw and catch of C Enable disable runtime information Pack struct union and class Specify SBR address Default 7 OxFFFFoo 4 Bit field alloc order Left CPU Specifies the CPU types CPU Specification Environment variable Depends on environment variable H38CPU H8SX Maximum 4G byte cpu h8sxx 32 H8SX Maximum 256M byte cpu h8sxx 28 H8SX Advanced 4G byte cpu h8sxa 32 H8SX Advanced 256M byte cpu h8sxa 28 H8SX Advanced 16M byte cpu h8sxa 24 H8SX Advanced 1M byte cpu h8sxa 20 H8SX Middle 16M byte cpu h8sxm 24 H8SX Middle 1M byte cpu h8sxm 20 H8SX Normal cpu h8sxn H8S 2600 Advanced 4G
553. to assembly language code after optimization optimization func func PUSH W MOV B OV B MOV B OV B MULXU B LXU MOV B ADD B MULXU B MOV B ADD B MULXU B MOV B ADD B MOV B RTS lt w U O U OV U OV U DD OV U Object Size Table byte H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 64 52 62 50 50 After 56 44 50 38 38 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 64 64 52 After 58 58 46 Execution Speed Table cycle H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Before 56 49 150 136 136 After 48 41 106 92 92 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Before 33 29 26 After 27 27 24 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 6 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques 6 2 5 Using Formulas Size O Speed Stack size Important Points If an appropriate mathematical formula exists for a given arithmetic expression both ROM efficiency and execution speed can be improved by using the formula Description Use a mathematical formula to reduce the number of arithmetic operations required in an algorithm oriented coding technique This improves both ROM efficiency and execution speed Example Calculate the sum of 1 through 100 C language program before optimization unsigned int s unsigned int n 100 void func void unsigned int i for s 0 i 1 i lt n it st i
554. to the right by count bits returns to the right the result Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 18 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Example To rotate bits of data C C program include lt machine h gt extern unsigned char data char i void func i rotlc 2 data Compiled assembly language expansion code MOV B Q data 32 RO0L ROTL B 2 ROL MOV B ROL _i 32 RTS SECTION B DATA ALIGN 2 RES B i 3 2 8 System Control Instructions Description Rotates left by 2 bits The following functions are available to enhance system control instructions No Item Format 1 TRAPA instruction void trapa unsigned int trap no Description Expands into unconditional trap TRAPA trap_no 2 SLEEP instruction void sleep void Example 1 TRAPA instruction Expands into the low power consumption mode instruction SLEEP To branch to the address indicated by the content of the vector address that is associated with a specified vector table number 0 C C program include lt machine h gt define dummy void 0 extern void f1 void extern void f2 void extern void f3 void void const vect_table void fl dummy f2 f3 void func trapa 0 Trap instruction to function f1 Note In this case the vector table should be assigned to an interrupt vector address Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 19 REJ05B0464 0300
555. top and _ secend that refer to the start and end addresses of sections have been added This enables use of the data initialization library function _INITSCT when the section switching function is used 3 packed Structure In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later pack option and pragma pack can specify the boundary alignment of the structure member B 1 2 Additional and Improved Functions 1 C Language Function In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the compiler can compile both C and C language programs The compiler distinguishes the C and C language programs by option lang or by their file extensions 2 Library H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler Version 3 0 or later supports mathematical functions double and float types in the standard library Embedded class libraries ios istream ostream iostream string complex and new are also supported 3 Specification of the Number of Register Parameters In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the regparam option can be used to select the number of parameter registers 4 Expansion of the speed Option In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later subcommand speed expression has been added for option speed When speed expression is specified inline expansion is performed for most operations instead of calling run time routines 5 Support of long Type Bit Field In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler vers
556. tructure Example of version 2 0 struct S int 1 int a 1 gt Error 2141 is output E Example of version 3 0 struct S int 1 int a 1 gt Correct compilation h 4 Inhibiting Errors from Occurring for Structure Initial Values In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the assignment and declaration of structures can be done simultaneously Example of version 2 0 struct S int a b s1 void test struct S s2 s1 lt Error 2130 is output Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features Example of version 3 0 struct S int a b s1 union U int a b jul void test struct S s2 s1 lt Correct compilation 5 Changing the Conditions of Undefined Symbol Errors for the static Function In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later no error message is output for unreferenced symbols in a static function that has only a declaration and no definition Example of version 2 0 static void func Error 2143 is output unconditionally since there is no definition void test Example of version 3 0 static void func lt Since there is no reference no error is output void test Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 B 16 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Appendix B Added Features 6 Enabling the Use of the Comment in C Programs In H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler version 3 0 or later the comment can b
557. ts 5 54 5 4 10 Specifying Inline Expansion of Functions esee nennen eene een ren rennen enne 5 56 5 4 11 Using 8 Bit Absolute Address Area eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen rene enne tenete 5 58 25 4 12 Using T6 Bit Absolute Address Area eee Rec oU pU 5 60 5 4 13 Using Indirect Memory Format ssssessesseseeeeeeeer eene nennen trennen eren enne enne tent ennr teretes 5 62 5 4 14 Using Extended Indirect Memory Format seen een eene eene enne 5 64 5 4 15 Specifying 2byte poimter eee eio eoe e ERE OI RU DERE E Rete pens 5 66 5 4 16 Boundary alignment value and boundary alignment essere 5 68 5 4 17 Explanation of Inter Module Optimization Items essere nennen 5 71 5 4 18 Disable of Inter Module Optimization sees nennen rennen enne 5 75 Section 6 Efficient Programming Techniques esses enne enne enne 6 1 6 1 Type Declarations ae ree cet p rie ORE eret HERE tb ER EU OR DD UE PEERS ERU 6 3 6 1 1 Using Byte Data Types char unsigned char seseeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen een rennen 6 3 64 2 Using Unsigned Variables eid een eet ee ete dede ciet eec 6 4 6 1 3 Suppressing Redundant Type Conversions sesessseseeeeeeeeeeeeenen nennen nee rennen eene 6 6 61 4 Using the const Quahltfier teo ute met D RR Epi E 6 7 6 1 Using Consistent Variabl
558. type via absolute form stype Outputs a S type file Binary via absolute Data record header form binary Outputs a binary file Dialog Menu Command Option Function Outputs a record according to each address H16 record h16 Outputs a HEX record H20 record h20 Outputs an extended HEX record H32 record h32 Outputs a 32 bit HEX record S1 record s1 Outputs a S1 record S2 record s2 Outputs a S2 record S3 record s3 Outputs a S3 record Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 44 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Debug information Dialog Menu Command Option Function None nodebug Outputs no debugging information In output load module debug Outputs debugging information to a load module In Separate Debug File sdebug Outputs debugging information to a file Show entries for Dialog Menu Output file path Command Option Function Specifies a path for an output file ROM to RAM mapped sections rom Reserves an area of RAM to resolve symbol relocation by address in RAM Divided output files Sets or does not set output range Specify value filled in unused area Specifies a value to output to unused area Output messages Specifies whether information level messages are output Reduce empty areas Repressed information level messages Reduces empty areas generated as the boundary alignment of sections after compilation Check Box Command Option Fu
559. ue of the CCR ANDing the CCRs void and_ccr unsigned char ccr Logically ANDs the CCR and ccr and stores the result in the CCR 6 ORing the CCRs void or ccr unsigned char ccr Logically ORs the CCR and ccr and stores the result in the CCR 7 XORing the CCRs void xor ccr unsigned char ccr Logically XORs the CCR and ccr and stores the result in the CCR RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 7 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 3 Compiler Example To operate the condition code register and then reset it to the condition existed before the CCR was operated C C program include lt machine h gt lt The include file for built in functions void main void unsigned char mask if mask get_imask_ccr Saves the value of the interrupt mask set imask ccr 1 Specifies the beginning of exception and ccr unsigned char OxFC Stores the AND of CCR and OxFC in CCR set_imask_ccr mask Returns the value of the interrupt mask Compiled assembly language expansion code _main STC B CCR ROL AND B 128 8 ROL ROTL B ROL BEQ L48 8 ORC B 128 8 CCR ANDC B 4 8 CCR STC B CCR ROH BLD B 0 ROL BST B 7 ROH LDC B ROH CCR RTS END Remarks and notes The CCR is an 8 bit register that indicates the internal state of the CPU lt Condition code register gt pt fulafulw z vie I Interrupt mask bit UI User bit interrupt master bit Half carry flag User bit Negative f
560. ue types As shown in the C program after conversion the call of the add functions or the code of the add functions do not increase the code size Thus the use of this feature will not influence the size and processing speed C program void main void int add int int float add float float double add double double void main void int ret_i add 1 2 float ret_f add 1 0f 2 0f double ret_d add 1 0 2 0 int add int x int y return x y float add float x float y return x y double add double x double y return x y Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 23 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques C program after conversion void main void int add int int int int float add float float float float double add double double double double void main void auto int ret_i auto float ret_f auto double ret_d ret_i add__int_int 1 2 ret_f add__float_float 1 0f 2 0f ret_d add__double_double 1 0 2 0 add__int_int int x int y return x y float add float_float float x float y return x y double add double double double x double y return x y Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 4 8 Reference Type Development and Size Reduction maintenance Speed O e Important Points The us
561. uestion Linkage Order of Object Files I would like to specify an order of link of an object file on HEW Answer Please add an object file by pushing Add and select the Show entry for Relocatable files and object files from the category Input in the Link Library tab of the H8S H8 Standard Toolchain time H8S H8 3 00 Standard Toolchain Configuration GY All Loaded Projects am C source file C source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file C C Assembly Link Library An object is linked in order specified in this Standard Library CPU Deb gt Category Input Y Show entries for Relocatable files and object files Use entry point Add Insert Remove t Up Down Prelinker control PO fut x Options Link Library nopreli ink rom D R no listz CONFIGDIRI PR RO JECTNA ME map nooptimize start PResetPRG PIhtPRG 0400 P C C DSEC CSBSEC D 0800 v Link Library Dialog Box owes RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 61 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 11 Q amp A H8C V 6 00Release02 or later eases specifying the link order To display the dialog box for customizing the link order choose Build and then Specify link order Here specify the link order The items higher on the list are linked first Linkage Order E Kil x Object order Cancel d
562. unction 30 bytes The stack size in this case will be 60 bytes The stack sizes for functions are output when symbol allocation information output is specified as part of a specification for object list file output Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 5 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program For a runtime routine refer to the List of Stack Sizes Used by the Standard Library in the manual supplied with the H8S and H8 300 Series C C Compiler When modifying the stack size specified in this section after the new project has been initialized refer to section 2 2 1 8 Setting the stack size 6 New project Step 5 Specify the settings for a vector table and press NEXT What supporting files would you like to create Specify whether a vector table definition file is to be Vector Handlers output PowerON Reset 0 Power On Rese _Manual_Reset 1 Manual Rese Displays the handler names that are output to the vector table Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 7 New project Step 6 Displays the files created by the project generator Press FINISH to go to step 7 The following source files will be generated dbsct Setting of B R Se sbrk Program of sbrk iodefine Definition of I O intprg Interrupt Program vecttbl Initialise of Vectc vect i Definition of Vec res
563. upt Enable register becomes 1 the interrupt is enabled 2 Setthe value of TGRD 3 Start the TPUO timer 4 Wait until the value of TCNTO and TGRD match Wait for a compare match Program execution Wait until TCNTO timer counter 0 and TGRD timer general register D match a compare match occurs at step 4 in the paragraph entitled Explanation of an interrupt generation program When the two match a compare match interrupt occurs with the result of calling the following interrupt routine For further information refer to the pertinent hardware manual intpre c vector 91 TGIOD TPUO 0x00000456 o gt _interrupt vect 91 void INT TGIOD TPUO void return vector 92 TCIOY TPUO __interrupt vect 92 void INT_TCIOV_TPUO void sleel 0x00000458 vector 33 TGI1 amp TPUI Londomanannumdod mande md aam Db E T T ILES esed Ld ditum O e Sample program containing code for a cyclic handler The following sample program contains code for a cyclic handler When a compare match occurs the program clears the timer and then branches control to an interrupt handler After the interrupt is serviced the program lowers the interrupt priority in IPRF interrupt priority register E ati dice include iodefine h a main void 0x00000a56 TPUO TIER BIT TGIED 1 TPUO Compare match interrupt enable OxODOD0Da5a TPUO TCR BIT CCLR 6 TCNTO Compare match interrupt clear OxOO0000a60 TPUO TGRD 13333 TGR
564. urther be improved by efficient programming techniques This section describes methods that the user might consider to create efficient programs Rules for reducing program size To reduce the program size similar processing tasks should be commonly used and complex functions should be reviewed for potential improvement ii Rules for improving execution speed The execution speed is largely a function of frequently executed statements and complex statements The user should review the processing of these statements so that he or she can improve the program by focusing on critical points Because of compiler s optimization function the actual execution speed may differ from the performance level determined on a priori basis Improvements in performance should be pursued by employing a variety of techniques and by verifying the actual performance using the compiler In this section the assembly language expansion code is supplied by assuming that the type of CPU used is the H8S 2600 Series running in the advanced mode The assembly language expansion code provided in this section is subject to change as the compiler undergoes further improvements in its design The performance is measured under the following conditions Cross Tools for Measurement H8S H8 300 C C Library Generator Ver 2 01 00 001 H8S H8 300 C C Compiler Ver 6 01 00 009 H8S H8 300 Assembler Ver 6 01 01 000 Optimizing Linkage Editor Ver 9 00 02 000 Option
565. use Incorrect Operation sseeeeeeeeeene 11 22 11 1 20 Comment Codi Bs aioe septate eeteqote E daten reote Bite quede tU dgstese ioter boe aseo 11 23 11 1 21 How to Specify Options for Each File eene nennen eene enne tenete nenne 11 24 11 1 22 How to Build Programs When the Assembler is Embedded sese 11 25 11 1 23 Output of Syntax Errors at Linkage essent nennen tenerent 11 27 11 124 C Language Speciticatiofs eec EU RU UR UERSUM EEUU 11 27 11 1 25 How to View Source Programs after Pre Processor Expansion sesseeeeeeneenene 11 28 11 1 26 How to Output Save Restore Codes for MACH or MACL Register eee 11 29 11 1 27 The Program Runs Correctly on the ICE but Fails When Installed on a Real Chip 11 30 11 1 28 How to Use C language programs Developed for SH Microcomputers sse 11 30 11 1 29 How to Modify Global Options nene eerte etit ree erbe repente rhet hee he tern 11 31 11 1 30 Optimizations That Cause Infinite Loops eese eene nennen en rennen ener nenne 11 32 11 1 31 Read write Instructions for Bit Fields rennen nennen 11 34 11 1 32 Common Invalid Instruction Exceptions That Occur When Programs Are Run for an Extended Period of Time eeeeeeee 11 35 11 1 33 Failure at Integer Multiplication seeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen een nre
566. ut Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office equipment communicatio
567. ut as this is sometimes difficult to accomplish there is also a process to confirm and document times when the rule conformance is not followed Compliance to various issues is also required separate from these rules such as when software metrics need to be measured 10 1 2 Rule Examples This subsection introduces some actual MISRA C rules Figure 10 1 shows Rule 62 that all switch statements shall contain a final default clause This is categorized as a programmer error In a switch statement if the default label is misspelled as defalt the compiler will not treat this as an error If the programmer does not notice this error the expected default operation will never be executed This problem can be avoided through the application of Rule 62 Example switch x defalt f Misspelled err 1 break Figure 10 1 Rule 62 Figure 10 2 shows Rule 46 that the value of an expression shall be the same under any order of evaluation that the standard permits This is categorized as a misconception about the language Namely if i is evaluated first the expression becomes 2 2 but if i is evaluated first the expression becomes 2 1 Likewise since no provision exists for the evaluation order of function arguments if j is evaluated first the expression becomes f 2 2 but if j is evaluated first the expression becomes f 1 2 This problem can be avoided through the application of Rule 46 Example an 1 x i i x 2
568. utput format Dialog Menu Subcommand Function ELF elf Outputs in ELF format SYSROF Sysrof Outputs in sysrof format SYSROFPLUS sysrofplus Outputs dwarf debugging information in sysrof format Type of load module Specifies load module file output format Dialog Menu Subcommand Function Absolute formAabs Outputs in absolute format Relocatable formArel Outputs in relocatable format Debug information Specifies debugging information output options Dialog Menu Subcommand Function None nodebug Outputs no debugging information In output load module debug Outputs debugging information to a load module In separate debug file dbg sdebug Outputs debugging information to a file ROM to RAM mapped sections Dialog Menu Subcommand Function rom Defines initialization data area both in ROM and RAM Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 4 17 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 4 HEW Generate map file Check Box Subcommand Function print Afile name Outputs a linkage list file Load module directory Dialog Menu 3 Optimize Tab E Outputs no linkage list file Subcommand Function output Selects a load module output directory OptLinker options Debug Input Output Optimize Section Verify Other Optimize 28 JHOOTE Output information Unify strin Eliminate I Generate optimize list Lise short ii Gontents Symbol Reference Re
569. ve Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 52 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 11 Q amp A No Std Include File No Function Reentrant Remarks 5 mathf h 38 A Floating point 39 A same as above 40 A same as above 41 A same as above 42 A same as above 43 A same as above 44 A same as above 45 A same as above 46 A same as above 47 A same as above 48 A same as above 49 A same as above 50 A same as above 51 A same as above 52 A same as above 53 A same as above 54 A same as above 55 A same as above 56 A same as above 57 A same as above 58 A same as above 59 A same as above 6 setjmp h 60 O 61 longjmp O 7 stdarg h 62 va_start O Macro 63 O Macro 64 O Macro 8 stdio h 65 x 66 x 67 x 68 x 69 x 70 x 71 x 72 x 73 x 74 x 75 A 76 A 77 x 78 x RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 11 53 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 11 Q amp A No Std Include File No Function Reentrant Remarks 8 stdio h 79 vsprintf A 80 fgetc x 81 fgets x 82 fputc x 83 fputs x 84 getc x 85 getchar x 86 gets x 87 putc x 88 putchar x 89 puts x 90 ungetc x 91 fread x 92 fwrite x 93 fseek x 94 ftell x 95 rewind x 96 clearerr x 97 feof x 98 ferror x 99 perror x 9 sSstdlib h 100 atof A Non ANSI 101 atoi same as above 102 atol
570. will have a larger object size or a lower processing speed than expected Therefore this chapter presents some cases in which the performance of a C program is deteriorated compared with C as well as codes with which you can work around such performance deterioration The following table shows a list of efficient C programming techniques No Category Item Section 1 Initialization Initialization Processing and Post processing of Global 8 1 1 Processing Post Class Object processing 2 Introduction to C How to Reference a C Object 8 2 1 3 Functions How to Implement new and delete 8 2 2 4 Static member variable 8 2 3 4 How to Use Options C Language for Embedded Applications 8 3 1 5 Run time Type Information 8 3 2 U n Exception Handling Function 8 3 3 7 Disabling Startup of Prelinker 8 3 4 8 Advantages and Constructor 1 8 4 1 7 a of C Constructor 2 8 4 2 10 Default Parameter 8 4 3 11 Inline Expansion 8 4 4 12 Class Member Function 8 4 5 13 operator Operator 8 4 6 14 Function Overloading 8 4 7 15 Reference Type 8 4 8 16 Static Function 8 4 9 17 Static Member Variable 8 4 10 18 Anonymous union 8 4 11 19 Virtual Function 8 4 12 RENESAS Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 8 1 REJ05B0464 0300 Section 8 Efficient C Programming Techniques 8 1 Initialization Processing Post Processing 8 1 1 Initialization Processing and Post Processin
571. with Abs16 SYMBOL SIZE COUNTS OPTIMIZE Ptr Glob Next Ptr Glob _Int_Glob Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob flmod brk As the global registers are ER4 and ERS a total of 8 bytes of data can be allocated The following is the explanation for the register allocation of the variables Int Glob and Ptr Glob which are most frequently accessed Even when these variables are allocated the registers can accommodate 2 additional bytes Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 10 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Allocate the variables Ch 1 Glob and Ch 2 Glob to the remaining 2 bytes Int Glob i Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob ER4 Specify as follows pragma global register Int Glob E4 Ch 1 Glob R4H Ch 2 Glob R4L Ptr Glob ER5 The following compares the result with the default Optimization function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 pragma global register 2940 1512 In the above example the object size is reduced and the execution speed is improved However in some cases the allocation of external variables to registers may cause a shortage of work registers and other variables may be allocated to memory which degrades the object performance Therefore be careful at using this function The table below shows the results of combining size efficient compiler options 1 byte enum type and 3 parameter passing registers specified with the variable to register assignment
572. x05 xor exr unsigned char Oxff e get exr set_imask_exr mask Compiled assembly language expansion code Saves the interrupt mask bits lt Sets a value in EXR logically XORs and sets the result in external variable e lt Restores the interrupt mask bits Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 3 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 3 Compiler Remarks and notes The built in functions for setting and referencing extended registers are valid only when the CPU operating mode is 2600n 2600a 2000n or 2000a Extended register ESEXESENENECIEDES T Trace bit 12 to IO Interrupt mask bits 3 2 3 Setting Vector Base Register Description H8SX has the function that can allocate the vector area for exception handling at any address In H8 300 H8 300H H88 families the vector area for exception handling is fixed from zero When CPU is H8SX users can modify the allocation address of the vector area for exception handling by specifying Vector Base Register VBR For setting Vector Base Register the compiler provides the following functions No Item Format Description 1 Setting VBR void set vbr void vbr Sets the value of vbr 32 bits to VBR Example To set the value of Vector Base Register VBR C C program Include File for Built in Functions include lt machine h gt void main void set imask ccr 1 Set interrupt mask bit se
573. xceeding the range because the 16 bit absolute address overlap with many other areas specify the pragma abs16 statement in the main body of the program Check the access counts for the symbols with the optimization information list generated by the inter module optimizer and assign the variables with large numbers of accesses to the ABS 16 section When the use of the short absolute address mode is specified in the optimization option of the inter module optimizer the access counts can be examined as follows Variable Accessible with Abs16 SYMBOL SIZE COUNTS OPTIMIZE Ptr Glob 4 4 Next Ptr Glob int Glob Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob flmod _brk Based on the above results specify the variables to be allocated to the 16 bit absolute address area in the pragma abs16 statement pragma abs16 Int Glob Bool Glob Arr 2 Glob Ptr Glb Next Ptr Glob Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 abs16 option 2998 1558 pragma abs16 specified 3012 1575 When the pragma abs8 specification mentioned above is added the execution results are as follows Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Optimization Function Size ROM No of Execution Cycles None default 3048 1580 abs16 option 2988 1558 pragma abs16 specified 3012 1575 pragma abs16 2980 1561 pragma abs8 specified Next examine whether
574. y Object select Generate file for inter module optimization Command line goptimize In HEW1 2 an inter module optimization add on information file is also supplied for the standard library that is linked during inter module optimization As this file is supplied in the compressed form in the Windows version decompress it before using By double clicking on the compressed file exe that has the same name as the library name to be used the file is self extracted and a directory containing the information file is created For details on the inter module optimization of this library refer to the Supplement to the H8S H8 300 Series C C compiler In HEW2 0 or later the inter module optimization features of Standard Library Generator should be used to create the library By checking Standard Library Tab Category Optimize Generate file for inter module optimization an inter module optimization add on information file is output 1 Default optimization The inter module optimizer supports the following optimization functions No Description Dialog Menu Subcommand Option 1 Unifies constants strings Unify strings String Unify 2 Deletes unreferenced variables functions Eliminate same code Symbol delete 3 Optimizes access to variables Use short addressing Variable access 4 Optimizes access to functions Use indirect call jump Funcation call 5 Reallocates registers Reallocate registers Register 6 Eliminates dea
575. ying all of the following conditions in the file are output with expanded codes e The initial value for the loop is a constant e The final judgement of the loop is a constant e The number of repetition for the loop is either a multiple of 3 or an even number e No goto labels is included in the loop e The loop contains expressions only and the number of expressions is 10 or less e The optimization is specified When a loop is expanded the program size is increased To improve the execution speed of a specific loop provide loop expanded coding in the program Specification Method Dialog menu C C Tab Category Optimize Speed sub options Loop optimization Command line speed loop Example To zero clear the contents of the array a C C program int a 10 void f void int i for i 0 i lt 10 i a i 0 Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 46 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions Compiled result of assembly expansion code Not specified Specified ERG R6 R6 R1 R1 ER6 ER6 ERO ERO R1 _a 32 ERO Object Size Comparison byte _a ER1 ERO ERO RO ER1 1 E0 2 ER1 RO GER1 1 E0 2 ER1 10 E0 L6 8 H8S 2600 H8S 2000 H8 300H H8 300 CPU Type ADV NML ADV NML NML Not specified 34 26 36 22 28 Specified 38 28 40 30 40 H8SX CPU Type MAX ADV NML Not specified 20 20 18 Specified 36 36 32 Execution Speed Comparison cycle
576. ype gt G Breakpoin Action type Interrupt x Address Ho000081 4 Count pi Interrupt typel Interrupt typez Priority UN Interrupt action example Let s see the following practical action example While the breakpoint is set at H 00000814 as the result of the above setting run the program by the Go command or similar method You can see that when the PC reaches H 00000814 a non maskable interrupt NMI of vector number 7 will occur Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 24 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW Source code fragment IntBP c OxO0000808 OxO000080c Ox00000814 Ox0000081 t intpre c vector 6 Direct Transition 000000426 __ interrupt vect 6 void INT Di rect_Tran vector 7 NMI Ox0000042e interrupt vect 7 void INT_NMI void L vector 8 User breakpoint trap 000000436 __ interrupt vect 8 void INT TRAPI void d 7 2 3 Coverage Feature Description HEW allows users to collect statement coverage information within a user specified address range during program execution By using statement coverage information you can observe how each statement is being executed In addition you can easily identify program code that has not been executed How to open the Open Coverage dialog box View Code Coverage How to collect new coverage information 1 Open the Open Coverage dialog box choose New Window and enter the s
577. ype Description Application A project type when creating an application that includes C C program files Assembly Application A project type when creating an application that includes assembly language programs only Demonstration Sample project type Empty Application Empty project creation Library Library creation project type In this dialog box set a workspace name when creating a new workspace project the project name is the same by default CPU type and a project type If you enter sample in the Workspace Name field as the workspace name the Project Name will be sample and the Directory will also be c hew2 sample To change the project name directly type a name in the Project Name field To change the directory to be used as the workspace select the Directory by clicking Browse or directly enter a directory path in the Directory field By clicking the OK button after selecting the desired project type you can move on to the step for initializing the new project The explanation below assumes that you have selected Application as a project type Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 2 15 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 2 Procedure for Creating and Debugging a Program 2 New project 1 9 Specify the CPU to be used and press NEXT Clicking on the OK button in New Project Worksapce dialogue box starts up the project generator First select the CPU to be used The type
578. zard by choosing Project gt Create Project Type assign a name to the project type you will use as the template and specify whether to include the configuration directory containing the post build executable files and other resources in the template You can quit the project type wizard here by clicking on the Finish button izard Step 1 What title would you like to be used for the new project type Sampie Projects generated using the new type will include all of the files in the project directory and below Would you like to include the contents of the configuration directories Yes please C No thanks View directories to be included Approx size of generator 17810KB lt Back Next gt Enh Cancel Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 7 6 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 7 Using HEW 3 At New project type wizard Step 1 click on the Next button to open the following wizard When opening the project type templateat step 1 specify whether to display project information and bitmaps At step 2 you can change the project type icon to a user specified icon Click on the Finish button These settings are not mandatory What type of generator would you like No dialog C Information dialog with default bitmap C Information dialog with bitmap eS Browse What Icon would you like to be used The default Icon C n icon contained in the file meme Browse Image 3 Ap
579. zes all 2946 1517 When this function is specified optimization is performed even to the items which should not be optimized In this case specifying the list option mlist option for HEW 1 2 outputs all the symbols that have been deleted or relocated by the optimization process Specify the symbols on which optimization should be disabled in the format of symbol forbid xxxx This specification should be made upon careful consideration of the symbols Rev 3 00 2005 09 12 5 9 REJ05B0464 0300 RENESAS Section 5 Using the Optimization Functions 5 1 5 Selecting Expansion Functions 1 Allocating registers to global variables By using pragma global register to assign external variables to fixed registers the program size for access to variables can be reduced Variables to be allocated to the register is selected as follows Selects variables of the size that can be assigned to registers Check the number of times each variable is accessed This can be checked by specifying the output of an optimization information list in the linkage editor the inter module optimizer for HEW1 2 Specification method Dialog menu Link Library Tab Category List Generate list file Link Library Tab Category List Contents Show reference Subcommand list show reference The following file is created as a result Variable Accessible with Abs8 SYMBOL COUNTS OPTIMIZE Ch 1 Glob Ch 2 Glob Variable Accessible

H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents